JP2021049439A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing amusement of a player toward games.SOLUTION: A game machine incudes: cancellation means in which a dynamic display of identification information is performed if the special state is being set by state setting means and the special state is cancelled on the basis of the fact that the dynamic display period of the identification information is finished; and presentation performance means which performs, if the special state is not being set, a presentation corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information, and which performs, on the basis of the special state to be set, a presentation corresponding to a dynamic display of lottery information. If the special state is being set, the presentation performance means shifts and performs a presentation from a state in which the presentation corresponding to the dynamic display of the lottery information has been performed to a presentation corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information on the basis of an establishment of a specific condition.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, whether to change the state of the start port provided on the game board from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the game ball is easy to enter. There is one that executes the first lottery of whether or not. In such a conventional game machine, a lottery executed by entering a game ball into the starting port in a state easily changed to the second state is executed a predetermined number of times, and until the lottery result of the predetermined number of times is displayed. Game machines that are continuously set have been proposed.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-147965

However, further improvement of interest is required.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second entry means different from the first entry means, and the first entry means. The first determination is executed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball means, and the first determination is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means. 2 The determination means for executing the determination, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are stopped. When displayed, it has a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player, and the game ball enters the second ball from the first state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. A variable means for changing to a second state that enables It is possible to set a dynamic display means and a special state that can be changed to the second state by the variable means when the lottery information for indicating a specific lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the special state is set by the state setting means and the state setting means, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and the special state is released based on the end of the dynamic display period. When the special state is not set, the effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and the lottery information is dynamically based on the setting of the special state. The effect executing means includes an effect executing means for executing an effect corresponding to the display, and the effect executing means starts from a state in which the effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the lottery information is executed when the special state is set. It is switched and executed based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied to the effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information.

The game machine according to claim 2 is information determined by the determination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means in the game machine according to claim 1. It has an information acquisition means for acquiring the above information and a storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the determination means enters the second ball entry means stored in the storage means based on the establishment of the determination condition. The determination is executed with priority over the information acquired based on the fact that the ball has entered the first ball entry means based on the information acquired based on the above information.

The identification of the gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the dynamic display is started when the special state is set in the specific condition in the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3. At least one of the establishment conditions is that the remaining period of the dynamic display period of information is equal to or less than a predetermined period.

The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the specific condition includes the identification information whose dynamic display is started when the special state is set. It is set as at least one of the conditions that the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is set to be stopped and displayed.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, a first ball-entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball-entry means different from the first ball-entry means, and a game ball in the first ball-entry means. The first determination is executed based on the fact that the ball has entered the ball, and the second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination is executed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means. When the determination means, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are stopped and displayed. , A privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player, and the game ball can be entered from the first state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second entering means. A variable means for changing to two states, a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions, and a lottery information dynamic display means for dynamically displaying lottery information for showing the lottery result by the lottery means. , A state setting means capable of setting a special state capable of being changed to the second state by the variable means when the lottery information for indicating the specific lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the special state is set by the state setting means, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and the release means for canceling the special state based on the end of the dynamic display period. When the special state is not set, an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and based on the setting of the special state, an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the lottery information is performed. The effect executing means has, and the effect executing means dynamically executes the effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the lottery information when the special state is set. It is switched and executed based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied to the effect corresponding to the display.

Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the information acquisition means for acquiring the information determined by the determination means based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means or the second entry means, and the information acquisition means. It has a storage means for storing the information.

Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine according to claim 2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination means is based on the information obtained based on the fact that the determination condition is satisfied and the ball is entered into the second entry means stored in the storage means. The determination is executed with priority over the above-mentioned information acquired based on the fact that the ball has entered the ball entry means.

Therefore, there is an effect that the player's motivation to play can be increased.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least in the specific condition, when the special state is set, the remaining period of the dynamic display period of the identification information from which the dynamic display is started is equal to or less than a predetermined period. It is set to one.

Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific condition is set so that the identification information for which the dynamic display is started when the special state is set is stopped and displayed with the identification information for indicating the specific determination result. It is set as at least one of the conditions that it is a thing.

Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed the ball flow in the right side area of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram which showed the ball flow in the right side area of the game board of a pachinko machine. (A) and (b) are schematic views showing the operation relationship between the storage device provided in the game board of the pachinko machine and the non-electric accessory. (A) and (b) are schematic views showing the internal structure of the second variable winning apparatus 650. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting of the display screen in the third symbol display device, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen in the third symbol display device. (A) is a timing chart showing the flow of the small hit game of the small hit type B executed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance, and (b) is the first ball entrance. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the small hit game of the small hit type A executed based on the ball entering the ball. (A) is a timing chart showing the flow of the small hit game executed based on the entry into the second entrance, and (b) is the timing chart showing the flow of the small hit game executed based on the entry into the second entry. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the jackpot game to be executed. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the game flow in 1st Embodiment. It is a timing chart (first half) which shows the relationship between the game state and the effect state in 1st Embodiment. It is a timing chart (second half) which shows the relationship between the game state and the effect state in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic view showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device at the time when the game state is the time saving state and the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started, and (b) is the game. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device at the time when the state is a time saving state, and 40 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation of the 1st special symbol. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device after the ball enters the second entrance during the fluctuation of the first special symbol while the game state is the time saving state. (B) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device when the game state is a time saving state and the fluctuation period of the first special symbol is 1 second remaining. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device at the time when the fluctuation of the first special symbol executed during the time saving state is stopped, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen after the time saving state ends. It is a figure which showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device at the time when the variation of the 2nd special symbol started in a normal state. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device at the time when the fluctuation of the second special symbol won by the small hit is stopped and displayed in the normal state after the end of the time saving state. FIG. 18B is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device when the big hit game is started based on the small hit game displayed in FIG. 18A. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device when the second jackpot game is started due to the time saving variation executed after the jackpot game by V winning is completed. b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device when the game state is a time saving state and the fluctuation period of the first special symbol is 10 seconds remaining. (A) is a display of the third symbol display device when the game state is a time saving state and the hold memory of the second special symbol occurs due to the ball entering the second entrance during the battle production. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the screen, (b) is the 3rd symbol display device in the case where the game state is a time saving state, and the ball does not enter the 2nd ball entrance during the battle production. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen. (A) shows an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device when the game state is the time saving state and the reserved ball of the second special symbol is acquired up to the upper limit during the time saving fluctuation of the first special symbol. It is a schematic diagram, and (b) is a privilege effect being executed which is given when the game state is a time saving state and the reserved ball of the second special symbol is acquired up to the upper limit during the time saving fluctuation of the first special symbol. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device when the game state is the normal state and the small hit game based on the first special symbol is executed. (B) Is a schematic view showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device during the small hit game shown in FIG. 22 (a). (A) is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device when a right-handed game is performed while the game state is a normal state (left-handed state), and (b) is an electric motor. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device in the state which the accessory is open operation. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control unit according to the first embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main control unit according to the first embodiment. It is a figure. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table in the first embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the special symbol 1 random number table in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the first embodiment, and (d) is the contents of the second random number table in the first embodiment. Is a schematic diagram schematically showing. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special symbol 1 jackpot selection table in the first embodiment. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 jackpot selection table in the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special symbol 1 small hit selection table in the first embodiment. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 small hit selection table in the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern table in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern table for special figure 1 deviation in the first embodiment, and (d) is a special diagram in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the variation pattern table for 1 small hit schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern table for special figure 1 time reduction in the first embodiment, and (b) is the contents of the variation pattern table for special figure 2 in the first embodiment. Is a schematic diagram schematically showing. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) shows the electrical configuration of the RAM in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect state selection table, and (b) is each effect state selected by the effect state selection table and a third symbol display device. It is a schematic diagram which showed the relationship with 3 symbols and reserved symbols. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the display control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table in 1st Embodiment schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table in 1st Embodiment schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the drawing list in 1st Embodiment schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal fluctuation start processing executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving fluctuation start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric accessory control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the general drawing look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V entrance passage processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V passing process executed by the MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric accessory opening / closing process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the storage device control processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern related processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the holding ball number-related processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the prize information-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-related processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the ordinary figure variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the effect state setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the specific effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the counter update process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the V interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the stop type command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the error command processing to be performed. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a jackpot start command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the round number command processing. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process which is executed by MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the second embodiment, and (b) shows an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the second embodiment, and (b) shows an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control unit according to the second embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main control unit according to the second embodiment. It is a figure. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern table for special drawing 1 time reduction in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving end determination process executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving fluctuation start processing 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the third embodiment, and (b) shows an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control unit according to the third embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main control unit according to the third embodiment. It is a figure. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the time saving state selection table in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing 3 executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation time setting process executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the modification 1 of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the modification 2 of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows another example of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram which showed the operation of the modification of the electric accessory. It is a schematic diagram which showed the operation of the modification of the electric accessory. It is a schematic diagram which showed the operation of the modification of the electric accessory. It is a schematic diagram which showed the operation of the modification of the electric accessory. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the other production example 1, and (b) shows an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the other production example 1. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic view showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the other production example 2, and (b) shows an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the other production example 2. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern table for ordinary drawings in the other production example 2, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern table for normal use in the other production example 2. It is a schematic diagram shown, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern table for time saving A in other production example 2, and (d) is the variation for time saving B in other production example 2. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the pattern table schematically. It is the flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the other production example 2.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 3 and 4 are right-hand regions of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 5 is a schematic view showing the operation of the non-electric accessory 710 provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6 is a schematic view showing the operation of the non-electric accessory 710 provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. FIG. 7 is a schematic view showing the internal structure of the second variable winning device 650 provided in the above, and FIG. 7 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

When the inner frame 12 shows a large number of nails and both the left first entry port 64a and the right first entry opening 64b (hereinafter, both the left first entry opening 64a and the right first entry opening 64b). Is a game board 13 having a first ball entry port 64), a second ball entry port 640, a through gate 67, a variable winning device (first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650), and the like (FIG. 2) is detachably attached from the front side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface (game area) of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 8) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. A metal hinge 19 is attached to the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame 14 and the lower plate have the side on which the hinge 19 is provided as an opening / closing axis. The unit 15 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two flat glass sheets is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side thereof in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. .. On the other hand, on the right side of the lower plate unit 15, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the ball launching unit 112a is driven. The touch sensor 51a for permitting the movement, the push button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 are detected by the change in the electric resistance. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

In this embodiment, the configuration is not limited to the above, but the configuration is such that the main control device 110 and other control devices detect the ball launched by the ball launching unit 112a, and the solenoid of the ball launching unit 112a It may be configured to detect that the ball has been fired. Further, the number of detected spheres may be counted and stored until a process such as RAM clear is executed.

A frame button 22 is provided on the upper portion of the lower plate unit 15. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which will be described later, is changed. By arranging the frame button 22 that can be operated by the player on the pachinko machine 10 in this way, it becomes possible to arbitrarily select the effect to be executed by the pachinko machine 10, and the player's willingness to participate in the game can be motivated. Can be enhanced.

In the present embodiment, the frame button 22 that can be pressed and operated by the player is provided as an operation means that can be operated by the player, but other configurations may be used, for example, the player contacts (for example). A sensor-type operating means for detecting (or approaching), a lever-type operating means for the player to operate in the left-right (or front-back) direction, and a handle-type operating means for the player to rotate are provided. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of operating means is set to one, but more than that may be provided, or a plurality of operating means having different operation methods may be provided. With such a configuration, the player can perform a wider variety of operations, and it is possible to increase the types of effects performed based on the player's operations on the operating means.

Further, the operating means (frame button 22) is arranged at a position (upper left side of the lower plate unit 15) that can be operated while the player is executing the game (while operating the operation handle 51 with the right hand). Therefore, the frame button 22 can be easily operated even while the player is executing the game.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 placed below the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in the front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, a general ball entrance 63, and a number of balls. It is configured by assembling 1 entry port 64, 2nd entry opening 640, variable winning device (1st variable winning device 65, 2nd variable winning device 650), variable display device unit 80, etc., and its peripheral edge is an inner frame. It is attached to the back side of the twelve. The general entry port 63, the first entry opening 64, the second entry opening 640, the variable winning device (first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650), and the variable display device unit 80 are based on router processing. It is arranged in a through hole formed in the plate 60, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a wood screw or the like. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a starting port or the like is arranged and the launched ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down). Further, the game area includes all areas in which the ball that has passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flows down before passing through the out opening 66 and the winning opening (entry ball opening).

In the pachinko machine 10, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (left side when viewed from the front of the game board 13) is formed as a left game area and the right side is a right game area, and a game in which a ball is launched aiming at the left game area (hereinafter, In the left-handed game (referred to as a left-handed game), a game in which a ball is inserted into a general ball entrance 63 or a left first ball slot 64a is performed, and a ball is launched aiming at a right game area (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game). In (referred to as), the launched ball passes above the variable display device unit 80, and is provided in the right gaming area with a right first ball entry port 64b, a second ball entry port 640, a first variable winning device 65, and a second. A game aimed at a variable winning device 650 or the like is performed. In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the player is made to play a game (left-handed game or right-handed game) according to the game state, thereby suppressing the game from becoming monotonous.

Further, as will be described in detail later, the pachinko machine 10 has a game (left-handed game or right-handed game) that is advantageous to the player according to various game states (normal state, time saving state, jackpot state, etc.) set. The game) is configured to be different. This makes it possible for the player to change the content of the game while grasping the current game state, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming more monotonous.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description of the game board 13 will be continued. The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 8) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters either the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, and the ball is a through gate (normal). When passing through the entrance) 67, a lottery for a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for entering the ball into the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 640, it is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit or not, and it is judged as a special symbol big hit. If so, the jackpot type is also determined. When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the first specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is closed for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed, or 10 balls are won. It is released (until it is done), and the opening is repeated the number of times (number of rounds) according to the jackpot type. As a result, a large number of balls are won in the first specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a small hit that is given to a player with a privilege different from the special gaming state is determined in some cases when a special symbol lottery is used to determine a non-big hit (missing). It is configured in. When the lottery of the special symbol is won in a small hit, the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is set for a predetermined period (for example, until a total of 1.8 seconds elapses or until 10 balls are won). A small hit game that is released is executed. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10, a part of the balls that won the second specific winning opening 650a during this small hit game passed through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3 (see FIG. 6)). In this case, the above-mentioned big hit game is executed after the small hit game is completed. As a result, the player executes the big hit based on the game aiming to win the big hit in the special symbol lottery and the small hit game executed by winning the small hit in the special symbol lottery. You can perform both with a game that aims to do that. Therefore, since the player can perform various games, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Although details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with seven types of special symbols, "big hit A" to "big hit G". The two types of "big hits A and B" are jackpot types that can be determined when a big hit is obtained in a lottery executed when the ball enters the first entrance 64. The two types of "big hits C and D" are small hits in a lottery executed when the ball enters the first entrance 64, and the ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. "Big hit E" is a big hit type that can be determined in the above, and "Big hit E" is when a big hit is made in a lottery executed when the ball enters the second entrance 640, or the ball is the second entry. It is a big hit type that can be determined when the ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, which is a small hit in a lottery executed when the ball enters the ball mouth 640, and is "big hit F, G". Is a big hit type that can be determined when the ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, which is a small hit in a lottery executed when the ball enters the second entrance 640. .. The plurality of jackpot types provided in this way include benefits during the jackpot game (for example, number of rounds, opening time, opening operation pattern) and jackpots as benefits given to the player when the jackpot game is executed. The benefits given after the game (for example, the privilege of giving a game state in which the player can easily obtain the next big hit) are set to be different. As a result, in the jackpot game executed at various occasions for the player, it is possible to increase the motivation to acquire the jackpot game in which more advantageous benefits are given, and to provide a variety of playability. be able to.

When a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts variable display of the special symbol, and after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds to 90 seconds) has elapsed, the lottery result is obtained. The special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry times is determined for each type of entry opening. Each is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed on the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640 remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed and the lottery is performed. , The variable display according to the lottery is started.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the through gate (ordinary entrance) 67, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol is a hit. When it hits a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is changed to the open position for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 3 seconds), so that the second entrance 640 is opened. Be released. In the normal state, since the electric accessory 640a is arranged at the closed position, the second entry port 640 is closed. Therefore, when the ball hits the normal symbol, the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640, and as a result, the special symbol can be easily drawn.

Further, when the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 4 seconds) has elapsed, the lottery is performed. The normal symbol showing the result is stopped and displayed. If a ball passes through the through gate (normal entry port) 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is the first symbol. It is displayed by the display device 37 and also displayed by the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the through gate (normal entry port) 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the lottery is performed. The variable display is started.

As described above, as the jackpot type of the special symbol, seven types of "big hit A" to "big hit G" are provided. When "Big hits A to C" are reached, the number of rounds is 7 rounds in a special game state (7 rounds jackpot), and when "Big hit D" is reached, the number of rounds is 2 rounds in a special game state (2 rounds jackpot). When it becomes "Big hit E", the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 15 rounds (15 rounds big hit). When it becomes "big hit F", it becomes a special game state (5 rounds jackpot) with 5 rounds, and when it becomes "big hit G", it becomes a special game state with 10 rounds (10 rounds jackpot).

In addition, when the hits are "big hit A", "big hit C", and "big hit E to G", the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes shorter after the jackpot ends, and the normal symbol wins the second time than the normal state. A time-saving state, which is a gaming state in which the electric accessory 640a is open-controlled so that the ball can easily enter the ball entry port 640, is given until the change of the special symbol is completed once (time reduction number of times is 1). .. When "Big hit B" and "Big hit D" are reached, the normal state is reached without the above-mentioned time saving state being given after the end of the big hit.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 used in the present embodiment has a function (so-called time saving function) of shifting the gaming state to a time saving state in which it is easier to put the ball into the second entry port 640 than in the normal state. It does not have a function to change the jackpot probability of special symbols or the jackpot probability of ordinary symbols (so-called probability fluctuation function), but it is not limited to this, and a pachinko machine having a probability fluctuation function is used. May be good.

As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of jackpot is different depending on the type of jackpot. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be the same for all jackpot types (for example, all 8 rounds). Further, for example, the period during which the "normal symbol is shortened" may be changed according to the type of jackpot. In addition, instead of changing the period during which the "normal symbol time is shortened", the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 and the electric accessory 640a being released by hitting one ordinary symbol are released. You may change the number of times to do it. Further, in the present embodiment, the privilege to be given after the end of the jackpot is determined depending on the type of the jackpot. For example, the jackpot ends on the condition that the ball passes through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3) during the jackpot. Later, a probabilistic state of a special symbol or a time saving state of a normal symbol may be added. Further, in the present embodiment, the time saving state is configured to continue until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is executed a predetermined specific number of times (once), but the time saving number of times is set to a plurality of times (for example, for example). 10 times) may be set so that the time saving state ends when the number of times the special symbol changes reaches the time saving number, or when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a specific lottery result. In addition, a lottery different from the special symbol lottery (a lottery for determining whether or not the time saving state is continued) is executed, and the time saving state is terminated when the lottery result is a result that the time saving state is not continued. You may. Further, in the present embodiment, a time saving state is always given after the end of the big hit game by a specific big hit type (big hit A, big hit C, big hit E to G), but other configurations may be used. For example, when a time saving number of times measuring means for measuring the number of times the time saving state is continuously given is provided and the measurement result by the time saving number of times measuring means reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10), which jackpot is used. Even if the jackpot game according to the type is executed, the time saving state may not be given after the jackpot game is completed. As a result, it is possible to set an upper limit of the gaming period in which the player is advantageous, and it is possible to suppress the provision of excessive gambling to the player. In addition, as an example of suppressing excessive gambling, an example in which an upper limit is set for the number of times a time saving state is continuously given is shown, but in addition to this, a period during which a time saving state is continuously given (time saving) is shown. An upper limit may be set on the number of changes of the special symbol executed during the consecutive villa period). Even in such a configuration, since the upper limit can be set during the time-saving consecutive villa period, excessive gambling can be suppressed. In this case, since the upper limit is not set for the number of times the time saving state is given (that is, the number of big hits during the time saving consecutive villa period), a limited period (the time saving consecutive villa period for which the upper limit is set) is not set. Inside, players can be enthusiastically played in an attempt to win a large number of jackpots.

A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display or fluctuate by indicating whether or not a lottery of special symbols performed in association with entering the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by the lighting state, or a ball entered in the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. Of these, the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state.

When a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the ball enters the ball. The number of times is held up to 4 times for each entry port, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 are each held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of times of holding is limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, it may be set to be held until the total number of balls entered into the plurality of entrances reaches the upper limit (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot, an error display, and the like. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED is different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states (high probability state of a special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 are used with a small number of LEDs. Or, it is possible to display (such as during the time reduction of ordinary symbols). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a jackpot, it is special according to the jackpot type (big hits A to G). A symbol (first symbol) is shown.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general entry ports 63 are provided in which a predetermined number (for example, 5) of balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. .. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 displays a decorative third symbol (decorative symbol) according to the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the display of the second symbol display device 83. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (starting prize), the first symbol display device 37 displays the variation of the special symbol (first symbol) as a trigger. Will be executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. Further, when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device 83 executes the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) with the sphere as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the normal symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the normal symbol.

Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10, the target of the symbol (main symbol) for notifying the player of the variation display in an easy-to-understand manner is changed according to the game state or the like by using the third symbol display device 81. It is configured as follows. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given is determined in one gaming state (for example, a normal state) based on the lottery result of a special symbol, and the other This is because the game state (for example, the time saving state) is configured to be determined based on the lottery result of the normal symbol. In this way, even in the pachinko machine 10 having complicated game playability, the player can switch the target of the symbol (main symbol) mainly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between a special symbol and a normal symbol. It is only necessary to pay attention to the variable display of the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbol rows of left, middle, and right can be displayed. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, among the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110, the display related to the special symbol is performed by the first symbol display device 37, and the display related to the normal symbol is performed by the second symbol display device 83. On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the display of the second symbol display device 83. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81. Further, a plurality of liquid crystal displays may be provided as the third symbol display device 81, or the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to be movable. Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 9 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 9A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 9B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. As shown in FIG. 9A, the left (left side display) showing the first special symbol, the second special symbol, or the normal symbol (depending on the gaming state), which is one of the third symbols, in the first display area Dm. Three symbol rows of area Dm1), middle (middle display area Dm2), and right (right side display area Dm3) are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row and the third symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is displayed on the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. The symbol (or ordinary symbol) is displayed in a variable manner (dynamic display).

The third symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, or ordinary symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm is composed of the main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9", respectively. ing. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the lottery result by the main control device 110, which will be described later, is a specific lottery result (a big hit or a part of a small hit in the case of a special symbol, or a win in the case of a normal symbol). In this case, a variable display is performed in which the same third symbol (main symbol) is aligned (for example, "777"), and a jackpot is generated after the variable display is completed.

Specifically, in the first display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the first display area Dm, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1. If the third symbol is aligned and stopped on the effective line with a combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols), a jackpot movie is displayed as a jackpot.

A second display area Dn (Dn1 to Dn6) is formed in the upper right area of the first display area Dm. In the second display area Dn, a symbol sequence showing a first special symbol, a second special symbol, and a normal symbol is displayed. Specifically, the second display area Dn1 is an area in which a symbol string indicating the first special symbol is displayed, and the second display area Dn2 is an area in which the symbol string indicating the second special symbol is displayed. The 2 display area Dn3 is formed as an area in which a symbol string indicating a normal symbol is displayed, and a variation display corresponding to the variation display of each symbol is displayed.

Further, in the second display area Dn, the reserved storage numbers of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol are also displayed. Specifically, the second display area Ds4 is an area in which the reserved storage number of the first special symbol is displayed, and the second display area Ds5 is an area in which the reserved storage number of the second special symbol is displayed. 2 Display area Ds6 is an area in which the number of reserved symbols of ordinary symbols is displayed.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the display corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol, and the display corresponding to the reserved storage number of each symbol are the second of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to be displayed in the display area Dn, of which one symbol (the symbol to be notified to the player) is selected as the main symbol, and the other symbols are less noticeable than the main symbol. It is displayed as a symbol in the second display area Dn. As a result, the player can execute the optimum game only by checking the displayed contents of the main symbol.

In the present embodiment, the display mode of the secondary symbol is made smaller than that of the main symbol to make the display mode less conspicuous than the main symbol, but other configurations may be used, for example, the display of the main symbol. The slave symbol may be configured to be more difficult to identify than the main symbol by increasing the transmittance of the display mode of the slave symbol rather than the aspect or moving the display area of the slave symbol.

Further, as the symbol sequence mode of each symbol displayed in the second display area Dn, the symbol sequence displayed as the main symbol may be displayed as it is, or “◯” as shown in FIG. 9 (b). , "×" are displayed in two rows in parallel, and when two "○" symbols are displayed in the left and right rows, the first special symbol, the second special symbol, or the normal symbol is hit. It may be configured to notify the player of the fact.

Further, the slave symbol corresponding to the symbol displayed as the main symbol may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or the display of the slave symbol may be displayed at a place other than the third symbol display device 81. You may.

In the present embodiment, when the game state is the normal state, the main symbol (special figure 1 main symbol Dma) corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm (FIG. 9 (b). ), When the game state is the time saving state, the main symbol (normal symbol main symbol Dmc) corresponding to the normal symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm (see FIG. 16 (a)). Further, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the main symbol (special diagram 2 main symbol Dmd) corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm regardless of the gaming state (FIG. 17 (b)).

Further, as will be described in detail later, when a predetermined game condition is satisfied in each game state (for example, when a normal symbol whose fluctuation is started during the time reduction state stops changing after the time reduction state ends), It is configured so that a combination different from the combination of the main symbol and the sub-symbol described above is displayed. As a result, the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player in response to the symbol variation executed so as to straddle different gaming states. Further, the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol are all displayed as subordinate symbols in the second display area Dn, and the pseudo symbol for production is variablely displayed as the main symbol (see FIG. 22 (a)). It is configured as follows. As a result, during the period in which each symbol is not displayed in a variable manner (for example, a small hit period), the player can be made to think that the symbol variation is being executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The main symbol (third symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured in a display mode consisting of numbers from "0" to "9", but is distinguished from other main symbols. A display mode other than numbers may be used as long as it is possible. For example, a display mode imitating a character or a display mode in which a character and a number are combined may be used. Further, as the symbols displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the first display area Dm, even if the symbols other than the main symbol (that is, the same symbols are aligned on the effective line L1 and stop), the player is not given a privilege. A symbol sequence including a sub symbol may be used as the symbol).

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol or the normal symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 8) described later is a hit, the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned. Is performed, and the jackpot is configured to occur after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

The main symbol (third symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1, and this stopped display state is held for at least 1 second. By displaying the stopped 3rd symbol for a certain period of time (1 second or more) in this way, whether or not the player is a combination of the 3rd symbols corresponding to the hit (special symbol, normal symbol lottery result). It is possible to prevent overlooking (whether or not is a hit). In the above-mentioned stop display state, only the main symbol stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 is displayed, and the other main symbols (main symbols set in each symbol row and other than the effective line L1) are displayed. It is advisable to hide (display inconspicuously) the main symbol that is stopped and displayed at the location. As a result, the player can be notified of the stop display result of the main symbol more clearly.

Further, if the combination of the third symbols displayed as stopped is a combination corresponding to the detachment and there is a reserved ball, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started after the stop display for 1 second. .. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest incoming balls in time.

On the other hand, if the main symbol (third symbol) of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol or the normal symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second in the state where the holding ball does not exist, the third symbol is stopped and displayed after that. Continues. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or a new main symbol variation is started. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the main symbol (third symbol) was stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed from the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demonstration effect.

In the present embodiment, the demonstration effect starts when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses after the symbols corresponding to the main symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) are stopped and displayed. However, regardless of the main symbol or the subordinate symbol, the demo effect may be started based on the elapsed time from the stop display of all the symbols, or the main symbol may be configured. The display mode of the effect may be different between the demo effect when only the symbol is stopped and displayed and the demo effect when both the main symbol and the subordinate symbol are stopped and displayed. In this case, for example, in the demo effect executed when only the main symbol is stopped and displayed, the notification for urging the progress of the game is executed, and in the demo effect when both the main symbol and the subordinate symbol are stopped and displayed, a new one is executed. It is advisable to execute a notification for encouraging a game by a good player. As a result, the game can be smoothly performed.

Next, the sub-display area Ds provided below the first display area Dm will be described with reference to FIG. 9A. As shown in FIG. 9A, sub-display areas Ds are formed below the first display area Dm. The sub-display area Ds is an area in which auxiliary display modes for assisting the player's game, such as a game status and a game description, are displayed corresponding to each game state and game result. Specifically, the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed (see FIG. 9B), and the content of the fluctuation effect of the main symbol executed in the first display area Dm is assisted. (See Fig. 22 (a)), guide the content of the game to be played (see Fig. 22 (b)), and display the remaining period of a specific period (shorter time period) that is advantageous to the player (Fig. 22). 15 (a)). As a result, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description of the game board 13 will be continued. Below the variable display device unit 80, a left first ball entry port 64a into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the left first entry port 64a, the first entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, which is caused by the turning on of the first entry opening switch. A special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110, and the display according to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the left first entry slot 64a is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. The left first ball entry port 64a performed a right-handed game when the ball was launched into the path on the left side of the front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80 (so-called left-handed game). It is configured to make it easier to enter the ball than in the case.

Below the left first ball entry port 64a, a storage device 750 and a specific general ball entry port 630 are arranged. A detailed description of the storage device 750 will be described later with reference to FIG. 5, but the storage device 750 has a storage valve 750a that can be variably operated between a closed state and an open state, and a storage valve 750a when the storage valve 750a is in the closed state. It is composed of a side wall for forming a storage area capable of storing one sphere. The storage valve 750a is variably controlled so as to change from a closed state in which balls can be stored to an open state when a big hit is won in a special symbol lottery, and when the storage valve 750a is variably operated to the open state, a storage area. (Or a ball that has flowed into the storage device 750 while the storage valve 750a is variable to the open state) is configured to flow down below the storage device 750. The storage device 750 is arranged at a position where the ball can be stored regardless of whether the left-handed game or the right-handed game is performed.

Below the storage device 750, a specific general ball entry port 630 is arranged so that a ball that has passed through the storage device 750 can enter the ball. The specific general entry port 630 is a winning opening in which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, and is also used as an opportunity to operate the non-electric accessory 710. A detailed description of the non-electric accessory 710 will be described later with reference to FIG. The non-electric accessory 710 provided is configured to be variable to a position where the ball can enter the right first ball entry port 64b.

On the other hand, in the right region of the game board 13, there are two flow paths through which the right-handed ball flows down, and a distribution member 700 for distributing the ball launched by the right-handed game into the above-mentioned two paths. The non-electric accessory 710, the right first ball entrance 65b, the through gate 67, the second ball opening 640 and the electric accessory 640a, the first variable winning device 65, and the second variable winning device 650 It is arranged. Next, the configuration of the right side region of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4.

The ball launched by the right-handed game is alternately distributed to the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702 by the distribution member 700. The ball distributed to the first flow path 701 passes through the bending path 701a (see FIG. 3), passes through the through gate 67 and the second entry port 640, and flows out to the lower part of the right side region. Further, the sphere distributed to the second flow path 702 flows down the third flow path 703a when the non-electric accessory 710 provided on the downstream side thereof is in the closed state (see FIG. 5A). Then, it flows into the inflow port 704a and flows down the fifth flow path 704b provided on the back surface side of the first flow path 701 (the back side from the viewpoint of FIG. It flows downward. On the other hand, when the non-electric accessory 710 is in the open state (see FIG. 5B), the ball flows down the fourth flow path 703b and enters the right first ball entry port 64b. When a ball enters the right first ball entry port 64b, three balls are paid out as prize balls.

A detailed description of the non-electric accessory 710 will be described later with reference to FIG. 5, but in the present embodiment, the ball that has entered the right first entry port 64b when the non-electric accessory 710 is open. The non-electric accessory 710 is configured to be changed to a closed state by its own weight.

Then, the spheres distributed to the two flow paths (first flow path 701 and second flow path 702) by the distribution member 700 merge in the lower right region, and are on the second variable winning device 650 and the first variable winning device 65. Flows down and flows into the out port 66 while flowing down the flow path that can flow into the storage device 750.

Here, the flow of the spheres distributed by the distribution member 700 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a schematic view showing the ball flow when the ball launched by the right-handed game flows down the first flow path 701, and FIG. 4 is a schematic view showing the ball flow when the ball launched by the right-handed game flows down the first flow path 701. It is a schematic diagram which showed the sphere flow at the time of flowing down 702.

As shown in FIG. 3, since the distribution member 700 alternately distributes the balls fired by the right-handed game into the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702, when 100 balls are fired per minute. 50 pieces flow down the first flow path 701 at 1.2 second intervals, and 50 pieces flow down the second flow path 702 at 1.2 second intervals. The first flow path 701 is composed of a ball passage formed with a passage width (about 15 mm) equivalent to one ball, and a bending path 701a provided in the middle of the first flow path 701 reduces the flow velocity of the ball. The ball passing time until the ball flowing into the first flow path 701 flows out from the first flow path 701 is configured to be about 2 seconds.

A through gate 67 is arranged at a downstream position of the first flow path 701 (downstream from the bending path 701a), and a second entry port 640 is arranged on the downstream side of the through gate 67. .. The second ball entry port 640 allows the ball to pass through the first flow path 701 when the electric accessory 640a is closed, and passes through the first flow path 701 when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state. The ball is configured to enter the second entry port 640.

Further, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is configured to reach the second entry port 640 after 0.2 seconds. Although the details will be described later, since the fluctuation time of the normal symbol executed when the ball passes through the through gate 67 is 3 seconds at the shortest, the ball passing through the through gate 67 is the ball passing through the through gate 67. It is configured so that the ball does not enter the second entrance 640 due to the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a, which is executed based on the lottery of the ordinary symbol executed when the ball passes through. That is, the period from passing through the through gate 67 to reaching the second entrance 640 (electric accessory 640a) is shorter than the period required for the lottery of ordinary symbols. As a result, it is possible to execute a lottery of a normal symbol and physically make it impossible to insert a ball into the second entry port 640 simply by firing one ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate game from being executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the ball launched by the right-handed game has the first flow path 701 (the flow path in which the through gate 67 and the second entry port 640 are arranged) and the second flow path by the distribution member 700. Since it is distributed alternately to the road 702, a lottery for a normal symbol is executed (a ball is passed through a through gate 67), a winning prize is won in the lottery for a normal symbol, and the electric accessory 640a is opened to open the second entrance. Since it is necessary to fire at least three balls in order to allow the ball to enter the 640, it is possible to prevent an even more inappropriate game (for example, a single shot) from being performed.

In the present embodiment, the through gate 67 and the second entry port 640 are arranged in one of the two flow paths distributed by the distribution member 700, but the through gate is in one of the flow paths. 67 may be arranged, and the second entry port 640 may be arranged in the other flow path. With this configuration, for example, when a malicious player destroys the distribution member 700 and creates a state in which the ball flows down to only one of the flow paths, the ball passes through the through gate 67. It becomes possible to regulate the game in which the ball enters the second entrance 640 when the normal symbol is won, and it is possible to suppress the illegal game from being performed.

Next, a case where the sphere flows down the second flow path 702 will be described with reference to FIG. The second flow path 702 is configured so that the period during which the sphere flows down is shorter than that of the first flow path 701 described above. Specifically, it is configured so that the time required for the ball flowing into the second flow path 702 to flow out from the outflow port 704c is about 1.5 seconds. With this configuration, when 100 balls are fired toward the right side region in one minute, the balls that have flowed into the first flow path 701 and the balls that are fired next to the balls are fired next to the second flow path 702. The ball flowing into the ball flows down the lower right area of the game board 13 (the area where the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are arranged) almost at the same time (about 0.1 second difference). Become. Therefore, in the gaming state (big hit state or small hit state) in which each variable winning device is opened, it is possible to easily win a plurality of balls at one time.

Further, a part of the second flow path 702 (fifth flow path 704b) is provided on the back side (back side from the viewpoint of FIG. 4) of the first flow path 701, and is viewed from the front (front view from the viewpoint of FIG. 4). It is configured so that a plurality of flow paths overlap. In this way, by forming a plurality of ball flow paths using the depth direction of the game board 13, the space for forming the ball flow paths (the area occupied by the ball flow paths of the game board 13) can be reduced. it can.

Further, the ball outlet of the second flow path 702 (outlet 704c) is located below the outlet of the first flow path 701 (downstream side of the second entry port 640), and is to the right of the game board 13. In the lower region, the sphere is configured to flow out to the downstream side of the sphere that has flowed out from the first flow path 701. As a result, the spheres that flowed out vigorously from the outlet 704c (the spheres that flowed out at a higher speed than the spheres that flowed down the first flow path 701) directly collided with the spheres that flowed out from the first flow path 701, which was irregular. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a ball flow occurs.

In the present embodiment, the ball launched by the right-handed game is alternately distributed to the two flow paths by the distribution member 700, but other configurations may be used, for example, two. The spheres may be distributed at different ratios instead of alternating (1: 1) with respect to the flow paths, or the spheres may be distributed to three or more flow paths. Further, in the present embodiment, the distribution member 700 whose distribution destination of the next passing sphere changes depending on the weight of the passing sphere is used. For example, the vibration is electrically driven according to a predetermined rule. A component member may be used.

Next, the operation flow of the storage device 750 and the non-electric accessory 710 used in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 (a) is a schematic view showing that both the storage device 750 and the non-electric accessory 710 are in the closed state (closed state), and FIG. 5 (b) shows the storage device 750 and the non-electric accessory 710. It is a schematic diagram which shows that each thing 710 is an open state (open state).

As shown in FIG. 5A, when the non-electric accessory 710 is in the closed state (closed state), it is impossible (difficult) to allow the ball to enter the right first ball entry port 64b. Therefore, when the game state is the normal state, it is possible to perform a right-handed game aiming at the right side region of the game board 13 and prevent the ball from being inserted into the right first ball entry port 64b.

The non-electric accessory 710 has an action portion that comes into contact with the ball when it passes through a specific location, and the action portion operates by the weight of the abutting ball and is released based on the operation. It is configured in. Specifically, the ball that has entered the specific general entry port 630 comes into contact with the above-mentioned action portion, the action connecting portion 710a operates in conjunction with the action, and the non-electric accessory 710 is opened. As a result, the ball can enter the right first ball entry port 64b.

Further, the right first ball entry port 64b is provided with a second action portion on which the ball that has entered can come into contact with the ball. The second working part is activated by the operation, and the non-electric accessory 710 is closed. As described above, the non-electric accessory 710 is configured to switch the variable state based on the operation of the member acting by the weight of the sphere without using an electric drive source. The configuration of the non-electric accessory 710 may be other than the configuration described above, and a well-known configuration may be used as a configuration that operates based on the weight of the sphere.

As described above, the ball enters the specific general entry port 630, which triggers the operation (opening) of the non-electric accessory 710, and is stored in the storage device 750 provided above the specific general entry port 630. When the storage device 750 is released, the ball can enter the specific general entry port 630. Then, when the predetermined release condition (for example, the start of the jackpot game) is satisfied as described above, the storage device 750 is in the release state until the predetermined closing condition (for example, the elapse of 10 seconds) is satisfied. It is variably controlled so as to be.

That is, as shown in FIG. 5B, when the jackpot game is started and the first variable winning device 65 is opened, the storage device 750 is released. Then, the storage device 750 is released, and the non-electric accessory 710 is opened based on the ball entering the specific general entry port 630. In the first embodiment, since the storage device 750 is arranged at a position where the ball launched by either the left-handed game or the right-handed game can pass through the storage device 750, the right-handed game A ball that did not win the first variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game in which the game is performed (a ball that passed over the first variable winning device 65 during the inter-round interval in which the first variable winning device is temporarily closed). ) Can be entered into the specific general entry port 630.

Therefore, during the jackpot game, it is possible to obtain both the payout of the prize ball based on the entry into the first variable winning device 65 and the payout of the prize ball based on the entry into the specific general entry port 630. be able to. Further, since the ball that could not be won in the first variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to enter the specific general entrance 630, the first variable is made during the jackpot game, which has been a waste ball in the past. It is possible to add value that is advantageous to the player to the ball that has not won the prize device 65.

In the first embodiment, the storage valve 750a is set so as to release the storage device 750 for 10 seconds after the jackpot game is started (after the opening operation of the first variable winning device 65 is executed). It is configured to operate variably. Therefore, by satisfying the end condition of the first round in the jackpot game (for example, winning 10 balls) within 10 seconds, the interval from the end of the first round to the start of the second round (inter-round interval). ) Period and the period when the storage device 750 is released can be matched.

As a result, the ball that has passed over the first variable winning device 65 during the inter-round interval period can be entered into the specific general entrance 630, so that the first round in the jackpot game can be made earlier (within 10 seconds). You can enthusiastically play the game to finish it.

The release timing of the storage device 750 executed during the jackpot game is 10 seconds after the above-mentioned release timing (after the jackpot game is started (after the first opening operation of the first variable winning device 65 is executed)). ) May be set, or the storage device 750 may be set to be released at a predetermined interval (for example, every 10 seconds) for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). With this configuration, if the end timing of each round of the jackpot game (the timing at which the interval between rounds is set) and the timing at which the storage device 750 is released all match, many during the jackpot game. The ball can be entered into the specific general entry port 630.

Further, when the above-described configuration is used, the timing at which the end condition of each round in the jackpot game is satisfied is adjusted (for example, the tenth ball, which is the round end condition, is won in the first variable winning device. By adjusting the timing to make the ball enter by operating the operation handle 51), it is possible to change the number of balls to be entered into the specific general entry port 630 during the big hit game. It is possible to provide a new game property in which the end timing of each round in the game is adjusted to a predetermined timing (timing when the storage device 750 is released), and the player can enthusiastically play the game.

The third symbol display device 81 may be configured to display a display mode for notifying the release timing of the storage device 750 and a display mode in which the player can predict the timing at which the inter-round interval is executed. As a result, the player can execute the game during the jackpot game while grasping the contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the first embodiment described above, the non-electric accessory 710 is in the open state (open state) when the jackpot game is executed. Therefore, by performing the right-handed game during the jackpot game, the right first The ball can be reliably entered into the ball entry port 64b. As a result, it is possible to reliably execute the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the time saving state (the time saving at the start of the consecutive villa mode (first time saving) which shifts from the jackpot in the normal state) after the jackpot game ends.

Further, in the present embodiment, when one ball enters the right first ball entry port 64b, the non-electric accessory 710 operates so as to shift to the closed state (closed state), which is a big hit. It is possible to prevent the ball from excessively entering the right first ball entry port 64b during the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the game ball guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 650e in the second variable winning device 650 is distributed to the normal discharge flow path 650e1 and the special discharge flow path 650e2, which will be described later. Will be described.

FIG. 6A is a schematic view showing a state in which the balls winning the second variable winning device 650 are distributed to the normal discharge flow path 650e1, and FIG. 6B is a schematic view showing the state in which the balls won the second variable winning device 650 are distributed to the second variable winning device 650. It is a schematic diagram which showed the state which the winning ball is distributed to the special discharge flow path 650e2.

As shown in FIG. 6B, when the switching member 650h is operated, the game balls that have passed through the detection port 650a1 of the second variable winning device 650 are distributed to the special discharge flow path 650e2. In the present embodiment, the retention member 650n is provided in the special discharge flow path 650e2. With this retention member 650n, only one game ball can be retained in the distribution destination region 650h3, which is the region where the game ball is distributed to the special discharge flow path 650e2 side by the switching member 650h. As a result, when one game ball is retained in the distribution destination area 650h3, the game ball that has passed through the detection port 650a1 of the second variable winning device 650 is not distributed to the special discharge flow path 650e2. Normally, it will flow down to the discharge flow path 650e1.

The retention member 650n is composed of a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side. The retention member 650n operates in the front-rear direction of the game board 13 by the operation of the retention solenoid 209b (see FIG. 8). The retention member 650n can retain one game ball in the distribution destination region 650h3 by advancing forward (closing operation). On the other hand, by performing the evacuation operation (opening operation) backward, the game ball staying in the distribution destination region 650h3 flows down to the special discharge flow path 650e2.

Here, the second variable winning device 650 allows the game ball to enter by opening the opening / closing door 650f1 during the small hit game. Further, the retention member 650n is closed during the small hit game (when it is possible to enter the second variable winning device 650), and after the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed (new to the second variable winning device 650). The opening operation is performed after a predetermined time has passed since (after the ball cannot be entered). That is, in this control example, the game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 650 is limited to one game ball that flows down to the special discharge flow path 650e2 even if the switching member 650h is operating. As a result, it is possible to prevent an excess of game balls flowing down into the special discharge flow path 650e2.

The game ball that has flowed down into the special discharge flow path 650e2 passes through the V winning switch 650e3. In the first embodiment, the jackpot game is given based on the passage of the game ball through the V winning switch 650e3.

In the first embodiment, the number of game balls flowing down to the special discharge flow path 650e2 is limited to one, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more game balls stay in the distribution destination area 650h3. The number of game balls to be limited may be appropriately changed by making it possible or by allowing the staying member to operate a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) during the small hit game.

A case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge flow path 650e1 will be described with reference to FIG. 6A. FIG. 6A is a diagram showing a state in which the flow path solenoid 209c (see FIG. 8) is inactive and the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h closes the opening surface at the entrance of the special discharge flow path 650e2. ..

In the first embodiment, the retention member 650n provided in the special discharge flow path 650e2 operates even when the flow path solenoid 209c is inactive. As a result, it is not necessary to switch the processing depending on whether or not the flow path solenoid 9209c is operated, so that the design cost and the program capacity can be reduced.

When the flow path solenoid 650k is inactive, all the game balls that have passed through the detection port 650a1 of the second variable winning device 650 flow down to the normal discharge flow path 650e1. On the other hand, since there is no game ball flowing down into the special discharge flow path 650e2, there is no influence of the retention member 650n newly provided in the first embodiment.

Next, the flow of the small hit game in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG. 10A shows a small hit type B small hit game executed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (left first ball entrance 64a, right first ball opening 64b). 10 (b) is a timing chart showing the flow of the ball, and FIG. 10B is executed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (left first entry port 64a, right first entry opening 64b). It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the small hit game of the small hit type A. FIG. 11A is a timing chart showing the flow of the small hit game executed based on the entry of the ball into the second entry port 640, and FIG. 11B is the second entry port 640. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the jackpot game executed based on the ball entering the ball. The details of the operation control of the various devices shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 will be described later.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, a small hit game for 60 seconds is executed (see FIG. 22). In this small hit game, a game in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened is executed, and when the ball winning the second variable winning device 650 passes through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3), the small hit game ends. It is configured so that a jackpot game will be executed later. When a small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the ball can pass (easily pass) through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3) during the small hit game (small hit type A). , One of the small hits (small hit type B) in which the ball cannot pass (difficult to pass) through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) is selected.

First, a description will be given with reference to FIG. 10 (a). Based on the winning of the ball to the first ball entry port 64, the main control device 110 performs fluctuation control of the first special symbol. At that time, the display control device 114 executes the first special symbol variation effect indicating that the first special symbol is changing for the same period (30 seconds) as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. The time of the first special symbol variation effect executed by the display control device 114 will be described later. Then, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped and the main control device 110 starts the small hit control (when the small hit game is executed), the opening / closing door 650f1 provided in the second variable winning device 650 is opened / closed. The V inlet solenoid 209a for variably operating, the retention solenoid 209b for variably operating the retention member 650n, and the flow path solenoid 209c for variably operating the switching member 650h are turned on according to a predetermined opening scenario. Specifically, the V inlet solenoid 209a repeats the opening operation of turning off for 15 seconds and turning on for 0.5 seconds twice after the small hit game is executed, and then off for 15 seconds and for 0.8 seconds. A total of 60 seconds of open scenario is set so that it is on and off for 13.2 seconds.

Next, the retention solenoid 209b is turned on for 55 seconds (a state in which the ball is retained) after the small hit game is executed, and then turned off for 5 seconds (a state in which the retention of the ball is released), for a total of 60. An open scenario for a second is set. The opening scenario of the V inlet solenoid 209a and the retention solenoid 209b described above is an opening scenario common to the small hit types A and B.

On the other hand, the opening scenario of the flow path solenoid 209c is configured so that different opening scenarios are set depending on the small hit type, and the ball cannot pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) (difficult to pass). In the small hit type B, which is a type, an open scenario is set in which the ball is continuously turned off for 60 seconds during the small hit game period (see FIG. 10A), and the ball passes through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3). In the small hit type A, which is a possible (easy to pass) small hit type, an open scenario is set in which the small hit game is turned off for 40 seconds, turned on for 15 seconds, and turned off for 5 seconds after the small hit game is executed (FIG. 10). See (b)).

In this way, by making only one solenoid drive different among the three solenoids that are driven during the small hit game, the ball can easily pass through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3). By configuring the small hit game and the small hit game in which the ball is difficult to pass, it is possible to use a common open scenario for the small hit games executed in different small hit types, and reduce the processing load. be able to.

In the present embodiment, the opening scenarios of the V inlet solenoid 209a and the retention solenoid 209b are standardized, and the opening scenarios of the flow path solenoid 209c are different depending on the small hit type, but other configurations may be used. Often, for example, the opening scenarios of the retention solenoid 209b and the flow path solenoid 209C may be shared, and the opening scenarios of the V inlet solenoid 209a may be different. In this case, a common open scenario is set so that the period during which the ball can pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) and the period during which the ball cannot pass are set according to the timing at which the ball wins the second variable winning device 650. As the opening scenario of the V inlet solenoid 209a, the opening scenario in which the V inlet solenoid 209a is turned on corresponding to the period during which the ball can pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) and the specific area (V) are set. It is preferable to use an open scenario in which the winning switch 650e3) turns on the V inlet solenoid 209a corresponding to the period during which the ball cannot pass. Further, in all the opening scenarios, it is preferable to unify the period during which the V inlet solenoid 209a is turned on. With this configuration, the number of balls that can be won in the second variable winning device 650 can be matched.

Further, as in the above example, the opening scenario is not different only for the V inlet solenoid 209a, but the start position (execution start position) of the opening scenario is different even when the same opening scenario is used. The small hit game in which the ball easily passes through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) and the small hit game in which the ball does not easily pass may be configured to be feasible. In this configuration, it is not necessary to prepare different open scenarios for each small hit type, so that the storage capacity can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 11A, the flow of the small hit game executed based on the entry of the ball into the second entry port 640 will be described. In addition, in this embodiment, the small hit game executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640 (that is, the small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2)). Since all the small hit games executed based on the above are configured to execute the same motion control, the small hit types will be described without limitation.

In FIG. 11A, the total time for small hit control (small hit game time) is set to 10 seconds for explanation. First, when the set time t1 (6.5 seconds) elapses after the small hit game (control) is started, the V inlet solenoid 209a is turned off and the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed among the above-mentioned plurality of solenoids. By closing the opening / closing door 650f1, a new ball does not win in the second variable winning device 650. Next, the set time t2 (9 seconds) elapses, the retention solenoid 209b is turned off, the retention member 650n is in the open state (evacuation state), and the ball retained by the retention member 650n flows down to the special discharge path 650e2. To go. Since the set time t2 is set to a sufficient time for the ball existing in the second variable winning device 650 to flow down the normal discharge flow path 650e1 when the set time t1 elapses, the set time t2 becomes the second when the set time t2 elapses. In the 2 variable winning device 650, only the balls retained by the retention member 650n flow down the special discharge flow path 650e2. Next, the set time t3 (5 seconds) elapses, the flow path solenoid 209c is turned off, and the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h closes the opening surface at the entrance of the special discharge flow path 650e2. The set time t3 is set to a sufficient time for the ball flowing down the special discharge flow path 650e2 to flow down downstream from the movable range of the guide piece 650h2 when the set time t2 elapses.

By driving the staying solenoid 209b and the flow path solenoid 209c with a time difference in this way, even if the ball is stayed by the staying member 650n within the movable range of the guiding piece 650h2, the guiding piece 650h2 and the staying member 650n stay. Since the ball can be surely flowed down to the special discharge flow path 650e2 without interfering with the stagnant ball, the device can be made compact.

Finally, based on the fact that the ball flowing down the special discharge flow path 650e2 has passed through the V winning switch (specific area) 650e3, the main control device 110 ends the small hit game control, performs the big hit game control, and performs the first The specific winning opening 65 is opened.

Next, the differences from FIG. 11 (a) will be described with reference to FIG. 11 (b). In FIG. 11B, since the lottery result of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second entrance 640 is a big hit (per symbol), the second variable winning device 650 is not operated. That is, after the fluctuation control of the second special symbol by the main control device 110 is completed, the jackpot control is started. During that time, the display control device 114 executes a second special symbol variation effect indicating that the second special symbol is changing.

Here, the relationship between the time of the effect performed by the display control device 114 in FIG. 11A and the time of the effect performed by the display control device 114 in FIG. 11B will be described. In FIG. 11A, the total of the fluctuation time (2 seconds) of the second special symbol and the small hit effect time (10 seconds) is set to 12 seconds, and in FIG. 11B, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set. Is set in 12 seconds. This is the timing at which the jackpot game is started regardless of whether the jackpot based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is either the V prize hit or the symbol hit described above, that is, the first variable prize device 65 (first specific prize). This is to match the timing at which the mouth 65a) opens. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the lottery result of the second special symbol and to enjoy the effect executed by the display control device to the end.

Next, the flow of the game in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of the game in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, when the game state is the normal state, the left-handed game in which the lottery of the first special symbol (special 1) is executed aiming at the left first entry slot 64a and the game state are in the time saving state. In this case, the lottery of the second special symbol (special 2) is executed aiming at the second entrance 640, or when the game state is a winning (big hit, small hit) state, the first variable winning device 65, the first 2 It is configured so that a right-handed game aiming at the variable winning device 650 is performed, and a winning (big hit or small hit) is won in the lottery of the first special symbol executed during the left-handed game, and the winning game ends. Later, when a time saving state is given, the game shifts to a right-handed game (consecutive villa mode), and shifts to a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. This consecutive villa mode (specific game state) ends when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the game state shifts to the normal state and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 0), and the normal state It shifts to the left-handed game. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, during the left-handed game (normal state), the game is performed with the aim of shifting to the right-handed game (specific game state) which is advantageous to the player, and the right-handed game is performed. During the consecutive villa mode (specific game state), the game is performed with the aim of continuing the consecutive villa mode (specific game state). In this way, in a game machine having different game characteristics, by making the different game characteristics correspond to a game (right-handed game, left-handed game) in which the position where the player shoots the ball is different, the player can be challenged. It is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the first special symbol lottery is a big hit as an opportunity to shift from the normal state in which the left-handed game is performed to the specific game state (ream villa mode) in which the right-handed game is performed. There are multiple (2 types) of chances: a hit and a V-winning hit in which the first special symbol wins a small hit and the jackpot is executed by passing through a specific area (V-winning switch 650e3) during the small-hit game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage during the left-handed game, which is a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player.

As shown in FIG. 12, in the normal game state in which the left-handed game is performed, the game aimed at the left first entry port 64a is executed. If the lottery of the first special symbol is performed based on the ball entering the left first entry slot 64a and the jackpot type of the lottery result is jackpot A (80% at the time of jackpot winning), after the jackpot ends. A time-saving game state (time-saving state) that facilitates winning a prize in the second ball opening 640 is provided. When the game shifts to the time-saving game state (time-saving state), a right-handed game in which a ball is launched to the right side of the game board 13 in order to aim at the second entrance 640 arranged in the right side area of the game board 13 is performed. Will be done. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is jackpot B (20% at the time of winning the jackpot), the time-saving game state (time-saving state) is not given after the end of the jackpot, so that the left-handed game is performed after the end of the jackpot game (normal game state). It shifts to the normal state). Further, in the present embodiment, if the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit and the small hit type is small hit A (10% at the time of small hit winning), there is also a route in which a big hit (V prize) is obtained. .. In this case, after the jackpot ends, the game shifts to the time-saving game state. Further, even if the small hit type is small hit A, if the ball cannot be passed through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) during the small hit game, or the small hit type of the winning small hit When is a small hit B, the game does not shift to the time-saving game state (time-saving state), but shifts to the normal state in which the left-handed game is executed.

Next, in the pachinko machine 10, the flow during the right-handed game, which is advantageous to the player, will be described. In the pachinko machine 10, as described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 5, a right first ball entry port 64b is arranged in the right area of the game board 13, and a jackpot game in which a right-handed game is executed is executed. At least one ball is configured so that the ball enters the right first ball entry port 64b. That is, in the normal game state (normal state), when a jackpot that is given a time saving state is won after the jackpot game ends, at least one hold memory of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is stored after the jackpot game ends. The time saving state is started in a state where the second special symbol (special figure 2) has no reserved memory.

As shown in FIG. 12, in the pachinko machine 10, when both the hold memory of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the hold memory of the second special symbol (special figure 2) exist, the second special symbol The lottery (variation) based on the hold memory of (Special Figure 2) is configured to be executed with priority (so-called special 2 priority change), but the hold memory of the second special symbol (Special Figure 2) is In the absence state, a lottery (variation) based on the reserved memory of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed. Here, since the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the time saving state is configured to be set to 150 seconds regardless of the lottery result, after the time saving state is started. During 150 seconds, the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed. Further, when the fluctuation (lottery) of any of the special symbols (special figure 1 and special figure 2) is executed once during the time saving state, the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied (configured). Time reduction once).

During the period in which the first special symbol (special figure 1) is fluctuating in this time-saving state, a game for acquiring the reserved memory of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed, and the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed. A maximum of 4 reserved memories of Special Figure 2) can be acquired. Here, if the hold memory of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be acquired, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped after the end of the time reduction, and after shifting to the normal state, the hold memory of the second special symbol is set. Based on the lottery is executed. As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, the lottery of the second special symbol is set to win a big hit with a probability of 1/300 and a small hit with a probability of 299/300. 2 For the small hits won by the lottery of special symbols, a small hit game that allows the ball to pass (easily pass) in a specific area (V winning switch 630e3) is executed, and all the big hits executed when the V prize is won are all. A jackpot is set in which a time saving state is given after the jackpot game is completed. Therefore, in the time-saving game state, the consecutive villa mode (specific game state) is continued as long as the hold memory of the second special symbol is held.

On the other hand, during the period when the first special symbol is fluctuating in the time saving state (during the preparation period for the consecutive villa), the hold memory of the second special symbol cannot be acquired, and there is no hold memory of the second special symbol. When the time saving state ends in, the game shifts to the normal game state as it is, and the consecutive villa mode (specific game state) ends.

In addition, if multiple (for example, 3) reserved memories of the 2nd special symbol are acquired during the consecutive villa preparation period, the change of the 2nd special symbol will start when the time is shortened again. Become. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (special 2 fluctuation time) in the time-saving state is set to 2 seconds regardless of the lottery result, which is shorter than the fluctuation time (3 seconds) of the normal symbol in the time-saving state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the acquisition of a new hold memory of the second special symbol during the time saving state in which the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is being executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which an excessive prize ball is provided to the player. In this embodiment, once the time saving state is entered, the time saving state is configured to loop with a probability of about 90%.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 13 to 23, the effect display contents executed by the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14, the flow of the effect display content that changes in response to the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 13 is a timing chart (first half) showing the relationship between the gaming state and the effect state in the present embodiment, and FIG. 14 is a timing chart (second half) showing the relationship between the game state and the effect state in the present embodiment.

Here, a decorative symbol (third symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 used in the present embodiment will be briefly described. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, decorative symbols (third symbols) corresponding to three types of symbols, a first special symbol, a second special symbol, and a normal symbol, can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Among them, the decorative symbol (third symbol) corresponding to the symbol that should notify the player of the lottery result most is displayed in the first display area Dm (see FIG. 9) of the third symbol display device. However, the decorative symbol (third symbol) corresponding to the other symbols is configured to be displayed in the second display area Dn (see FIG. 9) of the third symbol display device as a secondary symbol.

Then, by switching the symbol to be displayed as the main symbol according to the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, only the player is made to recognize the display result of the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is configured so that you can easily understand the complicated game playability.

The control for switching the symbol to be displayed as the main symbol described above will be described in detail later, but the value of the effect state is set based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 and the fluctuation state of each symbol, and the value of the effect state is set. Based on the above, the symbol to be displayed as the main symbol and the symbol to be displayed as the secondary symbol are switched and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 13, when the game state is the normal (special 1) state in which the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol is executed, "state 1" is set as the effect state. During the period when this "state 1" is set, the first special symbol is displayed as the main symbol and the normal symbol is displayed as the subordinate symbol, and the reserved symbol of the first special symbol is displayed as the main reserved symbol (figure). 9 (b)). In this way, in the "normal (special 1)" state in which the fluctuation (lottery) of the first special symbol is executed, the player can easily recognize the lottery result of the first special symbol. , The content of the game can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, in the "big hit" state in which the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol and the jackpot game is executed, in the first display area Dm (see FIG. 9B) of the third symbol display device 81. The jackpot effect image is displayed. In this case, since the main symbol is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, "-" is set as the effect state.

After the jackpot game is completed, the game state shifts to the time saving state and the change of the first special symbol is executed. In the "time saving (special 1)" state, the effect state is "state 3" based on the change state of the normal symbol. "Or" state 5 "is set. Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the “time saving (special 1)” state will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game state is "time reduction (special 1)", a game for acquiring the reserved memory of the second special symbol is performed. In order to acquire the hold memory of the second special symbol, a right-handed game is performed, the ball is passed through the through gate 67 (the lottery of the normal symbol is executed), and the normal symbol hit (normal symbol hit) is won (win). It is necessary to open the electric accessory 640a with a probability of 1/20).

That is, when the game state is the "short time (special 1)" state, the player plays the game while expecting that the lottery result of the normal symbol will be a hit. Further, in the present embodiment, when the normal symbol whose fluctuation is started during the time saving state stops the fluctuation during the time saving state and the operation of the electric accessory 640a is started, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is performed. Since the opening pattern (long opening) is set to be advantageous to the player, the normal map fluctuation is started while the game state is not the time saving state (for example, the jackpot state), and the game is electrically operated during the time saving state. When the operation of the accessory 640a is started, or when the fluctuation of the normal figure is started during the time saving state and the operation of the electric accessory 640a is started after the time saving state ends (for example, the normal state), the electric combination A normal opening pattern (short opening) is executed instead of an opening pattern (long opening) in which the opening operation of the object 640a is advantageous to the player.

In the gaming machine configured in this way, if the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the third symbol corresponding to the normal symbol on the condition that the gaming state is shifted to the time saving state. , Even if the electric accessory 640a is short-opened despite the time saving state as described above, the main symbol will be displayed even for the fluctuation of the normal symbol, which gives the player a sense of distrust. There was a problem that it would end up.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the "time reduction (special 1)" state is set as the game state, the fluctuation state of the normal symbol is determined, the timing at which the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started, and the fluctuation of the normal symbol. When the timing at which is stopped (the timing at which the electric accessory 640a is opened when the winning is won) is both in the "time reduction (special 1)" state, the effect state is "state 5". "Is set, and in other cases," state 3 "is set.

Then, during the period when "state 5" is set as the effect state, the normal symbol is displayed as the main symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol are the subordinate symbols, and the second special symbol is displayed as the main reserved symbol. The pending symbol of is displayed (see FIG. 16 (a)). In this way, in the "time saving (special 1)" state in which the fluctuation (lottery) of the first special symbol is executed for a long period of time (150 seconds), the symbol corresponding to the main symbol is switched from the first special symbol to the normal symbol. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize the lottery result of the normal symbol and notify the content of the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, during the period when "state 3" is set as the effect state, the main symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol are pseudo symbols that do not correspond to any of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol. , The third symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is displayed so as to be a secondary symbol, and the reserved symbol of the second special symbol is displayed as the main reserved symbol (see FIG. 16A). With this configuration, the content of the game can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in the state where the second special symbol is fluctuating, "state 4" is set as the effect state regardless of the gaming state (regardless of the normal state or the time saving state). During the period in which "state 4" is set as this effect state, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed as the main symbol (see FIG. 17 (b)). Then, as shown in FIG. 14, when the "state 5" is set as the effect state and the lottery result of the changing first special symbol is a specific result (for example, a big hit), the first 1 When the remaining variation time of the special symbol is less than or equal to a predetermined period, "state 6" is set as the effect state.

During the period when "state 6" is set as this effect state, the first special symbol is drawn from the variable display mode in which the third symbol corresponding to the normal symbol executed in "state 5" is the main symbol. The pseudo symbol based on the result is displayed in a variable manner as the main symbol. By doing so, it is possible to secure a period for suggesting the lottery result of the first special symbol that has won the jackpot to the player. Therefore, from the state in which "state 5" is set and the variable display mode with the third symbol corresponding to the normal symbol as the main symbol is displayed, the jackpot game of the first special symbol is suddenly started, and the game It is possible to suppress the problem that a person is confused.

In the present embodiment, the timing at which the effect state is changed from the “state 5” to the “state 6” is the timing at which the fluctuation of the normal symbol is executed. As a result, the transition of the production state can be performed without discomfort.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game state is the normal state and the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit, the specific effect for the small hit is executed (see FIG. 22). When this game state is the normal state and the small hit game based on the first special symbol is executed, "state 2" is set as the effect state.

During the period when "state 2" is set as this effect state, the pseudo symbol that does not correspond to any of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol is variablely displayed as the main symbol in the specific effect for small hits. Will be done. The pseudo symbol that is variablely displayed in this case is a pseudo symbol that is variablely displayed based on the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650 during the small hit game. That is, the timing at which this pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop display mode (for example, doublet) is displayed before a predetermined period of the timing when the second variable winning device 650 is opened, that is, the predetermined stop display mode is displayed. The timing is set so that the ball fired after being doublet can win the second variable winning device 650, and the player is made to think that the second variable winning device 650 has been opened based on the fact that the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed. Will be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the small hit game in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened, the small hit game which is advantageous to the player (the ball easily passes through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3)) is disadvantageous. It has a small hit game that becomes, and the type of the stop display mode of the pseudo symbol that is variablely displayed during the small hit game is set according to the type of the small hit game that is being executed. For example, as a stop display mode of the pseudo symbol corresponding to the timing when the second variable winning device 650 is opened at the timing when the ball can pass through the specific area, a specific stop display mode (for example, a specific number (7) doublet). Eyes) are displayed as stopped. With this configuration, the player can grasp the type of the small hit game and the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650 by the variable display of the pseudo symbol executed during the small hit game. You can entertain the small hit game.

Next, the display screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 23. In the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14, according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 and the fluctuation status and the holding status of each symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol). Therefore, display control for different symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the main symbol displayed in the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is executed. With this configuration, the game is played in a game machine designed so that the notable symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery) differs depending on the game state. It is possible to easily notify the player whether or not the game result is advantageous to the player simply by having the person grasp the display result of the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player can be notified. It is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game machine.

FIG. 15A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the time when the game state is the time saving state and the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is started. is there. In the present embodiment, since the right-handed game is advantageous to the player during the time saving state, the guide for guiding the game method in the guide display area Dm4 formed on the upper left side of the first display area Dm. The characters "right-handed" are displayed as a display. In the central portion of the first display area Dm, the normal symbol main symbol Dmc having the third symbol corresponding to the normal symbol as the main symbol is displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the normal symbol. Further, on the left side of the first display area Dm, a main reserved symbol display area Dm5 for displaying the number of reserved symbols of the second special symbol as the main reserved symbol is formed. In the state shown in FIG. 15A, the number of reserved storages of the second special symbol is “0”.

The second display area Dn1 formed on the upper right side of the first display area Dm has a third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, and the second display area Dn2 has a third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. However, in the third display area Dn3, the third symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is displayed as a slave symbol, respectively, and it is shown that the corresponding symbol is changing in the second display area Dn1 and the second display area Dn3. Therefore, the third symbol (slave symbol) is displayed in a variable manner, and in the second display area Dn2, the third symbol (slave symbol) for indicating that the corresponding symbol is not changed is stopped and displayed.

Regarding the display mode of the secondary symbols displayed in the second display areas Dn1 to Dn3, the display mode corresponding to whether or not the corresponding symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) are changing. Anything is fine. Further, as a display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol, it is sufficient if it can be grasped that it does not change (stopped), and as shown in the second display area Dn2 of FIG. 15 (a), "-". It may be a display mode in which "" is stopped and displayed, or a display mode in which the stop display mode of the previous variation display is stopped and displayed as it is.

Then, in the second display area Dn4, the number "3" is displayed as a display mode for indicating that the number of reserved balls (number of reserved balls) of the first special symbol is 3, and in the second display area Dn5. , The number "0" is displayed as a display mode to indicate that the number of reserved balls (number of reserved balls) of the second special symbol is 0 (a state in which the reserved memory has not been acquired), and the second display In the area Dn6, the number "4" is displayed as a display mode for indicating that the number of reserved balls (number of reserved balls) of the normal symbol is four.

As a display mode for showing the reserved storage number (number of reserved balls) of each symbol displayed in the second display areas Dn4 to Dn6, the reserved storage number of each symbol is specifically shown as in the present embodiment. A display mode in which the value is indicated by a number may be used, or a display mode in which only the presence / absence of hold storage of each symbol is shown (for example, "○" when there is hold memory, "-" when there is no hold memory). You may use it. In this case, the number of reserved memories may be suggested by changing the color of the display mode of "○" indicating that there is reserved memory. In addition, a display mode that abstractly suggests the number of reserved memories may be used.

In the state shown in FIG. 15A, since the first special symbol has executed the fluctuation of the fluctuation time of 150 seconds and the second special symbol has not changed, the second display area Dn1 is the first. The slave symbol corresponding to the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and "-" indicating that the slave symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner is displayed in the second display area Dn2.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds formed below the first display area Dm, "150 seconds" is displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1 as a time display for indicating the remaining period of the time saving state, and the first sub-display area Ds1 is displayed. In the second sub-display area Ds2 on the left side of the display area Ds1, "countdown !!" is displayed as a guidance display for notifying the player that the remaining period of the time saving state is being subtracted. In the present embodiment, as the remaining period displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1, the remaining period of the fluctuation period (150 seconds) of the special figure 1 in the time saving state is calculated, and the calculated value is displayed. Therefore, the accurate period until the end of the time saving state can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player can play the game with peace of mind until the period elapses. However, a different value may be displayed as the remaining period display to be displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1, for example, a value with the remaining period of the variable period (150 seconds) of the special figure 1 in the time saving state as the upper limit. May be set randomly and the value may be displayed so as to be subtracted.

In this case, by the time the displayed value becomes 0, the difference between the value indicating the remaining fluctuation period in Special Figure 1 and the randomly set value is added and displayed, or the displayed value is "???". It is good to change the display to. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp how long the time saving state will continue, and it is possible to make the player always play the game with excitement.

FIG. 15 (b) shows a time when the game state is a time-saving state and 40 seconds have elapsed (from the state shown in FIG. 15 (a)) after the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is started. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81 in the above. As shown in FIG. 15B, the main symbol Dmc of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of notifying that the winner is won in the lottery of the normal symbol (display mode of "555"), and the first display area Dm. On the lower right side of the above, the electric accessory 640a is long-opened by winning the normal symbol, and a guidance display for notifying that the ball can enter the second entrance 640 is displayed.

Further, "110 seconds" is displayed as the remaining period of the time saving state in the first sub-display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, and the ball is inserted into the second entry port 640 in the second sub-display area Ds2. A "charge time" indicating that the electric accessory 640a is in an easy state (a state in which the electric accessory 640a is operated for a long time) is displayed. Then, in the second display area Ds3, a stop display mode (“○○”) for indicating that the normal symbol has been won is displayed.

In this way, while the game state is in the time-saving state and the variation of the special figure 1 is being executed, the lottery result of the normal symbol (general diagram) becomes the symbol that the player should pay attention to most. The lottery result of the general drawing is displayed using the symbol Dmc. Therefore, the display can be easily understood by the player.

In this embodiment, the display position and display mode of each main symbol (special figure 1 main symbol, special figure 2 main symbol, doublet main symbol, pseudo main symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm are displayed. Mainly because the stop display mode for showing the same lottery result (for example, winning) in which the lottery result of the symbol is advantageous to the player is also the same stop display mode (for example, doublet). Even if the target symbol of the symbol is changed according to the game state, it is configured so that the player can execute the effect display (effect variable display) without a sense of discomfort, but other than that. As the configuration of, the display position and the display mode may be different for each main symbol, or if the stop display mode for showing a specific lottery result (for example, winning) in which the lottery result of the symbol is advantageous to the player is different. You may let it.

FIG. 16A is a diagram showing a state in which the game state is a time-saving state and the ball enters the second ball entry port 640 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1). As shown in FIG. 16A, when a ball enters the second entry port 640, it is displayed in the upper center of the first display area Dm to indicate that the ball has entered the second entry port 640. The text "Charge completed" is displayed. Then, in the main reserved symbol display area Dm5, a display mode (black circle in the figure) indicating that the number of reserved symbols of the second special symbol has been set to "1" is displayed. In this state, in the second display area Dn5, the number "1" is displayed as a display mode indicating that the number of reserved storages of the second special symbol is one.

In the present embodiment, one ball is inserted in the second entrance 640 as a closing condition of the electric accessory 640a when the electric accessory 640a is in the long open state by winning the hit of the normal symbol during the short time. It is set that 11 seconds (total opening time 6 seconds) have passed since the operation of the ball or the electric accessory 640a was started. In this figure, one ball enters the second entry port 640. Since the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is completed and the next normal symbol variation state is being executed, the normal symbol main symbol Dmc is variablely displayed in the central portion of the first display area Dm. Further, "100 seconds" is displayed as the remaining period of the time saving state in the first sub-display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, when one reserved memory of the second special symbol is acquired, after the end of the time saving state (after the fluctuation of the first special symbol being changed is stopped), the first 2 The variable display of special symbols is started, and it is designed so that it is possible to win a symbol hit or a V winning hit with a high probability. Further, since the time saving state is always given after the jackpot game executed based on the lottery of the second special symbol, the chance to acquire the reserved memory of the second special symbol will come again. In addition, when a plurality of reserved memories of the second special symbol are acquired in one time saving state (during the change of the first special symbol), the jackpot game corresponding to the acquired number is executed. Has been done. Therefore, by displaying the "holding memory of the second special symbol" most expected by the player in the time saving state as the main holding symbol on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. it can.

In the present embodiment, as the display mode of the main reserved symbol, a maximum of four "black circles" can be displayed corresponding to the number of reserved symbols, but other configurations may be used, for example. In order to effectively notify whether or not the consecutive villa mode is continued (whether or not the second special symbol is reserved and stored), the display mode of the main reserved symbol corresponding to the first reserved memory of the second special symbol is displayed as another main reserved symbol. It may be different from the display mode of the design. In this case, the main reserved symbol is emphasized more than the other main reserved symbols by making the main reserved symbol different in size, color, shape, and pattern so that the main reserved symbol corresponding to the first reserved symbol of the second special symbol is emphasized. Or, only the main reserved symbol corresponding to the first reserved symbol of the second special symbol may be displayed at a position different from that of the other main reserved symbols. Further, instead of changing the display mode of the main reserved symbol, the mode (display mode of the background image) on the display area side where the main reserved symbol is displayed may be different. Further, only when the first reserved memory of the second special symbol is acquired, the voice output means or the light emitting means may be used to notify the fact.

FIG. 16B is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the game state is a time saving state and the fluctuation period of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 1 second remaining. In this state, the pseudo effect symbol whose main symbol does not correspond to the display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol is displayed as a pseudo main symbol Dmb in the center of the first display area Dm. This pseudo main symbol Dmb is temporarily stopped and displayed in a swung state until the period when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped (until the remaining period display of the first sub display area Ds1 becomes "0 seconds"). ..

In this pseudo effect symbol, the game state is in the time saving state, and the fluctuation period exceeds the remaining time saving period. At the timing when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started (the timing when "state 3" is set as the effect state). It is what is displayed. With this configuration, when the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the normal symbol whose fluctuation period exceeds the remaining time shortening period is displayed as the normal symbol main symbol Dmc, even if the normal symbol main symbol Dmc is displayed, the normal symbol Dmc wins. Even if the stop display is performed in the display mode indicating, the problem that the electric accessory 640a is short-opened and the player feels distrust of the effect can be suppressed.

In addition, the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the normal symbol whose fluctuation period is longer than the remaining time reduction period is displayed as the normal symbol main symbol Dmc, and the display of the normal symbol main symbol Dmc is interrupted at the timing when the time reduction state ends ( It is possible to switch to another main symbol display), but if the display of the main symbol used to make the player gaze at the displayed content is changed in the middle, it will give the player a great sense of discomfort. There's a problem. By using the above-described configuration, such a problem can be solved.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the display mode of the pseudo effect symbol, the display mode showing the lottery result of the first special symbol is displayed, so that the pseudo effect symbol is displayed at the timing when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped. The lottery result of the first special symbol can be smoothly displayed only by changing the rocking state (temporary stop state) to the completely stopped stop state (see FIG. 17A). In addition, when the temporarily stopped main symbol (pseudo main symbol Dmb) is temporarily stopped in a display mode indicating a hit, the lottery result of the first special symbol is a win, so that the player is surely given a privilege. This can suppress the problem of giving the player a sense of distrust in the display mode (display result) of the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

It should be noted that a configuration other than the configuration for displaying the pseudo-effect symbol during the period for displaying the pseudo-effect symbol described in the present embodiment as the main symbol (during the period when "state 3" is set as the effect state) may be used. For example, during that period, none of the main symbols may be displayed, and an effect of inciting the end of the time saving state may be executed. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the normal symbol main symbol Dmc corresponding to the normal symbol for which the fluctuation period longer than the remaining time shortening period is set from being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player feels distrust.

In the state shown in FIG. 16B, since the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed while the pseudo main symbol is temporarily stopped, the lottery result of the normal symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn3. Is stopped and displayed in a display mode (“○ ×”) indicating that is off. In this way, the fluctuation stop timing of the normal symbol is within a predetermined period (for example, within 2 seconds) from the fluctuation stop timing of the special figure 1 (end timing of the time saving state), and the lottery result of the normal symbol is out of order. Even in the case of, the effect display using the pseudo main symbol Dmb is executed.

In FIG. 16B, since the display mode indicating that the number of reserved storages of the second special symbol is 2 is displayed in the main reserved symbol display area Dm5, the second special symbol is displayed after the time saving state is completed. Will start to fluctuate. In order to inform the player to that effect, "Soon charge release time !!" is displayed above the first display area Dm. This "charge release time" indicates the period during which the jackpot corresponding to the number of the second special symbols stored on hold is executed.

Then, when the charge release time is entered, as shown in FIG. 17A, "charge release time entry" is displayed in the information of the first display area Dm, and the special figure 1 main symbol Dma is stopped and displayed. A normal symbol whose fluctuation is displayed at this timing (time reduction end timing), that is, a normal symbol in which the fluctuation in the time reduction state is started and the stop timing of the fluctuation is after the time reduction end is the second display area as a secondary symbol. Since it is displayed on Dn3, it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned problem when the player is shown the variable display of the main symbol Dmc.

Next, when the charge release time is started, as shown in FIG. 17B, the special figure 2 main symbol Dmd is variably displayed in the first display area Dm. In this case, since the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started, the display mode indicating the number of reserved symbols (number of reserved symbols) of the special symbol 2 displayed in the main reserved symbol display area Dm5 is updated, and the remaining one is reserved. A display mode indicating the number of memories is displayed. Further, in the second display area Dn, the secondary symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 is displayed in the second display area Dn1 in the mode of being stopped and displayed as the main symbol in FIG. 17 (a), and in the second display area Dn2. The special figure 2 fluctuation is displayed, and the normal figure fluctuation is displayed as a secondary symbol in the second display area Dn3.

In this embodiment, when the change of the special figure 2 is executed, it is designed so that it is easy to win either the big hit or the small hit (100% win), and the period during which the special figure 2 is changing is , It is not necessary to make the player pay close attention to the fluctuation of the normal map. Therefore, while the special figure 2 is fluctuating, by displaying the special figure 2 main symbol Dmd as the main symbol, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set to 2 seconds in both the normal state and the time saving state. This period of 2 seconds is shorter than the shortest period set as the fluctuation time of a normal symbol. As a result, during the period in which the special figure 2 is fluctuating, it is suppressed that the normal figure fluctuation is executed and stopped without straddling a plurality of gaming states. As a result, it is possible to prevent an extra effect from being generated during the fluctuation of the special figure 2. In addition, with this configuration, when the special figure 2 fluctuates during the time saving state, the hit fluctuation of the normal figure is executed and stopped during the special figure 2 fluctuation period (during the time saving). It is possible to prevent the electric accessory 640a from opening and the special figure 2 hold from increasing during the special figure 2 fluctuation period (during the time reduction), and the player is provided with an excessive amount of balls. Can be suppressed.

It should be noted that the fluctuation period of the normal symbol and the fluctuation period of the special figure 2 can be selected from a plurality of values, and only when the selected fluctuation period satisfies the predetermined conditions, during the fluctuation period of the special figure 2 (time reduction). ), The electric accessory 640a may be configured to be openable. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with unexpectedness, and there is an effect that the game can be enthusiastically performed.

Then, when the special figure 2 fluctuation shown in FIG. 17 (b) wins a small hit and is stopped and displayed, the display screen shown in FIG. 18 (a) is displayed. That is, in the first display area Dm, the special figure 2 main symbol Dmd is stopped and displayed in a display mode (“555”) indicating a small hit, and is opened in the lower right area of the first display area Dm during the small hit game. A guidance display for guiding the player to the location of the second variable winning device 650 is displayed. Then, "Aim for V" is displayed in the second sub-display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds.

Then, during the small hit game shown in FIG. 18A, when the ball passes through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) in the second variable winning device 650 and the big hit game is started, FIG. 18B ) Is displayed. In this jackpot effect screen, the main symbol is not displayed in the main display area Dm, and the third symbol corresponding to each symbol (special 1, special 2, normal symbol) is displayed in the second display area Dm as a secondary symbol. Is displayed. As a result, the player can enjoy the jackpot production without worrying about the variable display of each of the running symbols (special 1, special 2, and normal).

Furthermore, in the jackpot production, "Charge Bonus 1st time" is displayed in the main display area Dm as the number of consecutive villas indicating the number of jackpots executed during the consecutive villa mode, and below that, the currently executed jackpot "ROUND1" is displayed as a round number display indicating the number of rounds. As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of rounds (2, 5, 7, 10, 15 rounds) are set in the jackpot game. Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot can be executed after the end of the time saving state by the number of holdings of the special figure 2 held and stored during the special figure 1 fluctuation (150 second fluctuation) during the time saving state.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment configured in this way, the display regarding a plurality of jackpots executed during the consecutive villa state is totaled as one period from the start to the end of the consecutive villa state. It is configured to be able to display the cumulative display of the period of the villa and the cumulative display of the specific period that aggregates only the jackpot games based on the jackpot rights acquired by one special figure 1 change (that is, the number of special figure 2 reserved). In the example diagram shown in FIG. 18A, the number of rounds displayed in the lower right side of the first display area Dm 6 corresponds to the number of rounds for the jackpot game within the specific period described above. The number display mode is displayed.

In this round number display area Dm6, it is determined how many rounds of jackpot games are executed in total based on the reserved memory of special figure 2 acquired by one change of special figure 1, and the determination result is obtained. A display mode suggesting is displayed. Specifically, based on the completion of the special figure 1 fluctuation (150 second fluctuation) during the time saving game, the prize information corresponding to the special figure 2 hold (that is, stored in the special figure prize information storage area 223a described later). The winning information regarding the special figure 2) is extracted, and the number of feasible jackpots and the number of rounds are determined. Then, the display mode including at least the determination result is displayed in the round number display area Dm6.

The round number display mode displayed in the round number display area Dm6 is the execution confirmed round number display mode (in FIG. 18B, indicated by a solid circle) indicating the number of rounds that are confirmed to be executed. , The running round display mode (indicated by a black circle in FIG. 18B) indicating the currently running round, and the jackpot right acquired within a specific period (special figure 1 fluctuation (150-second fluctuation) during the time-saving game). It is composed of a specific period total number of rounds suggestion display mode (indicated by a dotted circle in FIG. 18B) that suggests the total number of rounds in the jackpot game period that can be executed in.

By executing the jackpot effect configured in this way, the player can perform the special figure 2 reserved ball number displayed in the main reserved symbol display area Dm5 and the total number of rounds for a specific period displayed in the round number display area Dm6. You can enjoy the jackpot game while predicting the type (number of rounds) of the jackpot game to be executed in the future while looking at the number suggestion display mode.

Further, as described above, since the execution confirmed round number display mode and the executing round display mode are displayed in the round number display area Dm6, the round of the jackpot game currently being executed can be performed within a specific period. Of the total number of rounds that may be executed (the number of rounds displayed as the total number of rounds in a specific period) or the number of rounds that are confirmed to be executed (the number of confirmed rounds to be executed) The player can easily grasp where it is. Therefore, it is possible to easily predict the number of remaining rounds to be executed within a specific period.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18B, "the first charge bonus" is displayed as the number of consecutive villas indicating the number of jackpots executed during the consecutive villa mode. The number of consecutive villas is displayed, and the number of jackpots executed based on the jackpot right acquired during the above-mentioned specific period (special figure 1 fluctuation (150 seconds fluctuation) during the time-saving game (number of consecutive villas within the specific period) is displayed. Alternatively, both the display of the number of consecutive villas and the display of the number of consecutive villas within a specific period may be displayed. Further, the number of times the above-mentioned specific period is started in the consecutive villa mode ( A means for calculating the number of times the special figure 1 fluctuation (150-second fluctuation) is executed during the time-saving game is provided, and the total number of jackpots in the consecutive villa mode, the number of times of entering a specific period, and the number of times of entering a specific period are executed within one specific period. It may be configured to display the number of jackpots to be played. By configuring in this way, not only the display mode during the jackpot game can be enjoyed, but also the game status of the pachinko machine 10 can be grasped and future games can be played. Further, after calculating the above-mentioned number of times, the average number of jackpots within a specific period may be displayed.

By displaying the average number of jackpots within a specific period, if the average number of jackpots within a specific period is low, the lottery result of the normal symbol is biased to the outside, or the through condition that the lottery of the normal symbol is executed. It can be used as a reference for future games while analyzing the probable cause as to whether the number of balls passing through the gate 67 was small.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode corresponding to the number of rounds (1 round, 1 display mode) is displayed as the display mode displayed in the round number display area Dm6, but the number of rounds is displayed. The display mode displayed in the area Dm6 is not limited to this, and any display mode in which the player can predict the number of rounds may be used. For example, the size and color of the display mode may be changed according to a predetermined rule according to the number of rounds.

Further, in the present embodiment, "ROUND1" is displayed as a round number display indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot currently being executed, but this round number display may also display the number of rounds for one jackpot game. Instead, the number of rounds may be added and displayed for the jackpot games executed within a specific period. As a result, it is possible to easily grasp and store the game result in the consecutive villa mode. In the second sub-display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds, "5, 10, 20" indicating the number of times to be executed in a plurality of jackpot games executed within a specific period is displayed.

When the second jackpot game is started due to the time saving variation (special figure 2 variation) executed after the jackpot game shown in FIG. 18B is completed, the second jackpot game shown in FIG. 19A is started. The display screen inside is displayed. As shown in FIG. 19A, in the state where the second jackpot game is started, the main reserved symbol display area Dm5 displays a display mode indicating that the remaining number of reserved symbols is “0”. , In the main display area Dm, "charge bonus second time" is displayed as a display of the number of consecutive villas to indicate that this big hit is the second big hit in the consecutive villa mode. Then, in the round number display area Dm6, the execution confirmed round number display mode for a total of 20 rounds is displayed. That is, in FIG. 18B, the number of rounds displayed as the total number of rounds suggestion display mode for a specific period is changed to the execution confirmed number of rounds display mode by executing the current jackpot game (second time). ing. In this way, by changing the display mode of suggesting the total number of rounds for a specific period to the display mode of the number of confirmed rounds, the player can safely execute the jackpot game.

In the present embodiment, in order to notify the number of rounds of the current jackpot game when the jackpot game is started, among the number of rounds displayed as the suggestion display mode of the total number of rounds for a specific period, the current jackpot The configuration is such that the number corresponding to the number of rounds of the game is changed to the execution confirmed round number display mode, but other configurations may be used. For example, at the timing when the jackpot game is started, the execution confirmed round number is displayed. The mode is displayed as it is, and when a predetermined condition (for example, execution of a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 during the jackpot game or the jackpot game reaches the third round) is satisfied during the jackpot game, the total for a specific period is totaled. The round number suggestion display mode may be changed to the execution confirmed round number display mode. As a result, in order to grasp the number of confirmed rounds to be executed even during the jackpot game, it is possible to make the player interested in the production.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which all the specific period total number of rounds suggestion display modes are changed to the execution confirmed round number display mode, but other configurations may be used, for example, the specific period total rounds suggestion display mode. Only a part of the above may be changed to the execution confirmed round number display mode, or the total number of rounds suggestion display mode for a specific period may be changed to the execution confirmed round number display mode at a plurality of timings during the jackpot game. You may do it. As a result, the jackpot game can be executed with a sense of expectation at all times.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 19 (b) to 20 (b), the remaining period (remaining fluctuation period of special figure 1) in the time saving state (time saving state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed) is a predetermined condition ( The effect display (battle effect) that is executed when the remaining 10 seconds) is satisfied will be described. This effect display (battle effect) is an effect for notifying the player that the consecutive villa mode will end if there is no hold memory of the special figure 2 at the end of the time saving state. As described above, this battle effect is executed when the remaining period of the time saving state is 10 seconds or less and the special figure 2 hold is "0". Then, when a ball enters the second entrance 640 during this battle production and the hold memory of Special Figure 2 occurs, a battle victory production is executed to indicate that the consecutive villa mode is continued. (See FIG. 20 (a)) If the ball does not enter the second entrance 640 during this battle effect, a battle defeat effect is executed to indicate that the consecutive villa mode is continued (see FIG. 20 (a)). See FIG. 20 (b)). In the present embodiment, when the battle effect is executed, the effect that finally loses the battle is set. This is because the period of the battle production is set to the period (10 seconds) in which the fluctuation of the normal figure can be changed 3 or 4 times, and the probability that the ball will enter the second entrance 640 during the battle production is determined. This is because it is lower than the probability that the ball does not enter the second entrance 640 during the battle production. That is, the processing load can be reduced because the control for changing the effect content needs to be executed only when a low-probability event occurs.

In the present embodiment, the effect result of the battle effect is different depending on whether or not the special figure 2 is held, but other elements may be included. For example, when the lottery result of the special figure 1 fluctuating during the time saving is a big hit, the battle victory effect may be executed at the timing when the lottery result of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed. As a result, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect to the player who predicts the outcome of the battle effect based only on the content (presence or absence of storage) of the main reserved symbol display area Dm5.

In the present embodiment, the display mode of the main reserved symbol display area Dm5 is updated at the timing when the reserved memory of the special figure 2 occurs, but as another configuration, for example, during the battle production, the special figure 2 Even if the hold storage occurs, the display mode of the main hold symbol display area Dm5 may not be updated, or the main hold symbol display area Dm5 may not be displayed when the battle effect is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know that the ball has entered the second entrance 640 while the battle effect is being executed, and the effect of the battle effect is enhanced. Can be done.

In addition, based on the winning information of the normal symbol that is stored on hold, it is possible to determine whether the normal symbol is correct or not, and change the content of the battle effect (opposite, order of attack, type of attack, etc.) based on the determination result. It is good to configure in. As a result, the player can pay attention to the content of the battle effect. Further, a privilege effect that is executed only when a plurality of special figure 2 holds are acquired during the battle effect may be provided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21A, the content of the effect to be executed when the special figure 2 hold is acquired up to the upper limit during the special figure 1 time reduction fluctuation will be described. As shown in FIG. 21 (a), when the special figure 2 hold is acquired up to the upper limit, it is shown that the special figure 2 hold is stored up to the upper limit (4 pieces) in the main hold symbol display area Dm5. The main reserved symbol is displayed in the display mode (display mode in which the black circles in the figure are four). Then, in the central portion of the first display area Dm, a message for congratulating that the special figure 2 hold has reached the upper limit is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 21B, in the first display area Dm, a privilege effect (a lively effect using characters) that has nothing to do with the lottery result of each symbol is executed.

Then, in the first sub-display area Ds1, the characters "??" that hide the remaining period of the short period of time are displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp which game state is in the period during which the above-mentioned privilege effect is executed.

Here, during the special figure 1 time reduction fluctuation, the lottery of the normal symbol is repeated, and by winning the hit of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a is opened and the ball is inserted into the second entrance 640. Then, the game of acquiring the hold memory of the second special symbol is executed. While such a game is being executed, the player pays the most attention to the lottery result of the normal symbol, so that the normal symbol main symbol Dmc is displayed as the main symbol of the third symbol display device 81 ( When the special figure 2 hold as shown in FIGS. 15 (b) and 21 (a) is stored up to the upper limit (4 pieces), the special figure 2 hold cannot be stored any more. , The player no longer pays close attention to whether or not the normal symbol is won. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 21A, the third symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn3 as the slave symbol.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the display of the third symbol corresponding to the symbol that the player does not gaze at as the main symbol. Further, it is possible to suppress a problem when the main symbol Dmc of the normal figure is displayed in the state of FIG. 21A and the stop display is performed in the display mode indicating a hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the effect content when the first special symbol (special figure 1) executed in the normal state of the game is won as a small hit will be described. FIG. 22A is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen immediately after the small hit game is started, and FIG. 22B is a specific timing (second variable winning device 650) during the small hit game. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen at the opening timing of.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the small hit game based on the lottery result of the special figure 1 is executed in the normal state, the pseudo main symbol Dmb is variablely displayed in the first display area Dm. This pseudo main symbol Dmb is variablely displayed so as to suggest the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650 during the small hit game, and the sub-display area Ds is used to explain the game content during the small hit game. If the symbols (pseudo main symbol Dmb) are aligned, the characters "chance" are displayed (see FIG. 22 (a)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (b), when the pseudo main symbol Dmb is stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop display mode (“444” in FIG. 22 (b)), it is displayed on the lower right side of the first display area Dm. A guidance display mode for guiding the game aiming at the second variable winning device 650 is displayed to the player, and the characters "Aim for V" for explaining the content of the game are displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the small hit game based on the special figure 1 is executed in the normal state, the pseudo main symbol Dmb that is variablely displayed based on the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650 is the first. 1 Displayed in the display area Dm. As a result, it is possible to make it seem that the opening operation of the second variable winning device 650, which is executed a plurality of times during the small hit game, is executed based on the variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb.

Further, in the state where the small hit game based on the special figure 1 is executed in the normal state, the main reserved symbol for displaying the number of reserved symbols emphasized to the player is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is configured. As a result, the holding symbol display indicating the number of reserved symbols of each symbol described above is not changed based on the variable display of the pseudo main symbol having nothing to do with each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, normal figure). It can be made difficult for the player to notice. As another configuration, a pseudo-holding symbol display (pseudo-holding main symbol) that is variable based on the variation display of the pseudo-main symbol Dmb may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, the pseudo main symbol Dmb also executes a variable display during the small hit game, in which the second variable winning device 650 is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode (for example, a loose stitch), which is different from the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650. Will be done. As a result, even when the opening timing interval of the second variable winning device 650 is wide, the pseudo main symbol Dmb can be continuously displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the pseudo main symbol Dmb that is stopped and displayed based on the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650, the stop display mode is set so that the opening timing of the corresponding second variable winning device 650 is advantageous to the player. It is configured to be different depending on the timing (opening timing at which the ball can pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3)). For example, the stop of the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the opening timing advantageous to the player. As a display mode, a display mode in which a specific same number is stopped is set, for example, "777". As a result, the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650 and the degree of advantage of the opening timing can be grasped by the variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb executed during the small hit game. You can be interested in the contents of the production display.

Next, the error display displayed on the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 23 (a). FIG. 23A is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen when the right-handed game is performed in the normal state where the left-handed game is executed. As shown in FIG. 23A, when it is determined that the right-handed game has been performed in the normal state in which the left-handed game is executed, the main symbol displayed in the first display area Dm is covered. The notification display area Dm7 is formed as described above, and the characters "Please return to left-handed" are displayed. As a result, the player can be made to correct the game content.

In the present embodiment, when the error display in FIG. 23A detects that the right-handed game has been executed (the ball has passed through the through gate 67) during the normal state in which the left-handed game is executed. However, among the states in which the normal state in which the left-handed game is executed is set as the game state, the ball passes through the through gate 67 immediately after the transition from the time saving state to the normal state. It is advisable to prevent the error display from being executed even if it is detected. Specifically, just before the transition from the time saving state to the normal state (just before the end of the time saving state), the fluctuation period of the started normal symbol and the electric power executed when the fluctuation (lottery) result is a hit. During the operation period of the accessory 640a or a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after the time saving state ends, it is preferable to set as a grace period during which the error display is not executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the error display from being executed even if the ball launched into the game area immediately before the end of the time saving state passes through the through gate 67 after the end of the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player who has been actively playing the game until immediately before the end of the time saving state from losing his or her willingness to play.

In the case of using such a configuration, if a ball enters the second entrance 640 during the above-mentioned grace period, it is preferable to execute a privilege effect different from the usual one, for example. , It is advisable to perform a revival effect indicating that the player's advantageous state (ream villa mode) has been revived. As a result, the player can be enthusiastically played until the end.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23B, the display contents displayed during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a in the time saving state will be described. FIG. 23B is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen displayed during the electric accessory opening operation (during long opening) in the time saving state. In the present embodiment, by continuously performing the right-handed game during the time saving state, if the electric accessory 640a is open for a long time, the ball can be immediately entered into the second entrance 640. The game board 13 is configured in. Further, the electric accessory 640a that is opened for a long time is opened for 3 seconds as the first opening period, then closed for 5 seconds, and then the opening period for 3 seconds (second opening period) is set again.

The display screen shown in FIG. 23B is displayed when the ball does not enter the second entry port 640 during the first opening period during the opening operation (long opening) of the electric accessory 640a. Is to be done. That is, if the right-handed game is normally performed, the first ball is reliably inserted into the second entrance 640 during the first opening period, even though the configuration of the game board 13 is used. If the ball does not enter the second entrance 640 during the opening period, it is possible that the normal right-handed game has not been executed. Therefore, a display for prompting the right-handed ball is displayed in the notification display area Dm7. Is displayed.

In the present embodiment, even if the right-handed game is started after seeing the content displayed in the notification display area Dm7, each period is such that the ball can be entered into the second entrance 640 during the second opening period. Is set. Specifically, it is designed so that the period from when the ball is launched in a right-handed game until the ball reaches the second entrance 640 (electric accessory 640a) is about 2 seconds. The closing period provided between the first opening period (3 seconds) and the second opening period (3 seconds) is set to be 5 seconds. Therefore, it is possible to put the ball into the second ball entry port 640 by performing the right-handed game within 3 seconds after the closing period is started.

In the present embodiment, the first opening period and the second opening period are set to the same number of seconds, and a means for measuring the elapsed period of the first opening period and a means for measuring the elapsed period of the second opening period are used. Although the standardization is attempted, for example, the second opening period may be set longer than the first opening period. As a result, based on the fact that the display for urging right-handed hitting is displayed in the notification display area Dm7, when the right-handed hitting game is performed, the ball can be more reliably entered into the second entrance 640. it can.

Further, in the present embodiment, the closing period is set to 5 seconds, but a longer closing time (for example, 30 seconds) may be set. In this case, as a condition for ending the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a, if the right-handed game is normally executed, the number of balls that can be entered into the second entrance 640 during the first opening period ( For example, one ball may be entered as an end condition. As a result, even if the closing period executed during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a (the closing period executed after the lapse of the first opening period) is lengthened, the player who normally plays the right-handed game Therefore, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a can be completed by the time the closing period is executed.

<About the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 24) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 24, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like use the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, drawing the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

For the jackpot lottery and the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot (and small hit) lottery and the jackpot type (big hit symbol) are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for selecting the stop type, the stop type counter C3 used for selecting the stop type, the small hit type counter C5 used for selecting the small hit type (small hit symbol), and the fluctuation pattern selection. The variable type counter CS1 and the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1 are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 53). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 is referred to as a first ball entry port 64 (left first ball entry port 64a, right first ball entry port 64b (hereinafter, when both are indicated, it is referred to as a first ball entry port 64). )) A special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a in which each counter value is stored and a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b in which each counter value is stored for winning the second entrance 640 are provided. There is. In the present embodiment, the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 are each provided with a maximum of four reserved balls, and a total of a maximum of eight reserved balls can be stored. Therefore, if the ball wins the first entry slot 64 during the period when the special symbol can be drawn, such as when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner or when the special symbol is not in the jackpot game, each counter value is changed to the special symbol. When the ball is stored in the 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the ball wins in the second entrance 640, each counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. After that, each counter value stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, and the first special symbol is variablely displayed (dynamic display). Various settings and control processes are executed. Similarly, each counter value stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Various settings and control processes are executed.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of reserved symbols (number of stored items) is set to 4 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the upper limit of the number of reserved symbols corresponding to each symbol is this. It is not limited to, and different values may be set, or only one special symbol may be reserved.

On the other hand, during the period when the lottery of the special symbol is impossible, such as during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the ball is at the first entrance 64 or When the second ball opening 640 is won, if the number of reserved balls for the winning ball opening (starting port) is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment), each counter value is acquired. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning ball opening. In addition, when the number of reserved balls for the winning ball opening is the upper limit value (4 pieces in this embodiment) or more, each counter value or the like is not acquired and the prize balls (5 pieces in this embodiment) are not acquired. Only the prize ball) is treated as an invalid ball paid out to the player.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is set to 4 for each of the 1st entry port 64 and the 2nd entry port 640, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is less than 4 (for example). It may be 3) or more than 4 (for example, 8). Further, a configuration in which an upper limit value is not provided may be used.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 24. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299), reaches the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 53).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the timing at which the ball wins the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is defined in the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot specified in 202a, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a hit in each game state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, the first random number table 202a is provided with a special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 used for the lottery of the first special symbol and a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 used for the lottery of the second special symbol. In the lottery of the first special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined to be a big hit. Further, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "1 to 3", and if it is "1 to 3", it is determined to be a small hit.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "1-299", and if it is "1-299", it is determined that it is a small hit.

Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol. For example, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of a big hit of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. As described above, there is one value of the first hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value "0" is stored in the first hit random number table 202a as described above. Since the total number of random numbers that are big hits is 1 while the total number of random numbers is 300, the probability of being a big hit of a special symbol is "1/300". Further, since the value of the first random number counter C1 which is a small hit in the first special symbol is three and the value of the first random number counter C1 which is a small hit in the second special symbol is 299, the first The probability of a small hit of a special symbol is "1/100", and the probability of a small hit of a second special symbol is "299/300".

Further, the value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit, the big hit type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 27A). The Rukoto. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG. 27 (a).

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the symbol is different from the symbol on which the reach is applied as the final stop symbol. Two stop (effect) patterns are selected: "out of reach" where the symbol stops (for example, in the range of 90 to 99) and "completely out of reach" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and when a ball enters the first entry port 64, the value is the value of the RAM 203. The special symbol 1 is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a. When the ball enters the second entry port 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a normal state and a time saving state, and the range of random value values set for each stop type that is out of order is changed according to the table. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed according to whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the time saving state, or the like.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines one variation pattern from the set variation pattern selection table. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter for determining the fluctuation time. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 53) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 29 and 30), which stores a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, is the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided inside.

A plurality of data tables for selecting a variation pattern are defined in the variation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 29 and 30). In this variation pattern table 202d, a plurality of variation pattern tables corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol are set, and the variation patterns corresponding to the game state and the winning / failing determination result are set for each. The table is set. Details of each variation pattern table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and the ball passes through either the left or right normal start port (through gate) 67. When it is detected, it is acquired and stored in the normal map execution area of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is defined in the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 26C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4. However, when it matches the value of the random number that is the hit specified in the second hit random number table 202c, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol (second symbol). For example, in this second hit random number table 202c, there are 12 random number values that are hit by ordinary symbols, and the range is "0 to 11". The total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 240, and the total number of random numbers that can be hit is 12, so the probability of hitting a normal symbol is "12/240 (1/20)). ".

Further, in the present embodiment, the normal state and the time saving state can be set as the game state, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol or the second when the normal symbol hits according to the game state. The opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the ball entry port 640 is different, and the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entry port 640 in the shorter time state than in the normal state. As a result, when the game state is the normal state, a game (left-handed game) aimed at the first ball entry port 64 (left first ball entry port 64a) is performed, and when the game state is the time saving state, the game is performed. , A game (right-handed game) aimed at the second entrance 640 can be performed.

In the normal state, when the ball passes through the through gate (normal entry port) 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for 4 seconds on the second symbol display device 83. To. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 11", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a is opened (short-opened) only for "0.1 seconds x 2 times". On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate (normal entry port) 67 in the time saving state, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for 3 seconds on the second symbol display device 83, and the acquired value of the random number counter C4 per second is obtained. If is in the range of "0 to 11", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). , The electric accessory 640a is opened (long open) only for "3 seconds x 2 times". In this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the normal electric accessory, and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed as long as the game playability is not impaired.

Although detailed description will be described later, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the value of the first random number counter C4 is acquired (the timing at which the lottery of ordinary symbols is executed) and the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 (The timing when the operation of the electric accessory 640a is set) is configured so that the electric accessory 640a is opened for a long time only when the time is shortened. For example, if the timing at which the value of the first random number counter C4 is acquired (the timing at which the lottery of ordinary symbols is executed) is in a time-saving state, the timing at which the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 ends. Even if (the timing when the operation of the electric accessory 640a is set) is in the normal state, the electric accessory 640a may be configured to be long-opened, or the value of the random number counter C4 per first is acquired. Even if the timing to be performed (the timing at which the lottery of the normal symbol is executed) is the normal state, the timing at which the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 ends (the timing at which the operation of the electric accessory 640a is set) is If the time is shortened, the electric accessory 640a may be configured to be opened for a long time.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see 53).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 24, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 53) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 52) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 51) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Next, the contents of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 30. FIG. 25A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the present embodiment. The ROM 202 is provided with at least a first hit random number table 202a, a first hit type selection table 202b, a second hit random number table 202c, a variation pattern table 202d, and a small hit type selection table 202e.

Next, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (c). As shown in FIG. 26A, the first random number table 202a includes a special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 used for the lottery of the first special symbol and a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 used for the lottery of the second special symbol. Is stipulated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 26 (b), the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is used for entering the ball into the first ball entry port 64 (left first ball entry port 64a, right first ball entry port 64b). Based on this, it is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a hit is set in the lottery of the first special symbol. In the lottery of the first special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "1 to 3", and if it is "1 to 3", it is determined to be a small hit. In addition, when it is determined that the value is "4 to 299", it is determined that the value is out of alignment.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a hit in the lottery of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second entry port 640. ) Is set in the table. In the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "1-299", and if it is "1-299", it is determined that it is a small hit.

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 26 (d)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 26 (d), regardless of the state of the game machine, when the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 0 to 11, it is considered as a normal symbol hit. It is judged.

If it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol) after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, and the electric accessory is displayed. The 640a is opened for a predetermined time.

Here, as described above in FIG. 2 and the like, the electric accessory 640a in the present embodiment operates in the front-rear direction of the game board 13 by the operation of a solenoid (one of the other solenoids 209z) (not shown). The electric accessory 640a acts to guide the ball to enter the second entry port 640 by advancing forward (opening operation). On the other hand, by retracting (closing) the ball backward, the ball is not guided to the second entry port 640 (does not enter).

The details will be described later, but in the case of the electric accessory 640a in the present embodiment, after the opening period of 3 seconds (first opening period) has elapsed, the closing period of 5 seconds has passed, and then the electric accessory 640a has been opened again for 3 seconds. When the opening operation (long opening) in which the period (second opening period) is set is executed and the time is not shortened (in the normal state), after the opening period of 0.1 seconds (first opening period) elapses, After the closing period of 0.1 seconds, the opening operation (short opening) in which the opening period of 0.1 seconds (second opening period) is set is executed again. As a result, it is possible to suppress a game in which a ball is attempted to enter the second entry port 640 even though the time is not shortened (in a normal state).

Further, the electric accessory 640a in the present embodiment is designed so that the end condition of the opening operation is satisfied when one ball enters the second entry port 640 and the opening operation is ended. As a result, it is possible to prevent a plurality of balls from entering the second entry port 640 by one opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. Further, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4, since the present embodiment has a configuration for restricting the balls flowing down the flow path that can enter the second entry port 640. Since it is possible to suppress a situation in which a plurality of balls enter the second entry port 640 at a time, a plurality of balls enter the second entry port 640 by one opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. It is possible to suppress the balling more.

Next, the details of the first type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 27 (a). 27 (a) to 27 (c) are schematic views schematically showing the contents of the first type selection table 202b.

In the first hit type selection table 202b, when the big hit of the first special symbol is won, or when the small hit of the first special symbol is won, the ball is in a specific area (V winning switch 650e3 (FIG. 5))) is passed, and the special symbol 1 jackpot selection table 202b1 for selecting the jackpot type and the jackpot of the second special symbol are won, or the small hit of the second special symbol is won and the result. It has a special symbol 2 jackpot selection table 202b2 for selecting a jackpot type when the ball passes through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3 (see FIG. 5)) during the small hit game (FIG. 27 (FIG. 5). a) See).

As shown in FIG. 27 (b), when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 79", the jackpot A (7R time saving jackpot) is selected at the time of the jackpot of the first special symbol, and "580". In the case of "~ 99", the jackpot D (16R time saving no jackpot) is selected. Further, at the time of the small hit of the first special symbol, the big hit type is selected corresponding to the small hit type described later. Specifically, when the small hit type is small hit A, big hit C (7R time saving with big hit) is selected, and when the small hit type is B, big hit D (2R time saving no big hit) is selected.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27 (c), at the time of the jackpot of the second special symbol, the jackpot E (15R time reduction available jackpot) regardless of the value of the first hit type counter C2 (when the value is "0 to 99"). ) Is selected. Further, at the time of the small hit of the second special symbol, the big hit type is selected corresponding to the small hit type described later. Specifically, when the small hit type is small hit C, the big hit F (5R time-saving big hit) is selected, when the small hit D, the big hit G (10R time-saving big hit) is selected, and when the small hit E is used. The jackpot E (15R time saving jackpot) is selected.

In the present embodiment, when "time saving big hit" is selected in each of the above-mentioned big hit types, the time saving state of "time saving number 1 time" is given after the big hit game is completed. However, the number of time reductions given after the end of the jackpot game is not limited to this, and two or more times may be set, and different number of time reduction states are selected based on the selected jackpot type. You may do so. Further, a different number of time saving states may be selected based on the selected jackpot type and the gaming state set at the time when the jackpot is won (the ball passes through a specific area), or "time saving" may be selected. A different number of time saving states may be selected based on the jackpot type selected at the time of winning the jackpot based on the number of times that "big hit" is continuously selected. With this configuration, in addition to the content of the jackpot game (number of rounds of the jackpot game, etc.), the privilege content (number of times in the time saving state) given after the end of the jackpot game can be different, and the game during the jackpot game. It is possible to enthusiastically play the game while expecting the person to be given what kind of privilege (time saving state) will be given after the jackpot game is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state is set by executing the variation of the special symbol for the preset number of time saving times, but the time saving ending condition different from the present embodiment is set. For example, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol may be measured, and different end conditions may be set for the fluctuation of each special symbol. Specifically, as the time saving end condition, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol is four times, or the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is one, and the time saving end condition is set, or the first special symbol and the first special symbol and the first. The total number of fluctuations with the two special symbols may be set to four, or the number of fluctuations with the second special symbol may be set to one as the time saving end condition.

In addition to that, every time the change of the special symbol is executed, a lottery for whether or not to end the time saving state may be executed, and the time saving state may be ended based on the lottery result, or the special symbol is predetermined. The time saving state may be terminated when the stop display is displayed with the symbol of. With this configuration, it is possible to set the timing at which the time saving state ends in a complicated manner, and the player during the time saving game is expected to continue the time saving state for a long time while playing the game. Can be done. In this case, it is preferable to configure the player to be able to notify at least a part of the period during which the time reduction does not end. As a result, it is possible for the player to grasp a part of the period during which the time reduction does not end, and there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind during that period.

Next, the contents of the small hit type selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 28. 28 (a) to 28 (c) are schematic views schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table 202e.

The small hit type selection table 202e is a special symbol 1 small hit selection table 202e1 for selecting a small hit type when the small hit of the first special symbol is won, and a small hit of the second special symbol. It has a special symbol 2 small hit selection table 202e2 for selecting a small hit type (see FIG. 28 (a)).

As shown in FIG. 28 (b), when the small hit of the first special symbol is won, the small hit type counter C5 is selected when the value is "0 to 10", and the small hit A (V can pass) is selected. In the case of "11 to 99", the small hit B (V cannot pass) is selected.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 28 (c), when the small hit of the second special symbol is won, the small hit type counter C5 is selected, and when the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "0-9", the small hit C (V can pass) is selected. In the case of "10 to 24", the small hit D (V passable) is selected, and in the case of "25 to 99", the small hit E (V passable) is selected.

In the present embodiment, the operations of the V inlet solenoid 209a and the flow path solenoid 209c of the second variable winning device 650 are set according to the small hit type. Specifically, in the small hit game by the small hits A and C to E, the flow path solenoid 209c of the second variable winning device 650 is operating, and the ball can enter the special discharge flow path 650e2. There is. On the other hand, in the small hit game by the small hit B, the flow path solenoid 209c of the second variable winning device 650 is not operating. The ball cannot enter the special discharge flow path 650e2. That is, the small hits A and C to E are small hits that can be given a big hit game by passing the ball through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3) after that, and the small hit B is a small hit that is not given a big hit. ..

Further, in the small hit game by the small hits A and B (the small hit type selected by the small hit winning of the first special symbol), the V inlet solenoid 209a operates so that the opening / closing door 650f is opened for a short period of time (FIG. 10). (See), in the small hit game by small hits C to E (small hit type selected by the small hit winning of the second special symbol), the V inlet solenoid 209a operates so that the opening / closing door 650f is opened for a long period of time (Fig.). 11). That is, the small hits A and B are small hits in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the second variable winning device 650 during the small hit game, and the small hits C to E are the second variable winning devices 650 during the small hit game. It is a small hit that makes it easy for the ball to enter.

In this control example, the type of big hit to be given after that is determined according to the type of small hit, and the big hit given after small hit A is big hit C (7R time saving big hit), and the small hit B The jackpot given later is the jackpot D (2R time saving no jackpot), the jackpot given after the small hit C is the jackpot F (5R time saving big hit), and the jackpot given after the small hit D is the jackpot G (10R). It is configured so that the jackpot given after the small hit E is the jackpot E (15R time-saving jackpot).

In this control example, the type of big hit to be given after that is determined according to the type of small hit, but as another specification, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit. Also, the type of jackpot is determined by the jackpot selection table (only the jackpot right is acquired), and the jackpot that acquired the right earlier is executed when the ball passes through the V winning switch 650e3 in the subsequent small hit game. You may. By doing so, the player can select a small hit through which the V winning switch 650e3 is passed, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, even if a predetermined lottery is executed based on the ball passing through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3) during the small hit game, and the big hit type is determined based on the lottery result. Good. As a result, the content of the big hit game executed can be different depending on the timing when the ball passes through the specific area, so that the player will enthusiastically perform the small hit game, and the interest of the game can be improved. it can.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. The fluctuation pattern table 202d is a data table used for determining the display mode (variation time) of the fluctuation pattern, and the display mode is defined for each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The variable pattern table 202d defines a plurality of different tables corresponding to the types of special symbols, lottery results, and game states.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29 (a), the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1, the special figure 1 off (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2, and the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation pattern table 202d3 And, at least, the variation pattern table 202d4 for special figure 1 time reduction and the variation pattern table 202d5 for special figure 2 are defined.

First, the variation pattern table 202d for special figure 1 jackpot will be described with reference to FIG. 29 (b). The special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 selects the variation pattern (variation time) when the jackpot is won from the variation patterns (fluctuation time) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the normal state. A random value (counter value of the fluctuation type counter value CS1) for determining the type (variation time) of the fluctuation pattern is defined in the table.

Specifically, when the jackpot is determined as the stop type, the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "0 to 50" as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the fluctuation pattern of "51 to 179" is set. A variation pattern of super reach (60 seconds) is associated with the range, and a variation pattern of various special reach (90 seconds) is associated with the range of "180 to 198".

Next, with reference to FIG. 29 (c), the contents of the variation pattern table 202d2 for the deviation of the special figure 1 (normal) will be described. This special figure 1 deviation pattern table 202d2 shows the case where the lottery result of the special figure 1 is out of the fluctuation patterns (variation time) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the normal state. A random value (counter value of the fluctuation type counter value CS1) for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) in the above is specified.

Specifically, when complete deviation is determined as the stop type, a variation pattern of short deviation (7 seconds) is associated with the range of "0 to 98" as the value of the variation type counter CS1, and "99 to". A variation pattern of long deviation (10 seconds) is associated with the range of "198". In addition, when the lottery of the first special symbol results in a loss and the loss reach is determined as the stop type, various normal reach (30 seconds) are associated with the range of "0 to 149" as the value of the variation type counter CS1. , "150 to 197" are associated with various super reach (60 seconds), and "198" is associated with various special reach (90 seconds).

Next, with reference to FIG. 29 (d), the contents of the special figure 1 small hit variation pattern table 202d3 will be described. The special figure 1 small hit variation pattern table 202d3 is a first special symbol in a normal state. Of the fluctuation patterns (fluctuation time) of the special figure 1), a random number value (counter value of the fluctuation type counter value CS1) for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) when the lottery result of the special figure 1 is a small hit. ) Is specified.

Specifically, when the small hit is determined as the stop type, various super reach (60 seconds) are performed regardless of the small hit type (small hit A, small hit B) and the value of the variable type counter CS1. It is associated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, various fluctuation patterns are selected according to each stop type based on the lottery result of the first special symbol, and in particular, the fluctuation time. The long (for example, 90 seconds) fluctuation pattern is set so that it can be easily selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit. Therefore, isn't the player winning the jackpot when the variable display continues for a long period of time? I will play the game while expecting. Therefore, the game result can be predicted by the set period length of the fluctuation pattern, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern table 202d4 for special drawing 1 time reduction will be described with reference to FIG. 30 (a). In the special figure 1 time saving fluctuation pattern table 202d42, a random number value (counter value of the fluctuation type counter value CS1) for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the time saving state is obtained. It is stipulated.

Specifically, a fluctuation pattern of 150 seconds is associated regardless of the determined stop type and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

FIG. 30B is a diagram showing the contents of the variation pattern table 202d5 for special figure 2. The variation pattern table 202d5 for special figure 2 defines a random number value for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) in the normal state and the time saving state.

Specifically, when the determined stop type is a big hit, a short jackpot (7 seconds) is set regardless of the value of the variable type counter CS1, and when the determined stop type is a small hit, the variable type. Short and small hits (2 seconds) are associated regardless of the value of the counter CS1.

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 25 (b). FIG. 25B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 25 (b), the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol. 2 Hold ball number counter 203e, Normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f, Time saving medium counter 203g, Big hit start flag 203h, Big hit medium flag 203i, Small hit start flag 203j, Small hit medium flag 203k, Big hit type storage area 203m when passing V , V flag 203n, storage release flag 203p, release counter 203qa, time saving medium hit flag 203q, and other memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area), and each of these areas has a random number counter per first. Each value of C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type counter C5 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first entry port 64 (starting winning), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and C5 are acquired, and the acquired data are held for four times. Among the vacant areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old winning prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest winning prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. A determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) whose area number is 1 smaller. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the reserved area (reserved second area to reserved fourth area) in which the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. In the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, each counter value acquired based on the start winning to the second entry port 640 is stored. Since the method of storing the counter value is the same as that of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Similar to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Area) and. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, and the acquired data is vacant in four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Among the existing areas, the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the winning order is maintained and the data corresponding to the winning is stored. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b, A shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding area is packed into the holding area one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry (starting prize) into the first entry port 64. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the display device 81 (variable display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. It is added one by one (see S704 in FIG. 43). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S210 in FIG. 38).

The value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d (holding number N1 of the variation display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the hold ball number command (see S211 in FIG. 38). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 holds the fluctuation display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is increased to the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if there is a deviation from the number of reserved balls in the actual held fluctuation display, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of reserved balls command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the hold ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry (starting prize) into the second entry port 640. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the display device 81 (variable display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the second entry port 640 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. It is added one by one (see S710 in FIG. 43). On the other hand, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 in FIG. 38). The value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command, similarly to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f sets the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the balls at the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4 ( See S1104 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S905 in FIG. 45).

When the sphere passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved sphere counter 203f (the number of times the variable display is held M in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. , The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S1105 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S1103: No in FIG. 47). ).

The time saving medium counter 203g is a counter for counting the remaining time saving period (number of fluctuations of the special symbol) in the time saving state (time saving state) of the normal symbol. At the end of the jackpot game in which the jackpot type is other than "big hits B, D" (that is, "big hits A, C, EG"), the time-saving / medium counter 203g is set to 1 (see S1815 in FIG. 54). .. That is, in the present embodiment, when the time saving state is given after the big hit game, one time saving state is given.

The jackpot start flag 203h is a flag used for determining whether or not it is the jackpot start timing. The jackpot start flag 203h is set to on when the lottery result is a jackpot in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 38) (see S219 in FIG. 38), and the jackpot start timing in the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 54). It is referred to for determining whether or not (see S1801 in FIG. 54), and is set to off when it is determined that the jackpot start timing is in the jackpot control process (see S1802 in FIG. 54). As a result, it is possible to execute the process according to the jackpot start timing. Although not shown in each of the above-mentioned control examples, the jackpot start timing is determined in the same manner.

The jackpot flag 203i is a flag used to determine whether or not a jackpot is being played, that is, whether or not a jackpot game is being executed. The jackpot middle flag 203i is set to on when the lottery result is a jackpot in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 38), similarly to the jackpot start flag 203h described above (see S219 in FIG. 38). Then, in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 54), it is referred to in order to determine whether or not the jackpot is in progress (see S1805 in FIG. 54), and in the jackpot control process, it is determined that it is the timing of the end of the jackpot. If so, it is set to off (see S1813 in FIG. 54).

The small hit start flag 203j is a flag used for determining whether or not it is the start timing of the small hit. The small hit start flag 203j is set to ON in the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 42) executed when the lottery result is determined to be a small hit in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38). (See S610 in FIG. 42). Then, it is referred to in the small hit control process (see FIG. 55) to determine whether or not it is the start timing of the small hit (see S1901 in FIG. 55), and it is the start timing of the small hit in the small hit control process. Is set to off (see S1902 in FIG. 55).

The small hit medium flag 203k is a flag used to determine whether or not a small hit is being made, that is, whether or not a small hit game is being executed. The small hit medium flag 203k is set to ON in the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 42) in the same manner as the small hit start flag 203j described above (see S610 in FIG. 42). Then, it is referred to in the small hit control process (see FIG. 55) to determine whether or not the small hit is in progress (S1906 in FIG. 55), and it is determined in the small hit control process that it is the end timing of the small hit. If so, it is set to off (S1911 in FIG. 55).

The big hit type storage area 203m when passing through V is an area for storing the big hit type corresponding to the small hit type of the winning small hit when the small hit is won, and the ball is a specific area during the small hit game state. Contains the types of jackpots that are executed based on passing through. In the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 42), the jackpot type corresponding to the winning small hit type is set in the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203m (see S608 in FIG. 42), and the V-passing process (see FIG. 50). ), The set jackpot type is read (see S1401 in FIG. 50), and the corresponding V flag is set to on (see S1401 in FIG. 50).

The V flag 203n is a flag for memorizing that the ball has passed the V winning switch 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650, and sets the jackpot type based on the value of the V flag 203n at the end of the small hit game. It is a thing. This V flag 203n is set based on the value of the jackpot type when passing V in the V passing process (see FIG. 50) (S1402 in FIG. 50), and is referred to in the small hit ending process (S2003 and S2004 in FIG. 56). It is then set to off (S2006 in FIG. 56).

The storage release flag 203p is a flag used to indicate the period for releasing (opening) the storage valve 750a of the storage device 750 provided in the pachinko machine 10, and is the storage of the storage device 750 when set to ON. When the state is released and set to off, the storage device 750 is in the storage state. This storage release flag 203p is set to ON (S1804 in FIG. 54) when it is determined in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 54) that it is the start timing of the jackpot (S1801: YES in FIG. 54), and the storage device. It is referred to in the control process (see S2202 of FIG. 58), and is set to off when the value of the release counter 203Pa reaches the upper limit value (25000) (see S2205 of FIG. 58) (see S2205 of FIG. 58). S2208). That is, in the present embodiment, the storage device 750 is released (the storage valve 750a is opened) at the timing when the jackpot game is started, and when a predetermined period (10 seconds) has elapsed, the storage device is in the storage state (storage valve). 750a is configured to close). As a result, it is possible to increase the benefits given to the player when the jackpot is won.

As a configuration for changing the state (storage state, release state) of the storage device 750, a configuration other than the present embodiment may be used. For example, a jackpot for shifting the storage device 750 to the release state and a storage device 750. The jackpot that does not shift to the release state may be set according to the selected jackpot type, and a plurality of winning openings (for example, the first specific winning opening 65 and the second specific winning opening 650) are predetermined. When the jackpot games that are opened in the order of the two are executed, the storage device 750 may be shifted to the released state at the timing when the specific winning opening is opened.

Further, regarding the configuration in which the storage device 750 is shifted from the released state to the stored state (the termination condition of the released state), in the present embodiment, the released state is terminated when 10 seconds have passed after the transition to the released state. Even if the ball is not stored in the storage device 750, the ball can pass through the storage device 750, but the period in which the storage device is released is shortened (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the storage device 750 Only the stored spheres may be allowed to pass through the storage device 750. As a result, the player can enthusiastically play a game in order to store the ball in the storage device 750 by the time the release condition (big hit) of the storage device 750 is satisfied.

The release counter 203pa is a counter for measuring the period for releasing (opening) the storage valve 750a of the storage device 750. The release counter 203pa is set to "1" when it is determined in the storage device control process (see FIG. 58) that the storage release flag 203p is set to ON (see S2202 in FIG. 58) (FIG. 58). (See S2204), the value is incremented by 1 each time the storage device control process is executed (see S2206 in FIG. 58). Then, it is determined whether the value of the counter has reached "25000" (see 2205 in FIG. 58), and based on the determination result, the variable operation of the storage valve 750a is controlled, and the storage valve 750a is variably controlled to the closed state. Then, the value of the release counter 203Pa is set to "0" (see S2209 in FIG. 58).

The time saving middle hit flag 203q is a flag for indicating in which game state the lottery of ordinary symbols (general drawing lottery) for which the lottery result is a hit was executed, and when the lottery is executed during the time saving state, Set to on. The time saving middle hit flag 203q is referred to when setting the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a executed based on the hit of the normal drawing lottery.

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a large opening solenoid for closing or opening the first specific winning opening 65a, and the like. A solenoid 209 including a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

Further, various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch (FIGS. 7, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115 are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is connected to the MPU 201. Various processes are executed based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIGS. 7, 122) circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 51) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 is an output of voice in a voice output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device 227 (decorative lamp 227a, transmission lamp 227b, other lamp 227c, etc.), and fluctuation. It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display effect (variable display). The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the content of the effect, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. FIG. 31A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 31A, the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a and an effect state selection table 222b.

In the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, the voice lamp control device 113 is based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110, and the rough fluctuation content (variation time, fluctuation type (reach, deviation, etc.) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command) is shown. ) To determine more detailed fluctuations. Thereby, a wider variety of variation modes can be determined. Here, one of a plurality of types of variation mode is determined by lottery with respect to the rough variation content instructed by the main control device 110.

The effect state selection table 222b is a table for selecting an effect state for setting a display mode of the effect image (third symbol image, reserved symbol image, background image, etc.) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , One of the six production states is selected based on the game state of the pachinko machine 10, the establishment state of various flags, and the lottery result of the special symbol or the normal symbol.

Here, the contents of the effect state selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 32 (a). FIG. 32A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the effect state selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 32 (a), the effect state selection table 222b shows the established state (whether it is set to on or off) of the consecutive villa flag 223i, the normal figure valid flag 223q, the pseudo effect flag 223r, and the special 2 fluctuation flag 223s. It is configured so that any one of the effect states "1" to "6" is selected depending on whether it is set to.

Specifically, in the state where the flag 223i in the consecutive villas is set to off, when the pseudo effect flag 223r is also set to off, the effect state "1" is selected. On the other hand, when the pseudo effect flag 223r is set to on, the effect state "2" is selected. In addition, when the special figure 2 fluctuation flag 223s is set to off in the state where the continuous villa middle flag 223i is set to on and the normal figure valid flag 223q is set to off, the effect state "3" is set. Be selected. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 fluctuation flag 223s is set to ON, the effect state “4” is selected. Then, when the continuous villa middle flag 223i is set to on and the normal figure valid flag 223q is set to on, the effect state “5” is selected. In the state where the effect state "5" is selected, the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol (special figure 1) being executed and the fluctuation stop timing of the normal symbol (normal figure) are set at predetermined intervals (special figure). When the fluctuation stop timing of the normal figure is earlier than the fluctuation stop timing of 1 and each fluctuation stop timing is within 2 seconds), the effect state "6" is selected.

Here, the relationship between the effect state selected by the effect state selection table 222b and the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 32 (b). FIG. 32B is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between each effect state selected by the effect state selection table 222b and the third symbol and the reserved symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It should be noted that the target whose display mode is changed depending on the set effect state is not only the above-mentioned third symbol and the reserved symbol, but also various effect images displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is variable to the production image corresponding to, but the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 32 (b), the third symbol (main symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 according to the effect state selected by the effect state selection table 222b (see FIG. 9). And the symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the main reserved symbol (see FIG. 9) displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 are different. It is stipulated in. In this way, by making the symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, ordinary symbol) corresponding to the main symbol and the main reserved symbol different depending on the production state, the pachinko machine 10 having complicated playability is mainly used. The result of the main game can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner only by letting the player grasp the symbol and the main reserved symbol.

Specifically, when the effect state "1" is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol (special diagram 1) becomes the main symbol, and is reserved to indicate the number of reserved memories of the special diagram 1. The symbol becomes the main reserved symbol and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 9). The effect state "1" is selected when the game state is the normal state in which the left-handed game is being executed.

Next, when the effect state "2" is selected, the pseudo symbol for the effect that does not correspond to any of the symbols (special figure 1, special figure 2, normal figure) becomes the main symbol (pseudo main symbol Dmb). , It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so that none of the reserved symbols is displayed on the main reserved symbol (see FIG. 22 (b)). The effect state "2" is selected when the game state is the normal state and the small hit game of the special figure 1 is executed.

When this effect state "2" is selected, the pseudo main symbol Dmb displayed as the main symbol has a variable display (see FIG. 22 (a)) and a stop display (see FIG. 22 (a)) like the other main symbols. (B)) is executed, and in the small hit game of special figure 1, the pseudo main symbol Dmb is determined based on the timing at which the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is opened. The display is controlled so that the same symbol is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 22 (b)). As a result, the player is shown a small stop display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb. It is possible to notify the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a during the winning game, and it makes us think that the privilege of opening the second specific winning opening 650a is given as if the pseudo main symbol Dmb fluctuates (lottery). be able to.

Further, the number of times the pseudo main symbol Dmb is variablely displayed is set to be at least more than the number of times the second specific winning opening 650a is opened during the small hit game, and corresponds to the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a. The variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb that is not displayed is controlled so as to be stopped and displayed in a display mode other than the predetermined display mode (for example, a mode in which non-identical symbols are stopped and displayed (so-called loose stitches)). ing. As a result, the pseudo main symbol Dmb can always be displayed in a variable manner regardless of the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a during the small hit game, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, when the effect state "2" is selected, the main reserved symbol is not displayed, so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the fluctuation of the pseudo main symbol Dmb and the increase / decrease relationship of the reserved symbol. That is, since the pseudo main symbol Dmb is not a symbol corresponding to each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, normal figure) that is actually stored and stored, when the variation display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb is started. , The number of any of the reserved symbols (special figure 1 reserved symbol, special figure 2 reserved symbol, general figure reserved symbol) does not increase or decrease. Therefore, in the effect state "2" in which the pseudo main symbol Dmb is variablely displayed, any of the reserved symbols (special figure 1 reserved symbol, special figure 2 reserved symbol, normal symbol reserved symbol) is displayed as the main reserved symbol. Then, when the main symbol starts to fluctuate, the main reserved symbol does not decrease, and a situation occurs in which the player feels uncomfortable. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the effect state "2" is selected, the main reserved symbol is not displayed, so that the above-mentioned situation can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, when the effect state "2" is selected, the main reserved symbol is not displayed, but other configurations may be used, for example, a pseudo main symbol. The pseudo main hold symbol corresponding to Dmb may be displayed. In this case, it is advisable to increase or decrease the number of pseudo main reserved symbols in correspondence with the variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb. As a result, it is possible to execute the variable display of the pseudo main symbol without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, when displaying the pseudo main hold symbol, it is preferable to set the number and display mode of the pseudo main hold symbol to be displayed based on the type of the small hit game to be executed. With this configuration, the content of this small hit game is predicted to the player by the pseudo main reserved symbol displayed as the main reserved symbol at the timing when the small hit game in which the effect state "2" is selected is started. It becomes possible to perform a small hit game while having fun.

Further, the stop display mode of the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the timing when the second specific winning opening 650a is opened is the display mode in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. The display is controlled so that the type of the same symbol that is stopped and displayed is different based on the content of the privilege given by the ball. Specifically, the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a, which is opened at the timing when the ball entering the second specific winning opening 650a can pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3). The stop display mode of the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a which is set to the display mode in which the specific same number is stopped and displayed (for example, "777") and is opened at other timings. The stop display mode is a display mode different from the specific same number (for example, "444"). As a result, the pseudo main symbol Dmb is stopped and displayed with the same number, so that the player is notified of the opening timing to the second specific winning opening 650a, and further, the privilege given depending on the type of the number displayed is stopped. The content can be notified (suggested). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect using the pseudo main symbol Dmb.

Next, when the effect state "3" is selected, the pseudo symbol for the effect that does not correspond to any of the symbols (special figure 1, special figure 2, normal figure) becomes the main symbol (pseudo main symbol Dmb). As the main reserved symbol, the reserved symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the main reserved symbol (see FIG. 16B). The effect state "3" is selected when the game state is a time saving state and the small hit game is executed.

Next, when the effect state "4" is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 becomes the main symbol (special figure 2 main symbol Dmd), and the main reserved symbol is the hold corresponding to the special figure 2. The symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the main reserved symbol (see FIG. 18A). The effect state "4" is selected when the game state is the normal state and the variation of the special figure 2 is executed.

Next, when the effect state "5" is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the normal figure becomes the main symbol (general symbol main symbol Dmc), and the reserved symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 becomes the main reserved symbol. 3 Displayed on the symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 15B). The effect state "5" is selected when the game state is the time saving state and the drawing variation in which the lottery and the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a can be executed is executed during the time saving state.

When the effect state "6" is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 becomes the main symbol (special figure 1 main symbol Dma), and the reserved symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 becomes the third main reserved symbol. It is displayed on the symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 17A). The effect state "6" is selected when the game state is a time-saving state and the normal figure change is started when the remaining change period of the special figure 1 during the change is within 2 seconds.

Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. FIG. 31A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 31A, the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a and an effect state selection table 222b.

In the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, the voice lamp control device 113 is based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110, and the rough fluctuation content (variation time, fluctuation type (reach, deviation, etc.) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command) is shown. ) To determine more detailed fluctuations. Thereby, a wider variety of variation modes can be determined. Here, one of a plurality of types of variation mode is determined by lottery with respect to the rough variation content instructed by the main control device 110.

The effect state selection table 222b is a table for selecting an effect state for setting a display mode of the effect image (third symbol image, reserved symbol image, background image, etc.) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , One of the six production states is selected based on the game state of the pachinko machine 10, the establishment state of various flags, and the lottery result of the special symbol or the normal symbol.

Here, the contents of the effect state selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 32 (a). FIG. 32A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the effect state selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 32 (a), the effect state selection table 222b shows the established state (whether it is set to ON or not) of the continuous villa middle flag 223i, the normal figure valid flag 223q, the pseudo effect flag 223r, and the special figure 2 fluctuation flag 223s. It is configured so that any one of the effect states "1" to "6" is selected depending on whether it is set to off).

Specifically, in the state where the flag 223i in the consecutive villas is set to off, when the pseudo effect flag 223r is also set to off, the effect state "1" is selected. On the other hand, when the pseudo effect flag 223r is set to on, the effect state "2" is selected. In addition, when the special figure 2 fluctuation flag 223s is set to off in the state where the continuous villa middle flag 223i is set to on and the normal figure valid flag 223q is set to off, the effect state "3" is set. Be selected. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 fluctuation flag 223s is set to ON, the effect state “4” is selected. Then, when the continuous villa middle flag 223i is set to on and the normal figure valid flag 223q is set to on, the effect state “5” is selected. In the state where the effect state "5" is selected, the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol (special figure 1) being executed and the fluctuation stop timing of the normal symbol (normal figure) are set at predetermined intervals (special figure). When the fluctuation stop timing of the normal figure is earlier than the fluctuation stop timing of 1 and each fluctuation stop timing is within 2 seconds), the effect state "6" is selected.

Here, the relationship between the effect state selected by the effect state selection table 222b and the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 32 (b). FIG. 32B is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between each effect state selected by the effect state selection table 222b and the third symbol and the reserved symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It should be noted that the target whose display mode is changed depending on the set effect state is not only the above-mentioned third symbol and the reserved symbol, but also various effect images displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is variable to the production image corresponding to, but the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 32 (b), the third symbol (main symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 according to the effect state selected by the effect state selection table 222b (see FIG. 9). And the symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, ordinary symbol) corresponding to the main reserved symbol (see FIG. 9) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are defined to be different. In this way, by making the symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, ordinary symbol) corresponding to the main symbol and the main reserved symbol different depending on the production state, the pachinko machine 10 having complicated playability is mainly used. The result of the main game can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner only by letting the player grasp the symbol and the main reserved symbol.

Specifically, when the effect state "1" is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol (special diagram 1) becomes the main symbol, and is reserved to indicate the number of reserved memories of the special diagram 1. The symbol becomes the main reserved symbol and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 9). The effect state "1" is selected when the game state is the normal state in which the left-handed game is being executed.

Next, when the effect state "2" is selected, the pseudo symbol for the effect that does not correspond to any of the symbols (special figure 1, special figure 2, normal figure) becomes the main symbol (pseudo main symbol Dmb). , It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so that none of the reserved symbols is displayed on the main reserved symbol (see FIG. 22 (b)). The effect state "2" is selected when the game state is the normal state and the small hit game of the special figure 1 is executed.

When this effect state "2" is selected, the pseudo main symbol Dmb displayed as the main symbol has a variable display (see FIG. 22 (a)) and a stop display (see FIG. 22 (a)) like the other main symbols. (B)) is executed, and in the small hit game of special figure 1, the pseudo main symbol Dmb is determined based on the timing at which the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is opened. The display is controlled so that the same symbol is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 22 (b)). As a result, the player is shown a small stop display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb. It is possible to notify the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a during the winning game, and it makes us think that the privilege of opening the second specific winning opening 650a is given as if the pseudo main symbol Dmb fluctuates (lottery). be able to.

Further, the number of times the pseudo main symbol Dmb is variablely displayed is set to be at least more than the number of times the second specific winning opening 650a is opened during the small hit game, and corresponds to the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a. The variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb that is not displayed is controlled so as to be stopped and displayed in a display mode other than the predetermined display mode (for example, a mode in which non-identical symbols are stopped and displayed (so-called loose stitches)). ing. As a result, the pseudo main symbol Dmb can always be displayed in a variable manner regardless of the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a during the small hit game, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, when the effect state "2" is selected, the main reserved symbol is not displayed, so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the fluctuation of the pseudo main symbol Dmb and the increase / decrease relationship of the reserved symbol. That is, since the pseudo main symbol Dmb is not a symbol corresponding to each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, normal figure) that is actually stored and stored, when the variation display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb is started. , The number of any of the reserved symbols (special figure 1 reserved symbol, special figure 2 reserved symbol, general figure reserved symbol) does not increase or decrease. Therefore, in the effect state "2" in which the pseudo main symbol Dmb is variablely displayed, any of the reserved symbols (special figure 1 reserved symbol, special figure 2 reserved symbol, normal symbol reserved symbol) is displayed as the main reserved symbol. Then, when the main symbol starts to fluctuate, the main reserved symbol does not decrease, and a situation occurs in which the player feels uncomfortable. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the effect state "2" is selected, the main reserved diagram is not displayed, so that the above-mentioned situation can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, when the effect state "2" is selected, the main reserved symbol is not displayed, but other configurations may be used, for example, a pseudo main symbol. The pseudo main hold symbol corresponding to Dmb may be displayed. In this case, it is advisable to increase or decrease the number of pseudo main reserved symbols in correspondence with the variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb. As a result, it is possible to execute the variable display of the pseudo main symbol without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, when displaying the pseudo main hold symbol, it is preferable to set the number and display mode of the pseudo main hold symbol to be displayed based on the type of the small hit game to be executed. With this configuration, the content of this small hit game is predicted to the player by the pseudo main reserved symbol displayed as the main reserved symbol at the timing when the small hit game in which the effect state "2" is selected is started. It becomes possible to perform a small hit game while having fun.

Further, the stop display mode of the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the timing when the second specific winning opening 650a is opened is the display mode in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. The display is controlled so that the type of the same symbol that is stopped and displayed is different based on the content of the privilege given by the ball. Specifically, the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a, which is opened at the timing when the ball entering the second specific winning opening 650a can pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3). The stop display mode of the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a which is set to the display mode in which the specific same number is stopped and displayed (for example, "777") and is opened at other timings. The stop display mode is a display mode different from the specific same number (for example, "444"). As a result, the pseudo main symbol Dmb is stopped and displayed with the same number, so that the player is notified of the opening timing to the second specific winning opening 650a, and further, the privilege given depending on the type of the number displayed is stopped. The content can be notified (suggested). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect using the pseudo main symbol Dmb.

Next, when the effect state "3" is selected, the pseudo symbol for the effect that does not correspond to any of the symbols (special figure 1, special figure 2, normal figure) becomes the main symbol (pseudo main symbol Dmb). As the main reserved symbol, the reserved symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the main reserved symbol (see FIG. 16B). The effect state "3" is selected when the game state is a time saving state and the small hit game is executed.

Next, when the effect state "4" is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 becomes the main symbol (special figure 2 main symbol Dmd), and the main reserved symbol is the hold corresponding to the special figure 2. The symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the main reserved symbol (see FIG. 18A). The effect state "4" is selected when the game state is the normal state and the variation of the special figure 2 is executed.

Next, when the effect state "5" is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the normal figure becomes the main symbol (general symbol main symbol Dmc), and the reserved symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 becomes the main reserved symbol. 3 Displayed on the symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 15B). The effect state "5" is selected when the game state is the time saving state and the drawing variation in which the lottery and the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a can be executed is executed during the time saving state.

When the effect state "6" is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 becomes the main symbol (special figure 1 main symbol Dma), and the reserved symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 becomes the third main reserved symbol. It is displayed on the symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 16B). The effect state "6" is selected when the game state is a time-saving state and the normal figure change is started when the remaining change period of the special figure 1 during the change is within 2 seconds.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 31 (b). FIG. 31B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a special symbol winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223c, a special symbol variation start flag 223d, and a stop type selection flag 223e. The effect counter 223f, the time saving medium flag 223g, the time saving remaining period storage area 223h, the consecutive villa middle flag 223i, the fluctuation time counter 223j, the state storage area 223k, the effect state storage area 223m, and the special 2 hold flag 223n. , Special 2 hold upper limit flag 223p, normal map valid flag 223q, pseudo-effect flag 223r, special 2 fluctuation flag 223s, normal map prize information storage area 223t, and normal map fluctuation start flag 223u. At least the flag 223v, the privilege effect execution flag 223w, the end effect execution flag 223x, and the other memory area 223z are provided.

The prize information storage area 223a for special symbols has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas has a special symbol (first special symbol and). The winning information of the second special symbol) is stored respectively. Based on the information stored in the special drawing winning information storage area 223a, the lottery result of the reserved ball or the like can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 before the start of fluctuation.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are fluctuation effects (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and are main controls. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation effect held in the device 110 up to 4 times for each type of special symbol. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b corresponds to the number of reserved balls of the variable effect based on the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c corresponds to the second special symbol (special symbol 1). 2) Corresponds to the number of reserved balls for variable production based on the lottery.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Cannot get the value of. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c. , The number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, the variable display is suspended due to the entry into the first entry port 64 (left first entry opening 64a, right first entry opening 64b) and the second entry opening 640. After the addition or subtraction when the number of balls is added, or when the main controller 110 executes the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) and the number of reserved balls is subtracted. A hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d or the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 hold ball number command from the hold ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c (see S3207 in FIG. 61). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The values can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the control device 110.

The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c after storage, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 hold ball of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the value of the number counter 223c is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are synchronized with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. , Its value is changed. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 also changes while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere counter 203e of the main control device 110. Can be made to. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

In the present embodiment, the variable display (right of the symbol lottery) can be reserved (upper limit of 4) for the ordinary symbol as well as the special symbol described above, and the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls of the main control device 110 is set. When a command set when the value of the counter 203f is increased or decreased is received, a normal symbol reserved ball count counter (not shown) is provided as a counter for increasing or decreasing the value according to the content of the received command. However, regarding the processing executed in the voice lamp control device 113 and the processing executed in the display control device 114, only the target command for the above-mentioned special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is different. Therefore, the detailed description thereof will be omitted. The value of the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is used, for example, when the third symbol display device 81 displays the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol. The details of the case where the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are the same as the case where the number of reserved balls of the special symbol described above is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the display control device 114 receives each hold ball number command for display, it is received in a predetermined area (subordinate hold symbol display area Dn4 to Dn6 (see FIG. 9A)). A display is made to indicate the number of reserved balls corresponding to the command, and based on the received display effect status command, the reserved number of balls command to be displayed in the main reserved symbol display area is selected and held as the main reserved symbol. A display is made to indicate the number of balls. With this configuration, the display synchronized with the increase / decrease in the number of reserved balls set by the main control device 110 can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player should be notified in the current production state. The number of reserved balls of the symbol can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the present embodiment, the display control device 114 sets the number of reserved balls for each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, and normal figure) to a predetermined area (subordinate reserved symbol display area Dn4 to Dn6 (FIG. 9 (FIG. 9)). It is configured to be displayed in a))), and a part of it can be displayed as a main reserved symbol. However, the display method of the reserved symbol is not limited to this, and for example, each symbol (special figure 1) is displayed. , Special figure 2, normal figure), when the hold ball number command is received, the hold symbol (main hold symbol) to be displayed in the main hold symbol display area based on the received display effect state command, and the subordinate A hold symbol (subordinate hold symbol) to be displayed in the hold symbol display area is discriminated, and based on the determination result, the third symbol display device 81 is placed on hold corresponding to each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, normal figure). The design may be displayed.

The variation start flag 223d for the special figure is turned on when the variation pattern command (for the special figure) transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S3304 in FIG. 62), and the variation display on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It is turned off when the setting is made (see S3702 in FIG. 66). When the special figure variation start flag 223d is turned on, the special figure display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command (see S3706 in FIG. 66).

The special figure display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221. Then, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving the special figure display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 displays the variation of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the special figure display variation pattern command. As you can see, the display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

In the present embodiment, as the variation pattern command for displaying the special figure, the variation pattern command for displaying the special figure 1 corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and the variation for displaying the special figure 2 corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol are used. The pattern command is configured to be configurable. In the display control device 114, the variation pattern corresponding to the type of the received variation pattern command for special figure display (special figure 1 display variation pattern command, special figure 2 display variation pattern command) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to do.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, it is set in a predetermined area (design display areas Dn1 to Dn3 of the second display area Dn (see FIG. 9A)). A symbol string (variation pattern) corresponding to the received display variation pattern command is displayed, and a symbol (main symbol) to be displayed in the first display area Dm based on the received display effect state command. Is selected from each symbol (special diagram 1, special diagram 2, general diagram), and the selected symbol is displayed as the main symbol. With this configuration, the display synchronized with the fluctuation pattern of each symbol set by the main control device 110 can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player should be notified in the current production state. It is possible to notify the player of the fluctuation of the symbol in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the present embodiment, the display control device 114 displays all the variable displays (symbol strings) of each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, normal figure) in a predetermined area (secondary display area Dn subordinate symbol display). It is configured to be displayed in the areas Dn1 to Dn3 (see FIG. 9 (a)), and a part of the main symbol can be displayed in the first display area. The display method of (figure) is not limited to this, and for example, when a display variation pattern command corresponding to each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, normal figure) is received, the received display is received. Based on the effect status command, the symbol to be displayed in the first display area Dm (main symbol) and the symbol to be displayed in the slave symbol display area (slave symbol) are discriminated, and the third symbol is displayed based on the discrimination result. The device 81 may display a variable display (symbol sequence) corresponding to each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, normal figure).

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S3204 in FIG. 61), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S3708 in FIG. 66). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type) (see S3710 in FIG. 66).

The effect counter 223f is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223f is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198, and the value is added and updated by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 60) is executed. .. The effect counter 223f has a plurality of counters (not shown), and when the effect pattern is determined by referring to the plurality of counter values in one loop processing, different counter values are used. Used. As a result, when setting one effect pattern, the same counter value is not used at a plurality of places, so that the bias of the set effect pattern can be suppressed. It should be noted that the effect pattern may be set using each value calculated after performing different processing on the value acquired from the same counter. Specifically, among the effect patterns, one selection refers to the ones digit of the acquired value, the other selection refers to the tens digit of the acquired value, and the other selection refers to one of the acquired values. The ones digit of the obtained value may be referred to by multiplying the value obtained by multiplying the digit of the digit by three and the value obtained by multiplying the tens digit by five. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the bias of the set effect pattern while reducing the number of counters used when setting the effect pattern.

The time saving medium flag 223g is a flag for indicating that the present time is shortening. When the time saving medium flag 223g is on, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state, and when it is off, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state. The time saving medium flag 223g is set to on when it is determined in the effect state setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68) that the time saving state will be entered after the jackpot ends (3906 in FIG. 68), and the variable display setting process (FIG. 66). When it is determined that the special figure variation start flag 223d is on (S3701: Yes in FIG. 66) and the time saving medium flag 223g is determined to be on (S3704: Yes in FIG. 66). ), Set to off (S3705 in FIG. 66).

In the present embodiment, as the end condition of the time saving state, the special symbol change (lottery) is executed once (that is, the time saving number of times is once). Therefore, as described above, the time saving medium flag 223g is turned on. When the change of the special symbol is started in the state set to, the time saving medium flag 223g is set to off, but the voice lamp control device 113 indicates that the game state is the time saving state. Any configuration may be used so that the number of time reductions can be determined on the side. For example, if the number of time reductions is set to 100, a time reduction counter that can determine the number of remaining periods is provided, and each time the special symbol is changed (lottery). The value of the counter may be updated to, and when the value of the counter is updated to a value indicating the end of the time saving state, the time saving medium flag 223g may be set to off. As a result, even in the pachinko machine 10 in which the number of time reductions is set to a plurality of times (twice or more), the voice lamp control device 113 can reliably determine whether or not the current gaming state is the time reduction state. Can be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed a predetermined number of times (once), the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied. , Other configurations may be used. For example, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol t can be measured separately, and the end condition of the time saving state can be set as the first special symbol. Is changed 10 times (lottery), or until the second special symbol is changed once (lottery), and the time saving state ends when either end condition is satisfied. Alternatively, the time saving state may be terminated under conditions other than the number of fluctuations of the special symbol. In this case, for example, when the lottery result of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) or the normal symbol becomes a predetermined lottery result, the end condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied, or the pachinko machine 10 is used. When various driving members (electric accessory 640a, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650) are driven, a configuration may be used in which an end condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied. The drive times of the various drive members described above may be measurable, and when the drive times reach a predetermined number (for example, two times), the end condition for ending the time saving state may be satisfied. With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the time saving state ends, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The time saving remaining period storage area 223h is an area for storing the fluctuation time of the first special symbol executed during the time saving state. Here, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is configured so that the time saving state ends when the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) fluctuates once during the time saving state. That is, the fluctuation time of the special symbol set in the time saving state becomes the remaining period in the time saving state as it is.

The flag 223i in the consecutive villas is a flag for indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the right-handed gaming state (the consecutive villa state), and the current flag 223i in the consecutive villas is set to ON. Indicates that the gaming state is a right-handed gaming state, and when it is set to off, it indicates that the current gaming state is the normal state. The flag 223i in the consecutive villas is set to on when it is determined that the jackpot has started in the effect state setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68) (see S3903 in FIG. 68), and the effect is produced based on the effect state selection table 222b. It is referred to when selecting a state (see S3918 in FIG. 68), and when it is determined that the time saving state is not entered after the end of the jackpot, or when the ending condition of the time saving state is satisfied without the hold memory of the special figure 2. Is set to off (see S3907 and S3912 in FIG. 68).

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has shifted from the time saving state to the state of having the hold memory of FIG. 2 in addition to the jackpot state and the time saving state as the gaming state (right-handed gaming state) advantageous to the player. The game playability includes a normal state (see FIG. 12), and the number of reserved balls output from the main control device 110 as to whether or not the current game state is advantageous to the player (right-handed game state). The voice lamp control device 113 is configured to make a determination based on a command, various status commands, and the like. As a result, it is not necessary for the main control device 110 side to execute a process of determining whether or not the current gaming state is an advantageous state, and there is an effect that the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

The main control device 110 may perform a process of determining whether or not the current game state is advantageous to the player. In this case, a command indicating that a game state advantageous to the player (right-handed game state) is set is output to the voice lamp control device 113, and the fact that the player is in the right-handed game state is externally notified. It may be configured to output a signal for notifying (right-handed signal). In this case, in addition to the period in which the gaming state itself such as the jackpot state or the time saving state is advantageous to the player, the gaming state is not an advantageous gaming state (although it is a normal state), but the predetermined conditions are satisfied and again. , If it is determined that the game will shift to the jackpot state, the player is made to continuously execute the right-handed game by continuously notifying the outside that the right-handed game state is in progress. It is possible to suppress the troublesome game.

The fluctuation time counter 223j is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 during the time reduction state, and the remaining period of the time reduction state is calculated based on the measured counter value. When the fluctuation time counter 223j determines in the counter update process (see S3311 in FIG. 70) that the fluctuation in the special figure 1 has started during the time reduction (in the time reduction state) (S4103: Yes in FIG. 70), The value of the counter is set to "1", and every time the counter update process (see S3311 in FIG. 70) is executed thereafter, "1" is added until the value of the counter reaches "150,000" (S4108 in FIG. 70). (See), when the value of the counter becomes "150,000" (S4107: Yes in FIG. 70), the value of the counter is set to "0" (S4109). Then, the time saving remaining period (the remaining period in the time saving state) is calculated based on the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j (S4105 in FIG. 70).

The state storage area 223k is a storage area for temporarily storing the state when various state commands output from the main control device 110 are received, and in the command determination process (see S3112 in FIG. 61), the state storage area 223k is used. When a status command is received (S3215: Yes in FIG. 61), status information based on the received status command is stored (S3216 in FIG. 61). A display state command is set based on the state information stored in the state storage area 223k, and various images (background image and demo image) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are set by the main control device 110. Images corresponding to various states are displayed.

The effect state storage area 223m is a display mode of each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, normal figure) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114, and each reserved symbol (special figure 1 hold). It is an area for storing the effect state used for setting the display effect state command referred to when determining the display mode of the symbol, the special figure 2 reserved symbol, and the normal figure reserved symbol). This effect state includes the setting status of various flags set by various processes of the voice lamp control device 113 (continuous villa flag 223i, normal figure valid flag 223q, pseudo effect flag 223r, special figure 2 fluctuation flag 223s), and each. Based on the fluctuation stop timing of the symbol, it is selected in the effect state setting process (S3114 of FIG. 68) (see S3918 of FIG. 68), and the selected effect state is stored in the effect state storage area 223 m. The effect state storage area 223 m is configured to store (store) the selected effect state several times in the past. This makes it possible to compare and discriminate between the effect state before the transition and the effect state after the transition. With this configuration, it is possible to determine a transition pattern that cannot be migrated when a normal game is being performed, and to determine the presence or absence of an illegal game.

In addition, when the effect state shifts in a predetermined transition pattern over a plurality of times (for example, when the transition from the effect state 4 to the effect state 5 is repeated 5 times or more without going through the effect states 1 and 2). It is possible to provide an effect state (for example, Dalian villa effect state) that is selected only for, and it is possible to enhance the effect. When the Dalian villa production state is set, it is preferable to display a privilege image that cannot normally be seen by the player in the first display area Dm without displaying the main symbol on the third symbol display device 81. ..

The special 2 hold flag 223n is a flag for indicating that there is a hold memory of the special figure 2 (special 2) in the time saving state, and when the special 2 hold flag 223n is set to on, the special 2 hold flag 223n is set. It indicates that the hold storage (holding symbol) of FIG. 2 exists, and when it is set to off, it indicates that the holding storage (holding symbol) of the special figure 2 does not exist. This special 2 hold flag 223n is set to on when the special 2 hold ball number is updated to 1 in the hold ball number related process (see S3208 in FIG. 63) (see S3403 in FIG. 63). This special 2 hold flag 223n is referred to when it is determined in the effect state setting process (see S3114 of FIG. 68) that the time saving state has ended (see S3911 of FIG. 68), and the number of special 2 hold balls becomes 0. If so, it will be set to off.

The special 2 hold upper limit flag 223p is a flag for indicating that the hold memory of the special figure 2 (special 2) has reached the upper limit (4 pieces) in the time saving state, and the special 2 hold upper limit flag 223p is When set to on, it indicates that the number of reserved memories of special figure 2 (special 2) reaches the upper limit (4) in the time saving state, and when the special 2 hold upper limit flag 223p is set to off, It is shown that the number of reserved storages in Special Figure 2 (Special 2) is not the upper limit (4).

This special 2 hold upper limit flag 223p is set to on (S3406: Yes in FIG. 63) when the special 2 hold ball number is updated to the upper limit in the hold ball number related process (see S3208 in FIG. 63). (See S3407 in FIG. 63), referred to in the specific effect setting process (see S3315 in FIG. 69), and is set to off when the number of special 2 reserved balls is no longer the upper limit.

The normal figure valid flag 223q is a flag for indicating a normal figure variation (normal symbol variation) in which the operation of the electric accessory 640a executed at the time of winning can be an operation pattern (long open) advantageous to the player. When this normal map valid flag 223q is set to on, it indicates that the electric accessory 640a is a fluctuation of the normal map at the timing when it can be opened for a long time, and when it is set to off, the electric accessory 640a is short-circuited. It shows that the flag changes at the timing of opening.

The normal map valid flag 223q is set to ON when it is determined in the normal map variation display setting process (see S3712 in FIG. 67) that the timings of the variation start and variation end are both in the time saving state (FIG. 67). (Refer to S3806 of FIG. 67), it is set to off when it is determined that the timing of the fluctuation start is not in the time saving state, or when it is determined that the timing of the fluctuation end is not in the time saving state (S3809 in FIG. 67). reference). The setting status of the normal figure valid flag 223q is referred to when selecting the effect state based on the effect state selection table 222b (see S3918 in FIG. 68).

The pseudo effect flag 223r is a flag for indicating that the special figure 1 small hit has been executed when the game state is the normal state, and when it is set to on, the special figure 1 small hit is set in the normal state. Indicates that has been executed. By setting the pseudo effect flag 223r to ON, the effect display with the pseudo symbol as the main symbol (pseudo main symbol) is executed during the small hit game (see FIG. 22). This pseudo effect flag 223r is set to on when the small hit winning of special figure 1 occurs in the normal state by the effect state setting process (see S3114 of FIG. 68), and the small hit is set to on (see S3915 of FIG. 68). Is set to off when is finished (S3917 in FIG. 68). Then, the setting status of the pseudo effect flag 223r is referred to when selecting the effect state based on the effect state selection table 222b (see S3918 in FIG. 68).

The special 2 fluctuation flag 223s is a flag for indicating that the fluctuation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) has started, and when it is set to on, the second special symbol (special figure 2) has a special 2 fluctuation flag 223s. It indicates that the fluctuation has started. The special 2 fluctuation flag 223s is set to ON in the fluctuation pattern related processing (see S3202 in FIG. 62) when the received fluctuation pattern command is the fluctuation pattern command for special figure 2 (S3302 in FIG. 62). Then, it is set to off when the variation pattern command for special figure 1 is received. The setting status of the special 2 fluctuation flag 223s is referred to when selecting the effect state based on the effect state selection table 222b (see S3918 in FIG. 68).

Here, in the present embodiment, when the special 2 variation flag 223s is set to on, that is, when the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed, the variation result (lottery result). ) Is configured to give a big hit or a small hit, and in the small hit game executed based on the fluctuation (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the ball is in a specific area (V). It is configured to be a small hit game that easily passes through the winning switch 650e3). That is, the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is configured to be advantageous to the player only by being executed. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment configured in this way, the second special symbol is set while the special 2 fluctuation flag 223s is set to ON (that is, while the second special symbol is fluctuating). It is displayed in a variable manner as the main symbol (special diagram 2 main symbol). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the variable display of the second special symbol, which is given an advantageous state for the player, is overlooked.

The general figure winning information storage area 223t is an area in which the winning information included in the winning information command is stored when the winning information command of the normal symbol is received. Since the detailed configuration is the same as the above-mentioned special drawing winning information storage area 223a, the description thereof will be omitted.

The fluctuation start flag 223u for the normal symbol is a flag indicating that the fluctuation of the normal symbol has been executed, and when it is set to ON, it indicates that the normal symbol is fluctuating. The fluctuation start flag 223u for the normal map determines that the received fluctuation pattern command is not the fluctuation pattern command for the special figure (it is the fluctuation pattern command for the normal map) in the fluctuation pattern-related processing (see S3202 in FIG. 62). When it is set to on (see S3306 in FIG. 62) and is determined to be turned on in the normal figure variation display setting process (see S3712 in FIG. 67) (S3801: Yes in FIG. 67), It is set to off (see S3802 in FIG. 67).

The replacement flag 223v is a flag indicating that the end timing of the time saving state (the end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation in which the fluctuation is started in the time saving state) and the end timing of the normal figure fluctuation satisfy predetermined conditions. By setting it to ON, it is shown that the end timing of the fluctuation of the normal map is within 2 seconds of the end timing of the time saving state. By setting this replacement flag 223v to ON, the effect state "6" is selected as the effect state.

The privilege effect execution flag 223w is a flag for indicating that the privilege effect is executed, and when set to ON, it indicates that the privilege effect is executed. While the privilege effect execution flag 223w is set to ON, a privilege effect (see FIG. 21) that cannot normally be seen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The privilege effect execution flag 223w determines that the special 2 hold upper limit flag 223p is set to ON in the specific effect setting process (see S3315 in FIG. 69) (see S4002 in FIG. 69), and the display privilege effect command. After setting (see S4004 in FIG. 69), it is set to on (S4005 in FIG. 69), and after the flag 223i in the consecutive villas is set to off in the effect state setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68) (FIG. 68 (see S3907 in FIG. 68), set to off (see S3908 in FIG. 68). That is, if the privilege effect execution flag 223w is set to on even once in the state where the flag 223i in the consecutive villa is set to on (during the consecutive villa mode) (the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is the upper limit). (When it is reached), the privilege production will continue to be executed until the end of the consecutive villa mode.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the privilege production ends immediately even if the privilege production is executed. That is, after the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit, at least until all the reserved balls in the special figure 2 are exhausted and the subsequent change in the special figure 1 in the time saving state is completed, the privilege effect is produced. Is configured to be executed, so that the privilege effect can be continuously displayed.

Further, with this configuration, it is possible to display on the third symbol display device 81 that the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 has reached the upper limit for a long period of time, so that the surrounding players can see it. You can appeal and get a sense of satisfaction. Further, in order to obtain the satisfaction, the game can be enthusiastically performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured to execute a specific privilege effect on the condition that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has reached the upper limit even once, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the consecutive villa mode. A means for measuring the number of times the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 has reached the upper limit may be provided therein, and different privilege effects may be executed based on the measurement result by the means. As a result, the player can be made to play the game more enthusiastically.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the privilege effect execution flag 223w is set to be on, the privilege effect is set to be executed until the consecutive villa mode ends, but the present invention is not limited to this. The period until all the reserved balls in the special figure 2 are exhausted may be set as the period during which the privilege effect is executed. As a result, in the consecutive villa mode, the production can be switched each time the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed during the time saving state, and the game can be enthusiastically played to continue the consecutive villa mode with a new feeling. Can be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, the privilege effect is automatically executed when the condition for executing the privilege effect is satisfied, but other configurations may be used, for example, pachinko. By operating the operating means (frame button 22) provided on the machine 10, the normal effect and the privilege effect may be switched and executed. This makes it possible to provide the player with a desired effect.

In the present embodiment, the case where the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 reaches the upper limit is set as the condition for executing the privilege effect, but other conditions may be set as the condition for executing the privilege effect. Often, for example, in addition to the case where the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit, the setting may be made on the condition that the changing special figure 1 is won (big hit, small hit). In this way, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has reached the upper limit and the lottery result of Special Figure 1 that is changing is a big hit, it is actually 5 times (1 big hit based on Special Figure 1, special figure 1). Since the jackpot game (4 jackpots based on FIG. 2) is provided, the gaming state is further advantageous to the player. By executing the privilege effect only when such a condition is satisfied, the value of the privilege effect can be enhanced, and the game can be enthusiastically performed to see the privilege effect.

In this case, if the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 becomes 3 (a quasi-upper limit number smaller than the upper limit number), whether or not the privilege effect is executed based on the lottery result of the special figure 1. It is advisable to display (suggest) the player to be notified (suggested) of (special effect execution suggestion display). As a result, the player can be enthusiastically played the game while expecting the lottery result of the special figure 1 and the provision of the privilege effect. In addition, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 reaches the upper limit (4), the privilege effect is configured to be executed, and the content of the privilege effect is described in the changing lottery result of Special Figure 1 and the lottery result. Change based on the remaining period of the time saving state (remaining fluctuation time of special figure 1 during fluctuation) when the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 reaches the upper limit (when the execution condition of the privilege effect is satisfied). You may. Even in this configuration, the player can be enthusiastically played.

The end effect execution flag 223x is a flag for indicating that the end effect (see FIGS. 19 (b) to 20 (b)) for suggesting that the consecutive villa mode is terminated is executed, and is turned on. By being set to, it indicates that the end effect is being executed. This end effect execution flag 223x is turned on when the special 2 hold flag 223n is set to off in the specific effect setting process (see S3315 in FIG. 69) and the time saving remaining period is 10 seconds. It is set (see S4010 in FIG. 69) and is referred to when the special 2 hold flag 223n is set to on in the hold ball number related process (see S3208 in FIG. 63) (see S3404 in FIG. 63). Here, if the end effect execution flag 223x is set to on and the second hold flag 223n is set to on, it is assumed that the time saving state of this time has ended (the variation of special figure 1 has ended). However, the fluctuation (lottery) of Special Figure 2 will be started, and the consecutive villa mode will continue. Therefore, a display victory command is set for the executed end effect, and an effect suggesting a revival from the end effect is executed. As a result, the player can be expected to continue the consecutive villa mode even after the end effect is executed, and the player can be enthusiastically played until the end.

Then, in the effect state setting process (see S3114 of FIG. 68), the flag 223i in the consecutive villas is set to off after being set to off (see S3909 of FIG. 68). The end effect executed in the present embodiment may be configured to be executed even when the special figure 2 hold flag 223n is set to ON. In this case, the consecutive villa mode will always continue. Therefore, it is possible to increase the apparent continuation probability of the consecutive villa mode in the end effect. Further, when a plurality of special figures 2 holds are acquired during the period in which the end effect is being executed, the corresponding effect may be executed.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, for example. , Command storage area is provided.

This command storage area is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 61) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237, the input port 238, the output port 239, and the bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display fluctuation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches the instruction code, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data are written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be made executable in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to output the data after the address is specified in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a large amount of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the reading thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data used in the control program (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S5002 in FIG. 71) executed after the boot process (see S5001 in FIG. 71) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the NAND flash memory 234a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 36) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Process in parallel in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 73B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by, and the time required for reading the data can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The end address (final address of the storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236). Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the game is started by the player while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry are entered. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a fluctuating image when the power is turned on, which displays the result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a fluctuating effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S5003 and S5004 in FIG. 71).

Here, the fluctuation image when the power is turned on will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image as the third symbol display device. Display on 81.

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 displays the main image when the power is turned on. On the display screen of, the fluctuation image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position when facing the screen and the fluctuation image of the "×" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the fluctuation period. It is displayed alternately and repeatedly in the middle. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the "○" symbol is displayed for a certain period of time after the variable effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the "x" symbol is displayed after the variable effect is stopped. Display for a certain period of time.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entry port 64 (left first ball entry port 64a, right first ball entry port 64a). 64b), or when a ball entering the second entry port 640 is detected, the power-on variation image is used using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. Is drawn, and the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 so that the fluctuating images when the power is turned on are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball is detected in the first ball entry port 64 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be done.

Returning to FIG. 33, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The back image is an image displayed on the back side of the main symbol (third symbol), and for example, a city, the sea, the sky, or the like is displayed. A right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 15A) and the like are also stored in the rear image area 235c as a rear image.

The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, is resident. As a result, when the variation effect is performed by the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the device is not used.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", the main symbol consisting of the rear symbol such as a wooden box, the rear symbol and the character such as the furoshiki, the helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is expanded and the image is expanded in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first framebuffer 236b and the second framebuffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, and an effect state storage area 233k.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and an opening effect. , Display data tables corresponding to round production, ending production, and demo production are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is different, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A and jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening effect is for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, which are normally closed, will be opened. It is a production, and the round production is a production for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player that the end of the special game state (big hit state) is notified to the player.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has passed since one variation effect was stopped. Therefore, the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters, is defined for each address. In addition, one or a plurality of information about the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type displays one of the backs A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "city stage", "sky stage", or "island stage"), or backs A to. Information that specifies whether to display a rear image different from C is described. Further, as the back surface type, when specifying to display a back image different from the back images A to C, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage specified by the player as the drawing target. Also, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In the present embodiment, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 30). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 36) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image becomes diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, it is resident. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. (Corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 35). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 35).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 35, in the example of FIG. 35). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 36) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 35, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 71) (see S5005 in FIG. 71). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see S6605 in FIG. 82 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S5301 in FIG. 73 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S5308 in FIG. 73 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 73B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 73 (b) S5309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. The processing (see FIGS. 74 to 78) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 79 to 81) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S6501 in FIG. 82 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 82 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 83) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 36), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the contents of instructions for drawing an image. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 36), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instructions are described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 36) described later, which describes the instruction content for drawing an image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 73 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S6205 in FIG. 81) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 36) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 36, a back image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as (design). In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the semitransparent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing according to the filter specification information by the method specified by that information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 will image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 73 (b). ) Is executed, the timekeeping counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S6207 in FIG. 79). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S5002 in FIG. 71) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 83) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S6717 in FIG. 83). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S6718 in FIG. 83). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is referred to as a frame buffer (hereinafter, "drawing target buffer") that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S6802 in FIG. 84).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and displays the image with the drive signal for the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 73B) is executed, it is performed (see S6802 of FIG. 84).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The effect state storage area 233k is an area for storing the effect state information included in the display effect state command output from the voice lamp control device 113. The effect state information stored in the effect state storage area 233k is referred to when determining the display content to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It should be noted that this embodiment has variation pattern data corresponding to each effect state information, and is configured so that different variation patterns are determined even when the same display variation pattern command is received. ..

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 37 to 58. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are each added by 1, and their counter values are maximum. When the value (299, 99, 99, 239, 99 in this embodiment, respectively) is reached, the value is cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, when both the left first entry port 64a and the right first entry opening 64b (hereinafter, both the left first entry opening 64a and the right first entry opening 64b are shown, the first entry opening 64 and the right first entry opening 64b are indicated. (Referred to as) or the start winning process associated with winning the second ball opening 640 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 38 to 44.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through is caused by the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. The gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 45 to 48.

After executing the through gate passing process, the V entrance passing process accompanying the entry of the ball into the second variable winning device 650 is executed (S108). After that, the V passing process associated with winning the V winning switch 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650 is executed (S109). The details of the V-entrance passing process and the V-passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 49 and 59.

Next, the firing control process is executed (S110), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S111) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed on the display device 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S201). The special symbol jackpots include those during which the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

Unless it is a big hit of a special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202), and the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are displayed. If the mode is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e (holding number N2 of the change display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command (special figure 2 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and extracts the extracted values from the RAM 223. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B execute a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S213). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Get the value of (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S210) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is set (S211). After the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S211 the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). After that, the process of S213 is executed.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202: Yes), has the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B elapsed? Whether or not it is determined (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S215). .. The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41. When this special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Be told. More specifically, depending on the value of the random number counter C1 per first, it is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss, and it is a big hit or a small hit of the special symbol. In this case, either the big hits A to G or the small hits A to E are determined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2 or the small hit type counter C5.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. If it is a small hit, the red LED is turned on, and if it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is started, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing (this lottery result). Is a big hit of a special symbol (S216). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot of a special symbol (S216: Yes), an opening scenario of a specific winning opening is set based on the jackpot type (S217), and then the start of the jackpot is set (S218). Next, the jackpot start flag 203h and the jackpot middle flag 203i are set to ON (S219), the time saving / medium counter 203g is set to 0 (S220), and the process proceeds to S221. In the process of S221, a stop command is set (S221), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S216, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S216: No), it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small hit (S222).

In the process of S222, if it is determined that the lottery result this time is a small hit (S222: Yes), the small hit start setting process is executed (S223). Next, the process of S221 is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S222, when it is determined that the lottery result this time is not a small hit (S222: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g is 1 or more (S224). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0 (S224: No), the processing of S221 is executed and the main processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving / medium counter 203g is 1 or more (S224: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g is subtracted by 1 (S224), and the process of S221 is executed. After that, this process ends.

Next, the special symbol variation start processing (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start processing (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and is special with the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area common to the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery of "special symbol big hit", "special symbol small hit" or "special symbol miss" (win / fail) This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol change start processing, first, it is determined whether or not the time is being shortened (S301). If the time is not shortened (S301: No), the normal fluctuation start process (S302) is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the time is being shortened (S301: Yes), the time saving fluctuation start process (S303) is executed and this process is terminated.

Next, the normal fluctuation start processing (S302) and the time saving fluctuation start processing (S303) executed in the special symbol fluctuation start processing (S213) described above will be described.

First, the normal fluctuation start processing (S302) will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a normal variation start process (S302) executed in the special symbol variation start process (see S213 in FIG. 39).

In the normal fluctuation start processing, first, the data of the execution area in the corresponding special symbol holding ball storage area (special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b) is acquired (S401). After that, the lottery result is acquired based on the special symbol jackpot random number table corresponding to the acquired special symbol type (S402). Specifically, in the case of a lottery of the first special symbol based on the entry into the first entrance 64, a big hit or a small hit can be obtained by referring to the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 26 (b)). If it is a lottery of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, the big hit or the small hit is determined by referring to the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 (see FIG. 26 (c)). I do.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a big hit (S403). When the lottery result is a big hit (S403: Yes), the display mode at the time of a normal big hit corresponding to the special symbol and the big hit type is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401 (S403: Yes). S404). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol 1 jackpot selection table 202b1 or the special symbol 2 jackpot selection table 202b2, and 7 It is determined what type of jackpot is among the jackpots (big hits A to G) of various special symbols (see FIGS. 27 (b) or 27 (c)).

In the process of S404, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hits A to G). Further, the jackpot type (big hits A to G) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

After that, the normal jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S405), and the process proceeds to S406. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S405, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. Specifically, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 and the variation pattern table 202d1 for the jackpot for special figure 1 or the variation pattern table 202d5 for the jackpot for special figure 2 (common to normal and time saving). The fluctuation time of the symbol variation is determined by comparing with (FIG. 29 (a) or FIG. 30 (b)).

In the process of S406, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S405 is set (S406). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S404 is set (S407). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1701 of the main process (see FIG. 53). Will be done. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S407 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

On the other hand, when the lottery result is not a big hit (S403: No), it is further determined whether or not the lottery result is a small hit (S408). When the lottery result is a small hit (S408: Yes), the display mode at the time of a normal small hit corresponding to the special symbol and the big hit type is set (S409). After that, the normal small hit fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S410). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the small hit symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S405, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 and the variation pattern table 202d3 for the small hit for special figure 1 or the variation pattern table 202d5 for the big hit for special figure 2 The fluctuation time of the symbol variation is determined by comparing with (common to normal and time saving) (FIG. 29 (d) or FIG. 30 (b)). Next, the processes of S406 and S407 are executed, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

When the lottery result is not a small hit (S408: No), the display mode at the time of normal deviation corresponding to the special symbol is set (S411). After that, the fluctuation pattern at the time of normal deviation is determined based on the number of reserved balls (S412). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S405, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 and the variation pattern table 202d2 for the deviation of the special figure 1 or the variation pattern table 202d5 for the jackpot for the special figure 2 ( The fluctuation time of the symbol variation is determined by comparing with the normal / time saving common) (FIG. 29 (c) or FIG. 30 (b)). Next, the processes of S406 and S407 are executed, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, the time saving fluctuation start processing (S303) will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a time saving variation start process (S303) executed in the special symbol variation start process (see S213 and FIG. 39). This time saving fluctuation start processing (S303) differs from the above-mentioned normal fluctuation starting processing (S302) in that the display mode for time saving and the fluctuation pattern are set (determined), and the other points are the same. , The detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the processing of S505, S510, and S512, when the variation pattern for the time reduction of the first special symbol is determined, it is determined based on the variation pattern table 202d4 for the time reduction for the special figure 1 as described above (FIG. 30 (a). )reference). On the other hand, when determining the variation pattern for the time reduction of the second special symbol, it is determined based on the variation pattern table 202d5 for special figure 2 (common to normal and time reduction) in the same manner as the normal variation start processing (S302) (FIG. 30 (b)).

Next, the small hit start setting process (S222) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the small hit start setting process (S222). This small hit start setting process (S222) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and is a small hit type (small hits A to E). This is a process for setting the operation of the V inlet solenoid 209a, the retention solenoid 209b, and the flow path solenoid 209c in the small hit game.

In the small hit start setting process (S222), first, the small hit type selected in the process of S409 of the normal fluctuation start process or the process of S509 of the time saving fluctuation start process described above is read (S601), and then the small hit type A is read. Or, it is determined whether or not it is B (S602). When the small hit type is A or B (S602: Yes), the opening scenario for the special figure 1 is set (S603). The opening scenario for the special figure 1 specifically shows the setting of the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 650f1 and the retention member 650n of the second variable winning device 650. That is, it is shown that the operation of the V inlet solenoid 209a and the retention solenoid 209b is set so that the opening / closing door 650f1 and the retention member 650n are opened for a predetermined period during the small hit game effect (see FIG. 10).

When the processing of S603 is completed, it is determined whether or not the small hit type is B (S604). When the small hit type is B (S604: Yes), the flow path solenoid operation is set so that V winning is impossible (S605). That is, the operation of the flow path solenoid 209c is set so that the sphere cannot flow down the flow path 650h3 (see FIG. 10A). After that, the process proceeds to S608. In the process of S604, when the small hit type is not B (that is, the small hit type is A) (S604: No), the flow path solenoid operation is set so that V winning is possible (S606). That is, the operation of the flow path solenoid 209c is set so that the sphere can flow down the flow path 650h3 (see FIG. 10B).

On the other hand, in the processing of S602, when the small hit types are not A and B (that is, the small hit types are C, D or E) (S602: No), the opening scenario for special figure 2 is set (S606). ). The opening scenario for FIG. 2 specifically shows the setting of the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 650f1 and the retention member 650n of the second variable winning device 650. That is, it is shown that the operation of the V inlet solenoid 209a and the retention solenoid 209b is set so that the opening / closing door 650f1 and the retention member 650n are opened for a predetermined period during the small hit game effect (see FIG. 11A). When the processing of S607 is completed, the flow path solenoid operation is set so that V winning is possible (S606). That is, the operation of the flow path solenoid 209c is set so that the sphere can flow down the flow path 650h3 (see FIG. 11A).

When the processing of S605 and S607 is completed, the V-passing jackpot type corresponding to each small hit type is set in the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203m (S608). More specifically, the jackpot type (big hits C to G) at the time of passing V is determined based on the small hit type acquired in the process of S601 and the special symbol 1 jackpot selection table 202b1 or the special symbol 2 jackpot selection table 202b2. As described above, if the small hit type is A, it is determined that it is a big hit C (7 rounds with a short time and a big hit), and if the small hit type is B, it is a big hit D (2 rounds with a short time and no big hit). Judging, if the small hit type is C, it is determined that it is a big hit F (5 rounds with a short time, big hit), and if the small hit type is D, it is determined to be a big hit G (10 rounds with a short time, a big hit). If the small hit type is E, it is determined that it is a big hit E (15 rounds with a short time, a big hit) (see FIG. 27 (b) or (c)).

Next, the start of the small hit is set based on the small hit type (S609), and the small hit start flag 203j and the small hit medium flag 203k are set on (S610). After that, this process ends.

Next, the start winning information processing (S105) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 640. This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a hold process for the value when there is a start prize.

When the start winning process (FIG. 43, S105) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 (S701). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (S701: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of pending numbers N1 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired (S702). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball slot 64 (S701: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball slot 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 4. If it is not less than (S703: No), the process proceeds to S707. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S701: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball counter 203d is added by 1 (S704). Then, a hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S705).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S705, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above. Each value of the counter C5 is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S706). In the process of S706, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the hold second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the hold third area is set, and if the value is 3, the hold fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, in the processes of S707 to S712, the same process is executed for the winning of the second entrance 640 for the processes of S701 to S706. The only difference is that the holding process for the second special symbol is executed for the winning of the second ball opening 640, and the other processes are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, when it is determined in the process of S707 that the ball has not won the second entrance 640 (S707: No), the look-ahead process is executed after the process of S712 (S713). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, a look-ahead process (S713), which is one process in the start winning process (see S105 in FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (S713).

In this look-ahead process (FIG. 44, S713), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new prize in the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 (S801). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning in the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 (S801: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new prize in the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (S801: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the prize is a prize of the first special symbol (S802). ).

In the process of S802, when it is determined that the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (S802: Yes), the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, the special symbol 1 big hit selection table 202b1 and the special symbol 1 small hit selection table 202e1 Based on the above, the lottery result, the big hit type and the small hit type are acquired (S803), and the process proceeds to S804. In the process of S804, the winning information command including the big hit determination result, the big hit type, the small hit determination result, and the small hit type acquired in S803 (or S805) is set (S804), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S802, when it is determined that the winning is the winning of the second special symbol (S802: No), the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2, the special symbol 2 big hit selection table 202b2, and the special symbol 2 small hit selection Based on the table 202e2, the lottery result, the big hit type, and the small hit type are acquired (S805), the process of S804 is executed, and this process is completed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device and the electric motor associated with the second ball entrance 640 are performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the accessory.

In this normal symbol variation processing (FIGS. 40 and S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S901). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device. Includes being in the middle of being. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S901: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S901: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S902), and the second symbol display device is used. If the display mode is not changing (S902: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S903). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is larger than 0 (S904), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is 0 (S904 :). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S904: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S905).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S906). In the process of S906, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S907).

Next, the lottery result is acquired based on the second random number table 202c (S908). In this control example, there is no distinction between the high probability state and the low probability state in the lottery of the normal symbol, and the probability of winning the normal symbol is always constant. Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S907 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 11", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "12 to 239", the normal symbol is out. (See FIG. 26 (d)).

After that, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S908 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S909), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S909: Yes), it is a hit. (S910), and the process proceeds to S912. In the process of S910, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "○" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

In the process of S909, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S909: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S911). In the process of S911, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S912.

When the processing of S910 or S911 is completed, it is determined in the processing of S912 whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S912). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S912: Yes), the time saving middle hit flag 203q is set to ON (S913). Next, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device is set to 3 seconds (S914), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S912: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device is set to 4 seconds (S915), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the variation display time is very short, "4 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the normal state of the normal symbol. The ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball entry port 640.

On the other hand, in the process of S902, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S902: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed. (S916). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S914 or the process of S915 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device.

In the process of S916, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S916: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S916, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S916: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S917). In the process of S917, the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S910, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display device. ) Is set to be done. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S911, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. Is set. When the stop display is set by the process of S917, the variation display in the second symbol display device ends when the second symbol display update process (see S1708) of the main process (see FIG. 53) is executed next. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted on) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S910 or the process of S911.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (FIGS. 45, S106) is the ordinary symbol. It is determined whether it is a hit (S918). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S918: Yes), the electric accessory control process is set (S919), and this process ends.

Next, the electric accessory control process (S919) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 46. This electric accessory control process (S919) is a process executed in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and FIG. 46 is an electric accessory control process (see FIG. 45). It is a flowchart which showed S919).

In the electric accessory control process, first, it is determined whether or not the time saving middle hit flag 203q is on (S1001). When the time saving middle hit flag 203q is on (S1001: Yes), the time saving middle hit flag 203q is set to off (S1002), and then it is determined whether or not the time saving is in progress (S1003). When the time is shortened (S1003: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is opened (3 seconds) and closed. (5 seconds), set to open (3 seconds) (S1004), and end this process.

On the other hand, in S1001, when the time saving middle hit flag 203q is not on (that is, off) (S1001: Yes), or in S1003, when the time saving is not in (S1003: No), the pachinko machine 10 has a normal symbol. Since it is the normal state of, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set to opening (0.1 seconds), closing (0.1 seconds), and opening (0.1 seconds). (S1005, this process ends.

In this way, in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the opening operation of the second entrance 640 is "opening (0.1 seconds), closing (0.1 seconds), opening (opening (0.1 seconds)", as compared with the normal state of the normal symbol. 0.1 seconds) → open (3 seconds), close (5 seconds), open (3 seconds) ”, which makes it easy for the ball to enter the second entry port 640.

Further, when the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set by the electric accessory control process (S919), the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1706) of the main process (see FIG. 53) is executed next. , The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process (FIG. 47, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S1101). Here, the passage of the sphere at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S1101: Yes), the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S1102). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S1103).

If the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S1101: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203f is less than 4 (S1103: Yes), the normal symbol hold ball The value (M) of the number counter 203f is added by 1 (S1104). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set to the first of the free hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S1105). In the process of S1105, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the hold second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the hold third area is set, and if the value is 3, the hold fourth area is set as the first area. When the process of S1105 is completed, the normal map look-ahead process is executed (S1106).

Here, the general drawing look-ahead process will be described with reference to FIG. 48 (S1106). FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal map look-ahead process (S1106). In the normal figure look-ahead process (FIG. 48, S1106), first, the pre-determination based on the value of the second random number counter C4 newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is executed (S1201). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 newly stored in the process of S1105 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c.

Next, the hit pre-determination result and the fluctuation time determination result are acquired based on the pre-determination result (S1202). After that, the Fuzu winning information command is set (S1203), this processing is terminated, and the process returns to the through-gate passage processing.

Returning to FIG. 47, the description will be continued. When the normal figure look-ahead process (S1106) is completed, it is then determined whether or not the current time is a big hit of a special symbol (S1107). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S1107: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S1107: No), it is determined whether or not the present is a small hit (S1108). As a result of the determination, if the small hit is in progress (S1108: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

If it is not in the small hit (S1108: No), it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is changing (S1109). As a result of the determination, if the second special symbol is changing (S1109: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. If it is not during the change of the second special symbol (S1109: No), it is determined whether or not the time is being shortened (S1109). As a result of the determination, if the time is shortened (S1110: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is. If the time is not shortened (S1110: No), an error command is set (S1111), and this process ends.

On the other hand, whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S1101: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol hold ball count counter. If the value (M) of 203f is not less than 4 (S1103: No), the normal drawing look-ahead process (S1106) is skipped, the processes S1107 to S1111 are executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, the V inlet passing process (S108) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a V inlet passing process (S108) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

In the V entrance passing process (S108), it is first determined whether or not a small hit is being made (S1301). In the process of S1301, when it is determined that a small hit is being made (S1301: Yes), a V entrance passage command is set (S1302), and this process is terminated. If it is not in the small hit (S1302: No), it means that the ball has entered the second variable winning device 650 even though it is not a small hit game, so an error command is set (S1303) and this process is performed. To finish.

The V inlet passage command set in the process of S1302 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V entrance passage command, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the balls that have passed through the V entrance, and transmits a command for causing the display control device 114 to execute an effect based on the V entrance passage. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect during the small hit game based on the ball entering the second variable winning device 650 (see FIG. 12).

Next, the V-pass processing (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the V-passing process (S109). This V-passing process (S109) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

In the V-passing process, first, the V-passing jackpot type value stored in the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203m is acquired (S1401), and the V flag 203n indicating the acquired V-passing jackpot type is set to ON (S1401). S1402). Then, the V passage command is set (S1403).

Next, it is determined whether or not the small hit type corresponds to the small hit B (S1404). If it is determined in the process of S1404 that it corresponds to the small hit B (S1404: Yes), an error command is set (S1405), and this process is terminated. In this embodiment, the ball can pass through the V winning switch 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650 in the small hit A, C, D or E (that is, other than the small hit B), and the small hit type value is used. Only when the small hit A, C, D or E (that is, other than the small hit B) is set. Therefore, when the small hit type value is small hit B and the V passing process (S1401) executed based on the ball passing through the V winning switch 650e3 is executed, the V winning switch 650e3 is illegally executed. It is considered that this is the case when the ball is won. In this case, by setting an error command in the process of S1405, an error output is executed and a fraudulent act can be detected.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S1501) as a setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1601). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S1602). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S1603).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 7) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1604), and if it is turned on (S1604: Yes), the process shifts to S1612. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605), and if it is not stored (S1605: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S1612 in this case as well.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1606), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1607: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S1612 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1716 of FIG. 53, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1612, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S1612). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S1613, S1614) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1613, S1614) is executed. Further, the initialization process (S1613, S1614) of the RAM 203 is similarly executed when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S1613, S1614), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1613), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1614). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1610.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S1605: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S1605: Yes). S1607: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1608). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1610. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S1610, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S1611), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1701 to S1709 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1712 and S1713 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 53), first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), the output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is stored on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1701). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) and the start winning process (see FIG. 43) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the jackpot start command, the round number command, and the jackpot end command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 54) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1702). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1703), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or the first 1 The jackpot control process for opening or closing the first specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1704). In the jackpot control process, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and the maximum opening time of the first specific winning opening 65a has elapsed, or a specified number of balls have won a prize in the first specific winning opening 65a. Is determined. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the first specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the first specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1704) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

Next, in the case of a small hit state of a special symbol, various effects according to the small hit are executed, and a small hit control process for opening or closing the opening / closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 is executed ( S1705). In the small hit control process, the opening / closing door 650f1 is opened based on the opening scenario, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the opening / closing door 650f1 has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the opening / closing door 650f1. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed. In the present embodiment, the small hit control process (S1705) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

When the process of S1705 is completed, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is executed (S1706). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the electric accessory control process (FIGS. 46, S1005) executed in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45), the electric accessory opening / closing process is performed. Start opening / closing control of objects. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening operation set in the process of S1004 or the process of S1005 in the electric accessory control process (FIGS. 46 and S1005) is completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1707). In the first symbol display update process, S405, S410, and S412 of the normal variation start process (FIGS. 40 and S302) or the time saving variation start process (FIGS. 41 and S303) executed in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 39). When the fluctuation pattern is set by the processing of S505, S510, and S512, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B start the fluctuation display according to the fluctuation pattern. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is used. Turn off and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. Turns off and the red LED turns on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, the variation set by the process of S405, S410, S412 or the process of S505, S510, S512 of the normal variation start process (see FIG. 40) or the time saving variation start process (see FIG. 41). When the fluctuation time corresponding to the pattern ends, the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is terminated, and the normal fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 40) or the time saving fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 41) is terminated. The stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in the display mode set by the processing of S404, S409, S411 or the processing of S504, S509, S511.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1708). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S914 or the process of S915 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device. .. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol "○" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S917 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45), the variation executed in the second symbol display device. The display is finished, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighting display) in the display mode set by the processing of S910 or the processing of S911 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 45). To do.

Next, the storage device control process for setting the opening and closing of the storage valve 750a attached to the storage device 750 is executed (S1709).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1710), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1710: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1711). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1711: Yes), the process is shifted to S1701, and each process after S1701 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1711: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1712, S1713).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1712). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1702 (S1713).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1701 to S1709 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the processing of S1710, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1710: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 51 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1714 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1714), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S1715). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1716), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1717), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1710 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1701 to S1709, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1712 and S1713 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1701. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1701 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S1601) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1701 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1704) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1704). This jackpot control process (S1704) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 53), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed, and the first This is a process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1801). Specifically, if the jackpot start flag 203h is set to ON by the process of S219 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38), it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1801, when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1801: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203h is set to off (S1802), and the opening command is set (S1803).

The jackpot start command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the jackpot start command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display jackpot start command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect of starting the jackpot. When the processing of S1803 is completed, the storage release flag 203p is set to ON (S1804), and the main processing is completed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1801, if the jackpot of the special symbol is not started (S1801: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1805). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. Specifically, it is determined by whether or not the jackpot middle flag 203i is on. In the process of S1805, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S1805: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1805, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S1805: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1806). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1806: Yes), the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened (S1807), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1807). S1808). After setting the number of rounds command, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display round number command according to the round number to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the continuous jackpot is executed in the voice lamp control device 113, the display round number command according to the cumulative number of rounds is transmitted. Therefore, the cumulative number of rounds in the continuous jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the player can be made aware that the jackpot has continued for a long time, so that the player's interest can be improved.

On the other hand, in the process of S1806, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1806: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S1809). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65, or when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 30 seconds) have passed in the first variable winning device 65. , 10 in total) When a prize is won, it is judged that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of S1809, if the closing condition of the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S1809: Yes), the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is closed. , End this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is not satisfied (S1809: No), it is determined whether or not it is the timing of the end of the big hit (S1811). Specifically, when the special game state (all 16 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state is completed, it is determined that the jackpot ends.

In the process of S1811, when it is the timing of the end of the jackpot (S1811: Yes), the jackpot end command is set (S1812), and the jackpot middle flag 203i is set to off (S1813).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special game being executed is the jackpot B (S1814). In the process of S1814, if it is determined that the hit is not B (7R time saving no big hit) (S1814: No), the time saving medium counter 203g is set to 1 (S1815), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1814, if it is determined that the hit is B (7R time saving no big hit) (S1814: Yes), the process of S1815 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

The jackpot end command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the jackpot end command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects a display mode of the jackpot end effect based on the prize information stored in the special figure winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display jackpot end command corresponding to the selected jackpot end display mode is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot end command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the jackpot end effect.

Next, the small hit control process (S1705) will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a small hit control process (S1705) executed in the main process (see FIG. 53). This small hit control process (S1705) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the small hit state of a special symbol, various effects according to the small hit can be executed, or the first 2 This is a process for opening or closing the opening / closing door 650f1 of the variable winning device 650.

In the small hit control process, first, it is determined whether or not the small hit of the special symbol is started (S1901). Specifically, if the small hit start flag 203j is set to ON by the process of S610 of the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 42), it is determined that the small hit of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1901, when the small hit of the special symbol is started (S1901: Yes), the small hit start flag 203j is set to off (S1902), and the small hit start command is set (S1903).

The small hit start command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the small hit start command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display small hit start command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display small hit start command, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect of starting the small hit.

When the process of S1903 is completed, the V inlet solenoid 209a and the flow path solenoid 209c are set to ON (S1904) based on the opening scenario, the operation of the retention member 650n is started (S1905), and the present process is completed.

The opening scenario referred to in the processing of S1904 is set in the above-mentioned small hit start setting processing (see FIG. 42), and the opening scenario of the V inlet solenoid 209a is set regardless of the small hit type, and the flow path. The opening scenario of the solenoid 209c is set only when the small hit type is A, C, D or E. Therefore, in all the small hit games, the opening / closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 is opened, and the ball can be entered into the second variable winning device 650. On the other hand, only in the small hits A, C, D or E in which the flow path solenoid 209c is turned on, the ball that has entered the second variable winning device 650 can flow down to the special discharge flow path 650e2. That is, the small hits A, C, D or E are the small hit types to which the big hits are given, and the small hits B are the small hit types to which the big hits are not given.

Further, in the process of S1905, the operation of the retention member 650n is started (the retention solenoid 209b is turned on), so that one ball can be retained in the distribution destination region 650h3.

On the other hand, in the process of S1901 when it is not the timing to start the small hit of the special symbol (S1901: No), it is determined whether the small hit of the special symbol is in progress (S1906). As for the small hits of the special symbols, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the small hits of the special symbols (including during the small hit game of the special symbols). Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the small hit game of the special symbol. Specifically, it is determined by whether or not the small hit medium flag 203k is on. In the process of S1906, if it is not during the small hit of the special symbol (S1906: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S1906, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the small hit (S1906: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the V entrance is satisfied (S1907). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 6.5 seconds) has elapsed after opening the opening / closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650, or when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 6.5 seconds) have passed in the second variable winning device 650. (10 in total) When a prize is won, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

The closing condition may be that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls have entered the second specific winning opening 650a.

In the process of S1907, when the closing condition of the opening / closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 is satisfied (S1907: Yes), the V inlet solenoid 209a is used to close the opening / closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650. It is set to off (S1908), the retention solenoid 209b is set to off in order to end the operation of the retention member 650n (S1909), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the opening / closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 is not satisfied (S1907: No), it is determined whether or not it is the timing of the end of the small hit (S1910). Specifically, it is determined that the timing of the end of the small hit is after a predetermined time has elapsed (3 seconds in this control example) after the above-mentioned V inlet closing condition is satisfied. As a result, the small hit end process (off of the flow path solenoid 209c) can be executed after the operation of the retention member 650n is completed, so that the ball retained in the distribution destination region 650h3 is moved to the V winning switch 650e3. You can surely enter the ball.

In the processing of S1910, when it is the timing of the end of the small hit (S1910: Yes), the small hit medium flag 203k is set to off (S1911), the small hit end processing is executed (S1912), and each solenoid is released. The scenario is cleared (S1913), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1910, if it is not the timing of the end of the small hit (S1910: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Here, the details of the small hit end processing (S1912) will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the small hit end process (S1912). This small hit end process (S1912) is a process executed when it is determined in the small hit control process that the timing is the end of the small hit.

In the small hit end process (S1912), first, the flow path solenoid 209c is set to off (S2001), and it is determined whether or not the V flag 203n is on (S2002). In the process of S2002, when it is determined that the V flag 203n is on (S2002: Yes), it means that the ball has passed through the V winning switch 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650 during the small hit game. A process for starting the execution of the jackpot game based on the passage of the V winning switch 650e3 is performed.

Specifically, the opening scenario of the first specific winning opening 65a is set based on the jackpot type corresponding to the V flag 203n (S2003), and the start of the jackpot is set based on the jackpot type corresponding to the V flag 203n (S2003). S2004). Next, the jackpot start flag 203h and the jackpot middle flag 203i are set on (S2005), and the V flag 203n is set off (S2006). Then, the time saving / medium counter 230 g is set to 0 (S2007), the value of the V-passing jackpot type value stored in the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203m is cleared (S2008), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2002, when it is determined that the V flag 203n is not on (S2002: No), it means that the ball does not pass through the V winning switch 650e3 to the small hit ball, so no big hit is given. A small hit end command is set to end (S2009). After that, the process of S2008 is executed, and this process is terminated.

The small hit end command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the jackpot end command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects a display mode of the jackpot end effect based on the prize information stored in the special figure winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display jackpot end command corresponding to the selected jackpot end display mode is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot end command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the jackpot end effect.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process (S1706) will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an electric accessory opening / closing process (S1706) executed in the main process (see FIG. 53). This electric accessory opening / closing process (S1706) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53), and is a process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640.

In the electric accessory opening / closing process, first, it is determined whether or not the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2101). The opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set by the electric accessory control process (FIGS. 46, S1005) executed in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45). In the process of S2101, if the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is not set (S2101: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2101, when the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2101: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the first opening timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2102). If it is determined in the process of S2102 that it is the first opening timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2102: Yes), the opening of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2103), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2102 that it is not the first opening timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2102: No), then it is determined whether it is the first closing timing of the electric accessory 640a. (S2104). When it is determined that it is the first closing timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2104: Yes), the closure of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2105), and then it is determined whether the time saving operation is in progress (S2106). ). If it is determined in the process of S2106 that the operation time is not shortened (S2106: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined in the process of S2106 that the operation time is shortened (S2106: Yes), a close command is set (S2107), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2104 that it is not the first closing timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2104: No), then it is determined whether it is the second opening timing of the electric accessory 640a. (S2108). When it is determined that it is the second opening timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2108: Yes), the opening of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2109), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2108 that it is not the second opening timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2108: No), then it is determined whether it is the second closing timing of the electric accessory 640a. (S2110). If it is determined that it is not the second closing timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2110: No), then it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the second entry port 640 (S2111). If it is determined that the ball has not entered the second entry port 640 (S211: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2110 that it is the second closing timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2108: Yes), and when it is determined in S2111 that the ball has entered the second entry port 640. (S211: Yes), the closure of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2112). Then, the setting of the electric accessory 640a opening operation is cleared (S2113), and this process is terminated.

Next, the storage device control process (S1709) will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a storage device control process (S1709) executed in the main process (see FIG. 53). This storage device control process (S1709) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53), and is a process for setting the opening and closing of the storage valve 750a attached to the storage device 750.

In the storage device control process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the release counter 203pa is larger than 1 (S2201). When it is determined that the value of the release counter 203pa is not larger than 1 (that is, 0 or 1) (S2201: No), then it is determined whether or not the storage release flag 203p is ON (S2202). If it is determined that the storage valve is ON (S2202: Yes), storage release (that is, opening of the storage valve 750a) is set (S2203). Then, the value of the release counter 203pa is set to 1, and the process proceeds to S2205. On the other hand, in the process of S2201, when it is determined that the value of the release counter 203pa is larger than 1 (S2201: Yes), the processes of S2201 to S2204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S2205.

In the process of S2205, it is determined whether or not the value of the release counter 203pa is 25000 (S2205). If it is determined that the value of the release counter 203pa is not 25000 (S2205: No), the value of the release counter 203pa is added by 1 (S2206), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2205, when it is determined that the value of the release counter 203pa is 25000 (S2205: Yes), storage closure (that is, closure of the storage valve 750a) is set (S2207), and the storage release flag 203p is set. Set to off (S2208). Next, the value of the release counter 203pa is set to 0, and this process ends.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 59 to 70, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S3001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S3119 (see FIG. 60) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S3002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 60, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power off command from the main control device 110 (see S3116 in FIG. 60), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power off process of S3119. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S3119 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S3002: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S3119 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S3006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S3003: Yes), the process proceeds to S3004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data corruption of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S3004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S3119 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S3003: No), and the process proceeds to S3008.

If the power off processing flag is on (S3002: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S3119, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S3004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S3004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S3004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S3006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S3005: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S3007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S3008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S3008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S3119 is executed (see S3118 in FIG. 60). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S3119 is executed, the process of S3008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S3119 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S3008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S3009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S3010), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S3011) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S3008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, so that the process of S3008 is performed via the processes of S3004 to S3006. This is the case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S3008: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S3009, is skipped, the process is shifted to S3010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S3010). Next, interrupt permission is set (S3011), and the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S3009 is that when the processing of S3008 is reached via the processing of S3004 to S3006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S3004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S3101 this time was executed (S3101), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S3101: No), the process proceeds to S3112 without performing the processes of S3102 to S3111. In the process of S3101, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S3102 to S3111 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S3112, the variation display setting process of S3113, the effect state setting process of S3114, and the specific effect setting process of S3115 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S3112 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main controller 110, and by executing the processing of S3113 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing can be used. Based on this, the settings related to the variable effect can be made without delay. Further, since the processing of S3114 is executed in a short cycle, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is changed to the display content corresponding to the current gaming state without delay based on the command received by the command determination processing. Can be made to.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S3101 (S3101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S3103 to S3111 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3102). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S3108 described later (S3103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S3104). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process proceeds to the process of S3105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S3105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S3106). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S3107). This frame button input monitoring / effect processing monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the effect is pressed, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S3108), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S3109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S3109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S3110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S3108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S3109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After the counter update process (S3111), a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control unit 110 is performed (S3112). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 61 to 65.

Next, the process proceeds to S3113. In the process of S3113, the variable display setting process is executed (S3113). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67.

Next, the process proceeds to S3114. In the process of S3114, the effect state setting process is executed (S3114). In this effect state setting process, in order to set the effect state for making each effect mode (display mode of the third symbol, display mode of the reserved symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 correspond to the game state. The process is executed, and a display effect state command is generated and set based on the set effect state. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this effect state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 68.

When the processing of S3114 is completed, the process proceeds to the processing of S3115. In the process of S3115, the specific effect setting process is executed (S3115). In this specific effect setting process, a process for setting an effect different from the variable effect for showing the lottery result of each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, normal figure) is executed. The details of this specific effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 69.

Then, when the specific effect setting process is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S3116). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S3116 (S3116: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S3118), and the power-off process is executed (S3119). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S3120), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also deleted.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S3116 (S3116: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S3117), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S3117: No), the process returns to the process of S3101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3117: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S3112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S3112). This command determination process (S3112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. It is a process for.

In the command determination process (FIG. 61, S3112), first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control unit 110 is read from the command storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed. It is determined whether or not a variation pattern related command has been received (S3201). The variation pattern-related command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (fluctuation time) of the special symbol or a command for notifying the variation pattern (fluctuation time) of the normal symbol, and is a command from the main control device 110. The selected fluctuation pattern (variation time) is output corresponding to each of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, or the normal symbol.

If it is determined that the variation pattern-related command has been received in the process of S3201 (S3201: Yes), the variation pattern-related process (S3202) is executed. This variation pattern-related processing is used to extract the variation pattern based on the variation pattern-related command output (received) from the main control device 110 and cause the display control device 114 to execute the effect display. Here, the fluctuation pattern-related processing (S3202) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 62.

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern related process (S3202). In this variation pattern-related process (S3202), it is determined which symbol the variation pattern command received this time corresponds to, and based on the determination result, the process corresponding to the received symbol is executed. .. In this fluctuation pattern-related processing (S3202), it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern-related command received this time is a fluctuation pattern command for a special symbol (special symbol) (S3301). If it is determined in the process of S3301 that the command is a variation pattern command for special figures (S3301: Yes), the process proceeds to S3302.

When it is determined in the process of S3302 that it is the variation pattern command for special figure 2 (S3302: Yes), as shown in FIG. 62, first, it is determined whether the variation pattern received this time is the variation pattern command for special figure. (S3301). Here, if it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern received this time is the fluctuation pattern command for special figure 2 (S3302), and if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command is for special figure 2 (S3302: Yes), then , Special 2 fluctuation flag 223s is set to ON (S3303), the special figure fluctuation start flag is set to ON, and the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received command (S3305), while the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is set. Will be done.

The variation start flag 223d (variation start flag for special symbols) provided in the variation display of the special symbol is set to on, the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S3305), and this process is terminated. .. On the other hand, in the processing of S3301, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern-related command received this time is not the fluctuation pattern command for special figures, the fluctuation start flag 223u for normal drawings is set to ON (S3306), and the received fluctuation pattern is set. The variation pattern type is extracted from the command (S3307), and this process ends. The variation pattern type extracted here indicates that the variation pattern type of the special symbol is the variation pattern type of the special symbol in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 for each special symbol type (corresponding first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol). It is stored in an identifiable format, and in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 66) described later, the start of the variable display effect of the special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the special symbol are set for the display control device 114. It is used for notification (when setting a variation pattern command for displaying a special symbol).

Returning to FIG. 61, the description will be continued. In the process of S3201, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern related command has not been received (S3201: No), it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3203). If it is determined that a stop type command (either a special figure 1 stop type command, a special figure 2 stop type command, or a normal figure stop type command) has been received (S3203: Yes), it corresponds to the type of the received command. The stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON (S3204). Specifically, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received, the stop type selection flag 223e corresponding to the first special symbol is set to on, and when the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the second special The stop type selection flag 223e corresponding to the symbol is set to on, and when the normal symbol stop type command is received, the stop type selection flag 223e corresponding to the normal symbol is set to on.

When the processing of S3204 is completed, next, the stop type (one of complete deviation (disengagement), reach deviation, small hit, and jackpot (hit)) is extracted from the received stop type command (S3205), and this processing is performed. finish. The stop type extracted in the process of S3205 is stored in the voice lamp control device 113 in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221. Then, it is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 66) described later is executed, and is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

In the process of S3203, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S3203: No), it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3206). When it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received (S3206: Yes), the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 included in the received hold ball number command are included. (That is, the number of reserved balls in the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is extracted, and the corresponding counter value provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is set according to the extracted counter value. The counter value is updated (S3207). More specifically, when the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is stored. When the value is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c.

In the processing of S3207. When a normal symbol hold ball number command indicating the number of hold balls of a normal symbol is received, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter (that is, the number of hold balls of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol), which is not shown, is extracted and extracted. The corresponding counter value provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is also updated according to the counter value.

When the process of S3207 is completed, the process related to the number of reserved balls is executed (S3208). In this reserved ball number-related process (S3208), a process for setting various flags and display commands is executed based on the reserved ball number in the special figure 2. Here, the reserved ball number-related processing (S3208) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the contents of the reserved ball number related processing (S3208).

When the process related to the number of reserved balls (S3208) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls is updated in Special 2 (Special Figure 2) (S3401). Here, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special 2 is not updated (S3401: No), that is, when the number of reserved balls command received this time is not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2, this process is terminated as it is. .. On the other hand, in the process of S3401, when it is determined that the number of special 2 reserved balls has been updated (S3401: Yes), then it is determined whether the number of special 2 reserved balls has been updated to 1 (S3402). Here, it is determined whether the number of special 2 reserved balls has been updated to 1, that is, whether the number of special 2 reserved balls has changed from "0" to "1", that is, from the state where there is no special 2 reserved ball to the state where there is. To do.

In the process of S3402, when it is determined that the number of special 2 hold balls has been updated to 1 (S3402: Yes), the special 2 hold flag 223n is set to on, and then the end effect execution flag 223x is set to on. It is determined whether or not the flag is set (S3404). When it is determined that the end effect execution flag 223x is set to ON, that is, when it is determined that the end effect (see FIG. 19B) is being executed by the third symbol display device 81. (S3404: Yes), a display victory command is set (S3405), and this process ends.

When the display victory command is set, the character "victory" is displayed as the effect result of the end effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 20A), which is advantageous to the player. It is notified that the state will continue. If the ball wins a prize in Special Figure 2 during the period during which the end effect is being executed, the effect may be switched even during the end effect, or the effect may be switched in advance as in the present embodiment. At the end of the end effect executed for the specified period, the special figure 2 may be notified that the ball has won a prize.

In addition, as in the present embodiment, the timing at which the ball wins in the special figure 2 (second ball entry port 640) and the effect that the ball wins in the special figure 2 (second ball entry port 640) are notified. If there is a possibility that a time lag may occur between the timing and the timing of the operation, for example, the reserved symbol displaying the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 may be deleted during the end effect execution period. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being notified of the effect result of the end effect due to the increase in the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 even though the end effect is continued.

Returning to FIG. 63, the description will be continued. In the process of S3402, if it is determined that the number of special 2 reserved balls has not been updated to 1 (S3402: No), then it is determined whether the number of special 2 reserved balls has been updated to the upper limit (4) (S3406). ), When it is determined that the update has been performed (S3406: Yes), the special 2 hold upper limit flag 223p is set to ON (S3407: Yes), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3406 that the number of special 2 reserved balls has not been updated to the upper limit, the process of S3407 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640 (starting winning) or the ball passes through the through gate 67. Therefore, every time there is a start winning prize, the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 are set by the processing of S2210 as the main control device. It is possible to match the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, respectively. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d or special of the main control device 110. Even if the value deviates from the value of the symbol 2 hold ball counter 203e, if the hold ball number command is notified based on the start winning, the special symbol 1 hold ball counter 223b or the special symbol of the voice lamp control device 113 The value of the 2 reserved ball counter 223c can be modified to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e of the main controller 110.

Further, in the process of S3206, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S3206: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information related command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3209). If it is determined that the winning information-related command has been received in the processing of S3209 (S3209: Yes), the winning information-related processing is executed (S3210). In this prize information-related process (S3210), various flags and various counters that are referred to for setting various effects executed by the third symbol display device 81 are set. As a result, based on the lottery result of the pending special symbol, the special symbol executed before the change of the pending special symbol starts (that is, before the change of the target special symbol). During the variable display), it is possible to execute an effect showing the lottery result of the special symbol for which the winning information command is transmitted, and the lottery result of one special symbol is displayed to the player by using the variable display period of a plurality of special symbols. Suggestion notification can be made, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

Here, the winning information-related processing (S3210) will be described with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information-related processing (S3210). When this prize information-related process (S3210) is executed, first, it is determined whether the prize information-related command received this time is a prize information command related to a special figure (special symbol) (S3501). If it is determined that the winning information command is related to the special figure (S3501: Yes), the received winning information command is stored in the special drawing winning information storage area 223a (S3502), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3501, if it is determined that the prize information-related command received this time is not the prize information command related to the special figure (special symbol) (it is the prize information command related to the general figure) (S3501: No), the prize is won. The information is stored in the prize information storage area 223t for general drawing (S3503), and this process is terminated.

In the gaming machine in which the winning information of the special symbol (pre-reading of the special symbol) and the winning information of the normal symbol (pre-reading of the normal symbol) are executed, the output is output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. The output timing of each winning information command is the same, and when determining by the winning information related processing (S3210), a priority is set for each winning information command, and only the winning information command having the higher priority is determined. It may be configured as follows. As a result, it is not necessary to execute different discrimination processes for each prize information command, the processing load can be reduced, and the types and numbers of prize information commands discriminated on the voice lamp control device 113 side are irregular. Since it can be reduced to, it is possible to easily perform an unintended effect of the player.

That is, the winning information included in the winning information command is acquired when the ball enters each entry port (first entry port 64 or second entry opening 640) or through gate 67 by the main control device 110. Since each of the counter values is the result of executing the determination in advance before the lottery based on the entry is executed, or the information indicating the value based on the counter value, the voice lamp control device 113 Even if the winning information command is not acquired by the side, the game will not be hindered. Therefore, when the predetermined conditions are met (the special drawing winning information command and the general drawing winning information command are received at the same time). In some cases), it is configured so as not to intentionally acquire one of the winning information commands, thereby achieving the above-mentioned effect. Further, in a configuration in which there are a plurality of acquisition conditions (entry) for one symbol (first special symbol), such as the left first entrance 64a and the right first entrance 64b of the present embodiment, a prize is won. The information command includes information that allows the voice lamp control device 113 to identify which acquisition condition is based on the winning information command, and the processing based on the winning information command is based on the identification result. May be variable. Specifically, for example, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a winning information command based on the ball entering the left first ball entry port 64a, an effect based on the received winning information command (so-called look-ahead effect). May be configured to be performed more frequently than when a winning information command based on a ball entering the right first ball entry port 64b is received. As a result, the frequency with which the look-ahead effect is executed can be easily changed even for the same first special symbol. According to the configuration shown in the above example, during the game aiming at the left first entrance 64a (left-handed game), the look-ahead effect based on the first special symbol can be executed (frequently executed), and the right first. During the game aiming at the entrance 64b (right-handed game), the look-ahead effect based on the first special symbol may be difficult to execute (can be executed with a low probability). As a result, it is possible to set the effect mode according to the game state.

Returning to FIG. 61, the description will be continued. In the process of S3209, when it is determined that the winning information-related command has not been received (S3209: No), it is determined whether or not the winning-related command has been received next (S3211). When the hit-related command is received (S3211: Yes), the hit-related process (S3212) is executed.

Here, the hit-related processing (S3212) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 65. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a hit-related process (S3212). This hit-related process (S3212) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 61) that a hit-related command has been received.

In the hit-related process, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot start command has been received (S3601). When it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S3601: Yes), the jackpot start command for display is set (S3602), and this process ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting (notifying) the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S3601: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S3603). In the process of S3603, when it is determined that the round number command has been received (S3603: Yes), 1 is added to the round number accumulation counter (S3604). After that, the display round number command is set based on the round number cumulative counter (S3605), and this process ends.

If it is determined in the process of S3603 that the round number command has not been received (S3603: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot end command has been received (S3606). When it is determined that the jackpot end command has been received in the process of S3606 (S3606: Yes), the display jackpot end command is set (S3607), and the present process is terminated.

In the process of S3606, when it is determined that the jackpot end command has not been received (S3606: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit start command has been received (S3608).

If it is determined in the process of S3608 that the small hit start command has been received (S3608: Yes), the small hit start command for display is set based on the small hit type (S3609), and this process ends. In the process of S3608, when it is determined that the small hit start command has not been received (S3608: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit end command has been received (S3610).

In the process of S3610, when it is determined that the small hit end command has been received (S3610: Yes), a small hit end command for display is set in order to execute an effect suggesting the end of the small hit game (S3611). , End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S3610, when it is determined that the small hit end command has not been received (S3610: No), it is determined whether or not the V passing command has been received (S3612).

In the process of S3612, if it is determined that the V pass command has been received (S3612: Yes), the process based on the entry of the second variable winning device 650 into the V winning switch 650e3 is executed, and the display V passing command is executed. Is set (S3613), and this process is terminated. In this embodiment, there is a measuring means for measuring the number of times the V passing command is received during the period when the flag 223i in the consecutive villas is set to ON, and for display corresponding to the number of times measured by the measuring means. The V-pass command can be set. Specifically, the display V passage command is set so that the privilege effect is executed only when the number of measurements by the measuring means exceeds a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). As a result, the player can be made to aim for more V passages, and the game can be enthusiastically performed.

In addition, other conditions may be set as the condition for setting the content of the display V passing command. For example, the number of small hit games that did not pass V and the number of small hit games that passed V may be set respectively. A means for measuring and calculating the ratio may be provided, and the content of the display V passage command may be set based on the ratio calculated by the means. As a result, a player who has executed many small hit games that do not pass V can execute a blessing effect when the V has passed, or a player who has a high percentage of small hit games that have passed V. On the other hand, it is possible to execute a production to congratulate that fact.

If it is determined in the process of S3612 that the V-pass command has not been received (S3612: No), this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 61, the description will be continued. In the process of S3211, when it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S3211: No), then it is determined whether or not the notification command has been received (S3213). When it is determined that the notification command has been received in the processing of S3213 (S3213: Yes), the notification voice is set, the display command for notification is set (S3214), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S3213, when it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S3213: No), it is determined whether or not the status command has been received (S3215). When it is determined that the status command has been received (S3215: Yes), the status information based on the received status command is stored in the status storage area 223k (S3216), and this process is terminated. The state commands received here include a normal state command for indicating that the game state is a normal state, a jackpot state command for indicating that the game state is a jackpot state, and a small hit state for the game state. A small hit state command to indicate that the game state is a time saving state, a time saving state command to indicate that the game state is a time saving state, the electric accessory 640a is operating, and how many times it is operating. This is a state command related to the game state that can be grasped on the main control device 110 side, such as an operation state command for indicating.

The above-mentioned state command is configured to be received from the main control device 110 when the gaming state is changed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the process of determining the content of the received state command from becoming complicated and reduce the processing load. Further, when a power failure or the like occurs and the data in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is erased, the state command currently set in the power failure recovery process is output. The output timing of the state command is not limited to this, and the currently set game state may be output periodically, or the game state does not shift and a specific output condition is satisfied. In this case (for example, during a jackpot game, the timing when a predetermined round is reached, or in the normal state, the timing when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number), the status command may be output. As a result, the current gaming state can be more reliably grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

On the other hand, in the process of S3215, if it is determined that the state command has not been received (S3215: No), then the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S3217). In the process of S3217, for example, it is determined whether or not a stop command has been received from the main control device 110, and when it is determined that the stop command has been received, a display stop command is set based on the received command, or a game is played. When a ball entry command set based on the ball entering each entry port provided on the board 13 is received, the number of entry balls is accumulated for each type of entry opening where the ball enters. , Executes a process such as setting a command for the number of balls to be displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the variation display setting process (S3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S3113). This variation display setting process (S3113) is one process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation display setting process (see FIG. 66) is a process executed in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, in the present embodiment, each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, normal figure) corresponding to the main symbol mainly displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is arranged according to the set effect state. Designed to be variable. In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is set for each of the above-mentioned symbols and notified to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 sets the main symbol (the symbol to be displayed in the first display area Dm) and the secondary symbol (the second) based on the received display variation pattern command and the contents of the received display effect state command. The effect display corresponding to the design (design to be displayed in the display area Dn) is displayed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 in the gaming machine in which different effect displays are executed corresponding to a plurality of effect states.

In the variation display setting process (S3113), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3701). Then, when it is determined that the special figure variation start flag 223d is off (S3701: No), the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so the process proceeds to S3707. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223d for the special symbol is on (S3701: Yes), the detailed mode of the variation display of the special symbol this time is based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110. Each process of S3702 to S3706 for determining is executed.

More specifically, first, the variation start flag 223d for special figures is set to off (S3702), then the extracted variation pattern is acquired (S3703), and it is determined whether or not the time saving medium flag 223g is on (S3702). S3704). In the process of S3704, if it is determined that the time saving medium flag 223g is on (S3704: Yes), then the time saving medium flag is set to off (S3705), and the variation pattern command for displaying the special figure is set (S3704: Yes). The process proceeds to S3706) and S3707. On the other hand, in the process of S3704, if it is determined that the time saving / medium flag 223 g is not on (off) (S3704: No), the process of S3705 is skipped and the process of S3706 is executed.

When executing the process of S3706, 1 is subtracted from the value of the corresponding special symbol reserved ball number counter (special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c) to obtain the subtracted value. Based on this, the data in the special figure winning information storage area 223a included in the command storage area is shifted.

In the process of S3707, it is determined whether the flag indicating the stop type of the special figure is set to on among the stop type selection flags 223e of the RAM 223 (S3707). Then, when it is determined that the flag indicating the stop type of the special figure is off among the stop type selection flags 223e (S3707: No), the process proceeds to S3712. On the other hand, in the processing of S3707, when it is determined that the flag indicating the stop type of the special figure is on among the stop type selection flags 223e (S3707: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e (for special figure) is turned off. (S3708), then the stop type extracted in the process of S3205 of the command determination process (see FIG. 61) is acquired (S3709), and the acquired stop type is set as it is (S3710). Then, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set (S3711). After that, the normal map variation display setting process (S3712) is executed, and this process is terminated.

This normal map variation display setting process (S3712) is a process executed to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81 when a variation pattern command related to the normal map variation is received from the main control device 110. Here, the normal map variation display setting process (S3712) will be described with reference to FIG. 67.

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal map variation display setting process (S3712). When the normal map variation display setting process (S3712) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the normal map variation start flag 223u is set to ON. Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223u for the normal map is off (S3801: No), the fluctuation pattern command related to the normal map has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S3810 is started. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223u for the normal diagram is on (S3801: Yes), the detailed mode of the variation display of the special symbol this time is based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110. Each process of S3802 to S3810 for determining the above is executed.

Of the various processes executed in the normal map variation display setting process (S3712) of FIG. 67, the portion where the same process as the variation display setting process (S3113) described with reference to FIG. 66 is executed is The detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S3801, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223u for normal drawing is on (S3801: Yes), S3702 and S3703 for special figures executed in the above-mentioned fluctuation display setting process (S3113). For the processing, the processing of S3802 and S3803 whose target is changed to the normal diagram is executed, and then it is determined whether or not the timing at which the variation based on the received variation pattern command is executed is the time saving state (S3804). Here, the determination is made based on the state information stored in the state storage area 223k and the time reduction remaining period information stored in the time saving remaining period storage area 223h.

In the process of S3804, when it is determined that the fluctuation start timing is in the time saving state (S3804: Yes), then the timing at which the fluctuation based on the received fluctuation pattern command ends (in the case of a hit, the electric accessory 640a). (S3805), it is determined whether or not the operation content of the above is set in the time saving state (S3805). Here, by calculating the difference between the time saving remaining period information stored in the time saving remaining period storage area 223h and the fluctuation time included in the acquired fluctuation pattern, it is determined whether or not there is a time saving state at the timing when the fluctuation ends. To do.

In the process of S3805, when it is determined that the fluctuation end timing (electric accessory 640a operation start timing) is in the short time (S3805: Yes), the normal figure valid flag 223q is set to ON (S3806), and then the fluctuation It is determined whether the end timing is within 2 seconds of the time saving end (S3807). In the processing of S3807, if it is determined that the fluctuation end timing is within 2 seconds of the time reduction end (S3807: Yes), the replacement flag 223v is set to ON (S3808), and the display fluctuation pattern command (for normal drawing) is set. ) Is set (S3810), and the process proceeds to S3811.

On the other hand, in the process of S3804 or S3805, when it is determined to be No, the normal figure valid flag 223q is set to off (S3809), and the process proceeds to the process of S3810 described above. If it is determined in the processing of S3807 that the fluctuation end timing is not within 2 seconds of the end of working hours (S3807: No), the processing of S3808 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S3810.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the same processes of S3811 to S3815 as described above for S3707 to S3711 are executed, and this process is completed. The processing to be executed in S3811 to S3815 is that the target of the stop type command is the stop type command for special figures in S3707 to S3711, and the stop type command for normal drawings in S3811 to S3815. Since only the differences are different and the other contents are the same, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the effect state setting process (S3114) executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect state setting process (S3114). This effect state setting process (S3114) is a process for setting the effect state according to the state command output from the main control device 110 and the current game situation, and is set to the effect state set in this process. By outputting the based information (display effect state command) to the display control device 114, the display mode of each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, normal figure) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and The display mode of the number of reserved symbols (number of reserved symbols) of each symbol is configured to be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the effect state.

When the effect state setting process (S3114) is executed, first, the state information (game state) stored in the state storage area 223k is read out (S3901). This state information is stored in the state storage area 223k based on the state command received from the main control unit 110 in the above-mentioned command determination process (see S3112 in FIG. 61). Therefore, it is used to determine the current gaming state on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

Next, with reference to the state information stored in the state storage area 223k, it is determined whether or not the present (state information stored in the state storage area 223k) indicates the start of a jackpot (S3902). Here, if it is determined that it indicates the start of a big hit (S3902: Yes), the flag 223i in the consecutive villas is set to ON (S3903), and the process proceeds to S3918. On the other hand, in the process of S3902, when it is determined that it does not indicate the start of the jackpot (S3902: No), it is determined whether it indicates the end of the jackpot next (S3904).

If it is determined in the process of S3904 that it indicates the end of the jackpot (S3904: Yes), then it is determined whether to shift to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot (S3905). The determination of S3905 is determined based on the jackpot type information stored in the state storage area 223k. In the process of S3905, if it is determined that the process shifts to the time saving state (S3905: Yes), the time saving medium flag 223 g is set to ON (S3906), and then the process proceeds to S3918.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3905 that the time saving state is not shifted (S3905: No), the flag 223i in the consecutive villas is set to off (S3907), and the privilege effect execution flag 223w is set to off (S3908). The end effect execution flag 223x is set to off (S3909), and the process proceeds to S3918.

If it is determined in the process of S3904 that it does not indicate the end of the jackpot (S3904: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing to end the time saving state (S3910). When it is determined that it is the timing to end the time saving state (S3910: Yes), then the special 2 hold flag 223n for determining the presence or absence of the hold storage of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is set to ON. It is determined whether or not it is done (S3911). Here, if it is determined that the special 2 hold flag 223n is not on (off) (S3911: No), the consecutive villa flag 223i is set to off (S3912), and the process proceeds to S3918. Further, when it is determined that the special 2 hold flag 223n is set to ON (S3911: Yes), the process proceeds to S3918 in the same manner.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the flag 223i in the consecutive villas is set to on when the big hit is started, and the time saving state is not given after the big hit is finished, or when the time saving state is finished, the special figure 2 shows. When the hold memory is "0", the flag 223i in the consecutive villas is set to off. As a result, during the jackpot game, while the time saving state and the state in which the change (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed when the time saving state is changed to the normal state are repeatedly executed. (During a specific period that is advantageous to the player), the flag 223i during the consecutive villas can be continuously set to ON. Therefore, by measuring various values during the period when the flag 223i in the consecutive villas is turned on (for example, the number of times the jackpot is executed, the number of balls acquired, etc.), various values in the consecutive villa mode can be easily obtained. In the pachinko machine 10 having a continuous villa mode that shifts to a plurality of different gaming states, the processing can be simplified.

Returning to FIG. 68, the description will be continued. In the processing of S3910, when it is determined that it is not the timing when the time saving state ends (it is not the time saving end timing) (S3910: No), it is determined whether it is the small hit start timing (S3913), and the small hit start timing is used. If it is determined to be present (S3913: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current state is the normal state (S3914). In the process of S3914, if it is determined that the current state is the normal state (S3914: Yes), the pseudo effect flag 223r is set to ON (S3915), and the process proceeds to the process of S3918. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S3914 that the current state is not the normal state (the time saving state) (S3914: No), the above-mentioned processing of S3915 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S3918.

In the process of S3913, when it is determined that the current is not the small hit start timing (S3913: No), then it is determined whether the current is the small hit end timing (S3916), and when it is the small hit end timing. (S3916: Yes) sets the pseudo-effect flag 223r to off (S3917), and proceeds to the process of S3918. Here, in the case of the small hit end timing, if it is determined that the pseudo effect flag 223r is not set to ON (that is, the small hit end timing executed during the time saving state), S3917 The process proceeds to the process of S3918 without executing the process.

If it is determined in the process of S3916 that the current timing is not the end timing of the small hit (S3916: No), the process proceeds to the process of S3918. In the process of S3918, the current effect state is selected based on the effect state selection table 222b (S3918). Then, a display effect state command indicating the selected effect state is set (S3919), and this process ends.

Next, the specific effect setting process (S3115) executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the contents of the specific effect fixed process (S3115). This specific effect setting process (S3115) is a process for setting a display command for displaying the specific effect on the third symbol display device 81 when the specific condition is satisfied.

In the first embodiment, a privilege effect is executed when the number of reserved balls (number of reserved balls) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) reaches the upper limit (4) during the time saving state (see FIG. 21). In the case where the second special symbol (special figure 2) is not stored on hold during the time saving state, and the remaining period of the time saving state (variable remaining period of special figure 1) becomes a predetermined period (10 seconds). The end effect (see FIG. 19B) executed in 1 is configured to be executed as a specific effect.

When the display control device 114 receives a display command indicating the content of the specific effect, the display mode corresponding to the received specific effect content regardless of the variable display state (whether or not it is changing) of each symbol. Is configured to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When the specific effect setting process (S3115) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the consecutive villa flag 223i is set to on (S4001), and the consecutive villa flag 223i is not set to on (set to off). If it is determined (S4001: No), this process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the flag 223i in the consecutive villas is set to ON (S4001: Yes), then it is determined whether the privilege effect execution flag 223w is set to ON (S4002), and the flag is set to ON. If it is determined that there is no such case (S4002: No), it is determined whether or not the special 2 hold upper limit flag 223p is set to ON (S4003).

In the processing of S4003, if the special 2 hold upper limit flag 223p is set to on (S4003: Yes), the display privilege effect effect command is set (S4004), and the privilege effect execution flag 223w is set to on (S4005). ), End this process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special 2 hold upper limit flag 223p is not set to on (set to off) (S4003: No), or in the processing of S4002, the privilege effect execution flag 223w is already set to on. If it is determined that this is done (S4002: Yes), the process proceeds to S4006.

In the process of S4006, it is determined whether or not the end effect execution flag 223x is set to ON (S4006). Here, when it is determined that the end effect execution flag 223x is not set to on (set to off) (S4006: No), then it is determined whether the special 2 hold flag 223n is set to on. (S4007), when it is determined that the special 2 hold flag 223n is not set to on (set to off) (S4007; No), it is determined whether the time saving remaining period is 10 seconds (S4008). ).

In the process of S4008, the information indicating the time saving remaining period stored in the time saving remaining period storage area 223h is read out and the determination is executed. In the process of S4008, when it is determined that the time saving remaining period is 10 seconds (S4008: Yes), the display consecutive villa end effect command is set (S4009), and the end effect execution flag 223x is set to ON (S4010). ), End this process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the end effect execution flag 223x is set to ON in the processing of S4006 (S4006: Yes), or when the special 2 hold flag 223n is set to ON in the processing of S4007 (S4007). : Yes) skips the processes of S4008 to S4010 and ends the main process as it is.

As described above, in the specific effect setting process (S3315) of the present embodiment described with reference to FIG. 69, the state in which the flag 223i in the consecutive villas is set to on as the first specific effect. When the special 2 hold upper limit flag 223p is set to on (when the number of hold storages in special figure 2 reaches the upper limit) during (time saving state), the privilege effect (see FIG. 22) is configured to be executed. There is. By executing this privilege effect, it is possible to provide the player with a high-value-added effect, so that the player can enthusiastically perform the game in the time-saving state. In addition, when the privilege effect is executed, the main symbol Dmc of the normal figure is not displayed, so that the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 cannot be increased (the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 has already reached the upper limit). In this state), it is possible to suppress the effect of inciting the ball to enter the second entry port 640, and it is possible to suppress the player from giving a great sense of discomfort.

Further, since the above-mentioned privilege effect is configured to be continuously executed until the flag 223i in the consecutive villa is set to off (until the consecutive villa mode ends), it is added value to the player. Since it is possible to provide a high-value production for a long period of time (at least until all the reserved memory numbers in Special Figure 2 are consumed), the high-value-added production is completed in a short period of time, and the player's willingness to play It is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as reducing the value.

In addition, as the second specific effect, the number of reserved memories of special figure 2 is set to "" without acquiring the reserved memory of special figure 2 while the flag 223i in the consecutive villas is set to on (time saving state). There is an end effect (see FIG. 19B) that suggests that the consecutive villa mode will end when the remaining period of the time saving state reaches a predetermined period (10 seconds remaining). It is configured to be executed. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily grasp the possibility that the consecutive villa mode will end, and the period advantageous for the player (the consecutive villa mode) will end without being noticed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a problem.

Next, the counter update process (S3111) executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the contents of the counter update process (S3111). This counter update process (S3111) is a process for updating the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j and calculating the elapsed time (remaining time) of the executed fluctuation display. The information regarding the remaining time (time saving remaining period) of the variable time referred to here (time saving remaining period command for display) is output to the display control device 114 and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. , Refer to when setting the effect content in the voice lamp control device 113.

When the counter update process (S3111) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the current fluctuation time counter 223j is "0" (S4101). When it is determined to be "0" (S4101: Yes), that is, when the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is not updated (the state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation in the time saving state is not executed), then, It is determined whether or not the current time is during the time reduction (in the time reduction state) (S4102). Here, the determination is made based on the state information stored in the state storage area 223k.

If it is determined in the process of S4102 that the current time is being shortened (S4102: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the timing when the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is started (S4103), and the special figure 1 is shown. When it is determined that it is the timing to start the fluctuation (S4103: Yes), the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is set to "1" (S4104), and the remaining fluctuation time is based on the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j. The period (time saving remaining period) is calculated, and the information indicating the calculated time saving remaining period is stored in the time saving remaining period storage area 223h (S4105).

After that, the display time reduction remaining period command is set (S4106), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S4102, when it is determined that the current time is not in the time saving (in the time saving state) (S4102: No), or in the processing of S4103, when it is determined that the present is not the start timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation. (S4103: No) skips the processes of S4104 to S4106 and ends this process.

In the process of S4101, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is not "0" (S4101: No), that is, the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j has already been updated (Special Figure 1 in the time saving state). In the state where the fluctuation is executed), it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is "150,000" (whether 150 seconds have passed) (S4107). Here, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is not "150,000" ("less than 150,000") (S4107: Yes), the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is added by "1" (S4108). , The process proceeds to the process of S4105 described above. On the other hand, in the processing of S4107, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is "150,000" (S4107: Yes), the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is set to "0" (S4109), and S4105 Move to processing.

In this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special figure 1 executed during the time saving state is all defined as "150 seconds" regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 1, and therefore, it is shown in FIG. 70. As shown, the upper limit of the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is set to "150,000" corresponding to "150 seconds", but the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the special figure 1 executed during the time saving state is a plurality of fluctuation patterns (variation time). If the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be selected from the fluctuation time), the upper limit value of the fluctuation time counter 223j can be reset based on the content of the fluctuation pattern to be executed (the fluctuation time to be set). It may be configured to determine whether the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j being updated has reached the set upper limit value.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 84. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 71, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR type ROM has a high speed because a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S5001), and the display control device 114 enables various controls for the third symbol display device 81 to be executed. To start.

Here, the boot process (S5001) will be described with reference to FIG. 72. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S5001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S5101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S5102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S5101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S5102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S5102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S5103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S5104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S5001 in FIG. 71) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S5002 in FIG. 71) (S5105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the main boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S5001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 72, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S5101 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S5101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S5102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S5103 to S5105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S5101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S5101. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S5102 and S5102, the processes of S5103 to S5105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes of S5103 to S5105 may be executed without performing the processes of S5101 and S5102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 71. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S5002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S5003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S5003, then the variable image at power-on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S5004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S5004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S5005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 82 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S6502 in FIG. 82 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 73 (b)), the power-on main image and the power-on variation image (not shown), which are images at power-on, are simply drawn. The command determination process (see S5308 in FIG. 73 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S5309 in FIG. 73 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the NAND flash memory 234a can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that the character ROM 234 is used, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, the ball entered the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize), and the start instruction of the variation effect was controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110. When the display variation pattern command is received via the device 113, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image (not shown) at power-on is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect is performed. be able to. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed for a long time when the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, the power failure is restored. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S5005, the interrupt permission is set (S5006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S5006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 73 (a). FIG. 73A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S5201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 73 (b). FIG. 73B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 36) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 73B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S5301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S5301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed, so it is not an image at power-on (not shown) but a normal effect. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the command determination process (S5302) is executed, and then the display setting process (S5303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S5302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 74 to 78.

In the display setting process (S5303), one frame of images to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S5302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S5304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S5303) or the simple display setting process (S5309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S5305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S5306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S5305), which are determined in the task process (S5304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 59 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 84.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S5307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S5307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (for example, jackpot A, jackpot B, front-rear reach, reach other than front-rear reach, complete loss) , The chance eye) is compared with the stop type counter and the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S5301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S5308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S5309) is executed to display S5304. Move to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 74 to 78, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S5302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 74, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S5401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S5401: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S5401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S5303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S5402), and then the command The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S5403).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S5404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S5404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S5405), the process returns to the process of S5401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S5405) will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (a). FIG. 75A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, the effect state stored in the effect state storage area 233k is read out (S5501). Then, among the variation display data tables corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command, the variation display data table corresponding to the effect state read by the processing of S5501 is determined, and the determined variation display data table is used. It is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5502).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S5501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter fluctuation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 is used for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S5502 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5503). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S5502 is turned on, and other fluctuations are performed. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S5504). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of S5503, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5502, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S5505), and the pointer Initialize 233f to 0 (S5506). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5507), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S5506, from the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5502. , The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S5503e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S5505, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the display pattern command processing in the present embodiment, the display content (effect content) of the third symbol display device 81 is based on the display variation pattern command output (received) from the voice lamp control device 113. ), The display content (display mode of each symbol, display mode of the number of pending symbols of each symbol) corresponding to the output (received) display effect status command from the voice lamp control device 113 is determined. It is configured. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 15 to 22, it is possible to execute the display suitable for each effect state. Further, in order to discriminate between the display effect state command and the display variation pattern command on the display control device 114 side and execute the process of determining the display content, the voice lamp control device 113 corresponds to each effect state. It is not necessary to set the display variation pattern command, and the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, in the variation pattern command processing, the display content corresponding to the effect state is determined, and the determined display content is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but other than that. As a configuration, based on the display variation pattern command, the above-mentioned display processing is executed for the display contents corresponding to all the effect states, and among them, only the display contents corresponding to the currently set effect states are the players. It may be configured to be visibly displayed on the screen. Specifically, a display layer is provided corresponding to each effect state, and a process of transmitting a layer other than the layer corresponding to the set effect state is executed, or a set effect state is executed. The layer corresponding to is placed in the foreground. As a result, even if the effect state is changed while the display based on the variation pattern command is being executed and the display content is changed, it is possible to immediately respond. Further, regarding the area where the common display contents are always displayed regardless of the set effect state (for example, the second display area Dn), the display is displayed on another layer, and the display effect state command is referred to. Instead, the display content may be determined only by the fluctuation pattern command.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 74. In the processing of S5404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S5404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S5406). If there is a display variable type command (S5406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S5407), and the process returns to the process of S5401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S5407) will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (b). FIG. 75B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variable type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, complete off, or chance eye) indicated by the display stop type command. (S5601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 73 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S5602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S5602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned off. (S5603), this stop type command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S5602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S5304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S5602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S5603, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, but the character ROM 234 is used as a normal video before drawing is performed by the third symbol display device 81. The image data required for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the drawing responsiveness of the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S5601, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is completely out of order. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of S5602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, which causes the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete disengagement. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 74. In the processing of S5406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S5406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S5408), and the rear surface is determined. If there is an image change command (S5408: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S5409), and the process returns to the process of S5401.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S5409) will be described with reference to FIG. 76 (a). FIG. 76A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S6503) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S5701). .. Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images are turned on. The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S5702), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S5701 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S5702. .. When the specified back image type is back B or back C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display any of the back images A to C according to the back image type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set by S5702 is used. The type of back image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident) in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S5702, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 74. In the processing of S5408, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S5408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S5410), and there is an error command. If (S5410: Yes), the error command processing is executed (S5411), and the process returns to the processing of S5401.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S5411) will be described with reference to FIG. 76 (b). FIG. 76B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S5801). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S5802), and the error command The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S5801, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S5802 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process in S5802, the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 74. In the processing of S5410, if it is determined that there is no error command (S5410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display effect state command among the unprocessed commands (S5412), and the display effect is displayed. If there is a state command (S5412: Yes), the effect state information based on the received command is stored in the effect state storage area 233k (S5413), and the process returns to the process of S5401.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 74. In the process of S5412, if it is determined that there is no display effect state command (S5412: No), it is determined whether or not there is a hit-related command (S5440). If it is determined that there is a hit-related command in the process of S5440 (S5440: Yes), the hit-related command process is executed (S5441), and the process returns to the process of S5401. On the other hand, in the processing of S5440, if it is determined that there is no hit-related command (S5440: No), other command processing is executed (S5414), and the process returns to the processing of S5401.

In the processing of S5401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S5401: Yes). ), The processes of S5402 to S5413 and S5419 are executed again. Then, the processes of S5401 to S5413 and S5419 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S5401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this process is performed. End the command judgment process.

The simple command determination process (S5308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 73B) is also processed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment process, the commands required to display the power-on image (not shown) from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display Only the stop type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 75 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 75 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and others. For the command of, the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 75A) executed in this case, in the processing of S5501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S5502, the process of writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, the details of the hit-related command processing (S5441) will be described with reference to FIG. 77. This hit-related command process (S5441) is a process executed when it is determined that there is a hit-related command in the command determination process (see FIG. 146).

In the hit-related command processing (S5441), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot start command (S5901). If it is determined in the process of S5901 that there is a hit start command for display (S5901: Yes), the jackpot start command process is executed (S5902), and the process proceeds to the process of S5903.

Here, the details of the jackpot start command processing (S5902) will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (a). FIG. 78 (a) is a flowchart showing the jackpot start command process (S5902). This jackpot start command process (S5902) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit-related command process (FIG. 77) that there is a jackpot start command for display, and a third effect suggesting the start of a jackpot is produced. This is a process for displaying on the symbol display device 81.

In the jackpot start command processing (S5902), first, the jackpot start display data table corresponding to the command (for example, corresponding to the jackpot type) is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6001). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6002). After that, based on the jackpot start display data table, the time data is set in the time counter 233h (S6003), the pointer 233f is initialized (S6004), and the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S6005). This process ends.

Returning to FIG. 77, the description will continue. If it is determined that there is no display jackpot start command in the process of S5901 (S5901: No), the process proceeds to the process of S5903. When the processing of S5901 or S5902 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command (S5903). If it is determined in the process of S5903 that there is a display round number command, the round number command process is executed (S5904), and the process proceeds to the process of S5905.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S5904) will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (b). FIG. 78 (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command process (S5904). This round number command process (S5904) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit-related command process (FIG. 77) that a display round number command has been received, and the number of rounds during the jackpot game is updated. This is a process for displaying the effect of the command on the third symbol display device 81.

In the round number command process (S5904), first, the round number display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6101). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S6102), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the round number display data table (S6103). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S6104), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S6105), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 77, the description will continue. If it is determined in the process of S5903 that there is no display round number command (S5903: No), the process proceeds to the process of S5905. When the processing of S5903 or S5904 is completed, it is determined whether or not the display jackpot end command has been received (S5905).

If it is determined in the process of S5905 that there is a jackpot end command for display (S5905: Yes), the jackpot end command process is executed (S5906), and the process proceeds to the process of S5907.

Here, the details of the jackpot end command processing will be described. This jackpot end command process (S5906) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit-related command determination process (FIG. 77) that a jackpot end command has been received, and a third effect suggesting the end of the jackpot game is produced. This is a process for displaying on the symbol display device 81.

In the jackpot end command processing (S5906), first, the jackpot end display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d. Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared, and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the jackpot end display data table. After that, the pointer 233f is initialized, the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off, and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 77, the description will continue. If it is determined that there is no display jackpot end command in the process of S5905, the process of S5906 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S5907.

When the processing of S5905 or S5906 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a small hit start command for display (S5907). If it is determined in the process of S5907 that there is a small hit start command for display (S5907: Yes), the small hit start command process is executed (S5908), and the process proceeds to the process of S5909.

Here, the details of the small hit start command processing (S5908) will be described. This small hit start command process (S5908) is a process executed when it is determined that the small hit start command has been received in the hit related command determination process (see FIG. 77), and suggests the start of the small hit game. This is a process for displaying the effect on the third symbol display device 81.

In the small hit start command processing (S5908), first, the small hit start display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d. Next, the transfer data table buffer corresponding to the small hit start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. After that, the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the small hit start display data table, the pointer 233f is initialized, the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off, and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 77, the description will continue. If it is determined in the process of S5907 that there is no small hit start command for display (S5907: No), the process of S5908 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S5909.

When the processing of S5907 or S5908 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a small hit end command for display (S5909). If it is determined that there is a small hit end command in the process of S5909 (S5909: Yes), the small hit end command process is executed (S5910), and this process is terminated.

Here, the details of the small hit end command processing (S5210) will be described. This small hit end command process (S5210) is a process executed when it is determined that the small hit end command has been received in the hit related command determination process (see FIG. 77), and suggests the end of the small hit game. This is a process for displaying the effect to be performed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the small hit end command processing (S5210), first, the small hit end display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d. Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared, and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the small hit end display data table. After that, the pointer 233f is initialized, the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S5303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 79, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S6201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S6201: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the processes of S6202 to S6204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S6205. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S6201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S6202), S6203 to S6204 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S6203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S6203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S6203: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S6204).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 80. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to and all the error determinations set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S6301).

In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and it is necessary to draw the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. for each sprite. Determine various parameters.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S6301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S6302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 79. After the warning image setting process (S6204) or in the process of S6203, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S6203: No), the process proceeds to the process of S6205.

In S6205, the pointer update process is executed (S6205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S6401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S6401, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S6402). As a result, if it is End information (S6402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S6403), and if it is a demo display data table (S6403: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S6404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S6405), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S6403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S6403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S6403: No). S6406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S6402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S6402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 79 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6206). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S6206 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as magnification, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S6207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S6208). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S6208: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S6208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag is on. (S6209).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S6209: Yes), the confirmation display has not been produced yet, and it is time to produce the confirmation display. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S6210), and then the contents are cleared by writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6211). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S6212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S6214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S6215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing contents can be set as described above. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by invoking another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S6215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S5304), from the start of the fluctuation until the predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S6215, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S6209, if the confirmation display flag is off instead of on (S6209: No), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S6216). If the demo display flag is off (S6216: Yes), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (S6217) and then writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6218). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S6219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6220), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S6221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S6216, if the demo display flag is on (S6216: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S5309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 73B) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, the variation image at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time (Fig. A process of setting the display data table, which is specified to stop and display), in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S5305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 82A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6501: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting The process is executed (S6502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 82 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off as a result of the processing of S6501 (S6501: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S6503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S6502), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S5305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 82 (b). FIG. 82B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S6502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S6601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S6601: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S6602). In the process of S6602, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S6602 that the transfer process has not been completed (S6602: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S6602: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S6603. Further, as a result of the processing of S6601, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S6601: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S6603.

In the process of S6603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S6603), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S6603: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S6604), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data) is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S6603 (S6603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S6605), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 73 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S5308 in FIG. 73 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S5309 in FIG. 73 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 74 to 78) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 79 to 81) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 83) (see S6501: No in FIG. 82 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 83, a normal image transfer setting process (S6503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S5305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S6503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S6205) of the display setting process (S5303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S6701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S6702), and if it is the transfer data information (S6702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S6703) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S6704), and the process proceeds to S6705.

Further, in the process of S6702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S6702: No), the processes of S6703 and S6704 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S6705. In the process of S6705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S6705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S6705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S6706).

In the process of S6706, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S6706 that the transfer process has not been completed (S6706: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S6706: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S6707. Further, as a result of the processing of S6705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S6705: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S6707.

In the process of S6707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S6707), and if the transfer start flag is on (S6707: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S6708), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S6703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S6717. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S6707: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S6713). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S6713: No), there is no image data to be transferred, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag is on (S6713: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag is set to off (S6714), the rear image provided for each rear image type is provided. Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S6715). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally). The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S6716), and the process proceeds to S6717.

When the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S6715, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S6717, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6717). The discrimination in the processing of S6717 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S6717, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6717: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S6717 (S6717: Yes), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S6718). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the address given. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S6718, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S6719), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, if the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the command determination process executed earlier by executing this normal image transfer process, the back image is changed. Of the image data used in the above, the image data not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S5306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S5304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S5305) to generate the drawing list shown in FIG. 59 (S6801). That is, in the processing of S6801, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S5304). , The specified storage RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and then the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the sprite image data is stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S5305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S6802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231 and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the start address of the storage source to the final address of the storage source is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the process of S6802 (S6803). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 73B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

Whether or not to change the state of the starting port provided on the gaming board of a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the game ball is easy to enter. Some perform the first lottery. In such a conventional game machine, a lottery executed by entering a game ball into the starting port in a state easily changed to the second state is executed a predetermined number of times, and until the lottery result of the predetermined number of times is displayed. In a game machine that is continuously set, the probability that a judgment that the lottery is advantageous to the player is executed in a state where the lottery is executed a predetermined number of times is constant, and the game becomes monotonous and the player gets bored early. There was a problem that it would end up.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, the holding memory of the special figure 2 which is advantageous to the player is acquired during the period when the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is executed during the time saving state. It is possible to improve the interest of the game because the period can be set.

In a game machine in which a lottery of a plurality of symbols is executed, there is a game machine that notifies the player by displaying a symbol display for showing the lottery result by a display means (third symbol display device 81). There is a problem that it is difficult for the player to understand the content of the game because a plurality of symbols are displayed in a variable manner at various timings.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, among the third symbols corresponding to the plurality of symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the symbol most of interest to the player in the current gaming state, that is, that is, Since the symbol that has the greatest influence on the game result is displayed with more emphasis than the other symbols, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Further, in the above-described first embodiment, a game (left-handed game or right-handed game) that is advantageous to the player is performed according to various game states (normal state, time saving state, jackpot state, etc.) to be set. It is configured differently. This makes it possible for the player to change the content of the game while grasping the current game state, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming more monotonous.

In the first embodiment, since it is possible to provide different playability depending on the type of special symbol variation executed when the time is shortened, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. Can be done.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 92. The first embodiment described above is configured so that when the special symbol fluctuates once during the time saving state, the time saving state ends, and in the time saving state where the first special symbol fluctuates, the second special symbol It was configured to acquire the reserved memory of.

Then, when the change of the first special symbol in the time saving state is completed, if the hold memory of the second special symbol is acquired, the change of the second special symbol (lottery) is executed next, and the change is performed. The jackpot game is executed based on the (lottery), and after the jackpot game is completed, the time is reduced again. On the other hand, when the change of the first special symbol during the time saving state is completed, the second special symbol is displayed. If the hold memory could not be acquired, it was configured to shift to the normal state as it is.

In the first embodiment configured in this way, since the end timing of the time-saving state is the end timing of one variation of the first special symbol, the player can easily predict the end timing of the time-saving state. There is a problem. Further, in order to make the player's prediction difficult, it is necessary to be able to set a plurality of different fluctuation times for the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the storage capacity of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is increased. There was a problem of letting them do it.

Further, in the above-described first embodiment, if the hold memory of the second special symbol can be acquired at the end of the fluctuation of the first special symbol executed during the time saving state, the state advantageous to the player can be continuously acquired. If it is not, the gameplay is easy for the player to understand, and the player's advantageous state ends, but on the other hand, there is a problem that the gameplay becomes monotonous and the player gets bored early.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, a plurality of conditions for ending the time saving state are provided, and it is difficult for the player to grasp the ending timing of the time saving state. Specifically, the case where either the first special symbol change (lottery) is executed twice or the second special symbol change (lottery) is executed once is set as the end condition of the time saving state. ..

With this configuration, if the hold memory of the second special symbol is not secured at the time when the fluctuation of the first special symbol of the first rotation (first rotation of the time reduction) in the time saving state is completed, the time saving is performed. The change (lottery) of the first special symbol in the second rotation in the state is executed. On the other hand, if the hold storage of the second special symbol is secured at the time when the change of the first special symbol of the first rotation (first rotation of the time reduction) in the time saving state is completed, the hold storage of the second special symbol is reserved. The symbol change (lottery) is executed.

Therefore, in the time saving state, when the change of the first special symbol in the first rotation of the time saving is completed, the game property of acquiring the holding memory of the second special symbol is continued, and the holding memory of the second special symbol is stored. It is possible to provide a case where the used variation (lottery) is executed and a case where the second special symbol is held and stored.

Further, in the second embodiment, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol executed during the time saving state can be selected from a plurality (two). Therefore, the time saving state period (the changing period of the first special symbol executed during the time saving state) can be diversified by combining a plurality of fluctuation patterns, and the interest of the game can be improved. Since the time saving state period is set by the combination of a plurality of fluctuation patterns, when a plurality of fluctuation patterns of the first special symbol are prepared in the gaming machine having one time saving number as in the first embodiment described above. In comparison, the storage capacity of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the time saving state is configured to end when the change (lottery) of the second special symbol is executed once. As a result, for example, when the second special symbol is changed in the first rotation of the time saving, the winning small hit is executed when the small hit that is not most advantageous to the player (when the ball is passed through a specific area). When the number of rounds of the big hit game is smaller than that of other small hits), the game is intentionally performed so that the ball does not pass through the specific area, and the second special symbol of the second rotation of the time saving to be executed next is performed. It is possible to prevent a special game such as a game aiming at the fluctuation of the game from being executed.

If the result of the change (lottery) of the first special symbol in the first rotation of the time reduction is a small hit, the small hit game is executed after the change of the first special symbol in the first rotation of the time reduction is completed. Since the time saving state is maintained during this small hit game (because the time saving end condition is not satisfied), the game property of acquiring the hold memory of the second special symbol and the second variable winning device during the small hit game period. It is possible to set a period during which a plurality of game features such as a game feature in which a ball is inserted into the 650 and the ball is passed through a specific area (V winning switch 630) can be executed at the same time. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a novel playability, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

As shown in the first embodiment described above, when the end condition of the special symbol variation that started the fluctuation during the time reduction state is set as the end condition of the time reduction state, the special symbol variation of the first rotation of the time reduction occurs. Since the small hit game executed after the end is not in the time saving state, it is not possible to provide the game for acquiring the hold memory of the second special symbol during the small hit game.

Further, in the second embodiment, as the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol during the time saving state, the first fluctuation pattern (time saving state) in which the player can execute the game of acquiring the hold memory of the second special symbol is executed. A fluctuation pattern longer than the normal map fluctuation time in the middle) and a second fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern shorter than the normal map fluctuation time in the time saving state) in which it is difficult to execute the game for acquiring the hold memory of the second special symbol. It is configured to be selectable. With this configuration, for example, when the second variation pattern is selected twice in a row, the time saving state is not substantially given (a game in which the reserved memory of the second special symbol is acquired during the time saving state). When the first fluctuation pattern is selected twice in a row, it is possible to acquire the hold memory of the second special symbol during the time saving state with a high probability. The state is given. Further, when the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern are selected respectively, a time saving state in which the hold memory of the second special symbol can be acquired is given.

That is, it is possible to make the acquisition expectation of the second special symbol in the time saving state different based on the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol executed in the time saving state, so that the player can be provided with a surprising game. can do. Further, even if the jackpot type that shifts to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game and the jackpot type that does not shift to the time saving state are not prepared, and the time saving state is given after all the jackpot games are completed, the first Since it is possible to set a substantial time-saving state entry rate based on the selection result of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity by preparing a plurality of jackpot types.

In addition, by preparing a plurality of variation pattern selection tables for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the time saving state and configuring so as to refer to different variation pattern selection tables based on the gaming state and the gaming situation. It is possible to make the effective time saving state entry rate more diverse.

The configuration used in the second embodiment (a configuration in which a plurality of time saving end conditions are used) may be used for a gaming machine having game characteristics other than the second embodiment, for example, a small hit winning of a second special symbol. When some of the small hit types are set among the plurality of small hit types that are sometimes set, a small hit game in which the ball cannot pass through the specific area (V winning switch 630e3) is executed. It may be used for such a game machine.

Further, in the second embodiment, the number of fluctuations (lottery) is set to 2 as the end condition of the time saving state based on the fluctuation (lottery) of the first special symbol, but a larger number may be set. .. Further, the total number of fluctuations (lottery) of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations (lottery) of the second special symbol may be set as the end condition of the time saving state, and other than the number of fluctuations of the special symbol. , The number of fluctuations of the normal symbol, the result of the fluctuation (lottery) of the special symbol, and various accessories provided in the pachinko machine 10 (electric accessory 640a, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650, etc.) The end condition of the time saving state may be set based on the operation status (presence or absence of operation, number of operations).

The pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in terms of configuration, that is, a partial configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, a partial configuration of the RAM 203, and the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Other various processes are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the display screen executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. FIG. 85A is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen in a time saving state. Here, the display screen shown in FIG. 85 (a) will be described with respect to points different from the above-described first embodiment (points different from the display contents of FIG. 15 (a)). The same elements as those in the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 85A is an example showing a display screen in a state in which the hold storage of the second special symbol is not acquired at the time when the first rotation of the time saving is completed. As shown in FIG. 85 (a), at the end of the first rotation of the time saving, the hold memory of the second special symbol has not been acquired (special figure 2 display indicating the number of reserved symbols in the main reserved symbol display area Dm5). If this is not the case, then the first special symbol variation (lottery) is started as the variation of the second rotation of the time saving. Here, a fluctuation pattern of 150 seconds is set as the fluctuation pattern of the second rotation of the time reduction, and the display of "remaining time 0 seconds" displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds is compared with the display. "+150 seconds" is displayed as a display mode for adding the remaining time. The display of "150 seconds" is a display for indicating the fluctuation time of the second rotation of the time saving.

Then, in the first main display area Dm, the character "still" is displayed as a continuous notification display mode indicating that the game for acquiring the hold memory of the special figure 2 is continued. By displaying such a display screen, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the time saving state (the game state in which the game for acquiring the hold memory of special figure 2 is executed) will continue. You can play the game with expectations until the end.

The "remaining time" displayed in the sub-display area Ds1 is set before the remaining time of the special figure 1 fluctuation of the first rotation of the time reduction becomes "0", that is, during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 of the first rotation of the time reduction. A value indicating a part or all of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation which may be the second rotation may be added and displayed. In this case, if the remaining period of the special figure 1 fluctuation in the first rotation of the time saving is a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) and the hold storage of the special figure 2 is not acquired, the addition display is executed. Good. As a result, even if the remaining time is running low, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

On the other hand, at the time when the first rotation of the time reduction is completed, the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is not acquired, and the game of acquiring the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is executed as the variation of the special figure 1 of the second rotation of the time reduction. When a difficult second fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern shorter than the normal map fluctuation time in the time saving state) is selected, the display in which the remaining time is added as shown in FIG. 85 (a) is not performed, and the above-mentioned display is performed. The display screen (time saving state end display) shown in FIG. 20B of the first embodiment is displayed. In this case, during the period during which the time reduction state end display is being executed, the special figure 1 variation of the second rotation of the time reduction is executed.

That is, when the above-mentioned second fluctuation pattern is set, the time saving state is substantially completed, so that the time saving 2 is performed on the third symbol display device 81 even though the time saving state is set. When the special figure 1 fluctuation of the rotation is executed, the time saving state end display is displayed. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the end timing not in the end timing of the internal game state (time saving state) but in the game state in which the hold memory of the special figure 2 can be acquired, and the player can be notified of the end timing. It is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

It should be noted that the special figure 1 fluctuation of the second rotation of the time reduction executed during the period when the time reduction state end display is displayed, and the number of reserved symbols of the special figure 1 which decreases when the second rotation of the time reduction is executed (hold). Since the number of stored items is displayed in the second display area Dn of the third symbol display device 81, it can be made difficult for the player to notice.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the display timing indicating the end of the time saving state is different based on the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol selected during the time saving state. , Even during the time saving state internally, if the gaming state advantageous to the player cannot be given, the display indicating the end of the time saving state is executed. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. In addition, in the second embodiment, the case where the second fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation pattern shorter than the normal figure fluctuation time in the time saving state) which is difficult to execute the game for acquiring the hold memory of the special figure 2 is set is internally. Even if the time is shortened, it is assumed that the player cannot be given a favorable gaming state, but in addition to that, when the normal map fluctuation time is longer than the remaining period of the normal map fluctuation state (at the end of the normal map fluctuation). (When the time saving state ends), even if the time saving state is internally determined, it is determined that the gaming state advantageous to the player cannot be given, and the display indicating the end of the time saving state is executed. May be good.

Next, the display screen in the case where the special figure 1 fluctuation of the first rotation of the time saving wins a small hit will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 (b) to 86 (b). FIG. 85B is an example showing a display screen in a state in which special figure 1 wins a small hit and one special figure 2 has one reserved memory at the time when the first rotation of the time saving is completed. As shown in FIG. 85B, the first display area Dm is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode “341” indicating that the special figure 1 main symbol Dma has won a small hit, and the main reserved symbol is displayed. In the area Dm5, a display mode indicating that there is one reserved memory of the special figure 2 is displayed.

Then, the "remaining time 0 seconds" indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation of the first rotation of the time reduction is completed is displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1, and further, it is displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. "+60 seconds" is displayed as a display mode for adding the remaining time to the display of "remaining time 0 seconds". The display of "60 seconds" is a display for indicating the game time of the small hit game executed based on the small hit winning of the special figure 1.

That is, although the details will be described later, in the second embodiment, when the variation (lottery) of the special figure 1 is executed twice or the variation (lottery) of the special figure 2 is executed once, the time is shortened. The state is set to end, and when the variation (lottery) of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 85 (b) is executed once, the end condition of the time saving state is not satisfied. Therefore, the time saving state is continued during the small hit game executed by the small hit winning of the special figure 1. As a result, even in the state where the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is acquired, the reserved memory of the special figure 2 can be further acquired during the period when the small hit game is executed.

In this way, the player can simultaneously execute the game of inserting the ball into the second variable winning device 650, which is opened by the small hit game, and the game of acquiring the hold memory of the special figure 2. As a special game period notification mode for notifying the user, "charge combo activation" is displayed in the first display area Dm.

Then, when the small hit game is executed, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), the normal symbol main symbol Dmc is variablely displayed in the first display area Dm, and the game for acquiring the hold memory of the special figure 2 is performed. Will be executed. Further, when the small hit game executed in the small hit winning of Special Figure 1 is a small hit in which the ball can pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3), the ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game. Then, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), "V" is displayed in the first display area Dm, and the jackpot game is started.

<About the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed. Since the other points are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 87 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. The ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the contents of the variation pattern table 202d4 for special figure 1 defined in the variation pattern table 202d are partially changed. However, since the other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Although the details will be described later, the end conditions for the time saving state are also different.

The special figure 1 time saving fluctuation pattern table 202d4a (see FIG. 88) of the second embodiment is the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired with respect to the special figure 1 time saving fluctuation pattern table 202d4 of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that different fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times) are set based on.

Specifically, regardless of whether the lottery result of Special Figure 1 is "missing", "small hit", or "big hit", when the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 99", , A fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 120 seconds is set, and in the case of "100 to 198", a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is set. With this configuration, the game content in the time-saving state can be greatly different depending on the selected fluctuation pattern.

FIG. 87B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. In the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment, the special 2 fluctuation flag 203r is added to the first embodiment. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special 2 fluctuation flag 203r is a flag for indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed during the time saving state, and if it is set to on, the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed during the time saving state. It shows. The special 2 variation flag 203r determines that the current variation is special figure 2 in the time saving variation start process 2 (S303 in FIG. 91) executed in the special symbol variation start process (see S213 in FIG. 39). In the case (S551: Yes in FIG. 91), it is set to ON (see S522 in FIG. 91), referred to in the time saving end determination process (see S251 in FIG. 90) (see S2301 in FIG. 90), and the time saving medium counter 203g. After setting the value to "0", it is set to off (see S2303 in FIG. 90).

In this way, at the start of the special figure fluctuation, the result of determining which of the special figure 1 or special figure 2 fluctuation is executed is stored (the corresponding flag is set to on), and the time is shortened. At the timing when it is decided whether or not to end the state, it is determined whether or not to end the time saving state (whether or not the time saving state ending condition is satisfied) based on the stored determination result. It is possible to properly manage the current game state and the type of special figure change executed during the time saving state.

In the second embodiment, the type of the special symbol (special figure) determined at the timing when the variation (lottery) of the special figure is started is determined, and the determination result is stored in the special figure. It is configured so that it can be determined whether or not to end the time saving state at the fluctuation end timing, but other configurations may be used. For example, when the fluctuation (lottery) of the special figure is started, this time. By determining whether or not the time reduction state ends at the timing when the fluctuation ends and storing the determination result, even if control is performed to end the time reduction state based on the determination result at the special figure fluctuation end timing. It is good, at the timing of the end of the fluctuation of the special map, the type of the special map variation executed this time (the type of the special map variation used for the variation) is discriminated, and the control for ending the time saving state is performed based on the discrimination result. You may want to do it.

<Regarding the control process in the second embodiment>
In the control process in the second embodiment, the contents of the control process in the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 are changed from those in the first embodiment. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 89 to 92, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, the special symbol variation process is changed to the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 89) with respect to the first embodiment, and the time is shortened to be executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 89). The end determination process (see FIG. 90) was added, the time saving fluctuation start process was changed to the time saving fluctuation start process 2 (see FIG. 91), and the jackpot control process was changed to the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 92). Is different.

First, the special symbol variation processing 2 (S104) will be described with reference to FIG. 89. In this special symbol variation processing 2 (S104 in FIG. 89), the lottery result of the special symbol variation is different from the special symbol variation processing of the first embodiment described above, and the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g is 1 or more. In the case of (S224: Yes), the time saving end determination process (see S251 in FIG. 89) is executed, and the other configurations are the same. Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the special symbol variation processing 2 (see S104 in FIG. 89) described with reference to FIG. 90 will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving end determination process (see S251) in the second embodiment. This time saving end determination process (see S251) executes control for determining the end state of the time saving state in the second embodiment having a plurality of ending conditions of the time saving state.

When the execution of the time saving end determination process (S251 in FIG. 90) is started, it is first determined whether or not the special 2 fluctuation flag 203r is set to ON (S2301 in FIG. 90). In S2301, when the special 2 fluctuation flag 203r is set to on, that is, when the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed (S2301: Yes), the time saving end condition of the special symbol is satisfied at that time. Therefore, next, the value of the counter of the time saving medium counter 203g is set to "0" (S2303), the special 2 fluctuation flag 203r is set to off (S2302), and the special 2 fluctuation flag 203r is set to off. This process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2301, if the special 2 fluctuation flag 203r is not set to ON (S2301: No), then the time saving / medium counter 203 g is subtracted by 1 (see S2304), and this process ends.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving fluctuation start processing 2 (see S303 in FIG. 91) used in the second embodiment. In this time saving fluctuation start processing 2 (see S303 in FIG. 91), whether the type of the special figure variation executed this time is the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 with respect to the time saving fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment described above. The process for determining is added, and the other contents are the same. The description of the same contents will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 91, when the time saving fluctuation start processing 2 (see S303 in FIG. 91) is executed, the same processing of S501 and S502 as the time saving fluctuation start processing is executed. After finishing the processing of S502, it is next determined whether or not the current fluctuation is in the special figure 2 (S551). When it is determined that the current fluctuation is the special figure 2 (S551: Yes), the special 2 fluctuation flag 203r is set to ON (S552), and the process proceeds to S503. On the other hand, in the process of S551, when it is determined that the current fluctuation is not the special figure 2 (special figure 1) (S551: No), the process of S552 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S503. Then, the same processes of S503 to S512 as the time reduction start process are executed, and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is subtracted by 1 each time the fluctuation of the special drawing other than the special drawing 2 (that is, the fluctuation of the special drawing 1) is executed, and the time saving is performed. The time saving state is terminated when the value of the medium counter 203g becomes 0, and the time saving state is set to 0 by forcibly setting the value of the medium counter 203g to 0 by executing the fluctuation of the special figure 2. It has two types of time-saving end conditions for ending.

This makes it possible to execute the variation (lottery) of the special figure 1 multiple times in the time saving state, and the number of times the variation (lottery) of the special figure 2 is executed in the time saving state is singular (1 time). Can be.

Next, the jackpot control process 2 (S1704 in FIG. 92) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 92. The big hit control process 2 (S1704 in FIG. 92) differs from the above-mentioned big hit control process only in that the number of time reductions given to some big hits after the end of the big hit is changed from 1 time to 2 times. However, the other contents are the same.

The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 2 (S704 in FIG. 92). As shown in FIG. 92, when this process is executed, the same processes of S1801 to S1814 as the above-described jackpot control start process are executed. Then, when it is determined in the process of S1814 that the jackpot type is not "B or D" (S1814: No), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203 g is set to "2", and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the second embodiment, a plurality of time saving state end conditions for ending the time saving state are prepared, and further, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation during the time saving state is set to a plurality of fluctuation patterns (variation). It is configured to select from time). As a result, it is possible to further diversify the game during the time saving state, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. Specifically, when the ratio of selecting the jackpot type to which the time saving state is given after the end of the big hit is fixed, short fluctuation patterns are continuously selected as the fluctuation pattern (variation time) selected during the time saving state. In that case, even though the time saving state is given, it becomes a time saving state in which it is practically difficult to acquire the hold memory of the special figure 2. In this way, it is possible to change the substantially time-saving state entry rate depending on the selection result of the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the selected special figure 1 fluctuation.

In the second embodiment, as the time saving state, the time saving number is set to 2 times, and the time saving state is executed until the variation of the special figure 1 is executed twice or the variation of the special figure 2 is executed once. However, the set number of time reductions and the time reduction state end condition may be any one that can execute the same technical idea regardless of the configuration in the second embodiment described above. , The number of time reductions may be set to 3 or more.

Further, as the time saving end condition, even if the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 (for example, 5 times) or the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 is set to be larger than the number of reserved storages of the special figure 1 (upper limit 4) Good. As a result, even if the reserved memory of the special figure 2 cannot be acquired during the change of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 can be surely changed during the time saving state, so that the player is hit by a big hit when the time saving state is entered. A game can be provided.

Further, as the time saving end condition, the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 is set to 2 times, or the number of changes of the special figure 2 is 4 times (or the total number of changes of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is 4 times). In addition, in the small hit type of Special Figure 2, it is possible to set a big hit type to which a time reduction is given and a big hit type to which a time reduction is not given as a big hit type to be executed when passing through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3). You may use another example. With this configuration, when one reserved memory of special figure 2 is acquired during the special figure 1 change executed in the first rotation of the time saving, it is executed based on the special figure 2 change of the second rotation of the time saving. A specific area (V winning switch 650e3) is passed through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3) during the small hit game to execute the big hit game, or a specific area (V) is executed during the small hit game executed based on the special figure 2 fluctuation of the second rotation of the time saving. It is possible to let the player select whether to execute the third rotation of the time saving (the second rotation of the special figure 1) without passing the winning switch 650e3).

That is, in the special figure 1 fluctuation (first preparation period) executed in the first rotation of the time saving, when the game of acquiring the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is executed and one of the reserved memories of the special figure 2 is acquired, The fluctuation of special figure 2 which is the priority fluctuation is started at the second rotation of the time saving. If a small hit is won due to the fluctuation of the special figure 2, the small hit game is executed after the fluctuation of the second rotation of the time saving is completed. By passing the game ball through the specific area during this small hit game, the big hit game (V winning big hit) based on the small hit game is started. In this alternative example, as the type of the V prize jackpot in Special Figure 2, the type in which the time saving state is given after the jackpot game and the type in which the time saving state is not given can be set, so that the special feature of the second rotation of the time saving Fig. 2 If the jackpot based on the fluctuation is a jackpot that does not give a time saving state, the consecutive villa mode ends with this jackpot game. Here, the player does not execute the jackpot game in the second rotation of the time reduction, or does not execute the jackpot game in the second rotation of the time reduction, in a state where only one hold memory of the special figure 2 is acquired (small). During the winning game, the special figure 1 variation (second preparation period) executed for the third time reduction is executed in a specific area (without passing the game ball through the V winning switch 650e3), and the new special figure 2 You can choose whether to play a game that acquires hold memory.

As a result, based on the number of reserved memories of special figure 2 acquired during the first preparation period, one of the reserved memories of special figure 2 is discarded, and more reserved memories of special figure 2 are aimed at or acquired. Since it is possible to select whether or not to reliably execute the jackpot game based on the reserved memory of the special figure 2, the player can arbitrarily select the game content suitable for the player.

Further, in this alternative example, as the types of jackpots executed based on the reserved memory of special figure 2, there are a type in which a time saving state is given after the jackpot game is completed and a type in which a time saving state is not given. When a big hit game (V winning big hit) based on a small hit game is executed with one hold memory of, there is a possibility that the time saving state ends after the big hit game ends. Therefore, the subsequent game results can be greatly different depending on which of the above-mentioned game contents is selected by the player, and the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced.

In addition, the notification suggesting the type of the big hit game based on the small hit game executed in the second rotation of the time saving described above may be executed by the notification means (for example, the effect display by the third symbol display device 81). As a result, the player can select the game content with reference to the notification content by the notification means. In this case, as the notification content by the notification means, it is preferable to notify the game content that is advantageous to the player in a notification mode that the player can grasp. For example, if the jackpot executed based on the small hit game executed in the second rotation of the time reduction is a jackpot to which the time reduction state is given after the jackpot game is completed, it is advisable to set a notification mode to indicate that fact. .. As a result, the player can safely pass the ball through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) in the small hit game in the second rotation of the time saving.

In addition, in this alternative example, the time saving end condition is set as the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 is 2 times, or the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 is 4 times (or the total number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is 4). Since the number of times is set to (times), the game for selecting the above-mentioned game content can be executed only when the hold of the special figure 2 is acquired during the change of the special figure 1 executed in the first rotation of the time reduction number, so that the time reduction can be performed. It is possible to enthusiastically play a game in order to acquire the reserved memory of the special figure 2 as soon as the state is given.

Further, since the time saving end condition is set so that the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 is smaller than the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2, for example, the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 executed during the time saving state is set. Therefore, the number of fluctuations in the special figure 1 can be reduced. As a result, even if a plurality (for example, two) of the reserved memories of the special figure 2 are stored during one change of the special figure 1, the second change of the special figure 1 can be executed during the time saving state. This makes it possible to increase the chances of selecting the game content described above. In this other example, as the time saving end condition, the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 is 2 times, or the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 is 4 times (or the total number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is 4 times). However, the time saving end condition based on the number of fluctuations in the special figure 2 may be set to have a larger number of fluctuations than the time saving ending condition based on the number of fluctuations in the special figure 1.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 100. In the first embodiment described above, 3 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation (normal symbol fluctuation) executed during the time saving state, and the number of lottery of the normal symbol executed during the time saving state is set. Was configured to stabilize. Further, in the above-described second embodiment, in order to change the period during the time-saving state, a plurality of conditions for ending the time-saving state are provided with respect to the above-mentioned first embodiment, and the process is further executed during the time-saving state. It was configured so that a plurality of fluctuation times of the special figure 1 could be set.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol executed during the time saving state can be set from a plurality of normal symbols, and can be executed during the time saving state according to the content of the game. It was configured so that the number of lottery of symbols was different.

As a result, the player can be made to perform many lottery of ordinary symbols during the time saving state and enthusiastically play the game in order to obtain the special figure 2 hold. In addition, since the number of lottery of ordinary symbols executed during the time saving state can be changed, it is possible to set a time saving state that is advantageous to the player and a time saving state that is disadvantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. it can.

The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in terms of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, the partial configuration of the RAM 203, and the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Other various processes are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the game in the third embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is configured so that the time saving state given based on the lottery of Special Figure 1 and the time saving state given based on the lottery of Special Figure 2 are different. Further, it is configured so that a different time saving state is given based on the gaming state when the time saving state is given. By assigning different time-saving states in this way, it is possible to prepare a plurality of game features in the time-saving state, and it is possible to make the player perform a variety of games.

Specifically, by setting different time-saving states, the variation time of the normal symbol executed during the time-saving state is different, so that the playability during the time-saving state is different. That is, as described in the first embodiment described above, the pachinko machine 10 wins a normal symbol during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 in the time saving state, opens the electric accessory 640a, and enters the second ball. Since the game of acquiring the special figure 2 hold is executed by putting the ball into the mouth 640, the number of lottery of the ordinary symbols executed during the time saving is performed by making the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbols different. The number of fluctuations) can be made different.

Further, in the third embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is configured to be different based on the number of lottery (number of fluctuations) of the normal symbol executed during the time saving state. Specifically, when the number of lottery (number of fluctuations) of ordinary symbols executed during the time saving state exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 40 times), a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is set. ing. With this configuration, by executing a large number of normal symbol fluctuations during the time saving state, the number of lottery (variation times) of the normal symbols can be further increased, and the player is enthusiastically shortened. It is possible to execute a medium game. In addition, by shifting to a state in which a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is set, as a result, the number of balls entering the second entry port 640 per unit time can be increased, so that the player It is possible to provide a game that is advantageous to the player.

In this way, by providing a plurality of time saving states in which the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is different, it is possible to set a time saving state that is advantageous to the player and a time saving state that is disadvantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. ..

First, with reference to FIG. 93, a display screen executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 93A is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen in a time saving state. Here, the display screen shown in FIG. 93 (a) will be described with respect to points different from the above-described first embodiment (points different from the display contents of FIG. 15 (a)). The same elements as those in the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 93 (a), "39/40" is displayed at the lower right of the first display area Dm. This is a display mode described in the normal map fluctuation display area for displaying the number of normal map fluctuations during the time saving state (during special figure 1 fluctuation in the time saving state), and the value of "39" is executed. It is a normal map fluctuation number display mode for indicating the number of times, and a value of "40" is a normal map target fluctuation number display mode indicating a threshold value at which the fluctuation time of a normal symbol is shortened. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, a guidance display for guiding the period until the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened is displayed.

When the game progresses from the state shown in FIG. 93 (a) and the number of fluctuations in the normal map during the time saving state reaches 40, the game state in which the fluctuation time in the normal map becomes shorter as shown in FIG. 93 (b). The characters "supercharge time rush" are displayed to indicate that the transition has occurred, and a guidance display for informing the player that the normal map fluctuation time has been shortened is displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

<About the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
The third embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed. Since the other points are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 94 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 202 in MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment. In the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment, the time saving state selection table 202f is added to the first embodiment. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The time saving state selection table 202f is a table referred to when selecting a time saving state based on the jackpot symbols (special figures 1 and 2) and the game state stored in the game state storage area 203s. It is referred to in the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 99) described later (see S1871 in FIG. 99).

Here, in the third embodiment, as the game state to be set, the time saving A and the time saving B which is more advantageous to the player than the time saving A can be selected. Specifically, the jackpot symbol is special figure 1 (first special symbol), and the game state stored in the game state storage area 203s is normal (that is, the jackpot is won or a specific area (V prize). In the case of the timing) when the ball passes through the switch 650e3), the time saving A is selected as the time saving state, and in other cases, the time saving B is selected as the time saving state as shown in FIG. 95.

That is, when the game state is the normal state, a big hit is obtained based on the lottery of the special figure 1, and the time saving state is given as the time saving state only when the time saving state is given after the big hit game is completed, and in other cases, the time saving state is given. As a time saving B is given.

When the time reduction A is set as the time reduction state, 3 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (see S2409 in FIG. 98), and when the time reduction B is set, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set as the time reduction. A shorter variation time (2.5 seconds or 1.5 seconds) is set than when A is set (see S2405 and S2406 in FIG. 98). As a result, when entering the consecutive villa mode for the first time, the game is performed during the time saving state in which the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is normal (4 seconds), and when entering the time saving state again during the consecutive villa mode, the normal symbol changes. The fluctuation time can be shorter than usual. Therefore, once the consecutive villa mode that is advantageous to the player continues, it is possible to make it difficult to shift from the consecutive villa mode to the normal gaming state.

FIG. 94B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment. In the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment, a game state storage area 203s, a time saving state storage area 203t, and a normal figure number counter 203u are added to the first embodiment. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The game state storage area 203s is an area for storing the game state when the start of the big hit is set, and is referred to when selecting the type of the time saving state given after the end of the big hit. In the game state storage area 203s, the game state is stored (see S271 in FIG. 96) after the start of the jackpot is set in the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 96), and the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 99) is stored. ), It is determined as the timing of the end of the jackpot (S1811: Yes in FIG. 99), and when the jackpot type is not B or D (S1814; No in FIG. 99), it is referred to when setting the time saving state (S1871). ).

The time-saving state storage area 203t is an area for storing the selected time-saving state type (time-saving A, time-saving B), and is referred to when setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol during the time-saving state. When the time saving state is selected in the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 99), the time saving state storage area 203t stores the selected time saving state (see S1871 in FIG. 99) and sets the fluctuation time (see FIG. 98). ), The information stored when setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is referred to (see S2401 in FIG. 98).

The normal symbol count counter 203u is a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations of the normal symbol during the time saving state, and is used every time the normal symbol is changed during the time saving state in the fluctuation time setting process (see FIG. 98). 1 is added (see S2403 in FIG. 98). In the present embodiment, when the value measured by the normal symbol number counter 203u reaches a predetermined value (40), the setting process of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is configured to be different.

<Regarding the control process in the third embodiment>
The control process in the third embodiment is the same as that in the first embodiment with respect to the first embodiment in which the contents of the control process in the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. Therefore, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 96 to 99, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, the special symbol variation process is changed to the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 96), and the normal symbol variation process is changed to the normal symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 97) with respect to the first embodiment. The difference is that the jackpot control process is changed to the jackpot control process 3 (FIG. 99). Since the other elements are the same, the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the special symbol variation process 3 (see S104 in FIG. 96), the processes S201 to S219 are executed as in the first embodiment described above, and when the process of S219 is completed, the current game state is set to the game state storage area 203s. Store (S271). Then, the processes of S220 to S225 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, and the present process is terminated.

That is, in the third embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, the game state at the time when the start of the jackpot is set can be temporarily stored. Thereby, the game state set after the end of the big hit game can be set based on the game state at the start of the big hit (at the time of winning the big hit).

In the present embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, and the game state at the timing for setting the start of the jackpot is stored in the game state storage area 203s. For example, the variation of the special symbol is started. It may be configured to store the game state of the timing (for example, the timing at which the special symbol variation start process (see S213 in FIG. 96) in the special symbol variation process 3 is executed).

Next, in the normal symbol variation process 3 (see S106 in FIG. 97), the processes S901 to S912 are executed as in the first embodiment described above, and then the variation time setting process is executed (S951). Here, the fluctuation time setting process (S951) will be described with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation time setting process (S951).

When the variable time setting process (S951) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current time saving state is the time saving A (time saving state A) (S2401), and it is determined that the time saving A (time saving state A). (S2401: Yes) sets the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation time) to 3 seconds (S2409), and ends this process. On the other hand, in the processing of S2401, when it is determined that the current time saving state is not the time saving A (time saving state A) (S2401: No), then whether the value of the normal figure number counter 203u is larger than "1". (S2402).

In the process of S2402, when it is determined that the value of the normal figure number counter 203u is not larger than "1" (S2402: No), "1" is set to the value of the normal figure number counter 203u (S2403), and S2404. Move to the processing of. On the other hand, in the processing of S2402, when it is determined that the value of the normal figure number counter 203u is larger than "1", the process proceeds to (S2402: Yes) and the processing of S2404.

In the process of S2404, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal figure counter 203u is “40” or more (S2404). In the process of S2404, when it is determined that the value of the normal figure counter 203u is not more than "40" (less than 40), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal figure fluctuation time) is set to 2.5 seconds. (S2405). In this case, a fluctuation time shorter than the normal map fluctuation time set in the process of S2409 is set.

On the other hand, in the process of S2404, when it is determined that the value of the normal figure number counter 203u is "40" or more, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal figure fluctuation time) is set to 1.5 seconds (S2406). In this case, a fluctuation time shorter than the normal map fluctuation time set in the process of S2405 is set. Then, when the processing of S2405 or S2406 is completed, "1" is added to the value of the normal figure number counter 203u (S2407), the normal figure number command is set (S2408), and this processing is completed.

The normal figure number command set in the process of S2408 is a command output to the voice lamp control device 113, and the output process is performed in the same manner as the various commands set in the main control device 110 described above. ..

As described above, in the third embodiment, different normal map fluctuation times are set based on the type of the time saving state to be set and the number of normal map fluctuations executed during the time saving state. With this configuration, the number of fluctuations in the normal map executed during the time saving state can be made different based on the type of the time saving state and the number of fluctuations in the normal map executed during the time saving state. It is possible to improve the interest in the game of winning the game by winning the game and acquiring the reserved memory of the special figure 2.

In addition, when "time saving B" is set, which is more advantageous than "time saving A" as the time saving state (short fluctuation time is set as the normal map fluctuation time), the number of times of normal map fluctuation is more than a predetermined number (40 times or more). ), Since the configuration is such that a shorter normal fluctuation time is set, the player can be made to continuously execute the game during the time saving state.

In the third embodiment, a specific normal map fluctuation time is set based on each time saving state and the number of normal drawing time savings, but other configurations may be used, for example, each time saving state and the normal drawing time saving. A normal figure fluctuation time selection table to be referred to for setting the normal figure fluctuation time is provided according to the number of times the figure changes, and the normal figure fluctuation time selection table is based on a predetermined acquisition value (for example, a counter acquisition value). Therefore, the fluctuation time of the normal map may be selected. In this case, a table in which a long normal map fluctuation time is easily selected and a table in which a short normal map fluctuation time is easily selected are provided in the normal map fluctuation time selection table corresponding to each time saving state and the number of normal map fluctuations. Then, as in the third embodiment, it is possible to make the normal map fluctuation time, which is easy to be selected, different based on each time saving state (time saving A, time saving B) and the number of times the normal map changes, and the reserved memory of the special figure 2 It is possible to improve the interest in the game to acquire.

Further, in the third embodiment, two types of the time saving state, "time saving A" and "time saving B", are provided, but more types may be provided. Further, although one opportunity (the number of times of fluctuation of the normal map is 40 times) is provided to change the time of fluctuation of the normal map selected based on the number of times of change of the normal map, two or more may be provided.

Further, in the third embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a shorter normal map fluctuation time than usual is selected (easily made), but a specific upper limit condition (for example, a normal map) is selected. When the number of fluctuations exceeds 50 or when the number of reserved storages in Special Figure 2 reaches the upper limit), the selected normal map fluctuation time is longer than usual (for example, 10 seconds). ) May be selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively given a privilege due to the excessive execution of the fluctuation of the normal map.

Next, the jackpot control process 3 (S1704) of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 99. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 3 (S1704). The jackpot control process 3 (S1704) differs from the jackpot control process of the first embodiment described above in that a process is added when it is determined that the timing is the end of the jackpot, and the other processes are the same. Is executed. The description of the same processing will be omitted.

When the jackpot control process 3 (S1704) is executed, the processes of S1801 to S1814 are executed in the same manner as the jackpot control process of the first embodiment, and in the process of S1814, the jackpot type is "big hit B" or "big hit D". (That is, it is a jackpot to which a time saving state is given after the jackpot ends) (S1814: No), the time saving state is set based on the time saving state selection table 202f, and the set time saving state is set. It is stored in the time saving state storage area 203t (S1871). Then, the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g is set to “1” (S1815), and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. The third embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the command determination process is changed to the command determination process 3 (see FIG. 100). Since the other elements are the same, the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 3 (S3112). When this command determination process 3 (S3112) is executed, the processes S3201 to S3214 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process of the first embodiment. Then, when it is determined in the process of S3213 that the notification command has not been received (S3213: No), it is determined whether or not the command for the number of times of normal drawing has been received (S3251). When the normal figure count command is received (S3251: Yes), the display normal figure count command is set (S3252). The display number number command set here is output to the display control device 114 in the same manner as the other display commands, and is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the time saving state. The number of times is displayed (see FIG. 93).

<Modification 1 of the game board 13 in the first embodiment>
Next, a modification 1 of the game board 13 in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIG. 101. In the first embodiment described above, as described with reference to FIG. 2, a storage device is used to regulate the entry of balls into the right first entry port 64b arranged in the right region of the game board 13. A 750 and a non-electric accessory 710 were provided. As a result, unless the non-electric accessory 710 is opened, the ball is surely prevented from entering the right first ball entry port 64b. On the other hand, in the present modification 1, a configuration is used in which the entry of the ball into the right first entry port 64b is restricted without using the storage device 750 and the non-electric accessory 710. Specifically, by providing a constantly movable valve 1500 above the right first ball entry port 64b, the entry of a ball into the right first ball entry port 64b is restricted.

Further, in the configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above, the through gate 67 and the second entry port 640 are arranged in the first flow path 701, and the ball has passed through the through gate 67. The second entrance below the through gate 67 so that the ball passes in a shorter period (0.2 seconds) than the fluctuation time (3 or 4 seconds) of the normal symbol (normal symbol) executed based on. By disposing the 640, it was suppressed that the ball passing through the through gate 67 directly entered the second entry port 640. On the other hand, in this modification, the through gate 67 is arranged in the first flow path 701, and the second entry port 640 is arranged in the second flow path 702. As a result, it is possible to physically prevent the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 from entering the second entry port 640.

The difference between the configuration of the game board 13 in the first modification and the configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above is that the storage device 750, the non-electric accessory 710, and the specific general entrance 630 are eliminated. The point is that the arrangement position of the right first entry port 64b is changed, and the arrangement position of the second entry port 640 is changed from the first flow path 701 to the second flow path 702. The other configurations are the same. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 101 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 13 of the present modification 1. As shown in FIG. 101, in the game board 13 of the present modification 1, a constantly movable member 1500 is provided along the ball rolling surface of the most upstream portion of the first flow path 701, and the constantly movable member 1500 is provided. Is configured to allow the ball to enter the right first entry port 64b when is movable in the open position (in the open state).

Here, the operation of the constantly movable member 1500 will be described in detail. The constantly movable valve 1500 is configured to be variable to an open position (open state) and a closed position (closed state) at a predetermined timing based on the power being turned on to the pachinko machine 10. There is. Specifically, in the movable member drive process (not shown) executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 53) of the main control device 110, operation control is performed based on the movable scenario stored in the ROM 203. Has been done. In this movable scenario, the operation of constantly opening the movable member 1500 for 0.1 seconds and then closing it for 1.2 seconds is repeatedly executed.

That is, in the game board 13 of the present modification 1, the ball launched in the right-handed game flows into the first flow path 701 at 1.2 second intervals, and the rolling member 1500 is always arranged. It flows down in the downstream direction while rolling on the surface. When the timing when the ball flows into the first flow path 701 and rolls on the constantly movable member 1500 (or falls on the constantly movable member) and the timing when the constantly movable valve 1500 is opened coincide with each other. The ball passes through the constantly movable member 1500 in the open state and enters the right first ball entry port 64b.

The timing of rolling (or falling onto the constantly movable member) on the constantly movable member 1500 is at 1.2 second intervals, and the timing of opening the constantly movable valve 1500 is 0 in 1.3 seconds. Since it is .1 second, the timing at which the two match is about once every 15.6 seconds. That is, when the right-handed game is continuously executed, about four balls per minute enter the right first ball entrance 64b.

That is, in a game state in which the right-handed game is continuously executed, such as during a jackpot game or a time-saving game, the ball enters the right first entrance 64b on a regular basis, so that the jackpot game is played. It is possible to prevent the state in which there is no hold of the special figure 1 from occurring when the state is completed and the time is shortened. In addition, since the period (0.1 seconds) in which it is difficult for the player to aim is set as the period during which the constantly movable valve 1500 is opened at one time, the left first ball is entered in the normal state of the game. A right-handed game can be more disadvantageous to the player than a left-handed game aimed at the mouth 64a.

Specifically, when the game state is the normal state, when the left-handed game is performed, about 15 balls out of the 250 shot balls fired will enter the left first entry port 64a. It is designed, and if a ball enters, five prize balls will be paid out. In addition, it is designed so that about 5 balls enter the general entry port 63, and when a ball enters, 5 prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the left-handed game, when 250 balls are fired, it is possible to put about 20 balls into the left first entry port 64a, considering that the prize balls to be paid out are fired again. It becomes.

On the other hand, when the game state is the normal state and the right-handed game is performed, it is designed so that about 9 balls out of the 250 fired balls enter the right first entry port 64b. If you enter the ball, two prize balls will be paid out. Further, the general entry port 63 is not provided in the right side region. Therefore, in the right-handed game, when 250 balls are fired, about 10 balls are allowed to enter the right first ball entrance 64b even if the prize ball to be paid out is fired again. I can only do it. Therefore, when the game state is the normal state, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the right-handed game.

In the present embodiment, the general entry port 63 is not provided in the game area (right area) through which the ball launched by the right-handed game passes, but in the normal state of the game, the right-handed ball is hit more than the left-handed game. The general ball entrance 63 may be arranged based on a design concept to the extent that the game is not more advantageous to the player. As a result, the number of balls paid out as prize balls can be increased in the right-handed game in the time saving state or the jackpot state.

Next, among the configurations arranged in the right side region of the game board 13 in the present modification 1, the through gate 67 and the second entry port 640 are different from the configurations of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above. The explanation will focus on the points.

In the first modification, the through gate 67 is arranged in the downstream portion of the first flow path 701 having the bending path 701a, and the second entry is made in the downstream portion of the second flow path 702 (the lower end portion of the fifth flow path 704b). A ball mouth 640 is arranged. With this configuration, the ball flowing into the second flow path 702 can flow down toward the second entry port 640 at intervals of 1.2 seconds without reducing the flow speed of the ball. Therefore, since the flow interval of the balls flowing down the second flow path 702 can be made constant, the balls are connected in the second flow path 702, and a plurality of balls are simultaneously entered into the second entry port 640. It can be suppressed that it ends up. Further, when the third symbol display device 81 notifies that the electric accessory 640a is open without noticing that the electric accessory 640a has been opened (see FIG. 23 (b)), it is promptly performed. The ball can be entered into the second entry port 640.

Further, different flow paths (first flow path 701, 1st flow path 701,) in which the through gate 67, which triggers the execution of the lottery of the normal symbol, and the electric accessory 640a whose operation is controlled by winning the normal symbol, are distributed by the distribution member 700. Since it is arranged in the second flow path 702), when the distribution member 700 is destroyed so as to allow the ball to flow down to only one of the flow paths (when the distribution function is disabled), the second ball entry port is used. It is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the 640. That is, when the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a are arranged in one of the flow paths distributed by the distribution member 700, the distribution member 700 is destroyed and a state is created in which the ball flows down only in one of the flow paths. This makes it possible to create a state in which it is easy to insert a ball into the second entrance 640, but by using the configuration of this modification, the ball is illegally inserted into the second entrance 640. It is possible to suppress the creation of a state that is easy to make.

<Modification 2 of the game board 13 in the first embodiment>
Next, a modification 2 of the game board 13 in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIG. 102. In the first embodiment described above, as described with reference to FIG. 2, a storage device is used to regulate the entry of balls into the right first entry port 64b arranged in the right region of the game board 13. A 750 and a non-electric accessory 710 were provided. As a result, unless the non-electric accessory 710 is opened, the ball is surely prevented from entering the right first ball entry port 64b. On the other hand, in the present modification 2, a constantly movable plate 1700 is provided between the storage device 750 and the specific general entry port 630, and when the storage device 750 is released, a ball that has passed through the storage device 750. The case where the ball enters the specific general entry port 630 and the case where the ball does not enter the specific general entry port 630 are provided.

Specifically, the constantly movable plate 1700 can be changed to a guide position (protruding position) in which the ball can be guided to the specific general entry port 630 every second, and an open position (evacuation position) in which the ball cannot be guided (difficult). A variable control means is provided, and the flow of the sphere that has passed through the storage device 750 can be controlled by the variable control by the variable control means.

The operation of the constantly movable plate 1700 is controlled by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Specifically, the movable plate solenoid (not shown) that variably operates the constantly movable plate 1700 is set to an on state (a state in which the constantly movable plate 1700 is projected) and an off state (a state in which the constantly movable plate 1700 is retracted). It has a variable control means for making it variable, and a predetermined variable scenario based on a predetermined counter value updated every time the main process of the main control device 110 is executed by the variable control means. Variable control is executed according to.

The movable plate solenoid used in this modification is configured such that the movable plate 1700 is always located at the shelter position while the power is on. As described in each of the above-described embodiments, this is the first condition during the time saving state as an end condition of the game period (time saving state period in which it is easy to acquire the hold memory of FIG. 2) which is advantageous to the player. This is because the condition that the change (lottery) of the special symbol (special figure 1) is executed once is set. In other words, unless this end condition is satisfied, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol) will be shorter than the normal state (normal symbol fluctuation time 3 seconds), and it will be executed when the normal symbol (normal symbol) is won. This is because the opening operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a to be performed is also such that the opening operation pattern (long opening) which is advantageous to the player is continuously executed. As described above, in the state where there is no reserved memory of special figure 1, the fluctuation of each special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started until the reserved memory of special figure 2 is acquired. There is no (waiting for a short time), and only the fluctuation of the normal symbol (normal symbol) is executed. In this case, the time saving state will be continued until the ball is won in the normal drawing and the ball enters the second entrance 640. In order to prevent such a situation from being intentionally created, the movable plate 1700 is always positioned at the protruding position when the power of the movable valve solenoid is turned off. As a result, even if the act of intentionally stopping the supply of power to the movable valve solenoid is executed, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of great damage.

In the configuration of the present modification described above, depending on the timing at which the storage device 750 is released (that is, the timing at which the jackpot game is started) and the variable state of the constantly movable plate 1700, the right first entry port 64b is reached. It is possible to regulate the entry of the ball. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect at what timing the jackpot game will start.

A configuration may be added to the above-described modified example so that a different timing can be set as the timing for releasing the storage device 750. Specifically, according to the jackpot type selected at the time of winning the jackpot of the special symbol (special symbol), the jackpot type for releasing the storage valve 750a of the storage device 750 and the jackpot type for not releasing are set in advance. Further, as the jackpot type for releasing the storage valve 750a, the first timing (for example, the timing for starting the first round) and the second timing (for example, the timing for starting the third round) are set in advance. Configure.

With this configuration, the storage device 750 is released and the timing at which the sphere passes through the storage device 750 can be diversified. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether the timing at which the jackpot game is started and the variable state of the constantly movable plate 1700 are favorable timings for the player, and the player can be made even after the jackpot game is started. Can be played with a sense of expectation. In addition, it is possible to suppress the act of starting the jackpot game at a timing advantageous to the player.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned presence / absence of release of the storage device 750 and the configuration in which a plurality of release timings are set according to the jackpot type may be used in each of the above-described embodiments. As a result, more complicated game playability can be provided, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Modification 3 of the game board 13 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, a modification 3 of the game board 13 in the above-described first embodiment will be described. The third modification is different in that the arrangement positions of the storage device 750 and the specific general entry port 630 are different from those of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) of the first embodiment described above, and other than that. The composition of is the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 103, in the present modification 3, the storage device 750 and the specific general entry port 630 are arranged on the right side of the lower center of the game board 13. With this configuration, the right-handed game makes it easier to store the ball in the storage device 750 than the left-handed game. Specifically, among the balls launched by the right-handed game, the balls that have flowed down on the first variable winning device 65 are configured to be most easily stored in the storage device 750.

Then, in a state where the spheres are stored in the storage device 750, the next and subsequent spheres are configured to flow down above the stored spheres. Specifically, the upper surface position of the sphere stored in the storage device 750 is lower than the flow direction extension line of the sphere flowing down on the first variable winning device 65 (the first variable winning device 65 A storage device 750 is arranged so as to have a downward step with respect to the upper surface of the unit to be provided. Therefore, the storage of the spheres in the storage device 750 does not affect the subsequent sphere flow. In the present modification 3 configured in this way, when the right-handed game that is advantageous to the player is started, the holding of the special figure 1 can be secured more reliably.

Each modification of the game board 13 described above may be applied to each of the above-described embodiments. As a result, a more complicated game can be provided to the player, and the interest can be improved.

<Modification example of electric accessory 640a>
Next, a modified example of the electric accessory 640a used in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107. In each of the above-described embodiments, the game board in which the second ball entry port 640 is arranged so that two or more balls do not enter the second ball entry port 640 while the electric accessory 640a is open. It was configured to regulate the ball flow in the right region of 13. That is, a measure was taken to regulate the ball flow of the electric accessory 640a so that a plurality of balls do not flow in continuously at the same time. On the other hand, the electric accessory A200 described in this modification has a configuration in which two or more balls cannot enter the second entry port 640.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104, the shutter portion A222 has a cross section orthogonal to the rotation shaft portions 223 and 223 curved in a substantially "<" shape, and the rotation door A220 serves as a side start winning opening A40A. It is composed of a door main wall A222A that is located on the front side and stands up substantially vertically when the door is closed, and a winning auxiliary wall A222B that extends rearward from the upper end of the door main wall A222 in this state. The door main wall A222A has a V-shaped cross section in order to prevent the game ball from being caught. Further, the door main wall A222A is located away from the rotating shaft portions 223 and 223, and rotates forward from a substantially horizontal state as the rotating door A220 rotates from an open state to a closed state. It becomes a state of standing up almost vertically. The winning auxiliary wall A222B is inclined so as to descend toward the back side of the side starting winning opening A40A with the rotating door A220 open.

Further, the width of the shutter portion A222 is slightly narrower than the width of the side starting winning opening A40A, while the width of the pair of side walls is wider than the width of the side starting winning opening A40A. When the rotating door A220 is completely closed, the front surface of the side wall comes into contact with the side edge of the side starting winning opening A40A, and the rotating door A220 further closes the side starting winning opening A40A. It prevents it from rotating.

Of the pair of side walls, door rotating protrusions A224 and A224 are provided on the opposite sides of the rotating shaft portion from the shutter portion, respectively. Further, on the side wall, positioning contact portions A225 and A225 which are located behind the door rotating protrusion A224 and project downward when the rotating door A220 is in the completely open open end position are formed. ing.

A detection sensor is housed in the above-mentioned switch housing part 215B of the resin housing. The detection sensor has a flat rectangular parallelepiped shape, and a game ball passage hole is formed through the rear end portion in the vertical direction. Through holes are formed on both the upper and lower sides of the switch accommodating portion 215B corresponding to the game ball passage hole, and the game ball that has entered the tongue piece accommodating portion 215A passes through the game ball passage hole 281 and accommodates the switch. It is designed to move below the portion 215B. Below the switch accommodating portion 215B, a duct (not shown) that takes in the game ball and guides it to the ball circulation system of the game field is provided.

The tongue piece accommodating portion 215A of the resin housing is accommodated in the movable tongue piece A230. The movable tongue piece A230 has a flat structure in which the width direction is short with respect to the front-rear direction and is thinned in the vertical direction, and is supported so as to slide back and forth while sliding on the inner surface of the tongue piece accommodating portion 215A.

The movable tongue piece A230 has a symmetrical shape when viewed from above, and its front end portion is provided with a protruding projecting piece portion that is stepped narrower than the whole. The infested projectile portion is slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball, and has a width that allows it to be inserted into the lower wide portion of the side start winning opening A40A.

A pair of outward descending inclined surfaces 240S and 240S inclined so as to descend toward both sides are formed on both side portions in the lateral width direction of the upper surface of the infested projecting piece portion. In addition, between the pair of outward descending inclined surfaces 240S and 240S of the infested projecting pieces, the pull-in inclined surface is extremely gently inclined so as to descend toward the center and is gently inclined so as to descend toward the rear. 240H is formed. Further, on the upper surface of the infested projecting piece portion, an induction inclined surface 240Y that descends relatively steeply from the rear end of the retracting inclined surface 240H toward the rear is formed.

The movable tongue piece A230 has a shape in which the trapezoidal protrusion 231D protrudes rearward from the center in the width direction at the rear end of the substantially quadrangular base portion in the portion rearward from the infestation protrusion when viewed from above. There is. At the center of the base portion in the width direction, a ball-passing elongated hole is formed vertically from the front end position to the rear end position. The ball passage slot has a width that allows exactly one game ball to pass through and is slightly smaller than the width of the infested projectile portion. In addition, the front end of the ball-passing elongated hole becomes semi-circular and part of it reaches the base end of the infested projecting piece, and the rear end of the ball-passing elongated hole becomes parallel to the bottom of the trapezoidal projecting portion 231D. It has reached the position near the rear end of the base part.

A pair of doors extending in the vertical direction along both side edges of the long ball passage hole in the range of the movable tongue piece A230 extending from the base end of the infestation projecting piece to the intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the base part. The drive protrusion is formed so as to protrude. The entire base portion on the rear side of the door drive protrusion wall is a power receiving portion A230P that is thickened in the vertical direction so as to have an upper surface flush with the rear end portion upper surface of the door drive protrusion wall.

A pair of connecting recesses are formed in the power receiving portion A230P on the opposite inner side surfaces facing each other with the ball passage elongated hole interposed therebetween. Each connecting recess is composed of a substantially triangular interference avoiding recess whose lower end side is narrowed, and an engaging groove portion which is formed by being depressed in the inner surface of the interference avoiding recess on the side away from the ball passage elongated hole and extends in the vertical direction. Become. The front sliding contact surface 236A arranged on the front side of the engaging groove portion extends straight in the vertical direction. The rear sliding contact surface 236B arranged on the rear side of the engaging groove portion has a portion below the intermediate position in the vertical direction projecting forward to serve as a seesaw stopper portion according to the present invention. The stopper contact surface 237S at the upper end of the seesaw stopper portion is slightly inclined so as to descend toward the front sliding contact surface 236A.

Each door drive protrusion is provided with an intermediate recessed portion at an intermediate position in the front-rear direction, the front side of the intermediate recessed portion is the front pressing protrusion A241 according to the present invention, and the rear side of the intermediate recessed portion is the rear pressing according to the present invention. It is a protrusion A242. The rear pressing protrusion A242 has the same height as the power receiving portion A230P, and the front pressing protrusion A241 is lower than the power receiving portion A230P. Further, the bottom surface of the intermediate depression portion is a horizontal and flat intermediate depression flat surface 233N. The rear surface of the front pressing protrusion A241 is the closing pressing portion A241K according to the present invention, and rises vertically from the intermediate depressed flat surface 233N. Further, the upper surface of the front pressing protrusion A241 is the door stopper A241J according to the present invention, and is horizontally flat. On the other hand, the front surface of the rear pressing protrusion A242 is the opening pressing portion A242Z according to the present invention, which also rises vertically from the intermediate depressed flat surface 233N. The front surface of the front pressing protrusion A241 is parallel to the closing pressing portion A241K, which is the rear surface, and gently inclines forward from the middle to extend to the rear ends of the above-mentioned outward downward inclined surfaces 240S and 240S. ..

The lower end of the seesaw member A250 is engaged with the connecting recess of the movable tongue piece A230, and the door rotating protrusions A224 and A224 of the rotating door A220 are engaged with the door driving protrusion of the movable tongue piece A230, respectively. are doing. As a result, the movable tongue piece A230 is driven by receiving power from the solenoid via the seesaw member A250, and the rotary door A220 is driven by receiving power from the movable tongue piece A230.

First, the transmission of power from the seesaw member A250 to the movable tongue piece A230 will be described. Each connecting arm of the seesaw member A250 is received in each interference avoiding recess of each connecting recess of the movable tongue piece A230, and the lower end connecting protrusions A255 and A255 of each connecting arm are formed in each engaging groove of each connecting recess. Engage.

Here, when the solenoid is not excited, the plunger protrudes forward as shown in FIG. 104, and at this time, the lower end connecting convex portions A255 and A255 are located at the lower end portion of the engaging groove portion. At this time, the movable tongue piece A230 is arranged at the rear end position of the linear movement movable range, and the infestation projecting piece portion is retracted to the back side of the side start winning opening A40A. In this case, that is, in a state where the infestation projectile portion is retracted to the back side of the side start winning opening A40A, the tip portion of the infestation projectile portion is retracted to a position where the inside of the side start winning opening A40A is completely covered. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from colliding with the side start winning opening A40A in the shunting state.

When the solenoid is excited from this state and the plunger is sucked backward, the seesaw member A250 rotates around the rotation shaft portions A253 and A253, and the connecting arm rotates forward. The lower end connecting convex portions A255 and A255 press the front sliding contact surfaces 236A and 236A forward while sliding contact with the front sliding contact surfaces 236A and 236A. As a result, the movable tongue piece A230 is pushed forward of the game machine, and as shown in FIG. 104, the protruding protrusion piece portion protrudes from the side start winning opening A40A toward the front side of the game board. Then, for example, the end surface of the base portion of the movable tongue piece A230 comes into contact with the opening edge of the side start winning opening A40A from the rear surface side, and the movable tongue piece A230 is positioned at the "front end operating position" according to the present invention and stops. Then, the infestation protrusion piece 240 is in a state of being maximally protruded from the side start winning opening A40A (see FIG. 106).

When the excitation of the solenoid is stopped with the movable tongue piece A230 arranged at the front end operating position (the state shown in FIG. 106), the plunger is projected forward by the compression coil spring A276. Then, the lower end portion of the seesaw member A250 rotates rearward of the game machine around the rotation shaft portions A253 and A253, and the lower end portion of the seesaw member A250 moves from the front position to the rear position from the rotation shaft portions A253 and A253. Moving. At this time, the lower end connecting convex portions A255 and A255 are in sliding contact with the rear sliding contact surfaces 236B and 236B of the engaging groove portion and are pushed backward. As a result, the movable tongue piece is pulled in to the rear of the game machine, and the infestation projecting piece portion retracts to the back side of the side start winning opening A40A (see FIG. 107).

Specifically, when the excitation of the solenoid is stopped and the lower end portion of the connecting arm in the seesaw member A250 rotates rearward, first, the upper edge portion E1 (first) of the stopper concave portion provided on the lower end connecting convex portion A255. The trailing edge of the plane M1) comes into contact with the stopper contact surface 237S of the seesaw stopper portion. Then, as the seesaw member A250 rotates, the lower end connecting convex portion A255 slides into contact with the rear sliding contact surface 236B, and the lower end connecting convex portion A255 is located behind the rotating shaft portions A253 and A253 of the seesaw member A250. Occasionally, the lower edge portion E2 (lower end edge of the second plane M2) of the stopper recess comes into contact with the lower portion of the rear sliding contact surface 236B below the seesaw stopper portion, and the rear sliding of the engaging groove portion. Push the contact surfaces 236B and 236B backward. As a result, the movable tongue piece can be returned to the initial position (rear end retracted position) by the elastic force of the compression coil spring A276.

By the way, when the movable tongue piece A230 retracted to the back of the side start winning opening A40A is pulled out to the front of the game board by, for example, a wire inserted through a gap of the game machine, the following become that way. That is, the power is not transmitted from the solenoid to the seesaw member A250, the power of the seesaw member A250 is transmitted from the movable tongue piece A230, and the connecting arm of the seesaw member A250 is pushed forward by the rear sliding contact surface 236B in the engaging groove portion 236. Then, the first plane M1 in each of the stopper recesses of the lower end connecting convex portions A255 and A255 and the stopper contact surface 237S of the seesaw stopper portion come into surface contact with each other. When the movable tongue piece A230 is further pulled forward from this state, the pulling force becomes an upward force F1 orthogonal to the stopper contact surface 237S of the stepped portion, and becomes the center of the first plane M1 and the rotating shaft portion. The direction is substantially parallel to the direction connecting the center of A253, that is, the direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation direction of the stopper recess. As a result, the rotation of the seesaw member A250 is restricted, and it becomes impossible to pull the movable tongue piece A230 toward the front so that the protruding protrusion piece portion protrudes in front of the side start winning opening A40A. Further, even if the seesaw member A250 is slightly lifted diagonally upward by the upward force F1, the triangular ridge formed on the connecting wall 252 of the seesaw member A250 engages with the flange portion 274F of the plunger. As a result, the rotation of the seesaw member A250 is more reliably prohibited.

Next, the transmission of power from the movable tongue piece A230 to the rotating door A220 will be described. The door rotating protrusions A224 and A224 of the rotating door A220 are engaged with the door driving protrusion of the movable tongue piece, respectively, whereby the rotating door A220 receives power from the movable tongue piece A230 and rotates. To do. Specifically, in a state where the movable tongue piece A230 is arranged at the rear end retracting position and the entire infestation projecting piece portion is retracted to the back side of the side start winning opening A40A, the door rotating projecting portion A224 presses the front side. It is arranged above the door stopper A241J in the protrusion 241 (state in FIG. 104). At this time, the rotating shaft portion of the rotating door A220 is located diagonally forward of the door rotating protrusion A224. At this time, the first space AS1 according to the present invention is formed between the lower end portion of the door rotating protrusion A224 and the open pressing portion A242Z of the rear pressing protrusion A242.

Then, when the movable tongue piece A230 advances from the rear end retracted position, the front pressing protrusion A241 moves forward and becomes the lower end of the door rotating protrusion A224, as shown in the changes from FIGS. 104 to 107. The door stopper A241J of the front pressing protrusion A241 no longer faces in the vertical direction, and the lower end of the door rotating protrusion A224 faces the intermediate depressed flat surface 233N in the vertical direction with the intermediate depressed flat surface 233N. A rotating space for the door rotating protrusion A224 is secured between them.

Then, when the movable tongue piece A230 moves further forward, the lower end of the door rotating protrusion A224 moves in the first space AS1 described above, and during this time, the movable tongue piece A230 moves forward but the rotating door. Is kept in a stopped state. Then, as shown in FIG. 105, when the protruding protrusion of the movable tongue piece A230 protrudes by a predetermined amount from the side start winning opening A40A, the lower end of the door rotating protrusion A224 is the rear pressing protrusion A242. It abuts on the front surface A242Z. Then, as the movable tongue piece further advances, the door main wall A222A of the rotating door A220 is lifted, the side start winning opening A40A is opened (see FIGS. 105 and 106), and the movable tongue piece A230 is at the front end. When the operating position is reached, the rotating door A220 is fully opened, and the game ball can be won in the side start winning opening A40A. More specifically, when the rotating door A220 is pushed by the rear pressing protrusion A242 and rotated by a certain angle, the rotating door A220 rotates toward the open end position due to its own weight. That is, the rotating door A220 starts the rotation operation when the protruding protrusion piece portion protrudes about half from the side start winning opening A40A, and the protruding protrusion piece portion protrudes about half and then completely protrudes. In a relatively short period of time, the side start winning opening A40A changes from the fully closed state to the fully open state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the movable tongue piece A230 starts advancing, the rotary door A220 is stopped halfway, and the rotary door A220 starts to open from the middle. The mouth A40A is opened. Then, when the game ball falls on the upper surface of the infestation projecting piece portion 240 protruding from the side starting winning opening A40A, the game ball is guided by the infestation projecting piece portion 240 to win a prize in the side starting winning opening A40A. The game ball is detected by the detection switch.

Further, when the rotating door A220 is completely opened, as shown in FIG. 106, the positioning contact portion A225 of the side wall abuts on the upper surface of the rear pressing protrusion A242, and the rotating door A220 is at the open end. Positioned in position. As a result, the rattling of the rotating door A220 is regulated. Further, in this state, a second space AS2 according to the present invention is formed between the lower end portion of the door rotating protrusion A224 and the open pressing portion A242Z of the rear pressing protrusion A242.

Further, when the movable tongue piece A230 retracts from the front end operating position, the front pressing protrusion A241 moves rearward as shown in the changes from FIGS. 106 to 107. At this time, the lower end portion of the door rotating protrusion A224 moves relatively in the second space AS2 toward the front pressing protrusion A241. As a result, a part of the infestation projecting piece portion 240 in the movable tongue piece A230 moves into the front opening winning opening A40A (from the state where the door rotating projecting portion A224 is in contact with the opening pressing portion A242Z, it hits the closing pressing portion A241K. The rotating door A220 is maintained in an open state while (moving in the second space AS2 until it comes into contact). Then, the movable tongue piece A230 wins a front opening prize by a predetermined amount (the distance that the door rotating protrusion A224 moves in the second space AS2 from the state where the door rotating protrusion A224 abuts on the opening pressing portion A242Z until it abuts on the closing pressing portion A241K). When moving into the mouth A40A, the closing pressing portion A241K of the front pressing protrusion A241 comes into contact with the lower end of the door rotating protrusion A224. At this time, about half of the infestation projecting piece portion 240 of the movable tongue piece A230 is housed in the side start winning opening A40A. Then, when the movable tongue piece A230 is further retracted, the rotating door A220 operates so as to close with the retracting of the movable tongue piece A230, and when the infested projectile portion is completely retracted, the rotating door A220 is moved. The side start winning opening A40A is completely closed and stopped, and the movable tongue piece A230 further retracts behind the side starting winning opening A40A, and the lower end of the door rotating protrusion A224 moves up and down with the door stopper A241J. It returns to the initial state facing in the direction. As described above, in the present embodiment, the movable tongue piece A230 starts retreating, the rotating door 220 is stopped halfway, and the rotating door A220 starts closing from the middle. The mouth A40A is closed.

By the way, in a state where the side start winning opening A40A is closed (state in FIG. 104), for example, when the rotating door A220 is to be pried open with a wire or the like, the door rotating protrusion A224 rotates to the opening side. , The front side pressing protrusion A241 comes into contact with the door stopper A241J in the vertical direction. As a result, unauthorized opening of the rotating door A220 is prohibited. Here, the direction of the force by which the door rotating protrusion A224 pushes the door stopper A241J of the front pressing protrusion A241 is in the vertical direction and is orthogonal to the movable direction (front-back direction) of the movable tongue piece A230. Therefore, when an illegal external force is applied to the rotating door A220, the door stopper portion A241J of the movable tongue piece A230 is not moved in the movable direction, and the rotating door A220 is surely prevented from being opened illegally. Can be done.

<Other production example 1 using the configuration of each embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 108, other production examples executed using the configurations of the above-described embodiments will be described. In the second embodiment described above, as a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 15 (a), each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, It was configured to display the number of pending figures for each symbol) and each symbol. On the other hand, in the effect example described with reference to FIG. 108, the effect of displaying the symbol display and the number of reservations of the special figure 1 in the sub-display area Ds is executed. In this sub-display area Ds, it is displayed in a variable display mode in which a specific display mode (for example, a number) is changed in correspondence with the fluctuation of the symbol of the special figure 1 (the change in the special figure 1 is executed). , The reserved number of the special figure 1 is configured to be displayed in the suggestion display mode suggesting the display mode to be displayed next in the variable display mode. Here, the contents of this production example will be described with reference to FIG. 108 (a).

The display screen of FIG. 108 (a) is a display screen showing an example of the case where the special figure 1 is not held during the change of the special figure 1 during the time saving state (the first time reduction). As shown in FIG. 108 (a), the special figure 1 variable display area Ds3 of the sub-display area Ds is referred to as "remaining time seconds" as an auxiliary display mode for giving meaning to the variable situation of the variable display mode. The display and the display of "10" are displayed in the variable display area Ds4 as a variable display mode indicating that the special figure 1 is changing. By varying the display mode (“10” in FIG. 108 (a)) displayed in the variable display area Ds4, it is configured to notify that the special figure 1 is changing during the variable display. There is.

It should be noted that the display mode (for example, "10") displayed in the variable display area Ds4 while the special figure 1 is changing means that the player mistakenly recognizes that the change of the special figure 1 has stopped in the display mode. In order to prevent this, the display mode is temporarily stopped and displayed for a period (for example, 0.5 seconds) in which the player can recognize the display mode in a slightly shaken state, and then the display mode is changed to the next display mode. Then, when the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is stopped, the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4 (for example, “∞” (see FIG. 108 (b))) is set by the player in the display mode of the special figure 1. In order to recognize that the fluctuation has stopped, it is configured to stop for a longer period (for example, 1 second) than the above-mentioned temporary stop display (for example, 0.5 seconds).

With this configuration, the player can easily grasp the content of the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4. As long as the player can easily grasp the contents of the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4, other configurations may be used, for example, the period during which the special figure 1 is variably displayed. , The color of the background image of the special figure 1 variable display area Ds3 is changed, the display content of the auxiliary display mode is changed, and the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4 is changed during the period when the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed. You may change the color of the character and the thickness of the characters. As a result, the player can easily understand the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4.

Further, according to the configuration used in this production example, it is possible to notify that the special figure 1 is fluctuating and the remaining fluctuation period of the special figure 1 depending on the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4. ing. As a result, a plurality of information related to the fluctuation of the special figure 1 can be displayed in one display area (variable display area Ds4).

In this production example, in order to notify the player that the special figure 1 is fluctuating, the effect display that counts down the time in the special figure 1 fluctuation display area Ds3 is executed, but other than that. It may be configured, and for example, a story development type production display such as a production in which a question is asked and an answer is given or a production in which a mission is achieved may be used. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the special figure 1 is changing by changing the content displayed in the special figure 1 variable display area Ds3.

Then, among the sub-display areas Ds, in the special figure 1 hold display area Ds5, the hold number suggestion mode for showing the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed based on the hold number of the special figure 1 (FIG. 108 (Fig. 108). a) See). This hold number suggestion mode is displayed in a display mode suggesting a display mode to be displayed in the variable display area Ds4 from the next time onward. That is, the display mode displayed corresponding to each hold number suggestion mode is changed each time the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4 is changed.

According to the display screen shown in FIG. 108 (a), four hold number suggestion modes are displayed in the special figure 1 hold display area Ds5, and any of "V", "9", and "∞", respectively. Display mode is displayed. The display mode displayed as the hold number suggestion mode suggests the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4 as described above, and the "V" display mode is a hit by the lottery result of the special figure 1. The "9" display mode suggests the residual fluctuation period of the special figure 1, and the "∞" display mode suggests that there is no reserved memory of the special figure 1.

According to the game state shown in FIG. 108 (a), since there is no hold memory of the special figure 1, the display is set so that the number of "∞" displayed is increased as the hold number suggestion mode. As described above, the display mode of each hold number suggestion mode displayed in the special figure 1 hold display area Ds5 is the lottery result of the changing special figure 1, the remaining fluctuation time of the changing special figure 1, and the special figure. Since the display content is set based on the number of reserved balls of 1, the player can play the game while predicting the progress content of the future game based on the display mode displayed in the special figure 1 reserved display area Ds5. It can be carried out.

According to the display screen shown in FIG. 108 (a), four hold number suggestion modes are displayed, but the display number always displays four hold number suggestion modes regardless of the hold number in FIG. It is configured to be done. That is, in the special figure 1 hold display area Ds5, the hold number of the special figure 1 is notified (suggested) to the player not by the display number of the hold number suggestion mode but by the display content of each hold number suggestion mode. There is. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the current number of holds.

In this production example, the number of display of the hold number suggestion mode displayed in the special figure 1 hold display area Ds5 is configured to be always displayed (regardless of the hold number of special figure 1). Other configurations may be used, and are displayed in the special figure 1 hold display area Ds5 based on, for example, the number of holds of special figure 1, the remaining fluctuation time of special figure 1, and the lottery result of special figure 1. The display number of the pending number suggestion mode may be different. In this case, for example, when the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 becomes short (for example, when the remaining time becomes 10 seconds), the number of display of the hold number suggestion mode displayed in the special figure 1 hold display area Ds5 is reduced. It is good to configure. As a result, the options predicted by the player can be reduced, and the prediction accuracy of the player can be improved.

Further, as in the second embodiment described above, in the gaming machine configured to execute the game advantageous to the player when there is no hold number of the special figure 1 at the end of the time saving state. By suggesting (displaying) the presence or absence of the reserved number of the special figure 1 as in this production example, it is possible to make the player execute the game in the time saving state while expecting the player to the end.

Then, when the effect display of FIG. 108 (a) elapses and the fluctuation of the special figure 1 stops, the display screen shown in FIG. 108 (b) is displayed. The display screen of FIG. 108 (b) is a display screen showing an example in the case where neither the special figure 1 nor the special figure 2 is held in the state where the fluctuation of the special figure 1 executed during the time saving state is stopped. is there. As shown in FIG. 108 (b), when the first time reduction is completed in the state where the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are not held, the change of the special symbol is not started (the special figure change of the second rotation of the time reduction is performed). (Without being started), it will be on standby for a short time. During this short waiting time, by continuously executing the right-handed game, the normal symbol is continuously changed (lottery), and the game in which the ball is inserted into the second entrance 640 is executed.

In the configuration of the game board 13 described above with reference to FIG. 2, even if the right-handed game is executed during the time saving state, the ball does not enter the right first entrance 64b, and therefore the ball does not enter the right first entrance 64b. The state shown in (1) is a gaming state in which the time saving state is continuously maintained until the ball enters the second entry port 640. On the display screen, the normal symbol main symbol Dmc corresponding to the normal symbol is variablely displayed in the first display area Dm, and the special figure 1 reserved display area Ds5 is currently displayed instead of the display indicating the number of reserved characters in the special figure 1. Is displayed in the variable display area Ds4 as a display indicating that the special figure 1 is not fluctuating in the special figure 1 variable display area Ds3. The characters "remaining time ∞ seconds" with the "∞" display mode stopped are displayed.

According to the effect example described above, the player displays a display mode in which the fluctuation status (lottery result, remaining fluctuation time) of the special figure 1 during the time saving state and the reserved number of the special figure 1 are displayed on the display screen. Since the effect is displayed so as to predict the progress of the subsequent game, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the above-mentioned production example, both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 shift to the time saving standby state which can occur in the state without holding (the "∞" display mode is stopped and displayed in the variable display area Ds4). Although the effect display for suggesting is also executed, it is determined whether or not to execute this effect display based on the number of reserved memories (presence / absence of hold) in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2. Also, for example, when the number of reserved storages in the special figure 2 is 1 or more, it is preferable not to execute the above-mentioned effect display.

In the first embodiment described above, when both the gaming state at the timing when the fluctuation (lottery) of the normal symbol is executed and the gaming state at the timing when the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set are both in the time saving state. As the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a, an operation pattern (long open) that is advantageous to the player is set, but other configurations may be used. For example, a fluctuation (lottery) of a normal symbol is executed. The timing at which the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (the timing at which the determination condition is satisfied) may be used instead of the timing (the timing at which the determination by the determination means is executed).

Further, the timing at which the operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed (the timing at which the operation means executes the operation) is not the timing at which the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set (the timing at which the operation mode is set by the operation mode setting means). ) May be used.

Further, when the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is to operate the electric accessory 640a a plurality of times, each operation content may be determined at each timing when each operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed. .. Specifically, as the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a, there is an operation pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is opened three times, and when an operation pattern (long release) advantageous to the player is set, each release is performed. When the period is set to 2 seconds and an operation pattern (short opening) that is disadvantageous to the player is set, when each opening period is set to 0.2 seconds, the long opening is used as the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a. Is set, and when the time saving state ends between the second opening and the third opening, the opening period may be set to 0.2 seconds only for the third opening. With this configuration, the electric accessory 640a is operated so as to be advantageous to the player until the end during the time saving state which is advantageous to the player, but after the gaming state shifts to the normal state, the player It can be facilitated to suppress the provision of an excessively favorable condition.

In this case, only the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a may be set in advance, and the opening period may be set at the timing when the electric accessory 640a is opened according to the operation pattern. Without setting the operation pattern of the object 640a, the timing at which the operation of the electric accessory 640a is started and the operation content may be individually controlled for each operation.

Further, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent a plurality of balls from entering the second entry port 640 while the electric accessory 640a is open, a ball is inserted into the second entry port 640. It is possible to enter the second entrance 640 in order to prevent a plurality of balls from entering the second entrance 640 at the same time, with the condition that one ball is inserted as the condition for ending the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. A distribution means for alternately distributing balls to a flow path (first flow path) and a flow path that cannot enter the second ball entry port 640 (second flow path) is provided, and the first flow path is provided. Although it was configured so that the distance between the balls flowing down was wide. Other configurations may be added to more reliably prevent a plurality of balls from entering the second entry port 640 at the same time.

For example, of the flow paths (first flow paths) capable of entering the second ball entry port 640, a gear-type sprocket mechanism is provided on the upstream side of the second ball entry port 640, even if the first flow path is provided. Even if a plurality of balls flow down continuously on the road, the sprocket mechanism may guide the balls one by one to the downstream side to widen the flow interval of the balls. As a result, it is possible to physically prevent a plurality of balls from entering the second entry port 640 at the same time. In this way, when a ball feeding member for feeding the ball in the downstream direction is provided on the upstream side of the second entry port 640 so that the flow interval of the ball is constant, the above-mentioned distribution member may not be used. .. Further, the ball feeding member may have a configuration other than the sprocket mechanism described above. For example, a magnetic body that can move with a constant operation is provided, and the ball is fed (flowed down) in the flow direction at a predetermined timing depending on the moving position of the magnetic body. ) Configuration may be used.

Further, in the present embodiment, the distribution member (distribution device 700) uses a configuration in which the ball launched in the right-handed game is distributed to two flow paths, but a configuration in which the ball is distributed to three or more flow paths. May be used. In this case, one distribution member may be used to distribute the sphere to three or more flow paths, or a combination of a plurality of distribution members may be used to distribute the sphere to three or more flow paths. It may be configured to sort. As a result, the interval at which the ball flows down the flow path that can enter the second ball entry port 640 can be further widened.

Further, in the present embodiment, a distribution member (distribution device 700) that distributes spheres evenly to a plurality of flow paths is used, but it is necessary to equalize the distribution rate of spheres to each flow path. Instead, for example, a distribution member may be provided such that the number of balls flowing down the first flow path 701 and the number of balls flowing down the second flow path 702 are 1: 2, or the distribution destination of the balls may be A configuration may be provided so as to be randomly selected. This makes it possible for the player to be interested in the flow mode of the ball.

In the second embodiment described above, a plurality of conditions for ending the time saving state are provided, and when any of the conditions is satisfied, the time saving state is terminated. However, other configurations may be used in advance. When all the set end conditions for the time saving state are satisfied, the time saving state may end. In this case, it is preferable to use a configuration in which a plurality of time-saving state end conditions that already satisfy the conditions are output to the outside so that the player can grasp them.

Further, in the second embodiment described above, one condition of the end condition of the time saving state is that the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol is executed a plurality of times (twice) as the number of times the time saving state is continued. However, such a configuration may be used to execute the playability shown below.

In the third embodiment described above, when the time saving state B is set for the purpose of providing a variety of playability by making the fluctuation time of the normal symbol different when a predetermined condition is satisfied, further, the time saving state When the number of fluctuations of the normal symbol in the inside exceeds 40 times, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened to provide an advantageous state to the player, but the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is different. By doing so, it may be configured to provide a disadvantageous state to the player, for example, a plurality of normal figure fluctuation times based on the type of the winning symbol and the gaming state at the time of winning. In a configuration in which one selection table is selected from the selection table and the normal figure fluctuation time executed from the selected normal figure fluctuation time selection table is selected, from the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the time saving state. A configuration may be used in which a long fluctuation time of the normal map (variation time of the normal map length) can be selected.

In this case, if the normal symbol length fluctuation time is selected, it is not possible to execute any more ordinary symbol lottery during the time saving state, so that the gaming state advantageous to the player is substantially terminated. With this configuration, the player grasps how long the substantially time-saving state (the game state is the time-saving state and the normal symbol length fluctuation time is not selected as the normal symbol variation) will continue. It is possible to provide playability that is difficult to achieve.

Further, when selecting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal figure), a configuration in which the fluctuation time set in advance based on the number of fluctuations of the normal figure may be selected in advance, or the normal pattern may be selected. When setting the fluctuation time of the symbol (normal figure), a configuration may be used in which the fluctuation time corresponding to the counter value acquired from a plurality of fluctuation times is selected based on a predetermined counter value. Further, when the fluctuation of the normal symbol (normal symbol) is started, a predetermined lottery is executed, and when the lottery result is the predetermined lottery result, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol) is set to the time saving state. A normal map fluctuation time (normal map length fluctuation time) longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in (for example, 150 seconds) may be selected.

In this way, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, by lengthening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, it is possible to end a substantially time saving state that is advantageous to the player, thereby allowing the player to You can concentrate on playing the game while always keeping a sense of tension.

Further, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the third symbol display device 81 is executed in a configuration in which a normal symbol fluctuation time (normal symbol length fluctuation time) longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the time saving state is selected. When the normal figure length fluctuation time is selected as the effect to be performed, it is preferable to turn off the notification of the right-handed game and guide the left-handed game even if the time is shortened. In this case, since the special figure 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state is actually being executed, the time-saving state is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the special figure 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state is completed. It is advisable to execute an effect that notifies that the (ream villa mode) has ended. As a result, the player can be made to think that the special figure 1 fluctuation during the time saving state has ended and the time saving state has ended.

Further, as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, in addition to the above-mentioned normal map length fluctuation time (150 seconds), the fluctuation time in the normal map (for example,) which is shorter than that but longer than the normal normal map fluctuation time (3 seconds). 30 seconds or 50 seconds) may be set to be configurable. In this case, when the fluctuation time in the normal map is set, the effect display that makes the third symbol display device 81 think that the time saving state has ended is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as in the case where the fluctuation time in the normal figure is set as described above. It is displayed to make the player think that the time saving state has ended, and at the timing when the fluctuation time in the normal map ends, or just before the fluctuation time in the normal map ends (for example, corresponding to the normal fluctuation time in the normal map). 3 seconds ago), it is advisable to display the effect display in the time saving state again. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that the time saving state has been shifted to the time saving state a plurality of times by using one time saving state, and it is possible to provide the player with a surprising game.

Furthermore, by combining the above-mentioned two normal map fluctuation configurations, the time saving state end effect executed when the set normal map fluctuation time exceeds the remaining period of the time saving state, and the set normal map fluctuation time The configuration may be such that both the time saving state end suggestion effect and the time saving state end suggestion effect executed when is shorter than the remaining period of the time saving state can be displayed. As a result, even after the time saving state end effect is executed, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game with the expectation that the time saving state will be immediately changed to the time saving state.

In the first embodiment described above, the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set so that the ball cannot enter the second entry port 640 in the normal state (non-time saving state), but in the normal state by any chance. When a ball enters the second ball entry port 640, it is advisable to provide a game stopping means for stopping the game. In this case, as the game stopping means, a means for executing a firing prohibition process in which the ball is not fired even if the operation handle 51 is operated, or a ball fired by operating the operation handle 51 is the game area (game board 13). Ball collection processing that allows the ball to be collected before reaching the front), and firing regulation processing that regulates the firing strength of the operation handle to the firing strength that is disadvantageous to the player (the firing strength that cannot reach the game area). , Even if a ball enters each entrance provided in the game area, it is conceivable to invalidate all the benefits (the privilege of paying out the prize ball and the privilege of executing the lottery).

Further, as a process for executing the game stopping means, first, when it is determined that the ball has entered the second entry port 640, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state. If it is determined that the time is not shortened, then it is determined whether or not the current jackpot game is in progress. Then, when it is determined that the ball is not in the big hit game, it is preferable to determine that the current entry is an illegal entry and to execute the game stop process by the above-mentioned game stop means.

Further, in the game stop means execution process described above, when it is determined that the ball has entered the second entry port 640 during the big hit game, the game stop means is not executed, but a special privilege effect is executed. It is good to do it. That is, although the time is not shortened during the jackpot game, the ball may rarely enter the second entrance 640 because it is in the game state in which the right-handed game is performed. In this case, the game stop means is not executed, and instead, a special effect for blessing the player is executed, which makes it possible to realize that the player has a very rare experience. It can be made to enhance the effect of production.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to execute the above-mentioned dedicated effect, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in a manner in which the player can recognize the normal figure variation display during the jackpot game, and the electric accessory 640a is displayed. The timing of opening (short opening timing) may be predicted. As a result, the player can digest the jackpot game while gazing at the normal map variation display displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

<Other production example 2 using the configuration of the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 109 to 111, another effect example 2 using the configuration of the third embodiment will be described. In this production example, the configuration for setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is different from that of the third embodiment described above, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is provided according to the game state. It is configured to be set based on the selection table 203aa. Here, with reference to FIG. 109, the effect content executed in the present effect example 2 will be described.

FIG. 109 shows an example of the display screen of the effect executed in the present effect example 2, and FIG. 109 (a) is a schematic view showing an example of the display screen when the time saving state is started. Reference numeral 109 (b) is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen when a long variation is set as the variation time of the normal symbol in the time saving state. The same elements as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 109 (a), on the display screen of the present production example 2, a picture imitating a bomb is displayed as an end suggestion display mode Dm10 that triggers a reduction in the remaining period in a short period of time, and a picture imitating a bomb is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In the second sub-display area Ds2, the characters "pinch when the bomb explodes" indicating the contents of the end suggestion display mode Dm10 are displayed.

Then, when a fluctuation time longer than the remaining period of the short period of time is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, as shown in FIG. 109 (b), the end suggestion display mode Dm10 is displayed in the exploding display mode. In the second sub-display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds, the characters "sorry end" are displayed, and the remaining time is displayed in "? Seconds".

In this way, when it is determined that the actual time reduction period (the fluctuation time of special figure 1 in which the fluctuation is started during the time reduction) does not change, but the fluctuation of the normal symbol (normal figure) does not end during the time reduction period. Since the electric accessory 640a does not perform the opening operation (long opening) which is advantageous to the player during the short time period, the state which is substantially advantageous to the player is completed.

In this production example 2, the display screen shown in FIG. 109 (b) is displayed when a fluctuation time longer than the remaining period of the short period of time is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. However, if a fluctuation time (for example, 10 seconds) longer than the normal fluctuation time (3 seconds) can be set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the same display screen is displayed even when the fluctuation time is selected. Good. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the advantageous period has ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the general drawing variation pattern selection table 202aa used in the present production example 2 will be described. FIG. 110 (a) is a schematic diagram in which the contents of the normal map variation pattern selection table 202aa are defined. As shown in FIG. 110A, the normal-figure variation pattern selection table 202aa includes the normal-figure variation pattern selection table 202aa1 which is referred to when the gaming state is the normal state, and when the gaming state is the time saving A. The reference figure variation pattern selection table 202aa2 for the time saving A and the attached figure variation pattern selection table 202aa3 for the time saving B referred to when the game state is the time saving B are defined, and are different depending on each gaming state. The variation pattern selection table is referenced.

As shown in FIG. 110 (b), the normal map fluctuation pattern selection table 202aa1 is defined so that a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of 4 seconds is always selected, and the normal map fluctuation pattern selection table for time saving A is specified. As shown in FIGS. 110 (c) and 110 (d), 202aa2 and the attached figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202aa3 for the time saving B show the value of the fluctuation type counter and the normal symbol (normal figure) fluctuation in the time saving state, respectively. The fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is selected based on the number of times.

Since the means for measuring the number of fluctuations of the normal symbol (normal diagram) in the time-saving state is the same as that of the third embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the normal symbol variation process 4 executed in the present effect example 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol variation processing 4. The ordinary symbol variation process 4 is different from the above-mentioned ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 45) in that the process for setting the variation time (S914, S915) is changed, and is the same except for the above. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted. When the normal symbol variation process 4 is executed and it is determined that the time is not shortened in the process of S912 (S912: No), or when the process of S913 is completed, the variation time is set based on the normal symbol variation pattern selection table 202aa. Then, this process is terminated.

According to the present production example 2 described above, the period that is advantageous to the player during the time saving period (the period during which the electric accessory 640a is long open) may be different depending on the set fluctuation time of the normal symbol. Therefore, the player can always pay attention to how long the advantageous period lasts.

It should be noted that, based on the general symbol winning information command output from the main control device 110, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol stored on hold is determined in advance, and the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the determination result. May be set. In this case, for example, the end suggestion display mode Dm10 may not be displayed when there is no fluctuation in the normal map of the fluctuation time exceeding the time saving remaining period in the pre-determination information of the normal map. As a result, it is possible to provide a period for the player to play the game with peace of mind.

Further, the effect display mode may be changed depending on the presence or absence of the hold storage of the special figure 2. In this case, it is preferable to display the end suggestion display mode Dm10 only in the state where there is no hold memory of the special figure 2. As a result, it is possible to make the player execute a game that gives a sense of crisis, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

<Other examples using the configurations of the above-described embodiments>
In each of the above-described embodiments, when a big hit is won in the lottery of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) (per symbol), and when the ball passes through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3) ( An example of using a pachinko machine 10 (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which a big hit game is executed has been described for (per V prize), but the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments is adopted only for the above-mentioned symbol hit. It may be used for a gaming machine (so-called type 1 type). Next, a game machine when the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments is used for one type will be described.

In the game machines used in other examples, when a jackpot is won in a lottery of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), a jackpot game is executed, and a predetermined condition is satisfied depending on the type of the winning jackpot. A game machine that can give a probability change state (so-called 1) in which the probability of winning a big hit by a special symbol lottery is set to a higher probability than the normal state until the special symbol changes 5 times. It is a type probability variation type), and the jackpot winning based on the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot winning based on the first special symbol (the jackpot game with many rounds and the jackpot that is likely to be given a probability variation state). It is configured so that the game) can be easily given.

Further, when the gaming state shifts to the probabilistic state, a variation pattern having a long variation time (for example, 150 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol as in each of the above-described embodiments. Make it easier. Then, in a state where both the reserved memory of the first special symbol and the reserved memory of the second special symbol are held, the fluctuation (lottery) based on the reserved memory of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. (So-called special figure 2 priority change).

With this configuration, it is possible to play a game in which the hold memory of the second special symbol is acquired in a state where the long-term fluctuation of the first special symbol is executed. Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game during the predetermined period (during the first special symbol change in the probabilistic state). When such a configuration is used, the first ball entry means that serves as an opportunity to acquire the hold memory of the first special symbol by performing a game (for example, a right-handed game) aiming at a predetermined position in the game area. Each entry is possible so that both the (first entry port 64) and the second entry means (second entry port 640), which triggers the acquisition of the hold memory of the second special symbol, can be entered. The means may be arranged. Further, it is preferable that the second ball entry means makes it more difficult for the ball to enter the ball than the first ball entry means.

As a result, in the probabilistic state, a fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, and during a predetermined period in which the probabilistic state continues (the period until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol ends 5 times). A game (disadvantageous game) in which the change of the first special symbol is executed without executing the lottery of the second special symbol (without the ball entering the second ball entry means), or the first special A fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the symbol, and a lottery for the second special symbol is executed during a predetermined period in which the probability variation state continues (the period until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol ends 5 times). (A ball enters the second ball entry means), and one of the games (advantageous game) in which the variation of the second special symbol is executed is executed.

In this way, the variation pattern of the first special symbol set during the probability variation state executes the probability variation state advantageous to the player and the probability variation state unfavorable to the player, so that the variation of the special symbol executed during the probability variation state is executed. Can make the player watch. Further, as in each of the above-described embodiments, even when a small hit is won in the first special symbol, the game of acquiring the hold memory of the second special symbol can be continued.

In the other examples described above, as a type 1 probabilistic type gaming machine, a configuration in which the probabilistic state ends when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number is used, but other configurations may be used. For example, a configuration in which the probabilistic state is continued until the next big hit is won, or a lottery is performed each time a special symbol change (lottery) is executed to decide whether or not to end the probabilistic state, and based on the lottery result. A configuration that terminates the probabilistic state may be used.

Further, in the other example described above, the variation (lottery) based on the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is executed preferentially over the variation (lottery) based on the reserved memory of the special figure 2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and regardless of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, a configuration may be used in which the special symbol is changed (lottery) in the order in which the reserved memory is acquired (winning order). Further, the number of consecutive times (upper limit number of times) to which the probability change state is given may be set in advance, and when the upper limit number of times is reached, the probability change state may not be given after the end of the jackpot.

Next, in the above-described first embodiment, the reserved memory of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is acquired during the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) executed in the time saving state. Although a configuration is used in which the time saving state is given again after the jackpot game based on the hold memory is completed, an upper limit (for example, 5 times) may be set for the number of times the time saving state is continuously given. ..

In this case, the number of jackpots executed until the number of consecutive grants in the time-saving state reaches the upper limit differs depending on the number of jackpot rights acquired during one time-saving state (the number of reserved memories in Special Figure 2). be able to. Therefore, the player can be enthusiastically played in order to acquire a larger number of reserved memories of the special figure 2.

In the first embodiment described above, the time saving state is always given after the end of the jackpot game based on the reserved memory of the special figure 2, but the jackpot game based on the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is configured. A jackpot type that is not given a time saving state after the end may also be selected. As a result, by continuously digesting the reserved memory of the special figure 2, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of times the time saving state is given when the jackpot is continuously executed.

That is, for example, when there are four reserved memories of special figure 2 and the jackpot game based on the reserved memories has a time reduction four times in a row, the time is shortened when the four reserved memories of special figure 2 are exhausted. While the next special symbol change is executed when the number of consecutive grants of the state is 4, it is based on the hold memory that is digested last among the jackpot games based on the hold memory of the special figure 2. When the jackpot has a time reduction and the other cases have no time reduction, the number of consecutive grants in the time reduction state becomes one when the four reserved memories shown in FIG. 2 are exhausted.

Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether or not the number of consecutive grants in the time saving state has reached the upper limit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the maximum number of jackpots when the number of consecutive grants in the time-saving state reaches the upper limit can be changed depending on the jackpot type of the reserved memory of the acquired special figure 2, so that the player can be provided with a surprising game. be able to.

As a method for measuring the number of times of continuous granting in the time-saving state, a method of measuring the number of times the time-saving is set for a continuous jackpot may be used, or the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 fluctuation executed during the time-saving state is measured. It may be a method of doing. When the latter measurement method is used in the first embodiment described above, in one consecutive villa mode, when the number of consecutive grants in the time saving state reaches the upper limit (5 times), a maximum of 25 jackpots (special). The maximum number of reserved memories in FIG. 2 is the upper limit (4) each time, and the fluctuation result in Special Figure 1 is a big hit each time), but the minimum is 5 big hits (the number of reserved memories in Special Figure 2 is 1 each time). (When the variation result in FIG. 1 is off every time) is provided. In this way, when the upper limit is set for the number of consecutive grants in the time saving state, the number of jackpots executed in one consecutive villa mode can be changed, so that the player can be in the consecutive villa mode. You can play games enthusiastically.

In addition, in a right-handed state (for example, a time saving state or a probabilistic state) that is advantageous to the player, the advantageous special symbol (second special symbol) that is advantageous to the player among the special symbols and the advantageous special symbol are more disadvantageous than the advantageous special symbol. The special symbol (first special symbol) is configured to be variable (lottery), and the second special symbol is configured so that the variable execution condition is more easily established than the first special symbol during the right-handed state. In the game machine, when it is determined that the second special symbol is fluctuating by the discriminating means for discriminating the type of the special symbol that fluctuates during the right-handed game, the display means (third symbol display device 81) is used for the second. 2 The effect display for varyingly displaying the identification information for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is executed, and when it is determined by the discrimination means that the first special symbol is fluctuating, the lottery result of the first special symbol is shown. The third symbol emphasizes the guidance display (for example, "Save the hold of special figure 2") that encourages the acquisition of the hold memory of the second special symbol during the change period, rather than the variable display of the identification information for the purpose. It may be configured to be displayed on the display device 81.

In this way, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 (particularly, the variable display mode of the special symbol) is changed based on the type of the special symbol to be executed in the specific game state, so that the present setting is performed. It is possible to notify the player of an appropriate game method based on the current game state and the current game content. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

Further, a discriminating means for discriminating the fluctuation time of the first special symbol executed during the right-handed game is provided, and the fluctuating time of the first special symbol executed by the discriminating means is a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). When it is determined that the above is the case, the above-mentioned guidance display may be displayed. As a result, the player can be made to grasp the content of the guidance display, and the game content of the game being executed can be corrected. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by shortening the period in which the guidance display is displayed.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a in the time saving state, the opening pattern (long opening) is 11 seconds in total, that is, the first opening period is 3 seconds, the closing period is 5 seconds, and the second opening period is 3 seconds. ) Is set and the opening scenario corresponding to the set opening pattern is completed, or when one ball enters the second entry port 640 during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a, the electric combination Although the condition (end condition) for terminating the opening operation of the object 640a is satisfied, a different opening pattern and an ending condition are set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a, and the above-described embodiments are met. May configure gaming machines with different playability.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the electric accessory 640a is opened during the time saving state (when the winning is won by the normal symbol lottery during the time saving state), the number of balls entering the second entrance 640 is increased. By limiting the number to one, it was possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive privilege. However, by using such a configuration, a privilege given to the player when the player wins the normal symbol lottery during the time saving state (a privilege that makes it easier for the ball to enter the second entrance 640). Is always constant, and there is a problem that the player's willingness to play is reduced.

Therefore, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, as an opening pattern (long opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a executed during the time saving state, the interval at which the sphere reaches the electric accessory 640a (the sphere is caused by the distribution member 700). An opening pattern was set in which an opening scenario was used in which the opening of 0.2 seconds was repeated 5 times at 1.2 second intervals, which is the distribution interval), and the opening scenario was completed as the end condition of the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. In this case, or, it is preferable to use a configuration in which the end condition is set when four balls enter the second entry port 640 during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a.

With this configuration, when the timing at which the electric accessory 640a is released in the long opening pattern coincides with the timing at which the ball reaches the electric accessory 640a, the electric accessory 640a is opened once. In, a maximum of four balls can be inserted into the second entry port 640. Therefore, the game status (ball launch timing, the privilege that is given to the player when the ball is won in the normal symbol lottery during the time saving state (the privilege that makes it easier for the ball to enter the second entrance 640) Depending on the timing at which the ball reaches the electric accessory 640a), it can be made different, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

Further, when the right-handed game is continuously executed (when the game of firing 100 balls per minute is executed), the opening interval of the electric accessory 640a is set to the electric accessory 640a. Since it is set to 1.2 seconds, which is the same as the timing when the ball arrives, it is easy for a player who is actively performing a right-handed game to put a large number of balls into the second entrance 640. can do.

Further, as described using the first embodiment described above, in the right region of the game board 13, a distribution member 700 that alternately distributes game balls and a flow of balls distributed by the distribution member 700 Since the ball is configured to reach the electric accessory 640 via a rectifying means (a bending path 701a or a direct passage that does not reduce the flow speed of the ball) for keeping the interval constant, a right-handed game is played. It is possible to further improve the accuracy of the interval at which the fired ball reaches the electric accessory 640a when the ball is continuously executed.

When such a configuration is used, the suggestion notification for suggesting the opening timing of the electric accessory 640a to the player may be executed. By executing this suggestion notification, the player can be made to play the game aiming at the timing at which it is easy to put the ball into the second ball entry port 640.

In each of the above-described embodiments, as the operating means that can be operated by the player, the frame button 22 that determines that the operating means has been operated by the player's pressing operation is used, but other configurations are used. May be used, and it is possible to determine that the player has been operated by tilting it to the left or right or back and forth to determine that it has been operated by a lever-shaped operating means, or that the player has been operated by touching or approaching. A touch sensor type operating means, a wireless operating means capable of determining that the operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the third symbol display for showing the player the lottery result of each symbol is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, in the third symbol, different display means may be provided for the display means for displaying the main symbol to be emphasized and displayed to the player and the display means for displaying the subordinate symbol. Further, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used, and a display applying the organic electroluminescence (EL) phenomenon that emits light when a voltage is applied to a layered structure using a certain organic compound. The surface of the device (organic EL display) and various three-dimensional objects (roles, etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 10 is used as a screen, and after identifying the position (protrusion, burial relationship) of the three-dimensional surface, an image is displayed using a projector. A display device (project mapping) for irradiating may be used.

When the above-mentioned project mapping is used as the display means, the image data is irradiated based on the data of the three-dimensional surface of the movable accessory provided in the pachinko machine 10 and the position data of the movable accessory when irradiating. By configuring so as to determine the position and the content, it is possible to execute a free display and enhance the effect of the effect. In addition, in consideration of the case where an abnormality occurs in the movable accessory that can be a screen, it is determined whether the movable accessory is in a normal state, and when it is determined that the determination result is not normal, the movable accessory is immovable. It is advisable to execute the abnormal time control so that the image data is irradiated by using the part as a screen. As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player cannot grasp the display content displayed on the display means due to the abnormality of the movable accessory.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed in the game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player, and the left side area of the game board 13 is executed in the normal game state. It is configured so that the left-handed game aiming at is executed, but the target area of the game board 13 may be different depending on the game state, and the left-handed game is executed during the time saving state, and during the normal state. May perform a right-handed game. Further, the game may be configured so that the game can be executed in different game states while aiming at the same area.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

It should be noted that, for example, in a slot machine, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (Probability change in special 1 fluctuation period in the composition of 1 type and 2 types)
A first acquisition means for acquiring the first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, a first determination means for executing the first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means, and a first determination means thereof. The first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information for indicating the first determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information for indicating that the first determination result is specific. By the first privilege granting means for granting the first privilege to the player when the stop display is displayed, the second acquisition means for acquiring the second information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the second acquisition means thereof. A second determination in which the acquired second information is stored and a second determination in which a determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination is more likely to be performed are executed based on the second information stored in the storage means. It is possible to switch between the two determination means, the first state that restricts the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the second state that makes it easier for the second acquisition condition to be satisfied than the first state. A game machine having the above-mentioned state setting means, and having a priority means for causing the second determination corresponding to the second information stored in the storage means to be executed with priority over the first determination. A gaming machine characterized in that, when the first state is switched to the second state, the first determination is executed before the second determination is executed. A1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, whether to change the state of the start port provided on the game board from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the game ball is easy to enter. There is one that executes the first lottery of whether or not. In such a conventional game machine, a lottery executed by entering a game ball into the starting port in a state easily changed to the second state is executed a predetermined number of times, and until the lottery result of the predetermined number of times is displayed. A game machine to be continuously set has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the probability that the lottery is executed in a predetermined number of times and the judgment that the lottery is advantageous to the player is executed is constant, and the game becomes monotonous and the player is early. There was a problem that I got bored.

According to the game machine A1, even when the second acquisition condition is easily satisfied, the dynamic display of the first identification information is executed, and the second determination is made during the dynamic display period. Since execution is restricted, at the start of the special state, there is a period during which the first determination, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the second determination, is executed, and then the second determination, which is advantageous to the player, is made. Since the second information stored in the storage means is configured to be prioritized by the priority means over the first determination and the second determination is executed, the second determination that is advantageous to the player is continuously performed. By switching to a period that is easy to execute, it is possible to improve the interest of the player and suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

In the game machine A1, the first ball entry means that triggers the establishment of the first acquisition condition when the game ball enters, and the second acquisition condition that triggers the establishment of the second acquisition condition when the game ball enters. A second ball entry means, a variable member that can be changed between an open state in which the game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter, and the game ball passes through a predetermined passing area. A detection means capable of detecting whether or not a game has been played, a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the detection of a game ball in the detection means, and lottery information for showing the lottery result by the lottery means are dynamically displayed. When the lottery information dynamic display means and the lottery information for showing the specific lottery result are stopped and displayed, the variable member is moved to the closed state or the open state in a variable pattern set by a predetermined rule. The lottery means has a variable control means to be changed, and the lottery means is configured to be able to execute the lottery even during a period in which the first identification information or the second identification information is dynamically displayed. A game machine A2 characterized by this.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A1, a lottery is drawn by passing the game ball to the passing area even during the period when the special state is set and the first identification information is dynamically displayed. Since it is possible to satisfy the second acquisition condition by executing the game ball into the second ball entry means, the passing area is as much as possible even during the period when the first identification information is dynamically displayed. There is an effect that the player can play the game so as to pass the game ball.

In the game machine A1 or A2, a variable winning means in which the game ball can be entered, a variable winning means in which the game ball is difficult to enter, and a specific area through which the game ball entered in the variable winning means can pass. , When the game ball passes through the specific area, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game that is advantageous to the player and the second determination means have determined that the result is the specific second determination. Based on this, the gaming machine A3 is characterized by having a variable game executing means for changing the variable ball entering means from a state in which it is difficult to enter the ball to a state in which the ball can be entered.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A1 or A2, by executing the second determination, it is possible to shift to a game in which the game ball is passed to a specific area, and the player can be informed of the game. It has the effect of being able to provide a game with change.

In either of the game machines A2 or A3, the variable pattern variable by the variable control means is variably set according to a period in which the special state is set. Game machine A4.

According to the game machine A4, since the variable pattern is changed according to the setting period of the special state, there is an effect that the variable pattern can be executed according to the period in which the special state is set.

In any of the game machines A2 to A4, the first storage means for storing the first information acquired by the first acquisition means and the first identification dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. It has a first dynamic display period setting means for determining a dynamic display period of information, and the first dynamic display period setting means is in the case where the second state is set by the state setting means. As the dynamic display period of the first identification information, at least the first dynamic display period shorter than the dynamic display period in which the lottery information is dynamically displayed by the lottery information dynamic display means and the lottery information are A game machine A5 characterized in that a second dynamic display period longer than the dynamically displayed dynamic display period can be set.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A2 to A4, the length of the dynamic display period set by the first dynamic display period setting means causes the second input as the second state. It is possible to set an advantageous state in which the game ball is easily entered into the ball means and a disadvantageous state in which it is difficult to allow the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game so that the second state becomes an advantageous state.

The game machine A5 has a display means capable of displaying predetermined information, and a display control means for displaying the state information for indicating the state of the game set by the state setting means on the display means. The control means is characterized in that when the second dynamic display period is set by the first dynamic display period setting means, the state information for indicating the second state is not displayed. Game machine A6 to play.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of the game machine A5, the game ball is inserted into the second ball entry means as the dynamic display period of the first identification information even though the second state is set. When the second dynamic display period, which is difficult to make, is set, the state information for indicating the second state is not displayed, so that the information displayed on the display means impairs the player's expectations. It has the effect of being able to be suppressed.

In any of the game machines A1 to A6, there is a game regulation means capable of regulating the game of the player based on the fact that the second acquisition condition is satisfied in the state where the first state is set. A game machine A7 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A6, the player's second acquisition condition is satisfied in the first state in which the establishment of the second acquisition condition is restricted. Since it is possible to regulate the game, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the illegal establishment of the second acquisition condition.

In the game machine A7, the game machine A8 is characterized in that the game regulation means regulates the launch of a game ball.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect of the game machine A7, since the launch of the game ball is regulated by the game regulation means, there is an effect that fraud can be effectively suppressed.

In any of the game machines A2 to A8, the first ball entry means can enter the first flow path in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means and the game ball into the second ball entry means. The first ball entry means arranged in the second flow path and the second flow path is played by the game ball entering the ball entry port arranged in the second flow path. It is characterized in that the ball is put into a state where it can enter, and the game ball is put into a state where it is difficult to enter by entering the game ball into the first ball entering means arranged in the second flow path. The game machine A9.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A2 to A8, the second state is set by inserting the game ball into the ball entry port, and the game ball is inserted into the second ball entry means. Even when the game ball is allowed to flow down the second flow path in order to make the ball ball, the game ball enters the ball entry port, so that the game ball can easily enter the first ball entry means. There is an effect that the judgment can be easily executed and configured.

In the game machine A9, a holding means capable of holding the game ball at a position where the game ball can enter the ball entrance, and a holding release means for releasing the holding by the holding means based on the establishment of the release condition. The gaming machine A10, characterized in that it has and.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A9, there is an effect that the timing of entering the game ball into the first ball entry means can be controlled by the release condition.

The game machine A11 is characterized in that the cancellation condition is canceled based on the first privilege being granted by the first privilege granting means.

According to the game machine A11, in addition to the effect of the game machine A10, the cancellation condition is satisfied at the timing when the first privilege is given, so that the first acquisition condition is easily satisfied after the first privilege is given. It has the effect of being able to.

<Characteristic B group> (Special 1 prize regulation at normal times)
A first flow path through which the game ball can flow down, a second flow path through which the game ball flowing down the first flow path is difficult to flow down, and a position where the game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter. The game ball enters the first ball entry means, the second ball entry means arranged in the second flow path, and the game ball can enter, and the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means. The acquisition means that can acquire information based on the ball, the determination means that executes the determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means are dynamic. In a gaming machine having a dynamic display means to be displayed and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed. , By letting the game ball flow down the second flow path and executing the game, a special state is set that is more advantageous to the player than letting the game ball flow down the first flow path and executing the game. When the game is played by flowing the game ball down the second flow path in a state where the special state is not set by the state setting means capable of performing the game and the state setting means, the first input is performed. The game machine B1 is characterized by having a regulating means for making it difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means rather than the ball means.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, whether to change the state of the start port provided on the game board from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the game ball is easy to enter. There is one that executes the first lottery of whether or not. In such a conventional game machine, a lottery executed by entering a game ball into the starting port in a state easily changed to the second state is executed a predetermined number of times, and until the lottery result of the predetermined number of times is displayed. A game machine to be continuously set has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the probability that the lottery is executed in a predetermined number of times and the judgment that the lottery is advantageous to the player is executed is constant, and the game becomes monotonous and the player is early. There was a problem that I got bored. In addition, if the game is configured to change the flow route of the game ball in order to change the game, the player is illegally benefited by causing the game ball to flow down to a route different from the assumed flow route. There was a problem that was given.

According to the game machine B1, when a special state is set, the game can be changed by allowing the second flow path to flow down to play the game, while the special state is set. If not, the game ball is regulated so that it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means than the first ball entry means. Therefore, when the special state ends, the game is played by flowing down the first flow path. There is an effect that defects such as fraud can be suppressed by inevitably directing the player to do so.

In the game machine B1, at least a third flow path through which the game ball can flow down and a fourth flow path through which the game ball flowing down the third flow path is difficult to flow down are formed in the second flow path. It has a distribution means capable of distributing the game ball flowing down the second flow path to the third flow path and the fourth flow path, respectively, and the second ball enters the fourth flow path. A game machine B2 characterized in that the means is arranged.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, the game balls distributed to the third flow path among the game balls flowing down to the second flow path can enter the second ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the amount of game balls that can enter the second ball entry means can be reduced as compared with the first ball entry means.

In the game machine B2, a third ball entry means capable of entering a game ball is arranged in the third flow path, and based on the fact that the game ball enters the third ball entry means, the said An advantage determination means for executing an advantage determination that is more advantageous to the player than the determination based on the information acquired by the information being acquired by the acquisition means and the game ball entering the third ball entry means. By setting the special state, the third ball entering means is provided with a variable control means for changing the state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the state in which the game ball is easy to enter. Game machine B3 to play.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2, in a special state, it becomes easy to enter the ball into the third ball entry means, so that the player is allowed to flow the game ball down to the second flow path. It has the effect of encouraging players to play games.

In the game machine B2 or B3, the game machine B4 is characterized in that the distribution means alternately distributes game balls to the third flow path and the fourth flow path.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B2 or B3, by alternately distributing the game balls, half of the game balls that have flowed down into the second flow path can flow down, effectively as the second ball entry means. It has the effect of reducing the number of game balls that enter the ball.

In the game machines B1 to B4, the mode is switched between a holding means capable of holding the game ball flowing down the first flow path or the second flow path and a state in which the game ball held by the holding means is allowed to flow down downstream. The second ball enters by the switching means, an opening through which the game ball that has flowed down due to being switched to the state of flowing down by the switching means, and the game ball entering the opening. A game machine B5 characterized by having a variable means for making a means into a state in which a game ball can enter.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B4, the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is regulated by the holding means and the switching means, so that the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is regulated at an unintended timing. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the game ball enters the second ball entry means.

The game machine B6 is characterized in that, in the game machine B5, the switching means switches to a state in which the game ball can be held after a predetermined period of time elapses after switching to the state of flowing down.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5, the period during which the game ball can enter the second ball entry means can be defined, so that the game ball enters the second ball entry means. Has the effect of being able to regulate more.

In the game machine B5 or B6, the second ball entry means is characterized in that the second ball entry means is changed by the variable means to a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter based on the entry of the game ball. Game machine B7 to play.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5 or B6, the game ball entered the second ball entry means even during the period when the switching means was switched to the sulfurizing state. In this case, since the second ball entry means is changed to a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter, it is possible to prevent a plurality of game balls from continuously entering the second ball entry means. .. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving an excessive privilege to the player.

In any of the game machines B5 to B7, a first position where the game ball held by the holding means is provided in a flowable region and the flowed game ball can be guided to the first flow path, and the first position. Variable guidance means that can be changed to a second position that is difficult to guide to the flow path, and guidance member variable control that variably controls the variable guidance means to the first position and the second position at predetermined predetermined intervals. A gaming machine B8 having means and means, wherein the opening is arranged in a region where a gaming ball flowing down the first flow path can enter.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B5 to B7, the timing at which the game ball held by the holding means by the switching means can flow downstream, and the variable guiding means are in the first position. Since it is possible to insert the game ball into the opening only when the timing to be changed to is satisfied with the predetermined condition, the player is conscious of the timing of the game and enthusiastically plays the game. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In any of the game machines B1 to the game machine B8, when the special state is set by the state setting means, the identification information is dynamically displayed so that the remaining period of the special state is shortened. A game machine B9 characterized by having variable means for the game.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B8, the identification information is dynamically displayed, so that the remaining period of the special state is shortened. Therefore, the identification information is dynamically displayed to the player. It has the effect of making people interested in the period and improving the interest of the game. It should be noted that the longer the dynamic display period is executed, the longer the special state that is advantageous to the player becomes longer, so that the player can expect a longer dynamic display period.

<Characteristic C group> (Control to connect one game)
At a position where the first flow path through which the game ball can flow down, the second flow path where the game ball flowing down the first flow path is difficult to flow down, and the game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter. A game ball is placed in the arranged first entry means, the second entry means arranged in the second flow path and capable of entering a game ball, and the first entry means or the second entry means. The acquisition means that can acquire information based on the entry of the ball, the determination means that executes the determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means are dynamic. In a gaming machine having a dynamic display means to be displayed and a privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player when the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed, the first 2. A variable means that can be changed into a first state in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than the first state, and the variable means from the second state to the above. A variable execution means that changes to the first state based on the establishment of the variable condition, and based on the establishment of the specific condition, the game ball is caused to flow down from the first flow path to the second flow path to execute the game. The special state setting means for setting a special state that facilitates the execution of the privilege game that is advantageous to the player, and the identification information are dynamically displayed after the privilege game is executed, and the dynamic display period thereof. It is characterized in that it has a canceling means for canceling the special state based on the end of the game, and a variable condition determining means for determining the establishment of the variable condition when the privilege game is executed. Game machine C1 to play.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a start port provided on the game board, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a high probability state is set in which the lottery probability after the winning game is increased according to the type of the winning game so that the winning game can be easily executed continuously. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, it is difficult for the player to confirm whether the lottery is actually performed in a high probability state and the game is played, and there is a problem that the interest is easily lowered.

According to the game machine C1, when the privilege game is executed, it is determined whether or not the variable condition for determining whether to change the variable means to the first state is satisfied. Therefore, when the privilege game is executed, it is determined. By changing the variable means to the first state, the identification information can be easily displayed dynamically, the special state can be easily released, and if the variable means is not changed, the identification information can be difficult to be displayed dynamically. There is an effect that the special state can be easily set continuously, and the interest can be improved depending on whether or not the variable condition is satisfied when the privilege game is executed.

The game machine C1 has a type determination means for determining the type of the privilege game when the privilege game is executed, and the variable condition determination means is set to the type of the privilege game determined by the type determination means. The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the establishment of the variable condition is determined based on the above.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C1, the establishment of the variable condition is determined based on the type of the privileged game to be executed. The ratio can also be set, and there is an effect that stable game content can be set.

In the game machine C1 or C2, the privilege granting means executes the privilege game as one of the benefits, and the type determining means determines the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege granting means. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the special state is set based on the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege granting means.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1 or C2, the ratio of setting the special state can be changed by setting the type of the privilege game, and the shooting property can be easily adjusted and designed. It has the effect of being able to.

In any of the game machines C1 to C3, a third ball entry means capable of entering the game ball is arranged in the second flow path, and the acquisition means is used to enter the game ball into the third ball entry means. Acquires the information based on the fact that the ball has entered the ball, and the determination means has a game more than the determination based on the information acquired by the game ball entering the third ball entry means. It executes an advantageous determination that is advantageous to the person, and has a regulation means that can be changed between a state that regulates the entry of a game ball into the third entry means and a state that allows entry. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that, by setting the special state, the regulating means is easily changed to a state that allows the ball to enter.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C3, the game ball is likely to be inserted into the third ball entry means in which the advantage determination that is advantageous to the player is executed in a special state. Therefore, there is an effect that the game ball can be made to flow down to the second flow path to encourage the player to play the game.

In the game machine C4, a variable ball entry means that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter, and a specific area through which a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass. It has a privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game when the game ball passes through the specific area, and when the advantage determination determines a specific result, the variable ball entry means is released from the closed state. A game machine C5 characterized in that it can be changed to an open state.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C4, the privilege game is executed by passing the game ball through a specific area, so that the player can be interested in the ball flow. It has the effect of improving the interest of the.

In any of the game machines C2 to C5, the information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry means is stored in the first storage means capable of storing the information and the first storage means thereof. It has a determination condition determining means for determining the information for which the determination is executed by the determining means based on the information, and the type determining means at least stores the information in the storage means during the privilege game. It is determined that the first type corresponding to the first privilege game that is easy to be memorized and the second type corresponding to the second privilege game that is harder to store the information in the storage means than the first type. Characteristic gaming machine C6.

According to the game machine C6, depending on the type determined by the type determining means, it is possible to execute a privilege game in which information is easily stored in the first storage means and a privilege game in which information is difficult to be stored during the privilege game. As a result, when a special state is given after the end of the privilege game, it is possible to set a state in which the identification information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means is dynamically displayed and a state in which the identification information is not displayed. It will be possible. Therefore, it is possible to dynamically display the identification information based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means in the special state, and it is possible to diversify the game executed in the special state.

In the game machine C6, the special state setting means includes a first special state in which identification information based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means is dynamically displayed during the special state, and the first special state. 2 A second special state in which identification information based on the entry of a game ball is dynamically displayed is set in the ball entry means, and the second special state is more game-playing than the first special state. A game machine C7 characterized in that a privileged game that is advantageous to a person is easily executed.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C6, the degree of advantage provided to the player can be different depending on the type of identification information dynamically displayed during the special state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game.

<Characteristic D group> (Continuous Chan mode end production)
The first determination is made based on the first ball entry means capable of entering the game ball, the second entry means different from the first entry means, and the game ball entering the first entry means. To execute a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means, and the determination result by the determination means. A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating, and a variable state from a first state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means to a second state in which a game ball can enter the ball. The variable means for making the ball enter, the state setting means capable of setting a special state capable of changing the second ball entry means to the second state when a specific condition is satisfied, and the special state setting means. When the state is set, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and based on the end of the dynamic display period, the release means for canceling the special state and the special state are set. In this case, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the effect execution means for executing the effect based on the information for determining the establishment of the specific condition based on the remaining dynamic display period is provided. The featured game machine D1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a start port provided on the game board, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a high probability state is set in which the lottery probability after the winning game is increased according to the type of the winning game so that the winning game can be easily executed continuously. In such a game machine, after the symbol for notifying the player of the lottery result is variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like, the lottery result is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the lottery result, and the lottery result is notified. If is a hit, a hit game is known to be performed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that the game is monotonous and the player gets bored early because the variable display of the symbol based on the lottery result is repeated.

According to the game machine D1, the remaining period of the special state changes as the dynamic display period of the identification information executed when the special state is set elapses, so that the remaining period of the special state is specified by the effect executed by the effect executing means. It is possible to recognize the establishment of the condition and the remaining period of the special state, and there is an effect that the problem that the player gets bored early can be suppressed.

The game machine D1 has a detecting means for detecting that the game ball has passed through the passing region, and a discriminating means for determining the establishment of the specific condition when the passing of the game ball is detected by the detecting means. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the effect executing means executes an effect for showing the determination result based on the determination being executed by the determination means.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, even when the identification information is displayed in the special state, the determination of the establishment of the specific condition is executed by passing the game ball through the passing area. , It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine D1 or D2, the effect executing means executes a specific effect based on the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information being equal to or less than a predetermined period. ..

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine D1 or D2, there is an effect that it can be determined that the remaining period of the special state is equal to or less than a predetermined period by executing the specific effect. ..

In any of the game machines D1 to D3, the second determination is executed by the determination means among the information acquired by the acquisition means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means. The effect executing means has a storage means for storing up to a predetermined number of the above information, and the effect executing means stores the information in the storage means when the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information is equal to or less than the predetermined period. The gaming machine D4, characterized in that the specific effect is not executed on condition that the specific effect is stored.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D3, even if the special state ends due to the information being stored in the storage means, it is based on the information stored in the storage means. Since it is in a state where an advantageous judgment is easily made, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving an extra anxiety to the player by executing a specific effect.

In any of the game machines D2 to D4, a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the result information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means for a predetermined period and then stopping the display, and the second dynamic display means thereof. The effect executing means has a period determining means for determining the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information at the time when the result information is stopped and displayed, and the effect executing means determines the determination result by the period determining means as a predetermined period condition. The gaming machine D5 is characterized in that the stop display mode of the result information is switched to the stop display mode based on the determination result of the identification information when the above conditions are satisfied.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D2 to D4, the stop display mode can be switched when the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information satisfies the period condition. It is possible to provide a person with an unexpected effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine D5, the period condition is satisfied when the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information at the time when the result information is stopped and displayed by the second dynamic display means is within a predetermined period. A game machine D6 characterized by this.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D5, it is possible to suppress a problem that the result information and the identification information are stopped and displayed at short intervals, which makes it difficult for the player to grasp the displayed contents. It has the effect of being able to provide a game that is easy for the person to understand.

<Characteristic E group> (Change of normal map fluctuation period in a short time state)
The first determination is made based on the first ball entry means capable of entering the game ball, the second entry means different from the first entry means, and the game ball entering the first entry means. To execute a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means, and the determination result by the determination means. The dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating, and the first state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, make it easier for the game ball to enter the ball than in the first state. A variable means for changing to the second state, a state setting means capable of setting a special state which can be changed to the second state by the variable means when a specific condition is satisfied, and a state setting thereof. When the special state is set by the means, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and based on the end of the dynamic display period, the release means for releasing the special state and the variable means are provided. Lottery information dynamic display in which lottery means for executing a lottery for determining whether to change from the first state to the second state and lottery information for showing the lottery result by the lottery means are dynamically displayed. A dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period in which the lottery information is dynamically displayed, and a dynamic display period in which a plurality of the dynamic display periods determined by the dynamic display period determining means are set. The storage means in which a plurality of display period groups are stored, a selection means for selecting the type of the special state set by the state setting means, and the type of the special state set by the state setting means are used. The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the dynamic display period determining means includes a dynamic display period group setting means for setting the dynamic display period group for determining the dynamic display period.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a start port provided on the game board, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a high probability state is set in which the lottery probability after the winning game is increased according to the type of the winning game so that the winning game can be easily executed continuously. In such a game machine, after the symbol for notifying the player of the lottery result is variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like, the lottery result is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the lottery result, and the lottery result is notified. If is a hit, a hit game is known to be performed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that the game is monotonous and the player gets bored early because the variable display of the symbol based on the lottery result is repeated.

According to the game machine E1, if a lottery information with a short dynamic display period is determined, the lottery can be executed in a special state period, and the fun of the game can be improved by the determined dynamic display period group. , There is an effect that the trouble that the player gets bored at an early stage can be suppressed.

In the game machine E1, the acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means, and the information acquired by the acquisition means are stored. The gaming machine E2, which has a storage means, and the determination means executes the first determination or the second determination based on the information stored in the storage means.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1, the information acquired by the acquisition means can be stored in the storage means, so that the player can continue to use the information regardless of the determination status of the determination means. The game can be played, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

In the game machine E1 or E2, the determination means makes the first determination or the second determination even when the information is stored in the storage means during the period when the identification information is dynamically displayed. A game machine E3 characterized in that it waits for execution.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1 or E2, while the identification information is dynamically displayed, the execution of the determination based on the information stored in the storage means is awaited, so that the memory is stored. Multiple determinations based on the information stored in the means are not executed at the same time. Therefore, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

In any of the game machines E1 to E3, the lottery means has a detecting means capable of detecting that the game ball has passed through a passing area through which the game ball can pass, and the lottery means detects the passage of the game ball by the detecting means. The gaming machine E4, characterized in that the lottery is executed based on the fact that the lottery has been performed.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E1 to E3, when the detection means detects that the game ball has passed through the passing area, the lottery by the lottery means is executed. There is an effect that a person can be enthusiastically played a game using a game ball.

In any of the game machines E1 to E4, the dynamic display period group set by the dynamic display period group setting means is a short dynamic set so that a short dynamic display period can be easily determined as the dynamic display period. A gaming machine characterized in that at least a display period group and a long dynamic display period group in which a shorter dynamic display period is less likely to be determined than the short dynamic display period group are set. E5.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E1 to E4, the length of the dynamic display period set by the dynamic display period group set by the dynamic display period group setting means is set. It can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to make the number of lottery executed by the lottery means different during the special state which is advantageous to the player, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the game machines E2 to E5, the dynamic display period determining means is based on the number of the information acquired based on entering the second ball entering means stored in the storage means. The gaming machine E6 is characterized in that the dynamic display period of 1 is determined from the determined dynamic display period group.

According to the game machine E6, the dynamic display period is determined based on the effect of any of the game machines E2 to E5 and the number of information acquired based on the entry into the second ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to associate the game of inserting the game ball into the second ball entry means with the number of lottery executed by the lottery means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The game machines E1 to E6 have a notification means for notifying that the special state is set, and the notification means dynamically displays the lottery information determined by the dynamic display period determining means. The gaming machine E7 is characterized in that the notification is performed only when the period is shorter than the remaining period of the special state set by the state setting means.

According to the game machine E7, the notification means notifies that the current state is the special state only when the dynamic display of the lottery information ends in the state where the special state is set. Therefore, even during the special state, the player is distrusted by notifying the player that the variable means is in the special state during the remaining period of the special state in which the variable means is not changed from the first state to the second state. It has the effect of suppressing giving a feeling.

<Characteristic F group> (Direction per special 1 during short working hours)
The first determination is made based on the first ball entry means capable of entering the game ball, the second entry means different from the first entry means, and the game ball entering the first entry means. To execute a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means, and the determination result by the determination means. When the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are stopped and displayed, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. In a game machine having the privileged game executing means, the variable means for changing from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter into the second ball entering means to the second state in which the game ball can be entered. A lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions, a lottery information dynamic display means for dynamically displaying lottery information for showing the lottery result by the lottery means, and the specific lottery result. A state setting means capable of setting a special state capable of changing to the second state by the variable means when the lottery information for indicating that is stopped and displayed, and the special state by the state setting means. When the state is set, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and the release means for canceling the special state based on the end of the dynamic display period and the special state are not set. In this case, an effect executing means corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the lottery information is executed based on the setting of the special state. When the special state is set, the effect executing means is specified from a state in which an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the lottery information is executed to an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information. A gaming machine F1 characterized in that it is switched and executed based on the condition that the conditions are satisfied.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a start port provided on the game board, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a high probability state is set in which the lottery probability after the winning game is increased according to the type of the winning game so that the winning game can be easily executed continuously. In such a game machine, after the symbol for notifying the player of the lottery result is variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like, the lottery result is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the lottery result, and the lottery result is notified. If is a hit, a hit game is known to be performed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965). However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that the game is monotonous and the player gets bored early because the variable display of the symbol based on the lottery result is repeated.

According to the game machine F1, in the case of a special state, it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, so that a specific lottery result that makes it easy to enter the second ball entry means. Since it is possible to switch to a production corresponding to whether or not it becomes, it is possible to provide the player with a production corresponding to different information in the special state and other than the special state, so that the game can be changed and the player can be early. It has the effect of suppressing problems that make you tired of it.

In the game machine F1, the information acquisition means for acquiring the information determined by the determination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means or the second entry means, and the information acquisition means. The gaming machine F2, characterized in that it has a storage means for storing the acquired information.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1, the information acquired in the storage means even when a large number of game balls enter the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means. Is memorized, which has the effect of giving the player many opportunities to be judged.

In the game machine F2, the determination means is based on the information acquired based on the fact that the determination condition is satisfied and the ball is entered into the second ball entry means stored in the storage means. The gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the determination is executed with priority over the information acquired based on the entry into the first ball entry means.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effect of the game machine F2, when there is a plurality of information acquired based on the fact that the ball has entered the second ball entry means, the plurality of information is continuously determined. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the determination that is advantageous to the player can be continuously executed, and the player's motivation to play can be improved.

In any of the game machines F1 to F3, when the special state is set in the specific condition, the remaining period of the dynamic display period of the identification information from which the dynamic display is started is equal to or less than the predetermined period. The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that it is set as at least one of the establishment conditions.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F1 to F3, an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information executed when the special state is released before the special state is released. It has the effect of being able to switch to, and when it is released smoothly, it is possible to switch the effect.

In any of the game machines F1 to F4, under the specific condition, the identification information for which the dynamic display is started when the special state is set is stopped and displayed with the identification information for indicating the specific determination result. The gaming machine F5, characterized in that it is set as at least one of the conditions that it is set to be played.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects of the game machines F1 to F4, when the dynamically displayed identification information is stopped and displayed with the identification information for indicating that it is a specific determination result, the identification information is stopped and displayed. At first, the effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the lottery information is performed, and the player is notified whether the game ball is likely to enter the second ball entry means, and then a specific judgment result is obtained. Is also possible to be notified by the effect, so that there is an effect that the player can be provided with an effect that effectively utilizes the dynamic display period of the identification information.

<Characteristic G group> (Game support)
An entry means having an opening through which the game ball can enter, an open state in which the game ball can enter into the opening of the entry means, and a closed state in which entry of the game ball is restricted. When the variable member, the determination means for executing the determination based on the passage of the game ball, and the determination result by the determination means are specific determination results, the variable member is moved from the closed state to the open state. The variable control means is variable according to a specific variable pattern, and the variable pattern is brought into the open state after a closing pattern that is closed for a predetermined period after the first open pattern that is in the open state. A gaming machine G1 characterized in that it is composed of at least a second open pattern.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a passing area through which the game ball can pass, and when the game ball passes through the passing area, a predetermined first lottery is executed and the lottery result is won. If there is, it has been proposed to change the variable member so that the ball can easily enter a specific ball entry port. In such a game machine, when a ball enters a specific entrance, a second lottery different from a predetermined lottery is executed, and a liquid crystal display device displays a symbol for notifying the player of the lottery result. It is known that the lottery result is notified by stopping and displaying the lottery result with a symbol indicating the lottery result, and if the lottery result is a hit, a winning game is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the conventional game machine described above, since the variable display of the symbol based on the second lottery result is displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like, there is a problem that the player overlooks the result of the first lottery. It was.

According to the game machine G1, since the first open pattern and the second open pattern are configured, the player who notices that the variable member is variably controlled by executing the first open pattern. On the other hand, the game ball can be entered into the ball entry means during the second opening pattern. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be supported for a player who does not understand the game content.

In the game machine G1, among the variable patterns, when it is determined that the closing pattern has been executed by the closing determining means for determining that the closing pattern has been executed and the closing determining means, a predetermined first first. The gaming machine G2 comprising a notification executing means for executing notification.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1, the first notification is executed by the notification execution means based on the fact that the execution of the first opening pattern is completed and the closing pattern is executed. It is possible to easily make the player know that the variable control of the variable member is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be supported for a player who does not understand the game content.

The game machine G2 has a game area in which the variable member is provided and an operating means for launching a game ball in the game area, and the period set as the closed pattern in the variable pattern is The gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the ball launched by the operating means is set longer than the period until the ball reaches the variable member.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect of the game machine G2, the period set as the closing pattern is set longer than the period until the ball launched by the operating means reaches the variable member. Even if the player who recognizes that the variable control of the variable member is being executed by the first notification by the notification executing means starts the operation of the operating means, the ball entry means while the second opening pattern is being executed. It is possible to put a ball in the ball. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be supported for a player who does not understand the game content.

In any of the game machines G1 to G3, the end condition determining means for determining that the end condition for terminating the operation of varying the variable member by the variable control means is satisfied, and the end condition determining means is previously provided. The gaming machine G4 is characterized in that it is determined that the end condition is satisfied when the predetermined variable pattern is executed or when a predetermined number of balls enter the ball entry means.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G3, the end condition is satisfied when a predetermined number of balls enter the ball entry means, so that the predetermined number of balls are satisfied in the first opening pattern. By entering the ball into the ball entry means, it is possible to end the variable control of the variable member by the variable control means without executing the closing pattern. As a result, one variable control period can be shortened, so that the player can enthusiastically play the game. Further, even if the closing pattern is set for a long period of time, the end condition of the variable control can be satisfied during the period when the first variable pattern is being executed, so that the player who is executing the normal game can be satisfied. It has the effect of suppressing dissatisfaction caused by the execution of a long-term closure pattern.

In the game machine G4, the period set as the first opening pattern among the variable patterns is set longer than the period until the predetermined number of balls fired by the operating means reach the variable member. A game machine G5 characterized by being a game machine.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effect of the game machine G4, a predetermined number of balls can be thrown into the ball-entry means during the period when the first opening pattern is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the dissatisfaction caused by the execution of the closing pattern for a long period of time for the player who is playing a normal game.

In the game machines G1 to G5, the notification executing means determines a predetermined second notification when a ball enters the ball entering means while the second opening pattern is being executed among the variable patterns. The gaming machine G6, which is characterized by executing the above.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G5, the second notification is executed when the ball enters the ball entry means while the second opening pattern is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to have the player correct the operation method of the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be supported for a player who does not understand the game content.

In the game machines G1 to G6, among the variable patterns, the period set as the first open pattern is shorter than the period set as the second open pattern.

According to the game machine G7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G6, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the ball entry means during the period in which the variable pattern is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be supported for a player who does not understand the game content.

<Characteristic H group> (Direction just before the end of the time-saving game)
The first determination is made based on the first ball entry means capable of entering the game ball, the second entry means different from the first entry means, and the game ball entering the first entry means. To execute a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means, and the determination result by the determination means. When the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating and the identification information for indicating that the determination result is a specific result are stopped and displayed, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Lottery information dynamic in which lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions and lottery information for showing the lottery result by the lottery means are dynamically displayed on a game machine having a privilege game execution means. The display means, the variable member that is variable from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter into the second ball entry means to the second state in which the game ball can enter the ball, and the specific lottery result. A state setting means capable of setting a special state capable of changing the variable member to the second state when the lottery information for indicating that is stopped and displayed, and the special state by the state setting means. When the state is set, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed a predetermined number of times, and the release means for canceling the special state based on the end of the dynamic display period of the predetermined number of times, and the special When the dynamic display of the lottery information is started during the state, the effect execution is executed based on the information corresponding to the period in which the special state is set at the timing when the lottery information is stopped and displayed. A game machine H1 characterized by having means and means.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a start port provided on the game board, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a high probability state is set in which the lottery probability after the winning game is increased according to the type of the winning game so that the winning game can be easily executed continuously. In such a game machine, after the symbol for notifying the player of the lottery result is variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like, the lottery result is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the lottery result, and the lottery result is notified. If is a hit, a hit game is known to be performed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that the game is monotonous and the player gets bored early because the variable display of the symbol based on the lottery result is repeated.

According to the game machine H1, the effect is executed based on the state set at the stop display timing of the lottery information whose dynamic display is started during the special state, so that when the lottery information is stopped and displayed from the effect. It becomes possible to recognize the timing of the game, and it is possible to make the player interested in the state when the lottery information is stopped and displayed, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem of getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the game machine H1, the effect executing means executes an effect corresponding to the dynamic display period of the identification information in a state where the special state is not set, and based on the setting of the special state, the effect is described. The gaming machine H2 is characterized in that it is executed by switching to an effect corresponding to a dynamic display period of lottery information.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine H1, the effect is executed by switching the corresponding dynamic display period between the special state and the non-special state, so that the player is provided with a different effect and the game is played. It has the effect of improving the interest of the.

In the game machine H1 or H2, the acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means, and the information acquired by the acquisition means. The determination means has a storage means to be stored, and the determination means has a game ball in the second ball entry means among the information stored in the storage means based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition. The gaming machine H3 is characterized in that the determination is preferentially executed with respect to the information acquired based on the fact that the player has entered the ball.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1 or H2, when there is a plurality of information acquired based on the fact that the ball has entered the second ball entry means, the plurality of information is continuously determined. can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the determination that is advantageous to the player can be continuously executed, and the player's motivation to play can be improved.

In the game machine H3, in the determination condition, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped and displayed by the identification information for showing the specific determination result, and the undetermined information is stored in the storage means. The gaming machine H4, which is characterized in that, at least, is set as a condition.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1 or H2, it is difficult to satisfy the determination condition during the period when the identification information is dynamically displayed, so that the identification information is stored in the period when the identification information is dynamically displayed. It is possible to give the player an opportunity to store information in the means, and there is an effect that the game can be performed efficiently.

In the game machine H4, when the special state is set, the regulatory means for restricting that the information acquired based on the entry into the second ball entry means is stored in the storage means is provided. A game machine H5 characterized by having.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effect of the game machine H4, when a special state is set, it is regulated that the information acquired based on entering the second ball entry means is stored. Therefore, at the timing when the special state is set, the identification information for showing the determination result based on the information acquired by entering the first ball entry means can be easily displayed dynamically, which is advantageous for the player. There is an effect that it is possible to delay the execution of such a judgment and increase the interest of the player.

In any of the game machines H1 to H5, if the special state is set in the period of the lottery by the lottery means, the lottery information indicating that the variable member is the specific lottery result is stopped and displayed. The gaming machine H6 is characterized in that it is variable to the second state when the game is played.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H1 to H5, it is possible to change to the second state based on the setting status of the special state during the lottery period, which is advantageous to the player. There is an effect that it is possible to easily provide a state of affairs and the interest of the player can be increased.

<Feature I group> (Yamato specifications)
A game ball has entered a first ball-entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball-entry means different from the first ball-entry means, and the first ball-entry means or the second ball-entry means. Based on the information acquisition means for acquiring information based on the above, and the information acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means by the information acquisition means, the first determination is executed. A determination means for executing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the information acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means, and the determination means thereof. A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the above, and a privilege grant for granting the privilege when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. In a gaming machine having means, a normal state in which a game ball is more likely to enter the first ball entry means than the second ball entry means, and a second ball entry means rather than the first ball entry means. It has a state setting means that can at least switch and set a special state that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the means, and when the special state is set by the state setting means, the special state is provided. As a release condition for releasing the state, it is possible to individually set the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed corresponding to the first determination and the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed corresponding to the second determination. A game machine I1 characterized in that it is configured in.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a start port provided on the game board, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a high probability state is set in which the lottery probability after the winning game is increased according to the type of the winning game so that the winning game can be easily executed continuously. In such a game machine, after the symbol for notifying the player of the lottery result is variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like, the lottery result is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the lottery result, and the lottery result is notified. If is a hit, a hit game is known to be performed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that the game is monotonous and the player gets bored early because the variable display of the symbol based on the lottery result is repeated.

According to the game machine I1, as a condition for releasing the special state, the number of times the identification information corresponding to the first determination is dynamically displayed and the number of times the identification information corresponding to the second determination is dynamically displayed can be set. , The expectation that the second determination is executed can be variably set. That is, if the number of times of dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the first determination is set to be large, the player can be given many opportunities to execute the second determination, and conversely, the identification information corresponding to the first determination can be given. If the number of times of dynamic display of is set to be large, the chance that the second determination is executed can be set to be small, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be changed.

The game machine I1 has a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the determination means enters the second ball entry means among the information stored in the storage means. The gaming machine I2 is characterized in that the information acquired by the information acquisition means is preferentially determined based on the above.

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effect of the game machine I1, the judgment is executed with priority given to the information in which the judgment that is advantageous to the player is executed, so that the judgment that is advantageous to the player is continuously executed. It has the effect of making it easier to play and improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine I1 or I2, when the special state is set, the storage means is provided with a regulatory means that makes it difficult to store the information acquired based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means. A game machine I3 characterized by having.

According to the game machine I3, in addition to the effect of the game machine I1 or I2, in the case of a special state, the identification information based on the first determination can be easily displayed dynamically, and the second entry is made during the dynamic display period. There is an effect that a game ball is inserted into the ball means to store more information, and after the dynamic display of the first determination is completed, an advantageous determination can be continuously executed.

In any of the game machines I1 to I3, the release condition configures the dynamic display number of the identification information corresponding to the first determination to be larger than the dynamic display number of the identification information corresponding to the second determination. A game machine I4 characterized by being the one that has been used.

According to the game machine I4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines I1 to I3, it is possible to prevent the special state from being released by executing only the first determination, which is disadvantageous to the player. There is an effect that it is possible to easily execute the second determination which is advantageous to the player during the state.

In the game machine I4, the release condition is set as one dynamic display number of the identification information corresponding to the second determination.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effect of the game machine I4, the number of times that the second determination which is advantageous to the player is executed during the special state can be limited to one, so that the player can receive an excessive privilege. There is an effect that it can be suppressed from being given to.

A game machine I6 in any of the game machines I2 to I5, wherein the storage means is configured to be able to store up to a maximum number of the information.

According to the game machine I6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines I2 to I5, the information in which the second determination advantageous to the player is executed can be stored up to the maximum number, so that the special state ends. After that, it is possible to execute the second determination. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can have expectations even after the special state is completed.

In the game machine I6, the upper limit number is the first upper limit number for the information acquired based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means and the game ball entering the second ball entry means. The game machine I7 is characterized in that a second upper limit number with respect to the information acquired based on the above is set.

According to the game machine I7, in addition to the effect of the game machine I6, the information acquired based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means and the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Since it is possible to set the upper limit number that can be stored with the information acquired based on the above, regardless of the number of stored information acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means. , Information acquired based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entry means can be stored up to the maximum number. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game in order to allow the game ball to enter the second ball entry means during the special state.

In any of the game machines I1 to I7, the variable ball entry means that can be changed between the state in which the game ball can enter and the state in which it is difficult to enter, and the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass through. The game machine I8 is characterized in that the special area is provided, and the privilege giving means is configured to be able to give a privilege when the game ball passes through the specific area.

According to the game machine I8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines I1 to I7, a privilege is given by passing the game ball through a specific area, so that the player is interested in the ball flow. It has the effect of being able to improve the interest of the game.

The game machine I8 is characterized in that the special state is set by the state setting means after the privilege is given by the privilege giving means.

According to the game machine I9, in addition to the effect played by the game machine I8, a special state is set after the privilege is given, so that the game playability by passing the game ball through a specific area can be enhanced. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine I9, the state setting means has a setting determining means for determining whether or not to set the special state, and the setting determining means makes the first determination or the second determination by the determining means. The gaming machine I10, which determines whether or not to set the special state based on the execution.

According to the game machine I10, at the timing when the determination by the determination means is executed, it is determined whether or not to set the special state after the privilege is given. Therefore, depending on the timing when the game ball is passed through the specific area. Whether or not a special state is set will be variable. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of selecting the timing at which the game ball is passed through the specific area.

The game machine I10 is characterized in that the game machine I10 has a suggestion means for suggesting the decision information determined by the setting determination means during the period when the identification information is dynamically displayed.

According to the game machine I11, since it is possible to recognize whether or not the special state is set after the privilege is given by the suggestion means, the game is played so as to pass the game ball to the specific area, or the game is performed to the specific area. There is an effect that the player can decide whether to play the game so that the game ball does not pass by referring to the content of the suggestion.

In any of the game machines I7 to I11, the release condition is a game machine I12 in which the number of times of dynamic display for the first identification information is set to be larger than the first upper limit number.

According to the game machine I12, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines I7 to I11, the information already acquired for entering the ball into the first ball entry means when the special state is entered is the first. Even if the maximum number is stored, the special state is not released even if all the information is first judged and the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, so there is an opportunity for the second judgment to be executed in the special state. It can be given by the player, and has the effect of increasing the value of the special state to the player.

<Characteristic J group> (Big hit production during Ren Chan)
The first determination is made based on the first ball entry means capable of entering the game ball, the second entry means different from the first entry means, and the game ball entering the first entry means. To execute a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means, and the determination result by the determination means. A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating, and a variable state from a first state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means to a second state in which the game ball can enter the ball. The variable means for making the ball, a state setting means capable of setting a special state capable of changing the second ball entry means to the second state when a specific condition is satisfied, and the special state setting means for the second state. When the state is set, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and based on the end of the dynamic display period, the release means for canceling the special state and the release means for releasing the special state. After the release, based on the determination means for determining whether the special state is set by the state setting means and the determination result of the determination means before the dynamic display of the identification information is started. The gaming machine J1 is characterized by having an effect executing means capable of executing the effect in a variable manner.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a start port provided on the game board, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a high probability state is set in which the lottery probability after the winning game is increased according to the type of the winning game so that the winning game can be easily executed continuously. In such a game machine, after the symbol for notifying the player of the lottery result is variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like, the lottery result is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the lottery result, and the lottery result is notified. If is a hit, a hit game is executed, and a production is executed during the hit game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, further improvement in the interest of the game has been required.

According to the game machine J1, even when the special state is released, the effect is changed based on the information of whether the special state is set again before the identification information is dynamically displayed, so that the player can change the effect. It is possible to identify whether a special state is continuously set from the production, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine J1, the effect executing means executes the effect in response to the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the determination result based on the second determination.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effect of the game machine J1, the effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the judgment result based on the second judgment which is advantageous to the player is executed, so that the player This has the effect of increasing expectations for the judgment result of the second judgment.

The game machine J1 or J2 is characterized in that the effect executing means is configured to be capable of executing an effect capable of identifying information based on the number of times that the discriminating means continuously determines that the special state has been set. The game machine J3.

According to the game machine J3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J1 or J2, the number of times the special state is continuously set can be identified by the effect, so that not only the game but also the special state is set for the player. It has the effect of making people interested in the number of times they have been played and improving the interest of the game.

When the game machines J1 to J3 acquire information for executing the first determination when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, and the game ball enters the second ball entry means. A gaming machine comprising: an information acquisition means for acquiring information for executing the second determination, and an information storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means. J4.

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effects of the game machines J1 to J3, information is acquired at the timing when the game ball enters the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means, and the information is used as the information storage means. Since it is stored, it is possible to save the opportunity to be judged by the judgment means, and there is an effect that a lot of benefits can be given to the player.

In the game machine J4, the effect executing means is configured so that the effect can be changed based on the number of the information for executing the second determination stored in the storage means. A game machine J5 characterized by this.

According to the game machine J5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J4, the effect is changed depending on the number of information for which the second determination that is advantageous to the player is executed, so that the information is easily reserved to the player. It has the effect of being able to notify the number of items and increasing interest in the production.

<Characteristic K group>
The first determination is made based on the first ball entry means capable of entering the game ball, the second entry means different from the first entry means, and the game ball entering the first entry means. Is executed, and the determination means for executing the second determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means and the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means are dynamically displayed. A gaming machine having a target display means and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating that the determination result is specific is stopped and displayed. The gaming machine K1 is characterized in that it has a state setting means for setting a gaming state advantageous to the player during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed based on the establishment of a specific condition.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a start port provided on the game board, and a symbol for showing the lottery result is moved to a liquid crystal display device or the like. The target is displayed, and the symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner in which the lottery result is notified at the timing when the dynamic display period ends. If the notification mode indicated by the symbol is a hit, a hit game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and a high probability state is set in which the lottery probability after the hit game is increased depending on the type of the hit game, and the hit games are continuously played. Some have been proposed that are configured to be easy to implement. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the conventional game machine described above, if the dynamic display period for showing the lottery result is long, the number of lottery is reduced and it is disadvantageous for the player, and the longer the dynamic display period, the more boring the player. There was a problem that I got bored with the game. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of suppressing a problem that a player gets tired of playing a game.

According to the game machine K1, the player is in an advantageous state during the period when the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, so that the player is expected to execute the dynamic display with a long dynamic display period. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the game machine K1, the determination means executes a determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination for the second determination, and the game ball has entered the first entry means. Based on the information acquisition means for acquiring the information for executing the first determination, and acquiring the information for executing the second determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means. , The storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means, and the determination means is stored in the storage means based on the completion of the dynamic display of the identification information. The gaming machine K2, characterized in that the determination is executed with respect to the said information.

According to the game machine K2, in addition to the effect of the game machine K1, even if the information is acquired during the period when the identification information is dynamically displayed, it is stored in the storage means, so that the judgment opportunity by the judgment means is increased. It has the effect of being able to.

In the game machine K1 or K2, a variable means for changing from a first state in which a game ball is difficult to enter into the second ball entry means to a second state in which a game ball can be entered, and a lottery condition are satisfied. It has a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the lottery, and a lottery information dynamic display means for dynamically displaying lottery information for showing the lottery result by the lottery means. As an advantageous gaming state, when the lottery information for indicating a specific lottery result is stopped and displayed, it is possible to change to the second state by the variable means. A game machine K3 characterized by being there.

According to the game machine K3, in addition to the effect of the game machine K1 or K2, in a special state, the game ball can be easily entered into the second ball entry means, and the game playability can be changed. Has the effect of being able to increase.

In the game machine K3, when the game state favorable to the player is set by the state setting means, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and based on the end of the dynamic display period, the said The gaming machine K4, characterized in that it has a releasing means for releasing a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effect of the game machine K3, it is advantageous to the player based on the end of the dynamic display of the identification information executed when the game state advantageous to the player is set. Since the game state is released, the player can be interested in the end timing of the dynamic display of the identification information, and even if a long dynamic display period is set, the problem that the player gets bored can be suppressed. There is an effect.

In any of the game machines K1 to K4, the first flow path through which the game ball can flow down and a second flow path through which the game ball flowing down the first flow path is difficult to flow down are provided. The means are arranged at the second flow path and at least at a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter, and the second entry means is arranged in the second flow path. A game machine K5 characterized by being a game machine.

According to the game machine K5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines K1 to K4, the game ball is moved to the first ball entry means even if the game is played to allow the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. There is an effect that it is possible to regulate a state in which only a determination that is advantageous to the player is likely to be executed because the ball is inserted.

In any of the game machines K1 to K5, when a game state advantageous to the player is set, there is an effect executing means for executing the effect corresponding to the dynamic display period of the identification information. A game machine K6 characterized by this.

According to the game machine K6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines K1 to K5, if a game state advantageous to the player is set, an effect corresponding to the dynamic display period is executed. It has the effect of improving the interest.

In the game machine K6, the effect executed by the effect executing means includes an effect that encourages the game ball to enter the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means. The game machine K7.

According to the game machine K7, in addition to the effect of the game machine K6, the game ball is made to enter the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means during the game state which is advantageous to the player, and the first determination or the second Since it is possible to easily give an opportunity for the judgment to be executed, there is an effect that the game can be performed efficiently.

In any of the above-mentioned game machines, the game machine Z1 is characterized in that the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the above-mentioned game machines, the game machine Z2 is characterized in that the game machine is a pachinko game machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the above-mentioned game machines, the game machine Z3 is characterized in that the game machine is a fusion of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
64a Left first ball entry port (first ball entry means)
64b Right first ball entry port (first ball entry means)
113 Audio lamp control device (effect execution means)
640 Second ball entry port (second ball entry means)
640a Electric accessory (variable means)
S225 Release means S402 Judgment means S406 Dynamic display means S702, S708 Information acquisition means S710 Storage means S908 Lottery means S914,915 Lottery information dynamic display means S1704 Bonus game execution means S1815 State setting means

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, whether to change the state of the start port provided on the game board from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the game ball is easy to enter. which executes a first lottery whether or not have been proposed.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-147965

However, further improvement of interest is required.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second entry means different from the first entry means, and the first entry means. The first determination is executed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball means, and the first determination is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means. 2 The determination means for executing the determination, the dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means on the display means, and the game ball on the second entry means. By a variable means capable of changing from a first state in which it is difficult to enter a ball to a second state in which a game ball is easier to enter than in the first state, and when a specific condition is satisfied , the variable means A state determining means capable of determining a special effect state that can be easily changed from the first state to the second state as a game state, and the variable means from the first state to the second state. and a selecting means for performing a lottery to determine whether to variable, and lottery information dynamic display means capable of implementing the dynamic display of lottery information for indicating the lottery result by the selecting means, before Symbol Dynamic display period determining means for determining one dynamic display period from a group of dynamic display periods in which different lengths of dynamic display periods are set as the dynamic display period in which lottery information is dynamically displayed. If, before Symbol anda notifying means for notifying that the special effect state is determine, the special effect states are dynamically displayed in a state in which the special effect state is determined The identification information is released based on the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode for showing the predetermined determination result , and the special effect state ends in the state where the identification information is dynamically displayed. The notification is performed by the notification means only when the dynamic display period of the lottery information has elapsed by the time the lottery information is displayed .

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, a first ball-entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball-entry means different from the first ball-entry means, and a game ball in the first ball-entry means. Executes the first determination based on the fact that the ball has entered the ball, and executes the second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means. a determining means, and the dynamic display means capable of dynamically displayed on the display unit identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination unit, game ball to the second ball entrance means a ball entrance difficult A variable means capable of changing from one state to a second state in which a game ball is easier to enter than the first state, and when a specific condition is satisfied , the variable means causes the first state to change. A state determining means capable of determining a special effect state that can be easily changed to the second state as a game state, and whether to change the variable means from the first state to the second state. a lottery means for performing lottery for determining a lottery information dynamic display means capable of implementing the dynamic display of lottery information for indicating the lottery result by the selecting means, the dynamic previous SL lottery information as a dynamic display period to be displayed, and dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period of one out of the dynamic display period group dynamic display period of different length has been set, before Symbol special anda notifying means for notifying that the effect state is determine, the special effect states, the identification information being dynamically displayed in a state in which the special effect state is determined a predetermined It is released based on the fact that the display mode for showing the determination result of the above is stopped and displayed , and in the state where the identification information is dynamically displayed, the special effect state is completed by the end of the above. The notification is performed by the notification means only when the dynamic display period of the lottery information has elapsed .

Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed the ball flow in the right side area of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram which showed the ball flow in the right side area of the game board of a pachinko machine. (A) and (b) are schematic views showing the operation relationship between the storage device provided in the game board of the pachinko machine and the non-electric accessory. (A) and (b) are schematic views showing the internal structure of the second variable winning apparatus 650. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting of the display screen in the third symbol display device, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen in the third symbol display device. (A) is a timing chart showing the flow of the small hit game of the small hit type B executed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance, and (b) is the first ball entrance. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the small hit game of the small hit type A executed based on the ball entering the ball. (A) is a timing chart showing the flow of the small hit game executed based on the entry into the second entrance, and (b) is the timing chart showing the flow of the small hit game executed based on the entry into the second entry. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the jackpot game to be executed. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the game flow in 1st Embodiment. It is a timing chart (first half) which shows the relationship between the game state and the effect state in 1st Embodiment. It is a timing chart (second half) which shows the relationship between the game state and the effect state in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic view showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device at the time when the game state is the time saving state and the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started, and (b) is the game. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device at the time when the state is a time saving state, and 40 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation of the 1st special symbol. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device after the ball enters the second entrance during the fluctuation of the first special symbol while the game state is the time saving state. (B) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device when the game state is a time saving state and the fluctuation period of the first special symbol is 1 second remaining. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device at the time when the fluctuation of the first special symbol executed during the time saving state is stopped, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen after the time saving state ends. It is a figure which showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device at the time when the variation of the 2nd special symbol started in a normal state. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device at the time when the fluctuation of the second special symbol won by the small hit is stopped and displayed in the normal state after the end of the time saving state. FIG. 18B is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device when the big hit game is started based on the small hit game displayed in FIG. 18A. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device when the second jackpot game is started due to the time saving variation executed after the jackpot game by V winning is completed. b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device when the game state is a time saving state and the fluctuation period of the first special symbol is 10 seconds remaining. (A) is a display of the third symbol display device when the game state is a time saving state and the hold memory of the second special symbol occurs due to the ball entering the second entrance during the battle production. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the screen, (b) is the 3rd symbol display device in the case where the game state is a time saving state, and the ball does not enter the 2nd ball entrance during the battle production. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen. (A) shows an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device when the game state is the time saving state and the reserved ball of the second special symbol is acquired up to the upper limit during the time saving fluctuation of the first special symbol. It is a schematic diagram, and (b) is a privilege effect being executed which is given when the game state is a time saving state and the reserved ball of the second special symbol is acquired up to the upper limit during the time saving fluctuation of the first special symbol. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device when the game state is the normal state and the small hit game based on the first special symbol is executed. (B) Is a schematic view showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device during the small hit game shown in FIG. 22 (a). (A) is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device when a right-handed game is performed while the game state is a normal state (left-handed state), and (b) is an electric motor. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device in the state which the accessory is open operation. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control unit according to the first embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main control unit according to the first embodiment. It is a figure. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table in the first embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the special symbol 1 random number table in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the first embodiment, and (d) is the contents of the second random number table in the first embodiment. Is a schematic diagram schematically showing. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special symbol 1 jackpot selection table in the first embodiment. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 jackpot selection table in the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special symbol 1 small hit selection table in the first embodiment. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 small hit selection table in the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern table in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern table for special figure 1 deviation in the first embodiment, and (d) is a special diagram in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the variation pattern table for 1 small hit schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern table for special figure 1 time reduction in the first embodiment, and (b) is the contents of the variation pattern table for special figure 2 in the first embodiment. Is a schematic diagram schematically showing. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) shows the electrical configuration of the RAM in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect state selection table, and (b) is each effect state selected by the effect state selection table and a third symbol display device. It is a schematic diagram which showed the relationship with 3 symbols and reserved symbols. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the display control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table in 1st Embodiment schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table in 1st Embodiment schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the drawing list in 1st Embodiment schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal fluctuation start processing executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving fluctuation start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric accessory control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the general drawing look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V entrance passage processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V passing process executed by the MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric accessory opening / closing process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the storage device control processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern related processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the holding ball number-related processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the prize information-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-related processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the ordinary figure variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the effect state setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the specific effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the counter update process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the V interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the stop type command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the error command processing to be performed. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a jackpot start command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the round number command processing. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process which is executed by MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the second embodiment, and (b) shows an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the second embodiment, and (b) shows an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control unit according to the second embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main control unit according to the second embodiment. It is a figure. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern table for special drawing 1 time reduction in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving end determination process executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving fluctuation start processing 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the third embodiment, and (b) shows an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control unit according to the third embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main control unit according to the third embodiment. It is a figure. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the time saving state selection table in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing 3 executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation time setting process executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the modification 1 of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the modification 2 of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows another example of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram which showed the operation of the modification of the electric accessory. It is a schematic diagram which showed the operation of the modification of the electric accessory. It is a schematic diagram which showed the operation of the modification of the electric accessory. It is a schematic diagram which showed the operation of the modification of the electric accessory. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the other production example 1, and (b) shows an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the other production example 1. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic view showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the other production example 2, and (b) shows an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the other production example 2. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern table for ordinary drawings in the other production example 2, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern table for normal use in the other production example 2. It is a schematic diagram shown, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern table for time saving A in other production example 2, and (d) is the variation for time saving B in other production example 2. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the pattern table schematically. It is the flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the other production example 2.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 3 and 4 are right-hand regions of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 5 is a schematic view showing the operation of the non-electric accessory 710 provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6 is a schematic view showing the operation of the non-electric accessory 710 provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. FIG. 7 is a schematic view showing the internal structure of the second variable winning device 650 provided in the above, and FIG. 7 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

When the inner frame 12 shows a large number of nails and both the left first entry port 64a and the right first entry opening 64b (hereinafter, both the left first entry opening 64a and the right first entry opening 64b). Is a game board 13 having a first ball entry port 64), a second ball entry port 640, a through gate 67, a variable winning device (first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650), and the like (FIG. 2) is detachably attached from the front side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface (game area) of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 8) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. A metal hinge 19 is attached to the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame 14 and the lower plate have the side on which the hinge 19 is provided as an opening / closing axis. The unit 15 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two flat glass sheets is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side thereof in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. .. On the other hand, on the right side of the lower plate unit 15, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the ball launching unit 112a is driven. The touch sensor 51a for permitting the movement, the push button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 are detected by the change in the electric resistance. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

In this embodiment, the configuration is not limited to the above, but the configuration is such that the main control device 110 and other control devices detect the ball launched by the ball launching unit 112a, and the solenoid of the ball launching unit 112a It may be configured to detect that the ball has been fired. Further, the number of detected spheres may be counted and stored until a process such as RAM clear is executed.

A frame button 22 is provided on the upper portion of the lower plate unit 15. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which will be described later, is changed. By arranging the frame button 22 that can be operated by the player on the pachinko machine 10 in this way, it becomes possible to arbitrarily select the effect to be executed by the pachinko machine 10, and the player's willingness to participate in the game can be motivated. Can be enhanced.

In the present embodiment, the frame button 22 that can be pressed and operated by the player is provided as an operation means that can be operated by the player, but other configurations may be used, for example, the player contacts (for example). A sensor-type operating means for detecting (or approaching), a lever-type operating means for the player to operate in the left-right (or front-back) direction, and a handle-type operating means for the player to rotate are provided. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of operating means is set to one, but more than that may be provided, or a plurality of operating means having different operation methods may be provided. With such a configuration, the player can perform a wider variety of operations, and it is possible to increase the types of effects performed based on the player's operations on the operating means.

Further, the operating means (frame button 22) is arranged at a position (upper left side of the lower plate unit 15) that can be operated while the player is executing the game (while operating the operation handle 51 with the right hand). Therefore, the frame button 22 can be easily operated even while the player is executing the game.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 placed below the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in the front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, a general ball entrance 63, and a number of balls. It is configured by assembling 1 entry port 64, 2nd entry opening 640, variable winning device (1st variable winning device 65, 2nd variable winning device 650), variable display device unit 80, etc., and its peripheral edge is an inner frame. It is attached to the back side of the twelve. The general entry port 63, the first entry opening 64, the second entry opening 640, the variable winning device (first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650), and the variable display device unit 80 are based on router processing. It is arranged in a through hole formed in the plate 60, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a wood screw or the like. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a starting port or the like is arranged and the launched ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down). Further, the game area includes all areas in which the ball that has passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flows down before passing through the out opening 66 and the winning opening (entry ball opening).

In the pachinko machine 10, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (left side when viewed from the front of the game board 13) is formed as a left game area and the right side is a right game area, and a game in which a ball is launched aiming at the left game area (hereinafter, In the left-handed game (referred to as a left-handed game), a game in which a ball is inserted into a general ball entrance 63 or a left first ball slot 64a is performed, and a ball is launched aiming at a right game area (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game). In (referred to as), the launched ball passes above the variable display device unit 80, and is provided in the right gaming area with a right first ball entry port 64b, a second ball entry port 640, a first variable winning device 65, and a second. A game aimed at a variable winning device 650 or the like is performed. In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the player is made to play a game (left-handed game or right-handed game) according to the game state, thereby suppressing the game from becoming monotonous.

Further, as will be described in detail later, the pachinko machine 10 has a game (left-handed game or right-handed game) that is advantageous to the player according to various game states (normal state, time saving state, jackpot state, etc.) set. The game) is configured to be different. This makes it possible for the player to change the content of the game while grasping the current game state, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming more monotonous.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description of the game board 13 will be continued. The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 8) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters either the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, and the ball is a through gate (normal). When passing through the entrance) 67, a lottery for a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for entering the ball into the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 640, it is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit or not, and it is judged as a special symbol big hit. If so, the jackpot type is also determined. When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the first specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is closed for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed, or 10 balls are won. It is released (until it is done), and the opening is repeated the number of times (number of rounds) according to the jackpot type. As a result, a large number of balls are won in the first specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a small hit that is given to a player with a privilege different from the special gaming state is determined in some cases when a special symbol lottery is used to determine a non-big hit (missing). It is configured in. When the lottery of the special symbol is won in a small hit, the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is set for a predetermined period (for example, until a total of 1.8 seconds elapses or until 10 balls are won). A small hit game that is released is executed. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10, a part of the balls that won the second specific winning opening 650a during this small hit game passed through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3 (see FIG. 6)). In this case, the above-mentioned big hit game is executed after the small hit game is completed. As a result, the player executes the big hit based on the game aiming to win the big hit in the special symbol lottery and the small hit game executed by winning the small hit in the special symbol lottery. You can perform both with a game that aims to do that. Therefore, since the player can perform various games, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Although details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with seven types of special symbols, "big hit A" to "big hit G". The two types of "big hits A and B" are jackpot types that can be determined when a big hit is obtained in a lottery executed when the ball enters the first entrance 64. The two types of "big hits C and D" are small hits in a lottery executed when the ball enters the first entrance 64, and the ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. "Big hit E" is a big hit type that can be determined in the above, and "Big hit E" is when a big hit is made in a lottery executed when the ball enters the second entrance 640, or the ball is the second entry. It is a big hit type that can be determined when the ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, which is a small hit in a lottery executed when the ball enters the ball mouth 640, and is "big hit F, G". Is a big hit type that can be determined when the ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, which is a small hit in a lottery executed when the ball enters the second entrance 640. .. The plurality of jackpot types provided in this way include benefits during the jackpot game (for example, number of rounds, opening time, opening operation pattern) and jackpots as benefits given to the player when the jackpot game is executed. The benefits given after the game (for example, the privilege of giving a game state in which the player can easily obtain the next big hit) are set to be different. As a result, in the jackpot game executed at various occasions for the player, it is possible to increase the motivation to acquire the jackpot game in which more advantageous benefits are given, and to provide a variety of playability. be able to.

When a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts variable display of the special symbol, and after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds to 90 seconds) has elapsed, the lottery result is obtained. The special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry times is determined for each type of entry opening. Each is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed on the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640 remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed and the lottery is performed. , The variable display according to the lottery is started.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the through gate (ordinary entrance) 67, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol is a hit. When it hits a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is changed to the open position for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 3 seconds), so that the second entrance 640 is opened. Be released. In the normal state, since the electric accessory 640a is arranged at the closed position, the second entry port 640 is closed. Therefore, when the ball hits the normal symbol, the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640, and as a result, the special symbol can be easily drawn.

Further, when the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 4 seconds) has elapsed, the lottery is performed. The normal symbol showing the result is stopped and displayed. If a ball passes through the through gate (normal entry port) 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is the first symbol. It is displayed by the display device 37 and also displayed by the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the through gate (normal entry port) 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the lottery is performed. The variable display is started.

As described above, as the jackpot type of the special symbol, seven types of "big hit A" to "big hit G" are provided. When "Big hits A to C" are reached, the number of rounds is 7 rounds in a special game state (7 rounds jackpot), and when "Big hit D" is reached, the number of rounds is 2 rounds in a special game state (2 rounds jackpot). When it becomes "Big hit E", the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 15 rounds (15 rounds big hit). When it becomes "big hit F", it becomes a special game state (5 rounds jackpot) with 5 rounds, and when it becomes "big hit G", it becomes a special game state with 10 rounds (10 rounds jackpot).

In addition, when the hits are "big hit A", "big hit C", and "big hit E to G", the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes shorter after the jackpot ends, and the normal symbol wins the second time than the normal state. A time-saving state, which is a gaming state in which the electric accessory 640a is open-controlled so that the ball can easily enter the ball entry port 640, is given until the change of the special symbol is completed once (time reduction number of times is 1). .. When "Big hit B" and "Big hit D" are reached, the normal state is reached without the above-mentioned time saving state being given after the end of the big hit.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 used in the present embodiment has a function (so-called time saving function) of shifting the gaming state to a time saving state in which it is easier to put the ball into the second entry port 640 than in the normal state. It does not have a function to change the jackpot probability of special symbols or the jackpot probability of ordinary symbols (so-called probability fluctuation function), but it is not limited to this, and a pachinko machine having a probability fluctuation function is used. May be good.

As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of jackpot is different depending on the type of jackpot. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be the same for all jackpot types (for example, all 8 rounds). Further, for example, the period during which the "normal symbol is shortened" may be changed according to the type of jackpot. In addition, instead of changing the period during which the "normal symbol time is shortened", the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 and the electric accessory 640a being released by hitting one ordinary symbol are released. You may change the number of times to do it. Further, in the present embodiment, the privilege to be given after the end of the jackpot is determined depending on the type of the jackpot. For example, the jackpot ends on the condition that the ball passes through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3) during the jackpot. Later, a probabilistic state of a special symbol or a time saving state of a normal symbol may be added. Further, in the present embodiment, the time saving state is configured to continue until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is executed a predetermined specific number of times (once), but the time saving number of times is set to a plurality of times (for example, for example). 10 times) may be set so that the time saving state ends when the number of times the special symbol changes reaches the time saving number, or when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a specific lottery result. In addition, a lottery different from the special symbol lottery (a lottery for determining whether or not the time saving state is continued) is executed, and the time saving state is terminated when the lottery result is a result that the time saving state is not continued. You may. Further, in the present embodiment, a time saving state is always given after the end of the big hit game by a specific big hit type (big hit A, big hit C, big hit E to G), but other configurations may be used. For example, when a time saving number of times measuring means for measuring the number of times the time saving state is continuously given is provided and the measurement result by the time saving number of times measuring means reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10), which jackpot is used. Even if the jackpot game according to the type is executed, the time saving state may not be given after the jackpot game is completed. As a result, it is possible to set an upper limit of the gaming period in which the player is advantageous, and it is possible to suppress the provision of excessive gambling to the player. In addition, as an example of suppressing excessive gambling, an example in which an upper limit is set for the number of times a time saving state is continuously given is shown, but in addition to this, a period during which a time saving state is continuously given (time saving) is shown. An upper limit may be set on the number of changes of the special symbol executed during the consecutive villa period). Even in such a configuration, since the upper limit can be set during the time-saving consecutive villa period, excessive gambling can be suppressed. In this case, since the upper limit is not set for the number of times the time saving state is given (that is, the number of big hits during the time saving consecutive villa period), a limited period (the time saving consecutive villa period for which the upper limit is set) is not set. Inside, players can be enthusiastically played in an attempt to win a large number of jackpots.

A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display or fluctuate by indicating whether or not a lottery of special symbols performed in association with entering the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by the lighting state, or a ball entered in the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. Of these, the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state.

When a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the ball enters the ball. The number of times is held up to 4 times for each entry port, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 are each held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of times of holding is limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, it may be set to be held until the total number of balls entered into the plurality of entrances reaches the upper limit (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot, an error display, and the like. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED is different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states (high probability state of a special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 are used with a small number of LEDs. Or, it is possible to display (such as during the time reduction of ordinary symbols). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a jackpot, it is special according to the jackpot type (big hits A to G). A symbol (first symbol) is shown.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general entry ports 63 are provided in which a predetermined number (for example, 5) of balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. .. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 displays a decorative third symbol (decorative symbol) according to the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the display of the second symbol display device 83. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (starting prize), the first symbol display device 37 displays the variation of the special symbol (first symbol) as a trigger. Will be executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. Further, when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device 83 executes the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) with the sphere as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the normal symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the normal symbol.

Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10, the target of the symbol (main symbol) for notifying the player of the variation display in an easy-to-understand manner is changed according to the game state or the like by using the third symbol display device 81. It is configured as follows. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given is determined in one gaming state (for example, a normal state) based on the lottery result of a special symbol, and the other This is because the game state (for example, the time saving state) is configured to be determined based on the lottery result of the normal symbol. In this way, even in the pachinko machine 10 having complicated game playability, the player can switch the target of the symbol (main symbol) mainly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between a special symbol and a normal symbol. It is only necessary to pay attention to the variable display of the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbol rows of left, middle, and right can be displayed. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, among the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110, the display related to the special symbol is performed by the first symbol display device 37, and the display related to the normal symbol is performed by the second symbol display device 83. On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the display of the second symbol display device 83. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81. Further, a plurality of liquid crystal displays may be provided as the third symbol display device 81, or the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to be movable. Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 9 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 9A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 9B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. As shown in FIG. 9A, the left (left side display) showing the first special symbol, the second special symbol, or the normal symbol (depending on the gaming state), which is one of the third symbols, in the first display area Dm. Three symbol rows of area Dm1), middle (middle display area Dm2), and right (right side display area Dm3) are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row and the third symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is displayed on the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. The symbol (or ordinary symbol) is displayed in a variable manner (dynamic display).

The third symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, or ordinary symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm is composed of the main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9", respectively. ing. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the lottery result by the main control device 110, which will be described later, is a specific lottery result (a big hit or a part of a small hit in the case of a special symbol, or a win in the case of a normal symbol). In this case, a variable display is performed in which the same third symbol (main symbol) is aligned (for example, "777"), and a jackpot is generated after the variable display is completed.

Specifically, in the first display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the first display area Dm, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1. If the third symbol is aligned and stopped on the effective line with a combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols), a jackpot movie is displayed as a jackpot.

A second display area Dn (Dn1 to Dn6) is formed in the upper right area of the first display area Dm. In the second display area Dn, a symbol sequence showing a first special symbol, a second special symbol, and a normal symbol is displayed. Specifically, the second display area Dn1 is an area in which a symbol string indicating the first special symbol is displayed, and the second display area Dn2 is an area in which the symbol string indicating the second special symbol is displayed. The 2 display area Dn3 is formed as an area in which a symbol string indicating a normal symbol is displayed, and a variation display corresponding to the variation display of each symbol is displayed.

Further, in the second display area Dn, the reserved storage numbers of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol are also displayed. Specifically, the second display area Ds4 is an area in which the reserved storage number of the first special symbol is displayed, and the second display area Ds5 is an area in which the reserved storage number of the second special symbol is displayed. 2 Display area Ds6 is an area in which the number of reserved symbols of ordinary symbols is displayed.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the display corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol, and the display corresponding to the reserved storage number of each symbol are the second of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to be displayed in the display area Dn, of which one symbol (the symbol to be notified to the player) is selected as the main symbol, and the other symbols are less noticeable than the main symbol. It is displayed as a symbol in the second display area Dn. As a result, the player can execute the optimum game only by checking the displayed contents of the main symbol.

In the present embodiment, the display mode of the secondary symbol is made smaller than that of the main symbol to make the display mode less conspicuous than the main symbol, but other configurations may be used, for example, the display of the main symbol. The slave symbol may be configured to be more difficult to identify than the main symbol by increasing the transmittance of the display mode of the slave symbol rather than the aspect or moving the display area of the slave symbol.

Further, as the symbol sequence mode of each symbol displayed in the second display area Dn, the symbol sequence displayed as the main symbol may be displayed as it is, or “◯” as shown in FIG. 9 (b). , "×" are displayed in two rows in parallel, and when two "○" symbols are displayed in the left and right rows, the first special symbol, the second special symbol, or the normal symbol is hit. It may be configured to notify the player of the fact.

Further, the slave symbol corresponding to the symbol displayed as the main symbol may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or the display of the slave symbol may be displayed at a place other than the third symbol display device 81. You may.

In the present embodiment, when the game state is the normal state, the main symbol (special figure 1 main symbol Dma) corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm (FIG. 9 (b). ), When the game state is the time saving state, the main symbol (normal symbol main symbol Dmc) corresponding to the normal symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm (see FIG. 16 (a)). Further, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the main symbol (special diagram 2 main symbol Dmd) corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm regardless of the gaming state (FIG. 17 (b)).

Further, as will be described in detail later, when a predetermined game condition is satisfied in each game state (for example, when a normal symbol whose fluctuation is started during the time reduction state stops changing after the time reduction state ends), It is configured so that a combination different from the combination of the main symbol and the sub-symbol described above is displayed. As a result, the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player in response to the symbol variation executed so as to straddle different gaming states. Further, the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol are all displayed as subordinate symbols in the second display area Dn, and the pseudo symbol for production is variablely displayed as the main symbol (see FIG. 22 (a)). It is configured as follows. As a result, during the period in which each symbol is not displayed in a variable manner (for example, a small hit period), the player can be made to think that the symbol variation is being executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The main symbol (third symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured in a display mode consisting of numbers from "0" to "9", but is distinguished from other main symbols. A display mode other than numbers may be used as long as it is possible. For example, a display mode imitating a character or a display mode in which a character and a number are combined may be used. Further, as the symbols displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the first display area Dm, even if the symbols other than the main symbol (that is, the same symbols are aligned on the effective line L1 and stop), the player is not given a privilege. A symbol sequence including a sub symbol may be used as the symbol).

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol or the normal symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 8) described later is a hit, the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned. Is performed, and the jackpot is configured to occur after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

The main symbol (third symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1, and this stopped display state is held for at least 1 second. By displaying the stopped 3rd symbol for a certain period of time (1 second or more) in this way, whether or not the player is a combination of the 3rd symbols corresponding to the hit (special symbol, normal symbol lottery result). It is possible to prevent overlooking (whether or not is a hit). In the above-mentioned stop display state, only the main symbol stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 is displayed, and the other main symbols (main symbols set in each symbol row and other than the effective line L1) are displayed. It is advisable to hide (display inconspicuously) the main symbol that is stopped and displayed at the location. As a result, the player can be notified of the stop display result of the main symbol more clearly.

Further, if the combination of the third symbols displayed as stopped is a combination corresponding to the detachment and there is a reserved ball, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started after the stop display for 1 second. .. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest incoming balls in time.

On the other hand, if the main symbol (third symbol) of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol or the normal symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second in the state where the holding ball does not exist, the third symbol is stopped and displayed after that. Continues. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or a new main symbol variation is started. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the main symbol (third symbol) was stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed from the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demonstration effect.

In the present embodiment, the demonstration effect starts when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses after the symbols corresponding to the main symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) are stopped and displayed. However, regardless of the main symbol or the subordinate symbol, the demo effect may be started based on the elapsed time from the stop display of all the symbols, or the main symbol may be configured. The display mode of the effect may be different between the demo effect when only the symbol is stopped and displayed and the demo effect when both the main symbol and the subordinate symbol are stopped and displayed. In this case, for example, in the demo effect executed when only the main symbol is stopped and displayed, the notification for urging the progress of the game is executed, and in the demo effect when both the main symbol and the subordinate symbol are stopped and displayed, a new one is executed. It is advisable to execute a notification for encouraging a game by a good player. As a result, the game can be smoothly performed.

Next, the sub-display area Ds provided below the first display area Dm will be described with reference to FIG. 9A. As shown in FIG. 9A, sub-display areas Ds are formed below the first display area Dm. The sub-display area Ds is an area in which auxiliary display modes for assisting the player's game, such as a game status and a game description, are displayed corresponding to each game state and game result. Specifically, the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed (see FIG. 9B), and the content of the fluctuation effect of the main symbol executed in the first display area Dm is assisted. (See Fig. 22 (a)), guide the content of the game to be played (see Fig. 22 (b)), and display the remaining period of a specific period (shorter time period) that is advantageous to the player (Fig. 22). 15 (a)). As a result, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description of the game board 13 will be continued. Below the variable display device unit 80, a left first ball entry port 64a into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the left first entry port 64a, the first entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, which is caused by the turning on of the first entry opening switch. A special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110, and the display according to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the left first entry slot 64a is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. The left first ball entry port 64a performed a right-handed game when the ball was launched into the path on the left side of the front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80 (so-called left-handed game). It is configured to make it easier to enter the ball than in the case.

Below the left first ball entry port 64a, a storage device 750 and a specific general ball entry port 630 are arranged. A detailed description of the storage device 750 will be described later with reference to FIG. 5, but the storage device 750 has a storage valve 750a that can be variably operated between a closed state and an open state, and a storage valve 750a when the storage valve 750a is in the closed state. It is composed of a side wall for forming a storage area capable of storing one sphere. The storage valve 750a is variably controlled so as to change from a closed state in which balls can be stored to an open state when a big hit is won in a special symbol lottery, and when the storage valve 750a is variably operated to the open state, a storage area. (Or a ball that has flowed into the storage device 750 while the storage valve 750a is variable to the open state) is configured to flow down below the storage device 750. The storage device 750 is arranged at a position where the ball can be stored regardless of whether the left-handed game or the right-handed game is performed.

Below the storage device 750, a specific general ball entry port 630 is arranged so that a ball that has passed through the storage device 750 can enter the ball. The specific general entry port 630 is a winning opening in which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, and is also used as an opportunity to operate the non-electric accessory 710. A detailed description of the non-electric accessory 710 will be described later with reference to FIG. The non-electric accessory 710 provided is configured to be variable to a position where the ball can enter the right first ball entry port 64b.

On the other hand, in the right region of the game board 13, there are two flow paths through which the right-handed ball flows down, and a distribution member 700 for distributing the ball launched by the right-handed game into the above-mentioned two paths. The non-electric accessory 710, the right first ball entrance 65b, the through gate 67, the second ball opening 640 and the electric accessory 640a, the first variable winning device 65, and the second variable winning device 650 It is arranged. Next, the configuration of the right side region of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4.

The ball launched by the right-handed game is alternately distributed to the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702 by the distribution member 700. The ball distributed to the first flow path 701 passes through the bending path 701a (see FIG. 3), passes through the through gate 67 and the second entry port 640, and flows out to the lower part of the right side region. Further, the sphere distributed to the second flow path 702 flows down the third flow path 703a when the non-electric accessory 710 provided on the downstream side thereof is in the closed state (see FIG. 5A). Then, it flows into the inflow port 704a and flows down the fifth flow path 704b provided on the back surface side of the first flow path 701 (the back side from the viewpoint of FIG. It flows downward. On the other hand, when the non-electric accessory 710 is in the open state (see FIG. 5B), the ball flows down the fourth flow path 703b and enters the right first ball entry port 64b. When a ball enters the right first ball entry port 64b, three balls are paid out as prize balls.

A detailed description of the non-electric accessory 710 will be described later with reference to FIG. 5, but in the present embodiment, the ball that has entered the right first entry port 64b when the non-electric accessory 710 is open. The non-electric accessory 710 is configured to be changed to a closed state by its own weight.

Then, the spheres distributed to the two flow paths (first flow path 701 and second flow path 702) by the distribution member 700 merge in the lower right region, and are on the second variable winning device 650 and the first variable winning device 65. Flows down and flows into the out port 66 while flowing down the flow path that can flow into the storage device 750.

Here, the flow of the spheres distributed by the distribution member 700 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a schematic view showing the ball flow when the ball launched by the right-handed game flows down the first flow path 701, and FIG. 4 is a schematic view showing the ball flow when the ball launched by the right-handed game flows down the first flow path 701. It is a schematic diagram which showed the sphere flow at the time of flowing down 702.

As shown in FIG. 3, since the distribution member 700 alternately distributes the balls fired by the right-handed game into the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702, when 100 balls are fired per minute. 50 pieces flow down the first flow path 701 at 1.2 second intervals, and 50 pieces flow down the second flow path 702 at 1.2 second intervals. The first flow path 701 is composed of a ball passage formed with a passage width (about 15 mm) equivalent to one ball, and a bending path 701a provided in the middle of the first flow path 701 reduces the flow velocity of the ball. The ball passing time until the ball flowing into the first flow path 701 flows out from the first flow path 701 is configured to be about 2 seconds.

A through gate 67 is arranged at a downstream position of the first flow path 701 (downstream from the bending path 701a), and a second entry port 640 is arranged on the downstream side of the through gate 67. .. The second ball entry port 640 allows the ball to pass through the first flow path 701 when the electric accessory 640a is closed, and passes through the first flow path 701 when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state. The ball is configured to enter the second entry port 640.

Further, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is configured to reach the second entry port 640 after 0.2 seconds. Although the details will be described later, since the fluctuation time of the normal symbol executed when the ball passes through the through gate 67 is 3 seconds at the shortest, the ball passing through the through gate 67 is the ball passing through the through gate 67. It is configured so that the ball does not enter the second entrance 640 due to the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a, which is executed based on the lottery of the ordinary symbol executed when the ball passes through. That is, the period from passing through the through gate 67 to reaching the second entrance 640 (electric accessory 640a) is shorter than the period required for the lottery of ordinary symbols. As a result, it is possible to execute a lottery of a normal symbol and physically make it impossible to insert a ball into the second entry port 640 simply by firing one ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate game from being executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the ball launched by the right-handed game has the first flow path 701 (the flow path in which the through gate 67 and the second entry port 640 are arranged) and the second flow path by the distribution member 700. Since it is distributed alternately to the road 702, a lottery for a normal symbol is executed (a ball is passed through a through gate 67), a winning prize is won in the lottery for a normal symbol, and the electric accessory 640a is opened to open the second entrance. Since it is necessary to fire at least three balls in order to allow the ball to enter the 640, it is possible to prevent an even more inappropriate game (for example, a single shot) from being performed.

In the present embodiment, the through gate 67 and the second entry port 640 are arranged in one of the two flow paths distributed by the distribution member 700, but the through gate is in one of the flow paths. 67 may be arranged, and the second entry port 640 may be arranged in the other flow path. With this configuration, for example, when a malicious player destroys the distribution member 700 and creates a state in which the ball flows down to only one of the flow paths, the ball passes through the through gate 67. It becomes possible to regulate the game in which the ball enters the second entrance 640 when the normal symbol is won, and it is possible to suppress the illegal game from being performed.

Next, a case where the sphere flows down the second flow path 702 will be described with reference to FIG. The second flow path 702 is configured so that the period during which the sphere flows down is shorter than that of the first flow path 701 described above. Specifically, it is configured so that the time required for the ball flowing into the second flow path 702 to flow out from the outflow port 704c is about 1.5 seconds. With this configuration, when 100 balls are fired toward the right side region in one minute, the balls that have flowed into the first flow path 701 and the balls that are fired next to the balls are fired next to the second flow path 702. The ball flowing into the ball flows down the lower right area of the game board 13 (the area where the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are arranged) almost at the same time (about 0.1 second difference). Become. Therefore, in the gaming state (big hit state or small hit state) in which each variable winning device is opened, it is possible to easily win a plurality of balls at one time.

Further, a part of the second flow path 702 (fifth flow path 704b) is provided on the back side (back side from the viewpoint of FIG. 4) of the first flow path 701, and is viewed from the front (front view from the viewpoint of FIG. 4). It is configured so that a plurality of flow paths overlap. In this way, by forming a plurality of ball flow paths using the depth direction of the game board 13, the space for forming the ball flow paths (the area occupied by the ball flow paths of the game board 13) can be reduced. it can.

Further, the ball outlet of the second flow path 702 (outlet 704c) is located below the outlet of the first flow path 701 (downstream side of the second entry port 640), and is to the right of the game board 13. In the lower region, the sphere is configured to flow out to the downstream side of the sphere that has flowed out from the first flow path 701. As a result, the spheres that flowed out vigorously from the outlet 704c (the spheres that flowed out at a higher speed than the spheres that flowed down the first flow path 701) directly collided with the spheres that flowed out from the first flow path 701, which was irregular. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a ball flow occurs.

In the present embodiment, the ball launched by the right-handed game is alternately distributed to the two flow paths by the distribution member 700, but other configurations may be used, for example, two. The spheres may be distributed at different ratios instead of alternating (1: 1) with respect to the flow paths, or the spheres may be distributed to three or more flow paths. Further, in the present embodiment, the distribution member 700 whose distribution destination of the next passing sphere changes depending on the weight of the passing sphere is used. For example, the vibration is electrically driven according to a predetermined rule. A component member may be used.

Next, the operation flow of the storage device 750 and the non-electric accessory 710 used in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 (a) is a schematic view showing that both the storage device 750 and the non-electric accessory 710 are in the closed state (closed state), and FIG. 5 (b) shows the storage device 750 and the non-electric accessory 710. It is a schematic diagram which shows that each thing 710 is an open state (open state).

As shown in FIG. 5A, when the non-electric accessory 710 is in the closed state (closed state), it is impossible (difficult) to allow the ball to enter the right first ball entry port 64b. Therefore, when the game state is the normal state, it is possible to perform a right-handed game aiming at the right side region of the game board 13 and prevent the ball from being inserted into the right first ball entry port 64b.

The non-electric accessory 710 has an action portion that comes into contact with the ball when it passes through a specific location, and the action portion operates by the weight of the abutting ball and is released based on the operation. It is configured in. Specifically, the ball that has entered the specific general entry port 630 comes into contact with the above-mentioned action portion, the action connecting portion 710a operates in conjunction with the action, and the non-electric accessory 710 is opened. As a result, the ball can enter the right first ball entry port 64b.

Further, the right first ball entry port 64b is provided with a second action portion on which the ball that has entered can come into contact with the ball. The second working part is activated by the operation, and the non-electric accessory 710 is closed. As described above, the non-electric accessory 710 is configured to switch the variable state based on the operation of the member acting by the weight of the sphere without using an electric drive source. The configuration of the non-electric accessory 710 may be other than the configuration described above, and a well-known configuration may be used as a configuration that operates based on the weight of the sphere.

As described above, the ball enters the specific general entry port 630, which triggers the operation (opening) of the non-electric accessory 710, and is stored in the storage device 750 provided above the specific general entry port 630. When the storage device 750 is released, the ball can enter the specific general entry port 630. Then, when the predetermined release condition (for example, the start of the jackpot game) is satisfied as described above, the storage device 750 is in the release state until the predetermined closing condition (for example, the elapse of 10 seconds) is satisfied. It is variably controlled so as to be.

That is, as shown in FIG. 5B, when the jackpot game is started and the first variable winning device 65 is opened, the storage device 750 is released. Then, the storage device 750 is released, and the non-electric accessory 710 is opened based on the ball entering the specific general entry port 630. In the first embodiment, since the storage device 750 is arranged at a position where the ball launched by either the left-handed game or the right-handed game can pass through the storage device 750, the right-handed game A ball that did not win the first variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game in which the game is performed (a ball that passed over the first variable winning device 65 during the inter-round interval in which the first variable winning device is temporarily closed). ) Can be entered into the specific general entry port 630.

Therefore, during the jackpot game, it is possible to obtain both the payout of the prize ball based on the entry into the first variable winning device 65 and the payout of the prize ball based on the entry into the specific general entry port 630. be able to. Further, since the ball that could not be won in the first variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to enter the specific general entrance 630, the first variable is made during the jackpot game, which has been a waste ball in the past. It is possible to add value that is advantageous to the player to the ball that has not won the prize device 65.

In the first embodiment, the storage valve 750a is set so as to release the storage device 750 for 10 seconds after the jackpot game is started (after the opening operation of the first variable winning device 65 is executed). It is configured to operate variably. Therefore, by satisfying the end condition of the first round in the jackpot game (for example, winning 10 balls) within 10 seconds, the interval from the end of the first round to the start of the second round (inter-round interval). ) Period and the period when the storage device 750 is released can be matched.

As a result, the ball that has passed over the first variable winning device 65 during the inter-round interval period can be entered into the specific general entrance 630, so that the first round in the jackpot game can be made earlier (within 10 seconds). You can enthusiastically play the game to finish it.

The release timing of the storage device 750 executed during the jackpot game is 10 seconds after the above-mentioned release timing (after the jackpot game is started (after the first opening operation of the first variable winning device 65 is executed)). ) May be set, or the storage device 750 may be set to be released at a predetermined interval (for example, every 10 seconds) for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). With this configuration, if the end timing of each round of the jackpot game (the timing at which the interval between rounds is set) and the timing at which the storage device 750 is released all match, many during the jackpot game. The ball can be entered into the specific general entry port 630.

Further, when the above-described configuration is used, the timing at which the end condition of each round in the jackpot game is satisfied is adjusted (for example, the tenth ball, which is the round end condition, is won in the first variable winning device. By adjusting the timing to make the ball enter by operating the operation handle 51), it is possible to change the number of balls to be entered into the specific general entry port 630 during the big hit game. It is possible to provide a new game property in which the end timing of each round in the game is adjusted to a predetermined timing (timing when the storage device 750 is released), and the player can enthusiastically play the game.

The third symbol display device 81 may be configured to display a display mode for notifying the release timing of the storage device 750 and a display mode in which the player can predict the timing at which the inter-round interval is executed. As a result, the player can execute the game during the jackpot game while grasping the contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the first embodiment described above, the non-electric accessory 710 is in the open state (open state) when the jackpot game is executed. Therefore, by performing the right-handed game during the jackpot game, the right first The ball can be reliably entered into the ball entry port 64b. As a result, it is possible to reliably execute the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the time saving state (the time saving at the start of the consecutive villa mode (first time saving) which shifts from the jackpot in the normal state) after the jackpot game ends.

Further, in the present embodiment, when one ball enters the right first ball entry port 64b, the non-electric accessory 710 operates so as to shift to the closed state (closed state), which is a big hit. It is possible to prevent the ball from excessively entering the right first ball entry port 64b during the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the game ball guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 650e in the second variable winning device 650 is distributed to the normal discharge flow path 650e1 and the special discharge flow path 650e2, which will be described later. Will be described.

FIG. 6A is a schematic view showing a state in which the balls winning the second variable winning device 650 are distributed to the normal discharge flow path 650e1, and FIG. 6B is a schematic view showing the state in which the balls won the second variable winning device 650 are distributed to the second variable winning device 650. It is a schematic diagram which showed the state which the winning ball is distributed to the special discharge flow path 650e2.

As shown in FIG. 6B, when the switching member 650h is operated, the game balls that have passed through the detection port 650a1 of the second variable winning device 650 are distributed to the special discharge flow path 650e2. In the present embodiment, the retention member 650n is provided in the special discharge flow path 650e2. With this retention member 650n, only one game ball can be retained in the distribution destination region 650h3, which is the region where the game ball is distributed to the special discharge flow path 650e2 side by the switching member 650h. As a result, when one game ball is retained in the distribution destination area 650h3, the game ball that has passed through the detection port 650a1 of the second variable winning device 650 is not distributed to the special discharge flow path 650e2. Normally, it will flow down to the discharge flow path 650e1.

The retention member 650n is composed of a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side. The retention member 650n operates in the front-rear direction of the game board 13 by the operation of the retention solenoid 209b (see FIG. 8). The retention member 650n can retain one game ball in the distribution destination region 650h3 by advancing forward (closing operation). On the other hand, by performing the evacuation operation (opening operation) backward, the game ball staying in the distribution destination region 650h3 flows down to the special discharge flow path 650e2.

Here, the second variable winning device 650 allows the game ball to enter by opening the opening / closing door 650f1 during the small hit game. Further, the retention member 650n is closed during the small hit game (when it is possible to enter the second variable winning device 650), and after the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed (new to the second variable winning device 650). The opening operation is performed after a predetermined time has passed since (after the ball cannot be entered). That is, in this control example, the game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 650 is limited to one game ball that flows down to the special discharge flow path 650e2 even if the switching member 650h is operating. As a result, it is possible to prevent an excess of game balls flowing down into the special discharge flow path 650e2.

The game ball that has flowed down into the special discharge flow path 650e2 passes through the V winning switch 650e3. In the first embodiment, the jackpot game is given based on the passage of the game ball through the V winning switch 650e3.

In the first embodiment, the number of game balls flowing down to the special discharge flow path 650e2 is limited to one, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more game balls stay in the distribution destination area 650h3. The number of game balls to be limited may be appropriately changed by making it possible or by allowing the staying member to operate a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) during the small hit game.

A case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge flow path 650e1 will be described with reference to FIG. 6A. FIG. 6A is a diagram showing a state in which the flow path solenoid 209c (see FIG. 8) is inactive and the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h closes the opening surface at the entrance of the special discharge flow path 650e2. ..

In the first embodiment, the retention member 650n provided in the special discharge flow path 650e2 operates even when the flow path solenoid 209c is inactive. As a result, it is not necessary to switch the processing depending on whether or not the flow path solenoid 9209c is operated, so that the design cost and the program capacity can be reduced.

When the flow path solenoid 650k is inactive, all the game balls that have passed through the detection port 650a1 of the second variable winning device 650 flow down to the normal discharge flow path 650e1. On the other hand, since there is no game ball flowing down into the special discharge flow path 650e2, there is no influence of the retention member 650n newly provided in the first embodiment.

Next, the flow of the small hit game in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG. 10A shows a small hit type B small hit game executed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (left first ball entrance 64a, right first ball opening 64b). 10 (b) is a timing chart showing the flow of the ball, and FIG. 10B is executed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (left first entry port 64a, right first entry opening 64b). It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the small hit game of the small hit type A. FIG. 11A is a timing chart showing the flow of the small hit game executed based on the entry of the ball into the second entry port 640, and FIG. 11B is the second entry port 640. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the jackpot game executed based on the ball entering the ball. The details of the operation control of the various devices shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 will be described later.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, a small hit game for 60 seconds is executed (see FIG. 22). In this small hit game, a game in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened is executed, and when the ball winning the second variable winning device 650 passes through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3), the small hit game ends. It is configured so that a jackpot game will be executed later. When a small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the ball can pass (easily pass) through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3) during the small hit game (small hit type A). , One of the small hits (small hit type B) in which the ball cannot pass (difficult to pass) through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) is selected.

First, a description will be given with reference to FIG. 10 (a). Based on the winning of the ball to the first ball entry port 64, the main control device 110 performs fluctuation control of the first special symbol. At that time, the display control device 114 executes the first special symbol variation effect indicating that the first special symbol is changing for the same period (30 seconds) as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. The time of the first special symbol variation effect executed by the display control device 114 will be described later. Then, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped and the main control device 110 starts the small hit control (when the small hit game is executed), the opening / closing door 650f1 provided in the second variable winning device 650 is opened / closed. The V inlet solenoid 209a for variably operating, the retention solenoid 209b for variably operating the retention member 650n, and the flow path solenoid 209c for variably operating the switching member 650h are turned on according to a predetermined opening scenario. Specifically, the V inlet solenoid 209a repeats the opening operation of turning off for 15 seconds and turning on for 0.5 seconds twice after the small hit game is executed, and then off for 15 seconds and for 0.8 seconds. A total of 60 seconds of open scenario is set so that it is on and off for 13.2 seconds.

Next, the retention solenoid 209b is turned on for 55 seconds (a state in which the ball is retained) after the small hit game is executed, and then turned off for 5 seconds (a state in which the retention of the ball is released), for a total of 60. An open scenario for a second is set. The opening scenario of the V inlet solenoid 209a and the retention solenoid 209b described above is an opening scenario common to the small hit types A and B.

On the other hand, the opening scenario of the flow path solenoid 209c is configured so that different opening scenarios are set depending on the small hit type, and the ball cannot pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) (difficult to pass). In the small hit type B, which is a type, an open scenario is set in which the ball is continuously turned off for 60 seconds during the small hit game period (see FIG. 10A), and the ball passes through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3). In the small hit type A, which is a possible (easy to pass) small hit type, an open scenario is set in which the small hit game is turned off for 40 seconds, turned on for 15 seconds, and turned off for 5 seconds after the small hit game is executed (FIG. 10). See (b)).

In this way, by making only one solenoid drive different among the three solenoids that are driven during the small hit game, the ball can easily pass through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3). By configuring the small hit game and the small hit game in which the ball is difficult to pass, it is possible to use a common open scenario for the small hit games executed in different small hit types, and reduce the processing load. be able to.

In the present embodiment, the opening scenarios of the V inlet solenoid 209a and the retention solenoid 209b are standardized, and the opening scenarios of the flow path solenoid 209c are different depending on the small hit type, but other configurations may be used. Often, for example, the opening scenarios of the retention solenoid 209b and the flow path solenoid 209C may be shared, and the opening scenarios of the V inlet solenoid 209a may be different. In this case, a common open scenario is set so that the period during which the ball can pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) and the period during which the ball cannot pass are set according to the timing at which the ball wins the second variable winning device 650. As the opening scenario of the V inlet solenoid 209a, the opening scenario in which the V inlet solenoid 209a is turned on corresponding to the period during which the ball can pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) and the specific area (V) are set. It is preferable to use an open scenario in which the winning switch 650e3) turns on the V inlet solenoid 209a corresponding to the period during which the ball cannot pass. Further, in all the opening scenarios, it is preferable to unify the period during which the V inlet solenoid 209a is turned on. With this configuration, the number of balls that can be won in the second variable winning device 650 can be matched.

Further, as in the above example, the opening scenario is not different only for the V inlet solenoid 209a, but the start position (execution start position) of the opening scenario is different even when the same opening scenario is used. The small hit game in which the ball easily passes through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) and the small hit game in which the ball does not easily pass may be configured to be feasible. In this configuration, it is not necessary to prepare different open scenarios for each small hit type, so that the storage capacity can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 11A, the flow of the small hit game executed based on the entry of the ball into the second entry port 640 will be described. In addition, in this embodiment, the small hit game executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640 (that is, the small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2)). Since all the small hit games executed based on the above are configured to execute the same motion control, the small hit types will be described without limitation.

In FIG. 11A, the total time for small hit control (small hit game time) is set to 10 seconds for explanation. First, when the set time t1 (6.5 seconds) elapses after the small hit game (control) is started, the V inlet solenoid 209a is turned off and the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed among the above-mentioned plurality of solenoids. By closing the opening / closing door 650f1, a new ball does not win in the second variable winning device 650. Next, the set time t2 (9 seconds) elapses, the retention solenoid 209b is turned off, the retention member 650n is in the open state (evacuation state), and the ball retained by the retention member 650n flows down to the special discharge path 650e2. To go. Since the set time t2 is set to a sufficient time for the ball existing in the second variable winning device 650 to flow down the normal discharge flow path 650e1 when the set time t1 elapses, the set time t2 becomes the second when the set time t2 elapses. In the 2 variable winning device 650, only the balls retained by the retention member 650n flow down the special discharge flow path 650e2. Next, the set time t3 (5 seconds) elapses, the flow path solenoid 209c is turned off, and the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h closes the opening surface at the entrance of the special discharge flow path 650e2. The set time t3 is set to a sufficient time for the ball flowing down the special discharge flow path 650e2 to flow down downstream from the movable range of the guide piece 650h2 when the set time t2 elapses.

By driving the staying solenoid 209b and the flow path solenoid 209c with a time difference in this way, even if the ball is stayed by the staying member 650n within the movable range of the guiding piece 650h2, the guiding piece 650h2 and the staying member 650n stay. Since the ball can be surely flowed down to the special discharge flow path 650e2 without interfering with the stagnant ball, the device can be made compact.

Finally, based on the fact that the ball flowing down the special discharge flow path 650e2 has passed through the V winning switch (specific area) 650e3, the main control device 110 ends the small hit game control, performs the big hit game control, and performs the first The specific winning opening 65 is opened.

Next, the differences from FIG. 11 (a) will be described with reference to FIG. 11 (b). In FIG. 11B, since the lottery result of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second entrance 640 is a big hit (per symbol), the second variable winning device 650 is not operated. That is, after the fluctuation control of the second special symbol by the main control device 110 is completed, the jackpot control is started. During that time, the display control device 114 executes a second special symbol variation effect indicating that the second special symbol is changing.

Here, the relationship between the time of the effect performed by the display control device 114 in FIG. 11A and the time of the effect performed by the display control device 114 in FIG. 11B will be described. In FIG. 11A, the total of the fluctuation time (2 seconds) of the second special symbol and the small hit effect time (10 seconds) is set to 12 seconds, and in FIG. 11B, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set. Is set in 12 seconds. This is the timing at which the jackpot game is started regardless of whether the jackpot based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is either the V prize hit or the symbol hit described above, that is, the first variable prize device 65 (first specific prize). This is to match the timing at which the mouth 65a) opens. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the lottery result of the second special symbol and to enjoy the effect executed by the display control device to the end.

Next, the flow of the game in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of the game in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, when the game state is the normal state, the left-handed game in which the lottery of the first special symbol (special 1) is executed aiming at the left first entry slot 64a and the game state are in the time saving state. In this case, the lottery of the second special symbol (special 2) is executed aiming at the second entrance 640, or when the game state is a winning (big hit, small hit) state, the first variable winning device 65, the first 2 It is configured so that a right-handed game aiming at the variable winning device 650 is performed, and a winning (big hit or small hit) is won in the lottery of the first special symbol executed during the left-handed game, and the winning game ends. Later, when a time saving state is given, the game shifts to a right-handed game (consecutive villa mode), and shifts to a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. This consecutive villa mode (specific game state) ends when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the game state shifts to the normal state and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 0), and the normal state It shifts to the left-handed game. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, during the left-handed game (normal state), the game is performed with the aim of shifting to the right-handed game (specific game state) which is advantageous to the player, and the right-handed game is performed. During the consecutive villa mode (specific game state), the game is performed with the aim of continuing the consecutive villa mode (specific game state). In this way, in a game machine having different game characteristics, by making the different game characteristics correspond to a game (right-handed game, left-handed game) in which the position where the player shoots the ball is different, the player can be challenged. It is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the first special symbol lottery is a big hit as an opportunity to shift from the normal state in which the left-handed game is performed to the specific game state (ream villa mode) in which the right-handed game is performed. There are multiple (2 types) of chances: a hit and a V-winning hit in which the first special symbol wins a small hit and the jackpot is executed by passing through a specific area (V-winning switch 650e3) during the small-hit game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage during the left-handed game, which is a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player.

As shown in FIG. 12, in the normal game state in which the left-handed game is performed, the game aimed at the left first entry port 64a is executed. If the lottery of the first special symbol is performed based on the ball entering the left first entry slot 64a and the jackpot type of the lottery result is jackpot A (80% at the time of jackpot winning), after the jackpot ends. A time-saving game state (time-saving state) that facilitates winning a prize in the second ball opening 640 is provided. When the game shifts to the time-saving game state (time-saving state), a right-handed game in which a ball is launched to the right side of the game board 13 in order to aim at the second entrance 640 arranged in the right side area of the game board 13 is performed. Will be done. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is jackpot B (20% at the time of winning the jackpot), the time-saving game state (time-saving state) is not given after the end of the jackpot, so that the left-handed game is performed after the end of the jackpot game (normal game state). It shifts to the normal state). Further, in the present embodiment, if the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit and the small hit type is small hit A (10% at the time of small hit winning), there is also a route in which a big hit (V prize) is obtained. .. In this case, after the jackpot ends, the game shifts to the time-saving game state. Further, even if the small hit type is small hit A, if the ball cannot be passed through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) during the small hit game, or the small hit type of the winning small hit When is a small hit B, the game does not shift to the time-saving game state (time-saving state), but shifts to the normal state in which the left-handed game is executed.

Next, in the pachinko machine 10, the flow during the right-handed game, which is advantageous to the player, will be described. In the pachinko machine 10, as described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 5, a right first ball entry port 64b is arranged in the right area of the game board 13, and a jackpot game in which a right-handed game is executed is executed. At least one ball is configured so that the ball enters the right first ball entry port 64b. That is, in the normal game state (normal state), when a jackpot that is given a time saving state is won after the jackpot game ends, at least one hold memory of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is stored after the jackpot game ends. The time saving state is started in a state where the second special symbol (special figure 2) has no reserved memory.

As shown in FIG. 12, in the pachinko machine 10, when both the hold memory of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the hold memory of the second special symbol (special figure 2) exist, the second special symbol The lottery (variation) based on the hold memory of (Special Figure 2) is configured to be executed with priority (so-called special 2 priority change), but the hold memory of the second special symbol (Special Figure 2) is In the absence state, a lottery (variation) based on the reserved memory of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed. Here, since the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the time saving state is configured to be set to 150 seconds regardless of the lottery result, after the time saving state is started. During 150 seconds, the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed. Further, when the fluctuation (lottery) of any of the special symbols (special figure 1 and special figure 2) is executed once during the time saving state, the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied (configured). Time reduction once).

During the period in which the first special symbol (special figure 1) is fluctuating in this time-saving state, a game for acquiring the reserved memory of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed, and the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed. A maximum of 4 reserved memories of Special Figure 2) can be acquired. Here, if the hold memory of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be acquired, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped after the end of the time reduction, and after shifting to the normal state, the hold memory of the second special symbol is set. Based on the lottery is executed. As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, the lottery of the second special symbol is set to win a big hit with a probability of 1/300 and a small hit with a probability of 299/300. 2 For the small hits won by the lottery of special symbols, a small hit game that allows the ball to pass (easily pass) in a specific area (V winning switch 630e3) is executed, and all the big hits executed when the V prize is won are all. A jackpot is set in which a time saving state is given after the jackpot game is completed. Therefore, in the time-saving game state, the consecutive villa mode (specific game state) is continued as long as the hold memory of the second special symbol is held.

On the other hand, during the period when the first special symbol is fluctuating in the time saving state (during the preparation period for the consecutive villa), the hold memory of the second special symbol cannot be acquired, and there is no hold memory of the second special symbol. When the time saving state ends in, the game shifts to the normal game state as it is, and the consecutive villa mode (specific game state) ends.

In addition, if multiple (for example, 3) reserved memories of the 2nd special symbol are acquired during the consecutive villa preparation period, the change of the 2nd special symbol will start when the time is shortened again. Become. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (special 2 fluctuation time) in the time-saving state is set to 2 seconds regardless of the lottery result, which is shorter than the fluctuation time (3 seconds) of the normal symbol in the time-saving state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the acquisition of a new hold memory of the second special symbol during the time saving state in which the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is being executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which an excessive prize ball is provided to the player. In this embodiment, once the time saving state is entered, the time saving state is configured to loop with a probability of about 90%.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 13 to 23, the effect display contents executed by the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14, the flow of the effect display content that changes in response to the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 13 is a timing chart (first half) showing the relationship between the gaming state and the effect state in the present embodiment, and FIG. 14 is a timing chart (second half) showing the relationship between the game state and the effect state in the present embodiment.

Here, a decorative symbol (third symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 used in the present embodiment will be briefly described. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, decorative symbols (third symbols) corresponding to three types of symbols, a first special symbol, a second special symbol, and a normal symbol, can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Among them, the decorative symbol (third symbol) corresponding to the symbol that should notify the player of the lottery result most is displayed in the first display area Dm (see FIG. 9) of the third symbol display device. However, the decorative symbol (third symbol) corresponding to the other symbols is configured to be displayed in the second display area Dn (see FIG. 9) of the third symbol display device as a secondary symbol.

Then, by switching the symbol to be displayed as the main symbol according to the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, only the player is made to recognize the display result of the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is configured so that you can easily understand the complicated game playability.

The control for switching the symbol to be displayed as the main symbol described above will be described in detail later, but the value of the effect state is set based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 and the fluctuation state of each symbol, and the value of the effect state is set. Based on the above, the symbol to be displayed as the main symbol and the symbol to be displayed as the secondary symbol are switched and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 13, when the game state is the normal (special 1) state in which the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol is executed, "state 1" is set as the effect state. During the period when this "state 1" is set, the first special symbol is displayed as the main symbol and the normal symbol is displayed as the subordinate symbol, and the reserved symbol of the first special symbol is displayed as the main reserved symbol (figure). 9 (b)). In this way, in the "normal (special 1)" state in which the fluctuation (lottery) of the first special symbol is executed, the player can easily recognize the lottery result of the first special symbol. , The content of the game can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, in the "big hit" state in which the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol and the jackpot game is executed, in the first display area Dm (see FIG. 9B) of the third symbol display device 81. The jackpot effect image is displayed. In this case, since the main symbol is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, "-" is set as the effect state.

After the jackpot game is completed, the game state shifts to the time saving state and the change of the first special symbol is executed. In the "time saving (special 1)" state, the effect state is "state 3" based on the change state of the normal symbol. "Or" state 5 "is set. Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the “time saving (special 1)” state will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game state is "time reduction (special 1)", a game for acquiring the reserved memory of the second special symbol is performed. In order to acquire the hold memory of the second special symbol, a right-handed game is performed, the ball is passed through the through gate 67 (the lottery of the normal symbol is executed), and the normal symbol hit (normal symbol hit) is won (win). It is necessary to open the electric accessory 640a with a probability of 1/20).

That is, when the game state is the "short time (special 1)" state, the player plays the game while expecting that the lottery result of the normal symbol will be a hit. Further, in the present embodiment, when the normal symbol whose fluctuation is started during the time saving state stops the fluctuation during the time saving state and the operation of the electric accessory 640a is started, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is performed. Since the opening pattern (long opening) is set to be advantageous to the player, the normal map fluctuation is started while the game state is not the time saving state (for example, the jackpot state), and the game is electrically operated during the time saving state. When the operation of the accessory 640a is started, or when the fluctuation of the normal figure is started during the time saving state and the operation of the electric accessory 640a is started after the time saving state ends (for example, the normal state), the electric combination A normal opening pattern (short opening) is executed instead of an opening pattern (long opening) in which the opening operation of the object 640a is advantageous to the player.

In the gaming machine configured in this way, if the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the third symbol corresponding to the normal symbol on the condition that the gaming state is shifted to the time saving state. , Even if the electric accessory 640a is short-opened despite the time saving state as described above, the main symbol will be displayed even for the fluctuation of the normal symbol, which gives the player a sense of distrust. There was a problem that it would end up.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the "time reduction (special 1)" state is set as the game state, the fluctuation state of the normal symbol is determined, the timing at which the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started, and the fluctuation of the normal symbol. When the timing at which is stopped (the timing at which the electric accessory 640a is opened when the winning is won) is both in the "time reduction (special 1)" state, the effect state is "state 5". "Is set, and in other cases," state 3 "is set.

Then, during the period when "state 5" is set as the effect state, the normal symbol is displayed as the main symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol are the subordinate symbols, and the second special symbol is displayed as the main reserved symbol. The pending symbol of is displayed (see FIG. 16 (a)). In this way, in the "time saving (special 1)" state in which the fluctuation (lottery) of the first special symbol is executed for a long period of time (150 seconds), the symbol corresponding to the main symbol is switched from the first special symbol to the normal symbol. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize the lottery result of the normal symbol and notify the content of the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, during the period when "state 3" is set as the effect state, the main symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol are pseudo symbols that do not correspond to any of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol. , The third symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is displayed so as to be a secondary symbol, and the reserved symbol of the second special symbol is displayed as the main reserved symbol (see FIG. 16A). With this configuration, the content of the game can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in the state where the second special symbol is fluctuating, "state 4" is set as the effect state regardless of the gaming state (regardless of the normal state or the time saving state). During the period in which "state 4" is set as this effect state, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed as the main symbol (see FIG. 17 (b)). Then, as shown in FIG. 14, when the "state 5" is set as the effect state and the lottery result of the changing first special symbol is a specific result (for example, a big hit), the first 1 When the remaining variation time of the special symbol is less than or equal to a predetermined period, "state 6" is set as the effect state.

During the period when "state 6" is set as this effect state, the first special symbol is drawn from the variable display mode in which the third symbol corresponding to the normal symbol executed in "state 5" is the main symbol. The pseudo symbol based on the result is displayed in a variable manner as the main symbol. By doing so, it is possible to secure a period for suggesting the lottery result of the first special symbol that has won the jackpot to the player. Therefore, from the state in which "state 5" is set and the variable display mode with the third symbol corresponding to the normal symbol as the main symbol is displayed, the jackpot game of the first special symbol is suddenly started, and the game It is possible to suppress the problem that a person is confused.

In the present embodiment, the timing at which the effect state is changed from the “state 5” to the “state 6” is the timing at which the fluctuation of the normal symbol is executed. As a result, the transition of the production state can be performed without discomfort.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game state is the normal state and the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit, the specific effect for the small hit is executed (see FIG. 22). When this game state is the normal state and the small hit game based on the first special symbol is executed, "state 2" is set as the effect state.

During the period when "state 2" is set as this effect state, the pseudo symbol that does not correspond to any of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol is variablely displayed as the main symbol in the specific effect for small hits. Will be done. The pseudo symbol that is variablely displayed in this case is a pseudo symbol that is variablely displayed based on the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650 during the small hit game. That is, the timing at which this pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop display mode (for example, doublet) is displayed before a predetermined period of the timing when the second variable winning device 650 is opened, that is, the predetermined stop display mode is displayed. The timing is set so that the ball fired after being doublet can win the second variable winning device 650, and the player is made to think that the second variable winning device 650 has been opened based on the fact that the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed. Will be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the small hit game in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened, the small hit game which is advantageous to the player (the ball easily passes through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3)) is disadvantageous. It has a small hit game that becomes, and the type of the stop display mode of the pseudo symbol that is variablely displayed during the small hit game is set according to the type of the small hit game that is being executed. For example, as a stop display mode of the pseudo symbol corresponding to the timing when the second variable winning device 650 is opened at the timing when the ball can pass through the specific area, a specific stop display mode (for example, a specific number (7) doublet). Eyes) are displayed as stopped. With this configuration, the player can grasp the type of the small hit game and the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650 by the variable display of the pseudo symbol executed during the small hit game. You can entertain the small hit game.

Next, the display screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 23. In the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14, according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 and the fluctuation status and the holding status of each symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol). Therefore, display control for different symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the main symbol displayed in the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is executed. With this configuration, the game is played in a game machine designed so that the notable symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery) differs depending on the game state. It is possible to easily notify the player whether or not the game result is advantageous to the player simply by having the person grasp the display result of the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player can be notified. It is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game machine.

FIG. 15A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the time when the game state is the time saving state and the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is started. is there. In the present embodiment, since the right-handed game is advantageous to the player during the time saving state, the guide for guiding the game method in the guide display area Dm4 formed on the upper left side of the first display area Dm. The characters "right-handed" are displayed as a display. In the central portion of the first display area Dm, the normal symbol main symbol Dmc having the third symbol corresponding to the normal symbol as the main symbol is displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the normal symbol. Further, on the left side of the first display area Dm, a main reserved symbol display area Dm5 for displaying the number of reserved symbols of the second special symbol as the main reserved symbol is formed. In the state shown in FIG. 15A, the number of reserved storages of the second special symbol is “0”.

The second display area Dn1 formed on the upper right side of the first display area Dm has a third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, and the second display area Dn2 has a third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. However, in the third display area Dn3, the third symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is displayed as a slave symbol, respectively, and it is shown that the corresponding symbol is changing in the second display area Dn1 and the second display area Dn3. Therefore, the third symbol (slave symbol) is displayed in a variable manner, and in the second display area Dn2, the third symbol (slave symbol) for indicating that the corresponding symbol is not changed is stopped and displayed.

Regarding the display mode of the secondary symbols displayed in the second display areas Dn1 to Dn3, the display mode corresponding to whether or not the corresponding symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) are changing. Anything is fine. Further, as a display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol, it is sufficient if it can be grasped that it does not change (stopped), and as shown in the second display area Dn2 of FIG. 15 (a), "-". It may be a display mode in which "" is stopped and displayed, or a display mode in which the stop display mode of the previous variation display is stopped and displayed as it is.

Then, in the second display area Dn4, the number "3" is displayed as a display mode for indicating that the number of reserved balls (number of reserved balls) of the first special symbol is 3, and in the second display area Dn5. , The number "0" is displayed as a display mode to indicate that the number of reserved balls (number of reserved balls) of the second special symbol is 0 (a state in which the reserved memory has not been acquired), and the second display In the area Dn6, the number "4" is displayed as a display mode for indicating that the number of reserved balls (number of reserved balls) of the normal symbol is four.

As a display mode for showing the reserved storage number (number of reserved balls) of each symbol displayed in the second display areas Dn4 to Dn6, the reserved storage number of each symbol is specifically shown as in the present embodiment. A display mode in which the value is indicated by a number may be used, or a display mode in which only the presence / absence of hold storage of each symbol is shown (for example, "○" when there is hold memory, "-" when there is no hold memory). You may use it. In this case, the number of reserved memories may be suggested by changing the color of the display mode of "○" indicating that there is reserved memory. In addition, a display mode that abstractly suggests the number of reserved memories may be used.

In the state shown in FIG. 15A, since the first special symbol has executed the fluctuation of the fluctuation time of 150 seconds and the second special symbol has not changed, the second display area Dn1 is the first. The slave symbol corresponding to the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and "-" indicating that the slave symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner is displayed in the second display area Dn2.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds formed below the first display area Dm, "150 seconds" is displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1 as a time display for indicating the remaining period of the time saving state, and the first sub-display area Ds1 is displayed. In the second sub-display area Ds2 on the left side of the display area Ds1, "countdown !!" is displayed as a guidance display for notifying the player that the remaining period of the time saving state is being subtracted. In the present embodiment, as the remaining period displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1, the remaining period of the fluctuation period (150 seconds) of the special figure 1 in the time saving state is calculated, and the calculated value is displayed. Therefore, the accurate period until the end of the time saving state can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player can play the game with peace of mind until the period elapses. However, a different value may be displayed as the remaining period display to be displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1, for example, a value with the remaining period of the variable period (150 seconds) of the special figure 1 in the time saving state as the upper limit. May be set randomly and the value may be displayed so as to be subtracted.

In this case, by the time the displayed value becomes 0, the difference between the value indicating the remaining fluctuation period in Special Figure 1 and the randomly set value is added and displayed, or the displayed value is "???". It is good to change the display to. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp how long the time saving state will continue, and it is possible to make the player always play the game with excitement.

FIG. 15 (b) shows a time when the game state is a time-saving state and 40 seconds have elapsed (from the state shown in FIG. 15 (a)) after the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is started. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81 in the above. As shown in FIG. 15B, the main symbol Dmc of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of notifying that the winner is won in the lottery of the normal symbol (display mode of "555"), and the first display area Dm. On the lower right side of the above, the electric accessory 640a is long-opened by winning the normal symbol, and a guidance display for notifying that the ball can enter the second entrance 640 is displayed.

Further, "110 seconds" is displayed as the remaining period of the time saving state in the first sub-display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, and the ball is inserted into the second entry port 640 in the second sub-display area Ds2. A "charge time" indicating that the electric accessory 640a is in an easy state (a state in which the electric accessory 640a is operated for a long time) is displayed. Then, in the second display area Ds3, a stop display mode (“○○”) for indicating that the normal symbol has been won is displayed.

In this way, while the game state is in the time-saving state and the variation of the special figure 1 is being executed, the lottery result of the normal symbol (general diagram) becomes the symbol that the player should pay attention to most. The lottery result of the general drawing is displayed using the symbol Dmc. Therefore, the display can be easily understood by the player.

In this embodiment, the display position and display mode of each main symbol (special figure 1 main symbol, special figure 2 main symbol, doublet main symbol, pseudo main symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm are displayed. Mainly because the stop display mode for showing the same lottery result (for example, winning) in which the lottery result of the symbol is advantageous to the player is also the same stop display mode (for example, doublet). Even if the target symbol of the symbol is changed according to the game state, it is configured so that the player can execute the effect display (effect variable display) without a sense of discomfort, but other than that. As the configuration of, the display position and the display mode may be different for each main symbol, or if the stop display mode for showing a specific lottery result (for example, winning) in which the lottery result of the symbol is advantageous to the player is different. You may let it.

FIG. 16A is a diagram showing a state in which the game state is a time-saving state and the ball enters the second ball entry port 640 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1). As shown in FIG. 16A, when a ball enters the second entry port 640, it is displayed in the upper center of the first display area Dm to indicate that the ball has entered the second entry port 640. The text "Charge completed" is displayed. Then, in the main reserved symbol display area Dm5, a display mode (black circle in the figure) indicating that the number of reserved symbols of the second special symbol has been set to "1" is displayed. In this state, in the second display area Dn5, the number "1" is displayed as a display mode indicating that the number of reserved storages of the second special symbol is one.

In the present embodiment, one ball is inserted in the second entrance 640 as a closing condition of the electric accessory 640a when the electric accessory 640a is in the long open state by winning the hit of the normal symbol during the short time. It is set that 11 seconds (total opening time 6 seconds) have passed since the operation of the ball or the electric accessory 640a was started. In this figure, one ball enters the second entry port 640. Since the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is completed and the next normal symbol variation state is being executed, the normal symbol main symbol Dmc is variablely displayed in the central portion of the first display area Dm. Further, "100 seconds" is displayed as the remaining period of the time saving state in the first sub-display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, when one reserved memory of the second special symbol is acquired, after the end of the time saving state (after the fluctuation of the first special symbol being changed is stopped), the first 2 The variable display of special symbols is started, and it is designed so that it is possible to win a symbol hit or a V winning hit with a high probability. Further, since the time saving state is always given after the jackpot game executed based on the lottery of the second special symbol, the chance to acquire the reserved memory of the second special symbol will come again. In addition, when a plurality of reserved memories of the second special symbol are acquired in one time saving state (during the change of the first special symbol), the jackpot game corresponding to the acquired number is executed. Has been done. Therefore, by displaying the "holding memory of the second special symbol" most expected by the player in the time saving state as the main holding symbol on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. it can.

In the present embodiment, as the display mode of the main reserved symbol, a maximum of four "black circles" can be displayed corresponding to the number of reserved symbols, but other configurations may be used, for example. In order to effectively notify whether or not the consecutive villa mode is continued (whether or not the second special symbol is reserved and stored), the display mode of the main reserved symbol corresponding to the first reserved memory of the second special symbol is displayed as another main reserved symbol. It may be different from the display mode of the design. In this case, the main reserved symbol is emphasized more than the other main reserved symbols by making the main reserved symbol different in size, color, shape, and pattern so that the main reserved symbol corresponding to the first reserved symbol of the second special symbol is emphasized. Or, only the main reserved symbol corresponding to the first reserved symbol of the second special symbol may be displayed at a position different from that of the other main reserved symbols. Further, instead of changing the display mode of the main reserved symbol, the mode (display mode of the background image) on the display area side where the main reserved symbol is displayed may be different. Further, only when the first reserved memory of the second special symbol is acquired, the voice output means or the light emitting means may be used to notify the fact.

FIG. 16B is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the game state is a time saving state and the fluctuation period of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 1 second remaining. In this state, the pseudo effect symbol whose main symbol does not correspond to the display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol is displayed as a pseudo main symbol Dmb in the center of the first display area Dm. This pseudo main symbol Dmb is temporarily stopped and displayed in a swung state until the period when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped (until the remaining period display of the first sub display area Ds1 becomes "0 seconds"). ..

In this pseudo effect symbol, the game state is in the time saving state, and the fluctuation period exceeds the remaining time saving period. At the timing when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started (the timing when "state 3" is set as the effect state). It is what is displayed. With this configuration, when the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the normal symbol whose fluctuation period exceeds the remaining time shortening period is displayed as the normal symbol main symbol Dmc, even if the normal symbol main symbol Dmc is displayed, the normal symbol Dmc wins. Even if the stop display is performed in the display mode indicating, the problem that the electric accessory 640a is short-opened and the player feels distrust of the effect can be suppressed.

In addition, the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the normal symbol whose fluctuation period is longer than the remaining time reduction period is displayed as the normal symbol main symbol Dmc, and the display of the normal symbol main symbol Dmc is interrupted at the timing when the time reduction state ends ( It is possible to switch to another main symbol display), but if the display of the main symbol used to make the player gaze at the displayed content is changed in the middle, it will give the player a great sense of discomfort. There's a problem. By using the above-described configuration, such a problem can be solved.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the display mode of the pseudo effect symbol, the display mode showing the lottery result of the first special symbol is displayed, so that the pseudo effect symbol is displayed at the timing when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped. The lottery result of the first special symbol can be smoothly displayed only by changing the rocking state (temporary stop state) to the completely stopped stop state (see FIG. 17A). In addition, when the temporarily stopped main symbol (pseudo main symbol Dmb) is temporarily stopped in a display mode indicating a hit, the lottery result of the first special symbol is a win, so that the player is surely given a privilege. This can suppress the problem of giving the player a sense of distrust in the display mode (display result) of the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

It should be noted that a configuration other than the configuration for displaying the pseudo-effect symbol during the period for displaying the pseudo-effect symbol described in the present embodiment as the main symbol (during the period when "state 3" is set as the effect state) may be used. For example, during that period, none of the main symbols may be displayed, and an effect of inciting the end of the time saving state may be executed. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the normal symbol main symbol Dmc corresponding to the normal symbol for which the fluctuation period longer than the remaining time shortening period is set from being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player feels distrust.

In the state shown in FIG. 16B, since the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed while the pseudo main symbol is temporarily stopped, the lottery result of the normal symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn3. Is stopped and displayed in a display mode (“○ ×”) indicating that is off. In this way, the fluctuation stop timing of the normal symbol is within a predetermined period (for example, within 2 seconds) from the fluctuation stop timing of the special figure 1 (end timing of the time saving state), and the lottery result of the normal symbol is out of order. Even in the case of, the effect display using the pseudo main symbol Dmb is executed.

In FIG. 16B, since the display mode indicating that the number of reserved storages of the second special symbol is 2 is displayed in the main reserved symbol display area Dm5, the second special symbol is displayed after the time saving state is completed. Will start to fluctuate. In order to inform the player to that effect, "Soon charge release time !!" is displayed above the first display area Dm. This "charge release time" indicates the period during which the jackpot corresponding to the number of the second special symbols stored on hold is executed.

Then, when the charge release time is entered, as shown in FIG. 17A, "charge release time entry" is displayed in the information of the first display area Dm, and the special figure 1 main symbol Dma is stopped and displayed. A normal symbol whose fluctuation is displayed at this timing (time reduction end timing), that is, a normal symbol in which the fluctuation in the time reduction state is started and the stop timing of the fluctuation is after the time reduction end is the second display area as a secondary symbol. Since it is displayed on Dn3, it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned problem when the player is shown the variable display of the main symbol Dmc.

Next, when the charge release time is started, as shown in FIG. 17B, the special figure 2 main symbol Dmd is variably displayed in the first display area Dm. In this case, since the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started, the display mode indicating the number of reserved symbols (number of reserved symbols) of the special symbol 2 displayed in the main reserved symbol display area Dm5 is updated, and the remaining one is reserved. A display mode indicating the number of memories is displayed. Further, in the second display area Dn, the secondary symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 is displayed in the second display area Dn1 in the mode of being stopped and displayed as the main symbol in FIG. 17 (a), and in the second display area Dn2. The special figure 2 fluctuation is displayed, and the normal figure fluctuation is displayed as a secondary symbol in the second display area Dn3.

In this embodiment, when the change of the special figure 2 is executed, it is designed so that it is easy to win either the big hit or the small hit (100% win), and the period during which the special figure 2 is changing is , It is not necessary to make the player pay close attention to the fluctuation of the normal map. Therefore, while the special figure 2 is fluctuating, by displaying the special figure 2 main symbol Dmd as the main symbol, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set to 2 seconds in both the normal state and the time saving state. This period of 2 seconds is shorter than the shortest period set as the fluctuation time of a normal symbol. As a result, during the period in which the special figure 2 is fluctuating, it is suppressed that the normal figure fluctuation is executed and stopped without straddling a plurality of gaming states. As a result, it is possible to prevent an extra effect from being generated during the fluctuation of the special figure 2. In addition, with this configuration, when the special figure 2 fluctuates during the time saving state, the hit fluctuation of the normal figure is executed and stopped during the special figure 2 fluctuation period (during the time saving). It is possible to prevent the electric accessory 640a from opening and the special figure 2 hold from increasing during the special figure 2 fluctuation period (during the time reduction), and the player is provided with an excessive amount of balls. Can be suppressed.

It should be noted that the fluctuation period of the normal symbol and the fluctuation period of the special figure 2 can be selected from a plurality of values, and only when the selected fluctuation period satisfies the predetermined conditions, during the fluctuation period of the special figure 2 (time reduction). ), The electric accessory 640a may be configured to be openable. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with unexpectedness, and there is an effect that the game can be enthusiastically performed.

Then, when the special figure 2 fluctuation shown in FIG. 17 (b) wins a small hit and is stopped and displayed, the display screen shown in FIG. 18 (a) is displayed. That is, in the first display area Dm, the special figure 2 main symbol Dmd is stopped and displayed in a display mode (“555”) indicating a small hit, and is opened in the lower right area of the first display area Dm during the small hit game. A guidance display for guiding the player to the location of the second variable winning device 650 is displayed. Then, "Aim for V" is displayed in the second sub-display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds.

Then, during the small hit game shown in FIG. 18A, when the ball passes through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) in the second variable winning device 650 and the big hit game is started, FIG. 18B ) Is displayed. In this jackpot effect screen, the main symbol is not displayed in the main display area Dm, and the third symbol corresponding to each symbol (special 1, special 2, normal symbol) is displayed in the second display area Dm as a secondary symbol. Is displayed. As a result, the player can enjoy the jackpot production without worrying about the variable display of each of the running symbols (special 1, special 2, and normal).

Furthermore, in the jackpot production, "Charge Bonus 1st time" is displayed in the main display area Dm as the number of consecutive villas indicating the number of jackpots executed during the consecutive villa mode, and below that, the currently executed jackpot "ROUND1" is displayed as a round number display indicating the number of rounds. As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of rounds (2, 5, 7, 10, 15 rounds) are set in the jackpot game. Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot can be executed after the end of the time saving state by the number of holdings of the special figure 2 held and stored during the special figure 1 fluctuation (150 second fluctuation) during the time saving state.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment configured in this way, the display regarding a plurality of jackpots executed during the consecutive villa state is totaled as one period from the start to the end of the consecutive villa state. It is configured to be able to display the cumulative display of the period of the villa and the cumulative display of the specific period that aggregates only the jackpot games based on the jackpot rights acquired by one special figure 1 change (that is, the number of special figure 2 reserved). In the example diagram shown in FIG. 18A, the number of rounds displayed in the lower right side of the first display area Dm 6 corresponds to the number of rounds for the jackpot game within the specific period described above. The number display mode is displayed.

In this round number display area Dm6, it is determined how many rounds of jackpot games are executed in total based on the reserved memory of special figure 2 acquired by one change of special figure 1, and the determination result is obtained. A display mode suggesting is displayed. Specifically, based on the completion of the special figure 1 fluctuation (150 second fluctuation) during the time saving game, the prize information corresponding to the special figure 2 hold (that is, stored in the special figure prize information storage area 223a described later). The winning information regarding the special figure 2) is extracted, and the number of feasible jackpots and the number of rounds are determined. Then, the display mode including at least the determination result is displayed in the round number display area Dm6.

The round number display mode displayed in the round number display area Dm6 is the execution confirmed round number display mode (in FIG. 18B, indicated by a solid circle) indicating the number of rounds that are confirmed to be executed. , The running round display mode (indicated by a black circle in FIG. 18B) indicating the currently running round, and the jackpot right acquired within a specific period (special figure 1 fluctuation (150-second fluctuation) during the time-saving game). It is composed of a specific period total number of rounds suggestion display mode (indicated by a dotted circle in FIG. 18B) that suggests the total number of rounds in the jackpot game period that can be executed in.

By executing the jackpot effect configured in this way, the player can perform the special figure 2 reserved ball number displayed in the main reserved symbol display area Dm5 and the total number of rounds for a specific period displayed in the round number display area Dm6. You can enjoy the jackpot game while predicting the type (number of rounds) of the jackpot game to be executed in the future while looking at the number suggestion display mode.

Further, as described above, since the execution confirmed round number display mode and the executing round display mode are displayed in the round number display area Dm6, the round of the jackpot game currently being executed can be performed within a specific period. Of the total number of rounds that may be executed (the number of rounds displayed as the total number of rounds in a specific period) or the number of rounds that are confirmed to be executed (the number of confirmed rounds to be executed) The player can easily grasp where it is. Therefore, it is possible to easily predict the number of remaining rounds to be executed within a specific period.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18B, "the first charge bonus" is displayed as the number of consecutive villas indicating the number of jackpots executed during the consecutive villa mode. The number of consecutive villas is displayed, and the number of jackpots executed based on the jackpot right acquired during the above-mentioned specific period (special figure 1 fluctuation (150 seconds fluctuation) during the time-saving game (number of consecutive villas within the specific period) is displayed. Alternatively, both the display of the number of consecutive villas and the display of the number of consecutive villas within a specific period may be displayed. Further, the number of times the above-mentioned specific period is started in the consecutive villa mode ( A means for calculating the number of times the special figure 1 fluctuation (150-second fluctuation) is executed during the time-saving game is provided, and the total number of jackpots in the consecutive villa mode, the number of times of entering a specific period, and the number of times of entering a specific period are executed within one specific period. It may be configured to display the number of jackpots to be played. By configuring in this way, not only the display mode during the jackpot game can be enjoyed, but also the game status of the pachinko machine 10 can be grasped and future games can be played. Further, after calculating the above-mentioned number of times, the average number of jackpots within a specific period may be displayed.

By displaying the average number of jackpots within a specific period, if the average number of jackpots within a specific period is low, the lottery result of the normal symbol is biased to the outside, or the through condition that the lottery of the normal symbol is executed. It can be used as a reference for future games while analyzing the probable cause as to whether the number of balls passing through the gate 67 was small.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode corresponding to the number of rounds (1 round, 1 display mode) is displayed as the display mode displayed in the round number display area Dm6, but the number of rounds is displayed. The display mode displayed in the area Dm6 is not limited to this, and any display mode in which the player can predict the number of rounds may be used. For example, the size and color of the display mode may be changed according to a predetermined rule according to the number of rounds.

Further, in the present embodiment, "ROUND1" is displayed as a round number display indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot currently being executed, but this round number display may also display the number of rounds for one jackpot game. Instead, the number of rounds may be added and displayed for the jackpot games executed within a specific period. As a result, it is possible to easily grasp and store the game result in the consecutive villa mode. In the second sub-display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds, "5, 10, 20" indicating the number of times to be executed in a plurality of jackpot games executed within a specific period is displayed.

When the second jackpot game is started due to the time saving variation (special figure 2 variation) executed after the jackpot game shown in FIG. 18B is completed, the second jackpot game shown in FIG. 19A is started. The display screen inside is displayed. As shown in FIG. 19A, in the state where the second jackpot game is started, the main reserved symbol display area Dm5 displays a display mode indicating that the remaining number of reserved symbols is “0”. , In the main display area Dm, "charge bonus second time" is displayed as a display of the number of consecutive villas to indicate that this big hit is the second big hit in the consecutive villa mode. Then, in the round number display area Dm6, the execution confirmed round number display mode for a total of 20 rounds is displayed. That is, in FIG. 18B, the number of rounds displayed as the total number of rounds suggestion display mode for a specific period is changed to the execution confirmed number of rounds display mode by executing the current jackpot game (second time). ing. In this way, by changing the display mode of suggesting the total number of rounds for a specific period to the display mode of the number of confirmed rounds, the player can safely execute the jackpot game.

In the present embodiment, in order to notify the number of rounds of the current jackpot game when the jackpot game is started, among the number of rounds displayed as the suggestion display mode of the total number of rounds for a specific period, the current jackpot The configuration is such that the number corresponding to the number of rounds of the game is changed to the execution confirmed round number display mode, but other configurations may be used. For example, at the timing when the jackpot game is started, the execution confirmed round number is displayed. The mode is displayed as it is, and when a predetermined condition (for example, execution of a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 during the jackpot game or the jackpot game reaches the third round) is satisfied during the jackpot game, the total for a specific period is totaled. The round number suggestion display mode may be changed to the execution confirmed round number display mode. As a result, in order to grasp the number of confirmed rounds to be executed even during the jackpot game, it is possible to make the player interested in the production.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which all the specific period total number of rounds suggestion display modes are changed to the execution confirmed round number display mode, but other configurations may be used, for example, the specific period total rounds suggestion display mode. Only a part of the above may be changed to the execution confirmed round number display mode, or the total number of rounds suggestion display mode for a specific period may be changed to the execution confirmed round number display mode at a plurality of timings during the jackpot game. You may do it. As a result, the jackpot game can be executed with a sense of expectation at all times.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 19 (b) to 20 (b), the remaining period (remaining fluctuation period of special figure 1) in the time saving state (time saving state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed) is a predetermined condition ( The effect display (battle effect) that is executed when the remaining 10 seconds) is satisfied will be described. This effect display (battle effect) is an effect for notifying the player that the consecutive villa mode will end if there is no hold memory of the special figure 2 at the end of the time saving state. As described above, this battle effect is executed when the remaining period of the time saving state is 10 seconds or less and the special figure 2 hold is "0". Then, when a ball enters the second entrance 640 during this battle production and the hold memory of Special Figure 2 occurs, a battle victory production is executed to indicate that the consecutive villa mode is continued. (See FIG. 20 (a)) If the ball does not enter the second entrance 640 during this battle effect, a battle defeat effect is executed to indicate that the consecutive villa mode is continued (see FIG. 20 (a)). See FIG. 20 (b)). In the present embodiment, when the battle effect is executed, the effect that finally loses the battle is set. This is because the period of the battle production is set to the period (10 seconds) in which the fluctuation of the normal figure can be changed 3 or 4 times, and the probability that the ball will enter the second entrance 640 during the battle production is determined. This is because it is lower than the probability that the ball does not enter the second entrance 640 during the battle production. That is, the processing load can be reduced because the control for changing the effect content needs to be executed only when a low-probability event occurs.

In the present embodiment, the effect result of the battle effect is different depending on whether or not the special figure 2 is held, but other elements may be included. For example, when the lottery result of the special figure 1 fluctuating during the time saving is a big hit, the battle victory effect may be executed at the timing when the lottery result of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed. As a result, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect to the player who predicts the outcome of the battle effect based only on the content (presence or absence of storage) of the main reserved symbol display area Dm5.

In the present embodiment, the display mode of the main reserved symbol display area Dm5 is updated at the timing when the reserved memory of the special figure 2 occurs, but as another configuration, for example, during the battle production, the special figure 2 Even if the hold storage occurs, the display mode of the main hold symbol display area Dm5 may not be updated, or the main hold symbol display area Dm5 may not be displayed when the battle effect is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know that the ball has entered the second entrance 640 while the battle effect is being executed, and the effect of the battle effect is enhanced. Can be done.

In addition, based on the winning information of the normal symbol that is stored on hold, it is possible to determine whether the normal symbol is correct or not, and change the content of the battle effect (opposite, order of attack, type of attack, etc.) based on the determination result. It is good to configure in. As a result, the player can pay attention to the content of the battle effect. Further, a privilege effect that is executed only when a plurality of special figure 2 holds are acquired during the battle effect may be provided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21A, the content of the effect to be executed when the special figure 2 hold is acquired up to the upper limit during the special figure 1 time reduction fluctuation will be described. As shown in FIG. 21 (a), when the special figure 2 hold is acquired up to the upper limit, it is shown that the special figure 2 hold is stored up to the upper limit (4 pieces) in the main hold symbol display area Dm5. The main reserved symbol is displayed in the display mode (display mode in which the black circles in the figure are four). Then, in the central portion of the first display area Dm, a message for congratulating that the special figure 2 hold has reached the upper limit is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 21B, in the first display area Dm, a privilege effect (a lively effect using characters) that has nothing to do with the lottery result of each symbol is executed.

Then, in the first sub-display area Ds1, the characters "??" that hide the remaining period of the short period of time are displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp which game state is in the period during which the above-mentioned privilege effect is executed.

Here, during the special figure 1 time reduction fluctuation, the lottery of the normal symbol is repeated, and by winning the hit of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a is opened and the ball is inserted into the second entrance 640. Then, the game of acquiring the hold memory of the second special symbol is executed. While such a game is being executed, the player pays the most attention to the lottery result of the normal symbol, so that the normal symbol main symbol Dmc is displayed as the main symbol of the third symbol display device 81 ( When the special figure 2 hold as shown in FIGS. 15 (b) and 21 (a) is stored up to the upper limit (4 pieces), the special figure 2 hold cannot be stored any more. , The player no longer pays close attention to whether or not the normal symbol is won. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 21A, the third symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn3 as the slave symbol.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the display of the third symbol corresponding to the symbol that the player does not gaze at as the main symbol. Further, it is possible to suppress a problem when the main symbol Dmc of the normal figure is displayed in the state of FIG. 21A and the stop display is performed in the display mode indicating a hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the effect content when the first special symbol (special figure 1) executed in the normal state of the game is won as a small hit will be described. FIG. 22A is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen immediately after the small hit game is started, and FIG. 22B is a specific timing (second variable winning device 650) during the small hit game. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen at the opening timing of.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the small hit game based on the lottery result of the special figure 1 is executed in the normal state, the pseudo main symbol Dmb is variablely displayed in the first display area Dm. This pseudo main symbol Dmb is variablely displayed so as to suggest the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650 during the small hit game, and the sub-display area Ds is used to explain the game content during the small hit game. If the symbols (pseudo main symbol Dmb) are aligned, the characters "chance" are displayed (see FIG. 22 (a)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (b), when the pseudo main symbol Dmb is stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop display mode (“444” in FIG. 22 (b)), it is displayed on the lower right side of the first display area Dm. A guidance display mode for guiding the game aiming at the second variable winning device 650 is displayed to the player, and the characters "Aim for V" for explaining the content of the game are displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the small hit game based on the special figure 1 is executed in the normal state, the pseudo main symbol Dmb that is variablely displayed based on the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650 is the first. 1 Displayed in the display area Dm. As a result, it is possible to make it seem that the opening operation of the second variable winning device 650, which is executed a plurality of times during the small hit game, is executed based on the variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb.

Further, in the state where the small hit game based on the special figure 1 is executed in the normal state, the main reserved symbol for displaying the number of reserved symbols emphasized to the player is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is configured. As a result, the holding symbol display indicating the number of reserved symbols of each symbol described above is not changed based on the variable display of the pseudo main symbol having nothing to do with each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, normal figure). It can be made difficult for the player to notice. As another configuration, a pseudo-holding symbol display (pseudo-holding main symbol) that is variable based on the variation display of the pseudo-main symbol Dmb may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, the pseudo main symbol Dmb also executes a variable display during the small hit game, in which the second variable winning device 650 is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode (for example, a loose stitch), which is different from the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650. Will be done. As a result, even when the opening timing interval of the second variable winning device 650 is wide, the pseudo main symbol Dmb can be continuously displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the pseudo main symbol Dmb that is stopped and displayed based on the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650, the stop display mode is set so that the opening timing of the corresponding second variable winning device 650 is advantageous to the player. It is configured to be different depending on the timing (opening timing at which the ball can pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3)). For example, the stop of the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the opening timing advantageous to the player. As a display mode, a display mode in which a specific same number is stopped is set, for example, "777". As a result, the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650 and the degree of advantage of the opening timing can be grasped by the variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb executed during the small hit game. You can be interested in the contents of the production display.

Next, the error display displayed on the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 23 (a). FIG. 23A is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen when the right-handed game is performed in the normal state where the left-handed game is executed. As shown in FIG. 23A, when it is determined that the right-handed game has been performed in the normal state in which the left-handed game is executed, the main symbol displayed in the first display area Dm is covered. The notification display area Dm7 is formed as described above, and the characters "Please return to left-handed" are displayed. As a result, the player can be made to correct the game content.

In the present embodiment, when the error display in FIG. 23A detects that the right-handed game has been executed (the ball has passed through the through gate 67) during the normal state in which the left-handed game is executed. However, among the states in which the normal state in which the left-handed game is executed is set as the game state, the ball passes through the through gate 67 immediately after the transition from the time saving state to the normal state. It is advisable to prevent the error display from being executed even if it is detected. Specifically, just before the transition from the time saving state to the normal state (just before the end of the time saving state), the fluctuation period of the started normal symbol and the electric power executed when the fluctuation (lottery) result is a hit. During the operation period of the accessory 640a or a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after the time saving state ends, it is preferable to set as a grace period during which the error display is not executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the error display from being executed even if the ball launched into the game area immediately before the end of the time saving state passes through the through gate 67 after the end of the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player who has been actively playing the game until immediately before the end of the time saving state from losing his or her willingness to play.

In the case of using such a configuration, if a ball enters the second entrance 640 during the above-mentioned grace period, it is preferable to execute a privilege effect different from the usual one, for example. , It is advisable to perform a revival effect indicating that the player's advantageous state (ream villa mode) has been revived. As a result, the player can be enthusiastically played until the end.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23B, the display contents displayed during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a in the time saving state will be described. FIG. 23B is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen displayed during the electric accessory opening operation (during long opening) in the time saving state. In the present embodiment, by continuously performing the right-handed game during the time saving state, if the electric accessory 640a is open for a long time, the ball can be immediately entered into the second entrance 640. The game board 13 is configured in. Further, the electric accessory 640a that is opened for a long time is opened for 3 seconds as the first opening period, then closed for 5 seconds, and then the opening period for 3 seconds (second opening period) is set again.

The display screen shown in FIG. 23B is displayed when the ball does not enter the second entry port 640 during the first opening period during the opening operation (long opening) of the electric accessory 640a. Is to be done. That is, if the right-handed game is normally performed, the first ball is reliably inserted into the second entrance 640 during the first opening period, even though the configuration of the game board 13 is used. If the ball does not enter the second entrance 640 during the opening period, it is possible that the normal right-handed game has not been executed. Therefore, a display for prompting the right-handed ball is displayed in the notification display area Dm7. Is displayed.

In the present embodiment, even if the right-handed game is started after seeing the content displayed in the notification display area Dm7, each period is such that the ball can be entered into the second entrance 640 during the second opening period. Is set. Specifically, it is designed so that the period from when the ball is launched in a right-handed game until the ball reaches the second entrance 640 (electric accessory 640a) is about 2 seconds. The closing period provided between the first opening period (3 seconds) and the second opening period (3 seconds) is set to be 5 seconds. Therefore, it is possible to put the ball into the second ball entry port 640 by performing the right-handed game within 3 seconds after the closing period is started.

In the present embodiment, the first opening period and the second opening period are set to the same number of seconds, and a means for measuring the elapsed period of the first opening period and a means for measuring the elapsed period of the second opening period are used. Although the standardization is attempted, for example, the second opening period may be set longer than the first opening period. As a result, based on the fact that the display for urging right-handed hitting is displayed in the notification display area Dm7, when the right-handed hitting game is performed, the ball can be more reliably entered into the second entrance 640. it can.

Further, in the present embodiment, the closing period is set to 5 seconds, but a longer closing time (for example, 30 seconds) may be set. In this case, as a condition for ending the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a, if the right-handed game is normally executed, the number of balls that can be entered into the second entrance 640 during the first opening period ( For example, one ball may be entered as an end condition. As a result, even if the closing period executed during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a (the closing period executed after the lapse of the first opening period) is lengthened, the player who normally plays the right-handed game Therefore, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a can be completed by the time the closing period is executed.

<About the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 24) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 24, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like use the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, drawing the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

For the jackpot lottery and the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot (and small hit) lottery and the jackpot type (big hit symbol) are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for selecting the stop type, the stop type counter C3 used for selecting the stop type, the small hit type counter C5 used for selecting the small hit type (small hit symbol), and the fluctuation pattern selection. The variable type counter CS1 and the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1 are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 53). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 is referred to as a first ball entry port 64 (left first ball entry port 64a, right first ball entry port 64b (hereinafter, when both are indicated, it is referred to as a first ball entry port 64). )) A special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a in which each counter value is stored and a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b in which each counter value is stored for winning the second entrance 640 are provided. There is. In the present embodiment, the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 are each provided with a maximum of four reserved balls, and a total of a maximum of eight reserved balls can be stored. Therefore, if the ball wins the first entry slot 64 during the period when the special symbol can be drawn, such as when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner or when the special symbol is not in the jackpot game, each counter value is changed to the special symbol. When the ball is stored in the 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the ball wins in the second entrance 640, each counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. After that, each counter value stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, and the first special symbol is variablely displayed (dynamic display). Various settings and control processes are executed. Similarly, each counter value stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Various settings and control processes are executed.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of reserved symbols (number of stored items) is set to 4 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the upper limit of the number of reserved symbols corresponding to each symbol is this. It is not limited to, and different values may be set, or only one special symbol may be reserved.

On the other hand, during the period when the lottery of the special symbol is impossible, such as during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the ball is at the first entrance 64 or When the second ball opening 640 is won, if the number of reserved balls for the winning ball opening (starting port) is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment), each counter value is acquired. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning ball opening. In addition, when the number of reserved balls for the winning ball opening is the upper limit value (4 pieces in this embodiment) or more, each counter value or the like is not acquired and the prize balls (5 pieces in this embodiment) are not acquired. Only the prize ball) is treated as an invalid ball paid out to the player.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is set to 4 for each of the 1st entry port 64 and the 2nd entry port 640, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is less than 4 (for example). It may be 3) or more than 4 (for example, 8). Further, a configuration in which an upper limit value is not provided may be used.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 24. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299), reaches the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 53).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the timing at which the ball wins the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is defined in the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot specified in 202a, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a hit in each game state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, the first random number table 202a is provided with a special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 used for the lottery of the first special symbol and a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 used for the lottery of the second special symbol. In the lottery of the first special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined to be a big hit. Further, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "1 to 3", and if it is "1 to 3", it is determined to be a small hit.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "1-299", and if it is "1-299", it is determined that it is a small hit.

Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol. For example, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of a big hit of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. As described above, there is one value of the first hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value "0" is stored in the first hit random number table 202a as described above. Since the total number of random numbers that are big hits is 1 while the total number of random numbers is 300, the probability of being a big hit of a special symbol is "1/300". Further, since the value of the first random number counter C1 which is a small hit in the first special symbol is three and the value of the first random number counter C1 which is a small hit in the second special symbol is 299, the first The probability of a small hit of a special symbol is "1/100", and the probability of a small hit of a second special symbol is "299/300".

Further, the value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit, the big hit type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 27A). The Rukoto. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG. 27 (a).

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the symbol is different from the symbol on which the reach is applied as the final stop symbol. Two stop (effect) patterns are selected: "out of reach" where the symbol stops (for example, in the range of 90 to 99) and "completely out of reach" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and when a ball enters the first entry port 64, the value is the value of the RAM 203. The special symbol 1 is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a. When the ball enters the second entry port 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a normal state and a time saving state, and the range of random value values set for each stop type that is out of order is changed according to the table. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed according to whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the time saving state, or the like.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines one variation pattern from the set variation pattern selection table. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter for determining the fluctuation time. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 53) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 29 and 30), which stores a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, is the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided inside.

A plurality of data tables for selecting a variation pattern are defined in the variation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 29 and 30). In this variation pattern table 202d, a plurality of variation pattern tables corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol are set, and the variation patterns corresponding to the game state and the winning / failing determination result are set for each. The table is set. Details of each variation pattern table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and the ball passes through either the left or right normal start port (through gate) 67. When it is detected, it is acquired and stored in the normal map execution area of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is defined in the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 26C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4. However, when it matches the value of the random number that is the hit specified in the second hit random number table 202c, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol (second symbol). For example, in this second hit random number table 202c, there are 12 random number values that are hit by ordinary symbols, and the range is "0 to 11". The total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 240, and the total number of random numbers that can be hit is 12, so the probability of hitting a normal symbol is "12/240 (1/20)). ".

Further, in the present embodiment, the normal state and the time saving state can be set as the game state, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol or the second when the normal symbol hits according to the game state. The opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the ball entry port 640 is different, and the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entry port 640 in the shorter time state than in the normal state. As a result, when the game state is the normal state, a game (left-handed game) aimed at the first ball entry port 64 (left first ball entry port 64a) is performed, and when the game state is the time saving state, the game is performed. , A game (right-handed game) aimed at the second entrance 640 can be performed.

In the normal state, when the ball passes through the through gate (normal entry port) 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for 4 seconds on the second symbol display device 83. To. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 11", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a is opened (short-opened) only for "0.1 seconds x 2 times". On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate (normal entry port) 67 in the time saving state, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for 3 seconds on the second symbol display device 83, and the acquired value of the random number counter C4 per second is obtained. If is in the range of "0 to 11", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). , The electric accessory 640a is opened (long open) only for "3 seconds x 2 times". In this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the normal electric accessory, and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed as long as the game playability is not impaired.

Although detailed description will be described later, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the value of the first random number counter C4 is acquired (the timing at which the lottery of ordinary symbols is executed) and the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 (The timing when the operation of the electric accessory 640a is set) is configured so that the electric accessory 640a is opened for a long time only when the time is shortened. For example, if the timing at which the value of the first random number counter C4 is acquired (the timing at which the lottery of ordinary symbols is executed) is in a time-saving state, the timing at which the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 ends. Even if (the timing when the operation of the electric accessory 640a is set) is in the normal state, the electric accessory 640a may be configured to be long-opened, or the value of the random number counter C4 per first is acquired. Even if the timing to be performed (the timing at which the lottery of the normal symbol is executed) is the normal state, the timing at which the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 ends (the timing at which the operation of the electric accessory 640a is set) is If the time is shortened, the electric accessory 640a may be configured to be opened for a long time.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see 53).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 24, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 53) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 52) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 51) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Next, the contents of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 30. FIG. 25A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the present embodiment. The ROM 202 is provided with at least a first hit random number table 202a, a first hit type selection table 202b, a second hit random number table 202c, a variation pattern table 202d, and a small hit type selection table 202e.

Next, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (c). As shown in FIG. 26A, the first random number table 202a includes a special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 used for the lottery of the first special symbol and a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 used for the lottery of the second special symbol. Is stipulated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 26 (b), the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is used for entering the ball into the first ball entry port 64 (left first ball entry port 64a, right first ball entry port 64b). Based on this, it is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a hit is set in the lottery of the first special symbol. In the lottery of the first special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "1 to 3", and if it is "1 to 3", it is determined to be a small hit. In addition, when it is determined that the value is "4 to 299", it is determined that the value is out of alignment.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a hit in the lottery of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second entry port 640. ) Is set in the table. In the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "1-299", and if it is "1-299", it is determined that it is a small hit.

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 26 (d)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 26 (d), regardless of the state of the game machine, when the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 0 to 11, it is considered as a normal symbol hit. It is judged.

If it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol) after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, and the electric accessory is displayed. The 640a is opened for a predetermined time.

Here, as described above in FIG. 2 and the like, the electric accessory 640a in the present embodiment operates in the front-rear direction of the game board 13 by the operation of a solenoid (one of the other solenoids 209z) (not shown). The electric accessory 640a acts to guide the ball to enter the second entry port 640 by advancing forward (opening operation). On the other hand, by retracting (closing) the ball backward, the ball is not guided to the second entry port 640 (does not enter).

The details will be described later, but in the case of the electric accessory 640a in the present embodiment, after the opening period of 3 seconds (first opening period) has elapsed, the closing period of 5 seconds has passed, and then the electric accessory 640a has been opened again for 3 seconds. When the opening operation (long opening) in which the period (second opening period) is set is executed and the time is not shortened (in the normal state), after the opening period of 0.1 seconds (first opening period) elapses, After the closing period of 0.1 seconds, the opening operation (short opening) in which the opening period of 0.1 seconds (second opening period) is set is executed again. As a result, it is possible to suppress a game in which a ball is attempted to enter the second entry port 640 even though the time is not shortened (in a normal state).

Further, the electric accessory 640a in the present embodiment is designed so that the end condition of the opening operation is satisfied when one ball enters the second entry port 640 and the opening operation is ended. As a result, it is possible to prevent a plurality of balls from entering the second entry port 640 by one opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. Further, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4, since the present embodiment has a configuration for restricting the balls flowing down the flow path that can enter the second entry port 640. Since it is possible to suppress a situation in which a plurality of balls enter the second entry port 640 at a time, a plurality of balls enter the second entry port 640 by one opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. It is possible to suppress the balling more.

Next, the details of the first type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 27 (a). 27 (a) to 27 (c) are schematic views schematically showing the contents of the first type selection table 202b.

In the first hit type selection table 202b, when the big hit of the first special symbol is won, or when the small hit of the first special symbol is won, the ball is in a specific area (V winning switch 650e3 (FIG. 5))) is passed, and the special symbol 1 jackpot selection table 202b1 for selecting the jackpot type and the jackpot of the second special symbol are won, or the small hit of the second special symbol is won and the result. It has a special symbol 2 jackpot selection table 202b2 for selecting a jackpot type when the ball passes through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3 (see FIG. 5)) during the small hit game (FIG. 27 (FIG. 5). a) See).

As shown in FIG. 27 (b), when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 79", the jackpot A (7R time saving jackpot) is selected at the time of the jackpot of the first special symbol, and "580". In the case of "~ 99", the jackpot D (16R time saving no jackpot) is selected. Further, at the time of the small hit of the first special symbol, the big hit type is selected corresponding to the small hit type described later. Specifically, when the small hit type is small hit A, big hit C (7R time saving with big hit) is selected, and when the small hit type is B, big hit D (2R time saving no big hit) is selected.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27 (c), at the time of the jackpot of the second special symbol, the jackpot E (15R time reduction available jackpot) regardless of the value of the first hit type counter C2 (when the value is "0 to 99"). ) Is selected. Further, at the time of the small hit of the second special symbol, the big hit type is selected corresponding to the small hit type described later. Specifically, when the small hit type is small hit C, the big hit F (5R time-saving big hit) is selected, when the small hit D, the big hit G (10R time-saving big hit) is selected, and when the small hit E is used. The jackpot E (15R time saving jackpot) is selected.

In the present embodiment, when "time saving big hit" is selected in each of the above-mentioned big hit types, the time saving state of "time saving number 1 time" is given after the big hit game is completed. However, the number of time reductions given after the end of the jackpot game is not limited to this, and two or more times may be set, and different number of time reduction states are selected based on the selected jackpot type. You may do so. Further, a different number of time saving states may be selected based on the selected jackpot type and the gaming state set at the time when the jackpot is won (the ball passes through a specific area), or "time saving" may be selected. A different number of time saving states may be selected based on the jackpot type selected at the time of winning the jackpot based on the number of times that "big hit" is continuously selected. With this configuration, in addition to the content of the jackpot game (number of rounds of the jackpot game, etc.), the privilege content (number of times in the time saving state) given after the end of the jackpot game can be different, and the game during the jackpot game. It is possible to enthusiastically play the game while expecting the person to be given what kind of privilege (time saving state) will be given after the jackpot game is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state is set by executing the variation of the special symbol for the preset number of time saving times, but the time saving ending condition different from the present embodiment is set. For example, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol may be measured, and different end conditions may be set for the fluctuation of each special symbol. Specifically, as the time saving end condition, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol is four times, or the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is one, and the time saving end condition is set, or the first special symbol and the first special symbol and the first. The total number of fluctuations with the two special symbols may be set to four, or the number of fluctuations with the second special symbol may be set to one as the time saving end condition.

In addition to that, every time the change of the special symbol is executed, a lottery for whether or not to end the time saving state may be executed, and the time saving state may be ended based on the lottery result, or the special symbol is predetermined. The time saving state may be terminated when the stop display is displayed with the symbol of. With this configuration, it is possible to set the timing at which the time saving state ends in a complicated manner, and the player during the time saving game is expected to continue the time saving state for a long time while playing the game. Can be done. In this case, it is preferable to configure the player to be able to notify at least a part of the period during which the time reduction does not end. As a result, it is possible for the player to grasp a part of the period during which the time reduction does not end, and there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind during that period.

Next, the contents of the small hit type selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 28. 28 (a) to 28 (c) are schematic views schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table 202e.

The small hit type selection table 202e is a special symbol 1 small hit selection table 202e1 for selecting a small hit type when the small hit of the first special symbol is won, and a small hit of the second special symbol. It has a special symbol 2 small hit selection table 202e2 for selecting a small hit type (see FIG. 28 (a)).

As shown in FIG. 28 (b), when the small hit of the first special symbol is won, the small hit type counter C5 is selected when the value is "0 to 10", and the small hit A (V can pass) is selected. In the case of "11 to 99", the small hit B (V cannot pass) is selected.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 28 (c), when the small hit of the second special symbol is won, the small hit type counter C5 is selected, and when the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "0-9", the small hit C (V can pass) is selected. In the case of "10 to 24", the small hit D (V passable) is selected, and in the case of "25 to 99", the small hit E (V passable) is selected.

In the present embodiment, the operations of the V inlet solenoid 209a and the flow path solenoid 209c of the second variable winning device 650 are set according to the small hit type. Specifically, in the small hit game by the small hits A and C to E, the flow path solenoid 209c of the second variable winning device 650 is operating, and the ball can enter the special discharge flow path 650e2. There is. On the other hand, in the small hit game by the small hit B, the flow path solenoid 209c of the second variable winning device 650 is not operating. The ball cannot enter the special discharge flow path 650e2. That is, the small hits A and C to E are small hits that can be given a big hit game by passing the ball through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3) after that, and the small hit B is a small hit that is not given a big hit. ..

Further, in the small hit game by the small hits A and B (the small hit type selected by the small hit winning of the first special symbol), the V inlet solenoid 209a operates so that the opening / closing door 650f is opened for a short period of time (FIG. 10). (See), in the small hit game by small hits C to E (small hit type selected by the small hit winning of the second special symbol), the V inlet solenoid 209a operates so that the opening / closing door 650f is opened for a long period of time (Fig.). 11). That is, the small hits A and B are small hits in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the second variable winning device 650 during the small hit game, and the small hits C to E are the second variable winning devices 650 during the small hit game. It is a small hit that makes it easy for the ball to enter.

In this control example, the type of big hit to be given after that is determined according to the type of small hit, and the big hit given after small hit A is big hit C (7R time saving big hit), and the small hit B The jackpot given later is the jackpot D (2R time saving no jackpot), the jackpot given after the small hit C is the jackpot F (5R time saving big hit), and the jackpot given after the small hit D is the jackpot G (10R). It is configured so that the jackpot given after the small hit E is the jackpot E (15R time-saving jackpot).

In this control example, the type of big hit to be given after that is determined according to the type of small hit, but as another specification, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit. Also, the type of jackpot is determined by the jackpot selection table (only the jackpot right is acquired), and the jackpot that acquired the right earlier is executed when the ball passes through the V winning switch 650e3 in the subsequent small hit game. You may. By doing so, the player can select a small hit through which the V winning switch 650e3 is passed, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, even if a predetermined lottery is executed based on the ball passing through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3) during the small hit game, and the big hit type is determined based on the lottery result. Good. As a result, the content of the big hit game executed can be different depending on the timing when the ball passes through the specific area, so that the player will enthusiastically perform the small hit game, and the interest of the game can be improved. it can.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. The fluctuation pattern table 202d is a data table used for determining the display mode (variation time) of the fluctuation pattern, and the display mode is defined for each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The variable pattern table 202d defines a plurality of different tables corresponding to the types of special symbols, lottery results, and game states.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29 (a), the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1, the special figure 1 off (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2, and the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation pattern table 202d3 And, at least, the variation pattern table 202d4 for special figure 1 time reduction and the variation pattern table 202d5 for special figure 2 are defined.

First, the variation pattern table 202d for special figure 1 jackpot will be described with reference to FIG. 29 (b). The special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 selects the variation pattern (variation time) when the jackpot is won from the variation patterns (fluctuation time) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the normal state. A random value (counter value of the fluctuation type counter value CS1) for determining the type (variation time) of the fluctuation pattern is defined in the table.

Specifically, when the jackpot is determined as the stop type, the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "0 to 50" as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the fluctuation pattern of "51 to 179" is set. A variation pattern of super reach (60 seconds) is associated with the range, and a variation pattern of various special reach (90 seconds) is associated with the range of "180 to 198".

Next, with reference to FIG. 29 (c), the contents of the variation pattern table 202d2 for the deviation of the special figure 1 (normal) will be described. This special figure 1 deviation pattern table 202d2 shows the case where the lottery result of the special figure 1 is out of the fluctuation patterns (variation time) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the normal state. A random value (counter value of the fluctuation type counter value CS1) for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) in the above is specified.

Specifically, when complete deviation is determined as the stop type, a variation pattern of short deviation (7 seconds) is associated with the range of "0 to 98" as the value of the variation type counter CS1, and "99 to". A variation pattern of long deviation (10 seconds) is associated with the range of "198". In addition, when the lottery of the first special symbol results in a loss and the loss reach is determined as the stop type, various normal reach (30 seconds) are associated with the range of "0 to 149" as the value of the variation type counter CS1. , "150 to 197" are associated with various super reach (60 seconds), and "198" is associated with various special reach (90 seconds).

Next, with reference to FIG. 29 (d), the contents of the special figure 1 small hit variation pattern table 202d3 will be described. The special figure 1 small hit variation pattern table 202d3 is a first special symbol in a normal state. Of the fluctuation patterns (fluctuation time) of the special figure 1), a random number value (counter value of the fluctuation type counter value CS1) for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) when the lottery result of the special figure 1 is a small hit. ) Is specified.

Specifically, when the small hit is determined as the stop type, various super reach (60 seconds) are performed regardless of the small hit type (small hit A, small hit B) and the value of the variable type counter CS1. It is associated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, various fluctuation patterns are selected according to each stop type based on the lottery result of the first special symbol, and in particular, the fluctuation time. The long (for example, 90 seconds) fluctuation pattern is set so that it can be easily selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit. Therefore, isn't the player winning the jackpot when the variable display continues for a long period of time? I will play the game while expecting. Therefore, the game result can be predicted by the set period length of the fluctuation pattern, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern table 202d4 for special drawing 1 time reduction will be described with reference to FIG. 30 (a). In the special figure 1 time saving fluctuation pattern table 202d42, a random number value (counter value of the fluctuation type counter value CS1) for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the time saving state is obtained. It is stipulated.

Specifically, a fluctuation pattern of 150 seconds is associated regardless of the determined stop type and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

FIG. 30B is a diagram showing the contents of the variation pattern table 202d5 for special figure 2. The variation pattern table 202d5 for special figure 2 defines a random number value for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) in the normal state and the time saving state.

Specifically, when the determined stop type is a big hit, a short jackpot (7 seconds) is set regardless of the value of the variable type counter CS1, and when the determined stop type is a small hit, the variable type. Short and small hits (2 seconds) are associated regardless of the value of the counter CS1.

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 25 (b). FIG. 25B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 25 (b), the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol. 2 Hold ball number counter 203e, Normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f, Time saving medium counter 203g, Big hit start flag 203h, Big hit medium flag 203i, Small hit start flag 203j, Small hit medium flag 203k, Big hit type storage area 203m when passing V , V flag 203n, storage release flag 203p, release counter 203qa, time saving medium hit flag 203q, and other memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area), and each of these areas has a random number counter per first. Each value of C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type counter C5 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first entry port 64 (starting winning), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and C5 are acquired, and the acquired data are held for four times. Among the vacant areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old winning prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest winning prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. A determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) whose area number is 1 smaller. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the reserved area (reserved second area to reserved fourth area) in which the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. In the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, each counter value acquired based on the start winning to the second entry port 640 is stored. Since the method of storing the counter value is the same as that of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Similar to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Area) and. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, and the acquired data is vacant in four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Among the existing areas, the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the winning order is maintained and the data corresponding to the winning is stored. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b, A shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding area is packed into the holding area one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry (starting prize) into the first entry port 64. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the display device 81 (variable display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. It is added one by one (see S704 in FIG. 43). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S210 in FIG. 38).

The value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d (holding number N1 of the variation display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the hold ball number command (see S211 in FIG. 38). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 holds the fluctuation display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is increased to the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if there is a deviation from the number of reserved balls in the actual held fluctuation display, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of reserved balls command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the hold ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry (starting prize) into the second entry port 640. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the display device 81 (variable display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the second entry port 640 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. It is added one by one (see S710 in FIG. 43). On the other hand, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 in FIG. 38). The value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command, similarly to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f sets the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the balls at the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4 ( See S1104 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S905 in FIG. 45).

When the sphere passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved sphere counter 203f (the number of times the variable display is held M in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. , The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S1105 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S1103: No in FIG. 47). ).

The time saving medium counter 203g is a counter for counting the remaining time saving period (number of fluctuations of the special symbol) in the time saving state (time saving state) of the normal symbol. At the end of the jackpot game in which the jackpot type is other than "big hits B, D" (that is, "big hits A, C, EG"), the time-saving / medium counter 203g is set to 1 (see S1815 in FIG. 54). .. That is, in the present embodiment, when the time saving state is given after the big hit game, one time saving state is given.

The jackpot start flag 203h is a flag used for determining whether or not it is the jackpot start timing. The jackpot start flag 203h is set to on when the lottery result is a jackpot in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 38) (see S219 in FIG. 38), and the jackpot start timing in the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 54). It is referred to for determining whether or not (see S1801 in FIG. 54), and is set to off when it is determined that the jackpot start timing is in the jackpot control process (see S1802 in FIG. 54). As a result, it is possible to execute the process according to the jackpot start timing. Although not shown in each of the above-mentioned control examples, the jackpot start timing is determined in the same manner.

The jackpot flag 203i is a flag used to determine whether or not a jackpot is being played, that is, whether or not a jackpot game is being executed. The jackpot middle flag 203i is set to on when the lottery result is a jackpot in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 38), similarly to the jackpot start flag 203h described above (see S219 in FIG. 38). Then, in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 54), it is referred to in order to determine whether or not the jackpot is in progress (see S1805 in FIG. 54), and in the jackpot control process, it is determined that it is the timing of the end of the jackpot. If so, it is set to off (see S1813 in FIG. 54).

The small hit start flag 203j is a flag used for determining whether or not it is the start timing of the small hit. The small hit start flag 203j is set to ON in the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 42) executed when the lottery result is determined to be a small hit in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38). (See S610 in FIG. 42). Then, it is referred to in the small hit control process (see FIG. 55) to determine whether or not it is the start timing of the small hit (see S1901 in FIG. 55), and it is the start timing of the small hit in the small hit control process. Is set to off (see S1902 in FIG. 55).

The small hit medium flag 203k is a flag used to determine whether or not a small hit is being made, that is, whether or not a small hit game is being executed. The small hit medium flag 203k is set to ON in the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 42) in the same manner as the small hit start flag 203j described above (see S610 in FIG. 42). Then, it is referred to in the small hit control process (see FIG. 55) to determine whether or not the small hit is in progress (S1906 in FIG. 55), and it is determined in the small hit control process that it is the end timing of the small hit. If so, it is set to off (S1911 in FIG. 55).

The big hit type storage area 203m when passing through V is an area for storing the big hit type corresponding to the small hit type of the winning small hit when the small hit is won, and the ball is a specific area during the small hit game state. Contains the types of jackpots that are executed based on passing through. In the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 42), the jackpot type corresponding to the winning small hit type is set in the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203m (see S608 in FIG. 42), and the V-passing process (see FIG. 50). ), The set jackpot type is read (see S1401 in FIG. 50), and the corresponding V flag is set to on (see S1401 in FIG. 50).

The V flag 203n is a flag for memorizing that the ball has passed the V winning switch 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650, and sets the jackpot type based on the value of the V flag 203n at the end of the small hit game. It is a thing. This V flag 203n is set based on the value of the jackpot type when passing V in the V passing process (see FIG. 50) (S1402 in FIG. 50), and is referred to in the small hit ending process (S2003 and S2004 in FIG. 56). It is then set to off (S2006 in FIG. 56).

The storage release flag 203p is a flag used to indicate the period for releasing (opening) the storage valve 750a of the storage device 750 provided in the pachinko machine 10, and is the storage of the storage device 750 when set to ON. When the state is released and set to off, the storage device 750 is in the storage state. This storage release flag 203p is set to ON (S1804 in FIG. 54) when it is determined in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 54) that it is the start timing of the jackpot (S1801: YES in FIG. 54), and the storage device. It is referred to in the control process (see S2202 of FIG. 58), and is set to off when the value of the release counter 203Pa reaches the upper limit value (25000) (see S2205 of FIG. 58) (see S2205 of FIG. 58). S2208). That is, in the present embodiment, the storage device 750 is released (the storage valve 750a is opened) at the timing when the jackpot game is started, and when a predetermined period (10 seconds) has elapsed, the storage device is in the storage state (storage valve). 750a is configured to close). As a result, it is possible to increase the benefits given to the player when the jackpot is won.

As a configuration for changing the state (storage state, release state) of the storage device 750, a configuration other than the present embodiment may be used. For example, a jackpot for shifting the storage device 750 to the release state and a storage device 750. The jackpot that does not shift to the release state may be set according to the selected jackpot type, and a plurality of winning openings (for example, the first specific winning opening 65 and the second specific winning opening 650) are predetermined. When the jackpot games that are opened in the order of the two are executed, the storage device 750 may be shifted to the released state at the timing when the specific winning opening is opened.

Further, regarding the configuration in which the storage device 750 is shifted from the released state to the stored state (the termination condition of the released state), in the present embodiment, the released state is terminated when 10 seconds have passed after the transition to the released state. Even if the ball is not stored in the storage device 750, the ball can pass through the storage device 750, but the period in which the storage device is released is shortened (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the storage device 750 Only the stored spheres may be allowed to pass through the storage device 750. As a result, the player can enthusiastically play a game in order to store the ball in the storage device 750 by the time the release condition (big hit) of the storage device 750 is satisfied.

The release counter 203pa is a counter for measuring the period for releasing (opening) the storage valve 750a of the storage device 750. The release counter 203pa is set to "1" when it is determined in the storage device control process (see FIG. 58) that the storage release flag 203p is set to ON (see S2202 in FIG. 58) (FIG. 58). (See S2204), the value is incremented by 1 each time the storage device control process is executed (see S2206 in FIG. 58). Then, it is determined whether the value of the counter has reached "25000" (see 2205 in FIG. 58), and based on the determination result, the variable operation of the storage valve 750a is controlled, and the storage valve 750a is variably controlled to the closed state. Then, the value of the release counter 203Pa is set to "0" (see S2209 in FIG. 58).

The time saving middle hit flag 203q is a flag for indicating in which game state the lottery of ordinary symbols (general drawing lottery) for which the lottery result is a hit was executed, and when the lottery is executed during the time saving state, Set to on. The time saving middle hit flag 203q is referred to when setting the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a executed based on the hit of the normal drawing lottery.

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a large opening solenoid for closing or opening the first specific winning opening 65a, and the like. A solenoid 209 including a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

Further, various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch (FIGS. 7, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115 are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is connected to the MPU 201. Various processes are executed based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIGS. 7, 122) circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 51) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 is an output of voice in a voice output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device 227 (decorative lamp 227a, transmission lamp 227b, other lamp 227c, etc.), and fluctuation. It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display effect (variable display). The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the content of the effect, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. FIG. 31A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 31A, the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a and an effect state selection table 222b.

In the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, the voice lamp control device 113 is based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110, and the rough fluctuation content (variation time, fluctuation type (reach, deviation, etc.) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command) is shown. ) To determine more detailed fluctuations. Thereby, a wider variety of variation modes can be determined. Here, one of a plurality of types of variation mode is determined by lottery with respect to the rough variation content instructed by the main control device 110.

The effect state selection table 222b is a table for selecting an effect state for setting a display mode of the effect image (third symbol image, reserved symbol image, background image, etc.) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , One of the six production states is selected based on the game state of the pachinko machine 10, the establishment state of various flags, and the lottery result of the special symbol or the normal symbol.

Here, the contents of the effect state selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 32 (a). FIG. 32A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the effect state selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 32 (a), the effect state selection table 222b shows the established state (whether it is set to on or off) of the consecutive villa flag 223i, the normal figure valid flag 223q, the pseudo effect flag 223r, and the special 2 fluctuation flag 223s. It is configured so that any one of the effect states "1" to "6" is selected depending on whether it is set to.

Specifically, in the state where the flag 223i in the consecutive villas is set to off, when the pseudo effect flag 223r is also set to off, the effect state "1" is selected. On the other hand, when the pseudo effect flag 223r is set to on, the effect state "2" is selected. In addition, when the special figure 2 fluctuation flag 223s is set to off in the state where the continuous villa middle flag 223i is set to on and the normal figure valid flag 223q is set to off, the effect state "3" is set. Be selected. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 fluctuation flag 223s is set to ON, the effect state “4” is selected. Then, when the continuous villa middle flag 223i is set to on and the normal figure valid flag 223q is set to on, the effect state “5” is selected. In the state where the effect state "5" is selected, the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol (special figure 1) being executed and the fluctuation stop timing of the normal symbol (normal figure) are set at predetermined intervals (special figure). When the fluctuation stop timing of the normal figure is earlier than the fluctuation stop timing of 1 and each fluctuation stop timing is within 2 seconds), the effect state "6" is selected.

Here, the relationship between the effect state selected by the effect state selection table 222b and the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 32 (b). FIG. 32B is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between each effect state selected by the effect state selection table 222b and the third symbol and the reserved symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It should be noted that the target whose display mode is changed depending on the set effect state is not only the above-mentioned third symbol and the reserved symbol, but also various effect images displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is variable to the production image corresponding to, but the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 32 (b), the third symbol (main symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 according to the effect state selected by the effect state selection table 222b (see FIG. 9). And the symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the main reserved symbol (see FIG. 9) displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 are different. It is stipulated in. In this way, by making the symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, ordinary symbol) corresponding to the main symbol and the main reserved symbol different depending on the production state, the pachinko machine 10 having complicated playability is mainly used. The result of the main game can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner only by letting the player grasp the symbol and the main reserved symbol.

Specifically, when the effect state "1" is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol (special diagram 1) becomes the main symbol, and is reserved to indicate the number of reserved memories of the special diagram 1. The symbol becomes the main reserved symbol and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 9). The effect state "1" is selected when the game state is the normal state in which the left-handed game is being executed.

Next, when the effect state "2" is selected, the pseudo symbol for the effect that does not correspond to any of the symbols (special figure 1, special figure 2, normal figure) becomes the main symbol (pseudo main symbol Dmb). , It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so that none of the reserved symbols is displayed on the main reserved symbol (see FIG. 22 (b)). The effect state "2" is selected when the game state is the normal state and the small hit game of the special figure 1 is executed.

When this effect state "2" is selected, the pseudo main symbol Dmb displayed as the main symbol has a variable display (see FIG. 22 (a)) and a stop display (see FIG. 22 (a)) like the other main symbols. (B)) is executed, and in the small hit game of special figure 1, the pseudo main symbol Dmb is determined based on the timing at which the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is opened. The display is controlled so that the same symbol is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 22 (b)). As a result, the player is shown a small stop display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb. It is possible to notify the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a during the winning game, and it makes us think that the privilege of opening the second specific winning opening 650a is given as if the pseudo main symbol Dmb fluctuates (lottery). be able to.

Further, the number of times the pseudo main symbol Dmb is variablely displayed is set to be at least more than the number of times the second specific winning opening 650a is opened during the small hit game, and corresponds to the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a. The variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb that is not displayed is controlled so as to be stopped and displayed in a display mode other than the predetermined display mode (for example, a mode in which non-identical symbols are stopped and displayed (so-called loose stitches)). ing. As a result, the pseudo main symbol Dmb can always be displayed in a variable manner regardless of the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a during the small hit game, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, when the effect state "2" is selected, the main reserved symbol is not displayed, so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the fluctuation of the pseudo main symbol Dmb and the increase / decrease relationship of the reserved symbol. That is, since the pseudo main symbol Dmb is not a symbol corresponding to each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, normal figure) that is actually stored and stored, when the variation display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb is started. , The number of any of the reserved symbols (special figure 1 reserved symbol, special figure 2 reserved symbol, general figure reserved symbol) does not increase or decrease. Therefore, in the effect state "2" in which the pseudo main symbol Dmb is variablely displayed, any of the reserved symbols (special figure 1 reserved symbol, special figure 2 reserved symbol, normal symbol reserved symbol) is displayed as the main reserved symbol. Then, when the main symbol starts to fluctuate, the main reserved symbol does not decrease, and a situation occurs in which the player feels uncomfortable. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the effect state "2" is selected, the main reserved symbol is not displayed, so that the above-mentioned situation can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, when the effect state "2" is selected, the main reserved symbol is not displayed, but other configurations may be used, for example, a pseudo main symbol. The pseudo main hold symbol corresponding to Dmb may be displayed. In this case, it is advisable to increase or decrease the number of pseudo main reserved symbols in correspondence with the variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb. As a result, it is possible to execute the variable display of the pseudo main symbol without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, when displaying the pseudo main hold symbol, it is preferable to set the number and display mode of the pseudo main hold symbol to be displayed based on the type of the small hit game to be executed. With this configuration, the content of this small hit game is predicted to the player by the pseudo main reserved symbol displayed as the main reserved symbol at the timing when the small hit game in which the effect state "2" is selected is started. It becomes possible to perform a small hit game while having fun.

Further, the stop display mode of the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the timing when the second specific winning opening 650a is opened is the display mode in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. The display is controlled so that the type of the same symbol that is stopped and displayed is different based on the content of the privilege given by the ball. Specifically, the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a, which is opened at the timing when the ball entering the second specific winning opening 650a can pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3). The stop display mode of the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a which is set to the display mode in which the specific same number is stopped and displayed (for example, "777") and is opened at other timings. The stop display mode is a display mode different from the specific same number (for example, "444"). As a result, the pseudo main symbol Dmb is stopped and displayed with the same number, so that the player is notified of the opening timing to the second specific winning opening 650a, and further, the privilege given depending on the type of the number displayed is stopped. The content can be notified (suggested). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect using the pseudo main symbol Dmb.

Next, when the effect state "3" is selected, the pseudo symbol for the effect that does not correspond to any of the symbols (special figure 1, special figure 2, normal figure) becomes the main symbol (pseudo main symbol Dmb). As the main reserved symbol, the reserved symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the main reserved symbol (see FIG. 16B). The effect state "3" is selected when the game state is a time saving state and the small hit game is executed.

Next, when the effect state "4" is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 becomes the main symbol (special figure 2 main symbol Dmd), and the main reserved symbol is the hold corresponding to the special figure 2. The symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the main reserved symbol (see FIG. 18A). The effect state "4" is selected when the game state is the normal state and the variation of the special figure 2 is executed.

Next, when the effect state "5" is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the normal figure becomes the main symbol (general symbol main symbol Dmc), and the reserved symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 becomes the main reserved symbol. 3 Displayed on the symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 15B). The effect state "5" is selected when the game state is the time saving state and the drawing variation in which the lottery and the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a can be executed is executed during the time saving state.

When the effect state "6" is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 becomes the main symbol (special figure 1 main symbol Dma), and the reserved symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 becomes the third main reserved symbol. It is displayed on the symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 17A). The effect state "6" is selected when the game state is a time-saving state and the normal figure change is started when the remaining change period of the special figure 1 during the change is within 2 seconds.

Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. FIG. 31A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 31A, the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a and an effect state selection table 222b.

In the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, the voice lamp control device 113 is based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110, and the rough fluctuation content (variation time, fluctuation type (reach, deviation, etc.) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command) is shown. ) To determine more detailed fluctuations. Thereby, a wider variety of variation modes can be determined. Here, one of a plurality of types of variation mode is determined by lottery with respect to the rough variation content instructed by the main control device 110.

The effect state selection table 222b is a table for selecting an effect state for setting a display mode of the effect image (third symbol image, reserved symbol image, background image, etc.) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , One of the six production states is selected based on the game state of the pachinko machine 10, the establishment state of various flags, and the lottery result of the special symbol or the normal symbol.

Here, the contents of the effect state selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 32 (a). FIG. 32A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the effect state selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 32 (a), the effect state selection table 222b shows the established state (whether it is set to ON or not) of the continuous villa middle flag 223i, the normal figure valid flag 223q, the pseudo effect flag 223r, and the special figure 2 fluctuation flag 223s. It is configured so that any one of the effect states "1" to "6" is selected depending on whether it is set to off).

Specifically, in the state where the flag 223i in the consecutive villas is set to off, when the pseudo effect flag 223r is also set to off, the effect state "1" is selected. On the other hand, when the pseudo effect flag 223r is set to on, the effect state "2" is selected. In addition, when the special figure 2 fluctuation flag 223s is set to off in the state where the continuous villa middle flag 223i is set to on and the normal figure valid flag 223q is set to off, the effect state "3" is set. Be selected. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 fluctuation flag 223s is set to ON, the effect state “4” is selected. Then, when the continuous villa middle flag 223i is set to on and the normal figure valid flag 223q is set to on, the effect state “5” is selected. In the state where the effect state "5" is selected, the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol (special figure 1) being executed and the fluctuation stop timing of the normal symbol (normal figure) are set at predetermined intervals (special figure). When the fluctuation stop timing of the normal figure is earlier than the fluctuation stop timing of 1 and each fluctuation stop timing is within 2 seconds), the effect state "6" is selected.

Here, the relationship between the effect state selected by the effect state selection table 222b and the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 32 (b). FIG. 32B is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between each effect state selected by the effect state selection table 222b and the third symbol and the reserved symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It should be noted that the target whose display mode is changed depending on the set effect state is not only the above-mentioned third symbol and the reserved symbol, but also various effect images displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is variable to the production image corresponding to, but the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 32 (b), the third symbol (main symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 according to the effect state selected by the effect state selection table 222b (see FIG. 9). And the symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, ordinary symbol) corresponding to the main reserved symbol (see FIG. 9) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are defined to be different. In this way, by making the symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, ordinary symbol) corresponding to the main symbol and the main reserved symbol different depending on the production state, the pachinko machine 10 having complicated playability is mainly used. The result of the main game can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner only by letting the player grasp the symbol and the main reserved symbol.

Specifically, when the effect state "1" is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol (special diagram 1) becomes the main symbol, and is reserved to indicate the number of reserved memories of the special diagram 1. The symbol becomes the main reserved symbol and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 9). The effect state "1" is selected when the game state is the normal state in which the left-handed game is being executed.

Next, when the effect state "2" is selected, the pseudo symbol for the effect that does not correspond to any of the symbols (special figure 1, special figure 2, normal figure) becomes the main symbol (pseudo main symbol Dmb). , It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so that none of the reserved symbols is displayed on the main reserved symbol (see FIG. 22 (b)). The effect state "2" is selected when the game state is the normal state and the small hit game of the special figure 1 is executed.

When this effect state "2" is selected, the pseudo main symbol Dmb displayed as the main symbol has a variable display (see FIG. 22 (a)) and a stop display (see FIG. 22 (a)) like the other main symbols. (B)) is executed, and in the small hit game of special figure 1, the pseudo main symbol Dmb is determined based on the timing at which the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is opened. The display is controlled so that the same symbol is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 22 (b)). As a result, the player is shown a small stop display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb. It is possible to notify the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a during the winning game, and it makes us think that the privilege of opening the second specific winning opening 650a is given as if the pseudo main symbol Dmb fluctuates (lottery). be able to.

Further, the number of times the pseudo main symbol Dmb is variablely displayed is set to be at least more than the number of times the second specific winning opening 650a is opened during the small hit game, and corresponds to the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a. The variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb that is not displayed is controlled so as to be stopped and displayed in a display mode other than the predetermined display mode (for example, a mode in which non-identical symbols are stopped and displayed (so-called loose stitches)). ing. As a result, the pseudo main symbol Dmb can always be displayed in a variable manner regardless of the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a during the small hit game, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, when the effect state "2" is selected, the main reserved symbol is not displayed, so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the fluctuation of the pseudo main symbol Dmb and the increase / decrease relationship of the reserved symbol. That is, since the pseudo main symbol Dmb is not a symbol corresponding to each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, normal figure) that is actually stored and stored, when the variation display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb is started. , The number of any of the reserved symbols (special figure 1 reserved symbol, special figure 2 reserved symbol, general figure reserved symbol) does not increase or decrease. Therefore, in the effect state "2" in which the pseudo main symbol Dmb is variablely displayed, any of the reserved symbols (special figure 1 reserved symbol, special figure 2 reserved symbol, normal symbol reserved symbol) is displayed as the main reserved symbol. Then, when the main symbol starts to fluctuate, the main reserved symbol does not decrease, and a situation occurs in which the player feels uncomfortable. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the effect state "2" is selected, the main reserved diagram is not displayed, so that the above-mentioned situation can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, when the effect state "2" is selected, the main reserved symbol is not displayed, but other configurations may be used, for example, a pseudo main symbol. The pseudo main hold symbol corresponding to Dmb may be displayed. In this case, it is advisable to increase or decrease the number of pseudo main reserved symbols in correspondence with the variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb. As a result, it is possible to execute the variable display of the pseudo main symbol without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, when displaying the pseudo main hold symbol, it is preferable to set the number and display mode of the pseudo main hold symbol to be displayed based on the type of the small hit game to be executed. With this configuration, the content of this small hit game is predicted to the player by the pseudo main reserved symbol displayed as the main reserved symbol at the timing when the small hit game in which the effect state "2" is selected is started. It becomes possible to perform a small hit game while having fun.

Further, the stop display mode of the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the timing when the second specific winning opening 650a is opened is the display mode in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. The display is controlled so that the type of the same symbol that is stopped and displayed is different based on the content of the privilege given by the ball. Specifically, the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a, which is opened at the timing when the ball entering the second specific winning opening 650a can pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3). The stop display mode of the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a which is set to the display mode in which the specific same number is stopped and displayed (for example, "777") and is opened at other timings. The stop display mode is a display mode different from the specific same number (for example, "444"). As a result, the pseudo main symbol Dmb is stopped and displayed with the same number, so that the player is notified of the opening timing to the second specific winning opening 650a, and further, the privilege given depending on the type of the number displayed is stopped. The content can be notified (suggested). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect using the pseudo main symbol Dmb.

Next, when the effect state "3" is selected, the pseudo symbol for the effect that does not correspond to any of the symbols (special figure 1, special figure 2, normal figure) becomes the main symbol (pseudo main symbol Dmb). As the main reserved symbol, the reserved symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the main reserved symbol (see FIG. 16B). The effect state "3" is selected when the game state is a time saving state and the small hit game is executed.

Next, when the effect state "4" is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 becomes the main symbol (special figure 2 main symbol Dmd), and the main reserved symbol is the hold corresponding to the special figure 2. The symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the main reserved symbol (see FIG. 18A). The effect state "4" is selected when the game state is the normal state and the variation of the special figure 2 is executed.

Next, when the effect state "5" is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the normal figure becomes the main symbol (general symbol main symbol Dmc), and the reserved symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 becomes the main reserved symbol. 3 Displayed on the symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 15B). The effect state "5" is selected when the game state is the time saving state and the drawing variation in which the lottery and the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a can be executed is executed during the time saving state.

When the effect state "6" is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 becomes the main symbol (special figure 1 main symbol Dma), and the reserved symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 becomes the third main reserved symbol. It is displayed on the symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 16B). The effect state "6" is selected when the game state is a time-saving state and the normal figure change is started when the remaining change period of the special figure 1 during the change is within 2 seconds.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 31 (b). FIG. 31B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a special symbol winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223c, a special symbol variation start flag 223d, and a stop type selection flag 223e. The effect counter 223f, the time saving medium flag 223g, the time saving remaining period storage area 223h, the consecutive villa middle flag 223i, the fluctuation time counter 223j, the state storage area 223k, the effect state storage area 223m, and the special 2 hold flag 223n. , Special 2 hold upper limit flag 223p, normal map valid flag 223q, pseudo-effect flag 223r, special 2 fluctuation flag 223s, normal map prize information storage area 223t, and normal map fluctuation start flag 223u. At least the flag 223v, the privilege effect execution flag 223w, the end effect execution flag 223x, and the other memory area 223z are provided.

The prize information storage area 223a for special symbols has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas has a special symbol (first special symbol and). The winning information of the second special symbol) is stored respectively. Based on the information stored in the special drawing winning information storage area 223a, the lottery result of the reserved ball or the like can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 before the start of fluctuation.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are fluctuation effects (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and are main controls. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation effect held in the device 110 up to 4 times for each type of special symbol. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b corresponds to the number of reserved balls of the variable effect based on the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c corresponds to the second special symbol (special symbol 1). 2) Corresponds to the number of reserved balls for variable production based on the lottery.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Cannot get the value of. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c. , The number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, the variable display is suspended due to the entry into the first entry port 64 (left first entry opening 64a, right first entry opening 64b) and the second entry opening 640. After the addition or subtraction when the number of balls is added, or when the main controller 110 executes the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) and the number of reserved balls is subtracted. A hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d or the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 hold ball number command from the hold ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c (see S3207 in FIG. 61). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The values can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the control device 110.

The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c after storage, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 hold ball of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the value of the number counter 223c is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are synchronized with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. , Its value is changed. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 also changes while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere counter 203e of the main control device 110. Can be made to. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

In the present embodiment, the variable display (right of the symbol lottery) can be reserved (upper limit of 4) for the ordinary symbol as well as the special symbol described above, and the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls of the main control device 110 is set. When a command set when the value of the counter 203f is increased or decreased is received, a normal symbol reserved ball count counter (not shown) is provided as a counter for increasing or decreasing the value according to the content of the received command. However, regarding the processing executed in the voice lamp control device 113 and the processing executed in the display control device 114, only the target command for the above-mentioned special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is different. Therefore, the detailed description thereof will be omitted. The value of the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is used, for example, when the third symbol display device 81 displays the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol. The details of the case where the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are the same as the case where the number of reserved balls of the special symbol described above is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the display control device 114 receives each hold ball number command for display, it is received in a predetermined area (subordinate hold symbol display area Dn4 to Dn6 (see FIG. 9A)). A display is made to indicate the number of reserved balls corresponding to the command, and based on the received display effect status command, the reserved number of balls command to be displayed in the main reserved symbol display area is selected and held as the main reserved symbol. A display is made to indicate the number of balls. With this configuration, the display synchronized with the increase / decrease in the number of reserved balls set by the main control device 110 can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player should be notified in the current production state. The number of reserved balls of the symbol can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the present embodiment, the display control device 114 sets the number of reserved balls for each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, and normal figure) to a predetermined area (subordinate reserved symbol display area Dn4 to Dn6 (FIG. 9 (FIG. 9)). It is configured to be displayed in a))), and a part of it can be displayed as a main reserved symbol. However, the display method of the reserved symbol is not limited to this, and for example, each symbol (special figure 1) is displayed. , Special figure 2, normal figure), when the hold ball number command is received, the hold symbol (main hold symbol) to be displayed in the main hold symbol display area based on the received display effect state command, and the subordinate A hold symbol (subordinate hold symbol) to be displayed in the hold symbol display area is discriminated, and based on the determination result, the third symbol display device 81 is placed on hold corresponding to each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, normal figure). The design may be displayed.

The variation start flag 223d for the special figure is turned on when the variation pattern command (for the special figure) transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S3304 in FIG. 62), and the variation display on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It is turned off when the setting is made (see S3702 in FIG. 66). When the special figure variation start flag 223d is turned on, the special figure display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command (see S3706 in FIG. 66).

The special figure display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221. Then, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving the special figure display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 displays the variation of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the special figure display variation pattern command. As you can see, the display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

In the present embodiment, as the variation pattern command for displaying the special figure, the variation pattern command for displaying the special figure 1 corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and the variation for displaying the special figure 2 corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol are used. The pattern command is configured to be configurable. In the display control device 114, the variation pattern corresponding to the type of the received variation pattern command for special figure display (special figure 1 display variation pattern command, special figure 2 display variation pattern command) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to do.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, it is set in a predetermined area (design display areas Dn1 to Dn3 of the second display area Dn (see FIG. 9A)). A symbol string (variation pattern) corresponding to the received display variation pattern command is displayed, and a symbol (main symbol) to be displayed in the first display area Dm based on the received display effect state command. Is selected from each symbol (special diagram 1, special diagram 2, general diagram), and the selected symbol is displayed as the main symbol. With this configuration, the display synchronized with the fluctuation pattern of each symbol set by the main control device 110 can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player should be notified in the current production state. It is possible to notify the player of the fluctuation of the symbol in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the present embodiment, the display control device 114 displays all the variable displays (symbol strings) of each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, normal figure) in a predetermined area (secondary display area Dn subordinate symbol display). It is configured to be displayed in the areas Dn1 to Dn3 (see FIG. 9 (a)), and a part of the main symbol can be displayed in the first display area. The display method of (figure) is not limited to this, and for example, when a display variation pattern command corresponding to each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, normal figure) is received, the received display is received. Based on the effect status command, the symbol to be displayed in the first display area Dm (main symbol) and the symbol to be displayed in the slave symbol display area (slave symbol) are discriminated, and the third symbol is displayed based on the discrimination result. The device 81 may display a variable display (symbol sequence) corresponding to each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, normal figure).

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S3204 in FIG. 61), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S3708 in FIG. 66). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type) (see S3710 in FIG. 66).

The effect counter 223f is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223f is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198, and the value is added and updated by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 60) is executed. .. The effect counter 223f has a plurality of counters (not shown), and when the effect pattern is determined by referring to the plurality of counter values in one loop processing, different counter values are used. Used. As a result, when setting one effect pattern, the same counter value is not used at a plurality of places, so that the bias of the set effect pattern can be suppressed. It should be noted that the effect pattern may be set using each value calculated after performing different processing on the value acquired from the same counter. Specifically, among the effect patterns, one selection refers to the ones digit of the acquired value, the other selection refers to the tens digit of the acquired value, and the other selection refers to one of the acquired values. The ones digit of the obtained value may be referred to by multiplying the value obtained by multiplying the digit of the digit by three and the value obtained by multiplying the tens digit by five. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the bias of the set effect pattern while reducing the number of counters used when setting the effect pattern.

The time saving medium flag 223g is a flag for indicating that the present time is shortening. When the time saving medium flag 223g is on, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state, and when it is off, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state. The time saving medium flag 223g is set to on when it is determined in the effect state setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68) that the time saving state will be entered after the jackpot ends (3906 in FIG. 68), and the variable display setting process (FIG. 66). When it is determined that the special figure variation start flag 223d is on (S3701: Yes in FIG. 66) and the time saving medium flag 223g is determined to be on (S3704: Yes in FIG. 66). ), Set to off (S3705 in FIG. 66).

In the present embodiment, as the end condition of the time saving state, the special symbol change (lottery) is executed once (that is, the time saving number of times is once). Therefore, as described above, the time saving medium flag 223g is turned on. When the change of the special symbol is started in the state set to, the time saving medium flag 223g is set to off, but the voice lamp control device 113 indicates that the game state is the time saving state. Any configuration may be used so that the number of time reductions can be determined on the side. For example, if the number of time reductions is set to 100, a time reduction counter that can determine the number of remaining periods is provided, and each time the special symbol is changed (lottery). The value of the counter may be updated to, and when the value of the counter is updated to a value indicating the end of the time saving state, the time saving medium flag 223g may be set to off. As a result, even in the pachinko machine 10 in which the number of time reductions is set to a plurality of times (twice or more), the voice lamp control device 113 can reliably determine whether or not the current gaming state is the time reduction state. Can be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed a predetermined number of times (once), the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied. , Other configurations may be used. For example, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol t can be measured separately, and the end condition of the time saving state can be set as the first special symbol. Is changed 10 times (lottery), or until the second special symbol is changed once (lottery), and the time saving state ends when either end condition is satisfied. Alternatively, the time saving state may be terminated under conditions other than the number of fluctuations of the special symbol. In this case, for example, when the lottery result of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) or the normal symbol becomes a predetermined lottery result, the end condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied, or the pachinko machine 10 is used. When various driving members (electric accessory 640a, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650) are driven, a configuration may be used in which an end condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied. The drive times of the various drive members described above may be measurable, and when the drive times reach a predetermined number (for example, two times), the end condition for ending the time saving state may be satisfied. With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the time saving state ends, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The time saving remaining period storage area 223h is an area for storing the fluctuation time of the first special symbol executed during the time saving state. Here, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is configured so that the time saving state ends when the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) fluctuates once during the time saving state. That is, the fluctuation time of the special symbol set in the time saving state becomes the remaining period in the time saving state as it is.

The flag 223i in the consecutive villas is a flag for indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the right-handed gaming state (the consecutive villa state), and the current flag 223i in the consecutive villas is set to ON. Indicates that the gaming state is a right-handed gaming state, and when it is set to off, it indicates that the current gaming state is the normal state. The flag 223i in the consecutive villas is set to on when it is determined that the jackpot has started in the effect state setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68) (see S3903 in FIG. 68), and the effect is produced based on the effect state selection table 222b. It is referred to when selecting a state (see S3918 in FIG. 68), and when it is determined that the time saving state is not entered after the end of the jackpot, or when the ending condition of the time saving state is satisfied without the hold memory of the special figure 2. Is set to off (see S3907 and S3912 in FIG. 68).

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has shifted from the time saving state to the state of having the hold memory of FIG. 2 in addition to the jackpot state and the time saving state as the gaming state (right-handed gaming state) advantageous to the player. The game playability includes a normal state (see FIG. 12), and the number of reserved balls output from the main control device 110 as to whether or not the current game state is advantageous to the player (right-handed game state). The voice lamp control device 113 is configured to make a determination based on a command, various status commands, and the like. As a result, it is not necessary for the main control device 110 side to execute a process of determining whether or not the current gaming state is an advantageous state, and there is an effect that the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

The main control device 110 may perform a process of determining whether or not the current game state is advantageous to the player. In this case, a command indicating that a game state advantageous to the player (right-handed game state) is set is output to the voice lamp control device 113, and the fact that the player is in the right-handed game state is externally notified. It may be configured to output a signal for notifying (right-handed signal). In this case, in addition to the period in which the gaming state itself such as the jackpot state or the time saving state is advantageous to the player, the gaming state is not an advantageous gaming state (although it is a normal state), but the predetermined conditions are satisfied and again. , If it is determined that the game will shift to the jackpot state, the player is made to continuously execute the right-handed game by continuously notifying the outside that the right-handed game state is in progress. It is possible to suppress the troublesome game.

The fluctuation time counter 223j is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 during the time reduction state, and the remaining period of the time reduction state is calculated based on the measured counter value. When the fluctuation time counter 223j determines in the counter update process (see S3311 in FIG. 70) that the fluctuation in the special figure 1 has started during the time reduction (in the time reduction state) (S4103: Yes in FIG. 70), The value of the counter is set to "1", and every time the counter update process (see S3311 in FIG. 70) is executed thereafter, "1" is added until the value of the counter reaches "150,000" (S4108 in FIG. 70). (See), when the value of the counter becomes "150,000" (S4107: Yes in FIG. 70), the value of the counter is set to "0" (S4109). Then, the time saving remaining period (the remaining period in the time saving state) is calculated based on the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j (S4105 in FIG. 70).

The state storage area 223k is a storage area for temporarily storing the state when various state commands output from the main control device 110 are received, and in the command determination process (see S3112 in FIG. 61), the state storage area 223k is used. When a status command is received (S3215: Yes in FIG. 61), status information based on the received status command is stored (S3216 in FIG. 61). A display state command is set based on the state information stored in the state storage area 223k, and various images (background image and demo image) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are set by the main control device 110. Images corresponding to various states are displayed.

The effect state storage area 223m is a display mode of each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, normal figure) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114, and each reserved symbol (special figure 1 hold). It is an area for storing the effect state used for setting the display effect state command referred to when determining the display mode of the symbol, the special figure 2 reserved symbol, and the normal figure reserved symbol). This effect state includes the setting status of various flags set by various processes of the voice lamp control device 113 (continuous villa flag 223i, normal figure valid flag 223q, pseudo effect flag 223r, special figure 2 fluctuation flag 223s), and each. Based on the fluctuation stop timing of the symbol, it is selected in the effect state setting process (S3114 of FIG. 68) (see S3918 of FIG. 68), and the selected effect state is stored in the effect state storage area 223 m. The effect state storage area 223 m is configured to store (store) the selected effect state several times in the past. This makes it possible to compare and discriminate between the effect state before the transition and the effect state after the transition. With this configuration, it is possible to determine a transition pattern that cannot be migrated when a normal game is being performed, and to determine the presence or absence of an illegal game.

In addition, when the effect state shifts in a predetermined transition pattern over a plurality of times (for example, when the transition from the effect state 4 to the effect state 5 is repeated 5 times or more without going through the effect states 1 and 2). It is possible to provide an effect state (for example, Dalian villa effect state) that is selected only for, and it is possible to enhance the effect. When the Dalian villa production state is set, it is preferable to display a privilege image that cannot normally be seen by the player in the first display area Dm without displaying the main symbol on the third symbol display device 81. ..

The special 2 hold flag 223n is a flag for indicating that there is a hold memory of the special figure 2 (special 2) in the time saving state, and when the special 2 hold flag 223n is set to on, the special 2 hold flag 223n is set. It indicates that the hold storage (holding symbol) of FIG. 2 exists, and when it is set to off, it indicates that the holding storage (holding symbol) of the special figure 2 does not exist. This special 2 hold flag 223n is set to on when the special 2 hold ball number is updated to 1 in the hold ball number related process (see S3208 in FIG. 63) (see S3403 in FIG. 63). This special 2 hold flag 223n is referred to when it is determined in the effect state setting process (see S3114 of FIG. 68) that the time saving state has ended (see S3911 of FIG. 68), and the number of special 2 hold balls becomes 0. If so, it will be set to off.

The special 2 hold upper limit flag 223p is a flag for indicating that the hold memory of the special figure 2 (special 2) has reached the upper limit (4 pieces) in the time saving state, and the special 2 hold upper limit flag 223p is When set to on, it indicates that the number of reserved memories of special figure 2 (special 2) reaches the upper limit (4) in the time saving state, and when the special 2 hold upper limit flag 223p is set to off, It is shown that the number of reserved storages in Special Figure 2 (Special 2) is not the upper limit (4).

This special 2 hold upper limit flag 223p is set to on (S3406: Yes in FIG. 63) when the special 2 hold ball number is updated to the upper limit in the hold ball number related process (see S3208 in FIG. 63). (See S3407 in FIG. 63), referred to in the specific effect setting process (see S3315 in FIG. 69), and is set to off when the number of special 2 reserved balls is no longer the upper limit.

The normal figure valid flag 223q is a flag for indicating a normal figure variation (normal symbol variation) in which the operation of the electric accessory 640a executed at the time of winning can be an operation pattern (long open) advantageous to the player. When this normal map valid flag 223q is set to on, it indicates that the electric accessory 640a is a fluctuation of the normal map at the timing when it can be opened for a long time, and when it is set to off, the electric accessory 640a is short-circuited. It shows that the flag changes at the timing of opening.

The normal map valid flag 223q is set to ON when it is determined in the normal map variation display setting process (see S3712 in FIG. 67) that the timings of the variation start and variation end are both in the time saving state (FIG. 67). (Refer to S3806 of FIG. 67), it is set to off when it is determined that the timing of the fluctuation start is not in the time saving state, or when it is determined that the timing of the fluctuation end is not in the time saving state (S3809 in FIG. 67). reference). The setting status of the normal figure valid flag 223q is referred to when selecting the effect state based on the effect state selection table 222b (see S3918 in FIG. 68).

The pseudo effect flag 223r is a flag for indicating that the special figure 1 small hit has been executed when the game state is the normal state, and when it is set to on, the special figure 1 small hit is set in the normal state. Indicates that has been executed. By setting the pseudo effect flag 223r to ON, the effect display with the pseudo symbol as the main symbol (pseudo main symbol) is executed during the small hit game (see FIG. 22). This pseudo effect flag 223r is set to on when the small hit winning of special figure 1 occurs in the normal state by the effect state setting process (see S3114 of FIG. 68), and the small hit is set to on (see S3915 of FIG. 68). Is set to off when is finished (S3917 in FIG. 68). Then, the setting status of the pseudo effect flag 223r is referred to when selecting the effect state based on the effect state selection table 222b (see S3918 in FIG. 68).

The special 2 fluctuation flag 223s is a flag for indicating that the fluctuation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) has started, and when it is set to on, the second special symbol (special figure 2) has a special 2 fluctuation flag 223s. It indicates that the fluctuation has started. The special 2 fluctuation flag 223s is set to ON in the fluctuation pattern related processing (see S3202 in FIG. 62) when the received fluctuation pattern command is the fluctuation pattern command for special figure 2 (S3302 in FIG. 62). Then, it is set to off when the variation pattern command for special figure 1 is received. The setting status of the special 2 fluctuation flag 223s is referred to when selecting the effect state based on the effect state selection table 222b (see S3918 in FIG. 68).

Here, in the present embodiment, when the special 2 variation flag 223s is set to on, that is, when the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed, the variation result (lottery result). ) Is configured to give a big hit or a small hit, and in the small hit game executed based on the fluctuation (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the ball is in a specific area (V). It is configured to be a small hit game that easily passes through the winning switch 650e3). That is, the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is configured to be advantageous to the player only by being executed. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment configured in this way, the second special symbol is set while the special 2 fluctuation flag 223s is set to ON (that is, while the second special symbol is fluctuating). It is displayed in a variable manner as the main symbol (special diagram 2 main symbol). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the variable display of the second special symbol, which is given an advantageous state for the player, is overlooked.

The general figure winning information storage area 223t is an area in which the winning information included in the winning information command is stored when the winning information command of the normal symbol is received. Since the detailed configuration is the same as the above-mentioned special drawing winning information storage area 223a, the description thereof will be omitted.

The fluctuation start flag 223u for the normal symbol is a flag indicating that the fluctuation of the normal symbol has been executed, and when it is set to ON, it indicates that the normal symbol is fluctuating. The fluctuation start flag 223u for the normal map determines that the received fluctuation pattern command is not the fluctuation pattern command for the special figure (it is the fluctuation pattern command for the normal map) in the fluctuation pattern-related processing (see S3202 in FIG. 62). When it is set to on (see S3306 in FIG. 62) and is determined to be turned on in the normal figure variation display setting process (see S3712 in FIG. 67) (S3801: Yes in FIG. 67), It is set to off (see S3802 in FIG. 67).

The replacement flag 223v is a flag indicating that the end timing of the time saving state (the end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation in which the fluctuation is started in the time saving state) and the end timing of the normal figure fluctuation satisfy predetermined conditions. By setting it to ON, it is shown that the end timing of the fluctuation of the normal map is within 2 seconds of the end timing of the time saving state. By setting this replacement flag 223v to ON, the effect state "6" is selected as the effect state.

The privilege effect execution flag 223w is a flag for indicating that the privilege effect is executed, and when set to ON, it indicates that the privilege effect is executed. While the privilege effect execution flag 223w is set to ON, a privilege effect (see FIG. 21) that cannot normally be seen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The privilege effect execution flag 223w determines that the special 2 hold upper limit flag 223p is set to ON in the specific effect setting process (see S3315 in FIG. 69) (see S4002 in FIG. 69), and the display privilege effect command. After setting (see S4004 in FIG. 69), it is set to on (S4005 in FIG. 69), and after the flag 223i in the consecutive villas is set to off in the effect state setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68) (FIG. 68 (see S3907 in FIG. 68), set to off (see S3908 in FIG. 68). That is, if the privilege effect execution flag 223w is set to on even once in the state where the flag 223i in the consecutive villa is set to on (during the consecutive villa mode) (the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is the upper limit). (When it is reached), the privilege production will continue to be executed until the end of the consecutive villa mode.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the privilege production ends immediately even if the privilege production is executed. That is, after the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit, at least until all the reserved balls in the special figure 2 are exhausted and the subsequent change in the special figure 1 in the time saving state is completed, the privilege effect is produced. Is configured to be executed, so that the privilege effect can be continuously displayed.

Further, with this configuration, it is possible to display on the third symbol display device 81 that the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 has reached the upper limit for a long period of time, so that the surrounding players can see it. You can appeal and get a sense of satisfaction. Further, in order to obtain the satisfaction, the game can be enthusiastically performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured to execute a specific privilege effect on the condition that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has reached the upper limit even once, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the consecutive villa mode. A means for measuring the number of times the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 has reached the upper limit may be provided therein, and different privilege effects may be executed based on the measurement result by the means. As a result, the player can be made to play the game more enthusiastically.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the privilege effect execution flag 223w is set to be on, the privilege effect is set to be executed until the consecutive villa mode ends, but the present invention is not limited to this. The period until all the reserved balls in the special figure 2 are exhausted may be set as the period during which the privilege effect is executed. As a result, in the consecutive villa mode, the production can be switched each time the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed during the time saving state, and the game can be enthusiastically played to continue the consecutive villa mode with a new feeling. Can be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, the privilege effect is automatically executed when the condition for executing the privilege effect is satisfied, but other configurations may be used, for example, pachinko. By operating the operating means (frame button 22) provided on the machine 10, the normal effect and the privilege effect may be switched and executed. This makes it possible to provide the player with a desired effect.

In the present embodiment, the case where the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 reaches the upper limit is set as the condition for executing the privilege effect, but other conditions may be set as the condition for executing the privilege effect. Often, for example, in addition to the case where the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit, the setting may be made on the condition that the changing special figure 1 is won (big hit, small hit). In this way, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has reached the upper limit and the lottery result of Special Figure 1 that is changing is a big hit, it is actually 5 times (1 big hit based on Special Figure 1, special figure 1). Since the jackpot game (4 jackpots based on FIG. 2) is provided, the gaming state is further advantageous to the player. By executing the privilege effect only when such a condition is satisfied, the value of the privilege effect can be enhanced, and the game can be enthusiastically performed to see the privilege effect.

In this case, if the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 becomes 3 (a quasi-upper limit number smaller than the upper limit number), whether or not the privilege effect is executed based on the lottery result of the special figure 1. It is advisable to display (suggest) the player to be notified (suggested) of (special effect execution suggestion display). As a result, the player can be enthusiastically played the game while expecting the lottery result of the special figure 1 and the provision of the privilege effect. In addition, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 reaches the upper limit (4), the privilege effect is configured to be executed, and the content of the privilege effect is described in the changing lottery result of Special Figure 1 and the lottery result. Change based on the remaining period of the time saving state (remaining fluctuation time of special figure 1 during fluctuation) when the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 reaches the upper limit (when the execution condition of the privilege effect is satisfied). You may. Even in this configuration, the player can be enthusiastically played.

The end effect execution flag 223x is a flag for indicating that the end effect (see FIGS. 19 (b) to 20 (b)) for suggesting that the consecutive villa mode is terminated is executed, and is turned on. By being set to, it indicates that the end effect is being executed. This end effect execution flag 223x is turned on when the special 2 hold flag 223n is set to off in the specific effect setting process (see S3315 in FIG. 69) and the time saving remaining period is 10 seconds. It is set (see S4010 in FIG. 69) and is referred to when the special 2 hold flag 223n is set to on in the hold ball number related process (see S3208 in FIG. 63) (see S3404 in FIG. 63). Here, if the end effect execution flag 223x is set to on and the second hold flag 223n is set to on, it is assumed that the time saving state of this time has ended (the variation of special figure 1 has ended). However, the fluctuation (lottery) of Special Figure 2 will be started, and the consecutive villa mode will continue. Therefore, a display victory command is set for the executed end effect, and an effect suggesting a revival from the end effect is executed. As a result, the player can be expected to continue the consecutive villa mode even after the end effect is executed, and the player can be enthusiastically played until the end.

Then, in the effect state setting process (see S3114 of FIG. 68), the flag 223i in the consecutive villas is set to off after being set to off (see S3909 of FIG. 68). The end effect executed in the present embodiment may be configured to be executed even when the special figure 2 hold flag 223n is set to ON. In this case, the consecutive villa mode will always continue. Therefore, it is possible to increase the apparent continuation probability of the consecutive villa mode in the end effect. Further, when a plurality of special figures 2 holds are acquired during the period in which the end effect is being executed, the corresponding effect may be executed.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, for example. , Command storage area is provided.

This command storage area is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 61) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237, the input port 238, the output port 239, and the bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display fluctuation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches the instruction code, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data are written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be made executable in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to output the data after the address is specified in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a large amount of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the reading thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data used in the control program (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S5002 in FIG. 71) executed after the boot process (see S5001 in FIG. 71) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the NAND flash memory 234a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 36) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Process in parallel in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 73B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by, and the time required for reading the data can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The end address (final address of the storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236). Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the game is started by the player while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry are entered. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a fluctuating image when the power is turned on, which displays the result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a fluctuating effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S5003 and S5004 in FIG. 71).

Here, the fluctuation image when the power is turned on will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image as the third symbol display device. Display on 81.

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 displays the main image when the power is turned on. On the display screen of, the fluctuation image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position when facing the screen and the fluctuation image of the "×" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the fluctuation period. It is displayed alternately and repeatedly in the middle. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the "○" symbol is displayed for a certain period of time after the variable effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the "x" symbol is displayed after the variable effect is stopped. Display for a certain period of time.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entry port 64 (left first ball entry port 64a, right first ball entry port 64a). 64b), or when a ball entering the second entry port 640 is detected, the power-on variation image is used using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. Is drawn, and the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 so that the fluctuating images when the power is turned on are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball is detected in the first ball entry port 64 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be done.

Returning to FIG. 33, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The back image is an image displayed on the back side of the main symbol (third symbol), and for example, a city, the sea, the sky, or the like is displayed. A right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 15A) and the like are also stored in the rear image area 235c as a rear image.

The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, is resident. As a result, when the variation effect is performed by the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the device is not used.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", the main symbol consisting of the rear symbol such as a wooden box, the rear symbol and the character such as the furoshiki, the helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is expanded and the image is expanded in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first framebuffer 236b and the second framebuffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, and an effect state storage area 233k.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and an opening effect. , Display data tables corresponding to round production, ending production, and demo production are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is different, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A and jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening effect is for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, which are normally closed, will be opened. It is a production, and the round production is a production for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player that the end of the special game state (big hit state) is notified to the player.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has passed since one variation effect was stopped. Therefore, the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters, is defined for each address. In addition, one or a plurality of information about the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type displays one of the backs A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "city stage", "sky stage", or "island stage"), or backs A to. Information that specifies whether to display a rear image different from C is described. Further, as the back surface type, when specifying to display a back image different from the back images A to C, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage specified by the player as the drawing target. Also, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In the present embodiment, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 30). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 36) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image becomes diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, it is resident. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. (Corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 35). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 35).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 35, in the example of FIG. 35). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 36) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 35, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 71) (see S5005 in FIG. 71). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see S6605 in FIG. 82 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S5301 in FIG. 73 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S5308 in FIG. 73 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 73B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 73 (b) S5309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. The processing (see FIGS. 74 to 78) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 79 to 81) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S6501 in FIG. 82 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 82 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 83) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 36), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the contents of instructions for drawing an image. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 36), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instructions are described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 36) described later, which describes the instruction content for drawing an image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 73 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S6205 in FIG. 81) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 36) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 36, a back image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as (design). In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the semitransparent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing according to the filter specification information by the method specified by that information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 will image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 73 (b). ) Is executed, the timekeeping counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S6207 in FIG. 79). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S5002 in FIG. 71) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 83) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S6717 in FIG. 83). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S6718 in FIG. 83). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is referred to as a frame buffer (hereinafter, "drawing target buffer") that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S6802 in FIG. 84).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and displays the image with the drive signal for the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 73B) is executed, it is performed (see S6802 of FIG. 84).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The effect state storage area 233k is an area for storing the effect state information included in the display effect state command output from the voice lamp control device 113. The effect state information stored in the effect state storage area 233k is referred to when determining the display content to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It should be noted that this embodiment has variation pattern data corresponding to each effect state information, and is configured so that different variation patterns are determined even when the same display variation pattern command is received. ..

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 37 to 58. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are each added by 1, and their counter values are maximum. When the value (299, 99, 99, 239, 99 in this embodiment, respectively) is reached, the value is cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, when both the left first entry port 64a and the right first entry opening 64b (hereinafter, both the left first entry opening 64a and the right first entry opening 64b are shown, the first entry opening 64 and the right first entry opening 64b are indicated. (Referred to as) or the start winning process associated with winning the second ball opening 640 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 38 to 44.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through is caused by the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. The gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 45 to 48.

After executing the through gate passing process, the V entrance passing process accompanying the entry of the ball into the second variable winning device 650 is executed (S108). After that, the V passing process associated with winning the V winning switch 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650 is executed (S109). The details of the V-entrance passing process and the V-passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 49 and 59.

Next, the firing control process is executed (S110), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S111) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed on the display device 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S201). The special symbol jackpots include those during which the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

Unless it is a big hit of a special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202), and the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are displayed. If the mode is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e (holding number N2 of the change display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command (special figure 2 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and extracts the extracted values from the RAM 223. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B execute a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S213). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Get the value of (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S210) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is set (S211). After the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S211 the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). After that, the process of S213 is executed.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202: Yes), has the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B elapsed? Whether or not it is determined (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S215). .. The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41. When this special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Be told. More specifically, depending on the value of the random number counter C1 per first, it is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss, and it is a big hit or a small hit of the special symbol. In this case, either the big hits A to G or the small hits A to E are determined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2 or the small hit type counter C5.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. If it is a small hit, the red LED is turned on, and if it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is started, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing (this lottery result). Is a big hit of a special symbol (S216). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot of a special symbol (S216: Yes), an opening scenario of a specific winning opening is set based on the jackpot type (S217), and then the start of the jackpot is set (S218). Next, the jackpot start flag 203h and the jackpot middle flag 203i are set to ON (S219), the time saving / medium counter 203g is set to 0 (S220), and the process proceeds to S221. In the process of S221, a stop command is set (S221), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S216, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S216: No), it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small hit (S222).

In the process of S222, if it is determined that the lottery result this time is a small hit (S222: Yes), the small hit start setting process is executed (S223). Next, the process of S221 is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S222, when it is determined that the lottery result this time is not a small hit (S222: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g is 1 or more (S224). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0 (S224: No), the processing of S221 is executed and the main processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving / medium counter 203g is 1 or more (S224: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g is subtracted by 1 (S224), and the process of S221 is executed. After that, this process ends.

Next, the special symbol variation start processing (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start processing (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and is special with the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area common to the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery of "special symbol big hit", "special symbol small hit" or "special symbol miss" (win / fail) This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol change start processing, first, it is determined whether or not the time is being shortened (S301). If the time is not shortened (S301: No), the normal fluctuation start process (S302) is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the time is being shortened (S301: Yes), the time saving fluctuation start process (S303) is executed and this process is terminated.

Next, the normal fluctuation start processing (S302) and the time saving fluctuation start processing (S303) executed in the special symbol fluctuation start processing (S213) described above will be described.

First, the normal fluctuation start processing (S302) will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a normal variation start process (S302) executed in the special symbol variation start process (see S213 in FIG. 39).

In the normal fluctuation start processing, first, the data of the execution area in the corresponding special symbol holding ball storage area (special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b) is acquired (S401). After that, the lottery result is acquired based on the special symbol jackpot random number table corresponding to the acquired special symbol type (S402). Specifically, in the case of a lottery of the first special symbol based on the entry into the first entrance 64, a big hit or a small hit can be obtained by referring to the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 26 (b)). If it is a lottery of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, the big hit or the small hit is determined by referring to the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 (see FIG. 26 (c)). I do.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a big hit (S403). When the lottery result is a big hit (S403: Yes), the display mode at the time of a normal big hit corresponding to the special symbol and the big hit type is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401 (S403: Yes). S404). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol 1 jackpot selection table 202b1 or the special symbol 2 jackpot selection table 202b2, and 7 It is determined what type of jackpot is among the jackpots (big hits A to G) of various special symbols (see FIGS. 27 (b) or 27 (c)).

In the process of S404, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hits A to G). Further, the jackpot type (big hits A to G) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

After that, the normal jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S405), and the process proceeds to S406. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S405, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. Specifically, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 and the variation pattern table 202d1 for the jackpot for special figure 1 or the variation pattern table 202d5 for the jackpot for special figure 2 (common to normal and time saving). The fluctuation time of the symbol variation is determined by comparing with (FIG. 29 (a) or FIG. 30 (b)).

In the process of S406, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S405 is set (S406). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S404 is set (S407). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1701 of the main process (see FIG. 53). Will be done. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S407 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

On the other hand, when the lottery result is not a big hit (S403: No), it is further determined whether or not the lottery result is a small hit (S408). When the lottery result is a small hit (S408: Yes), the display mode at the time of a normal small hit corresponding to the special symbol and the big hit type is set (S409). After that, the normal small hit fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S410). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the small hit symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S405, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 and the variation pattern table 202d3 for the small hit for special figure 1 or the variation pattern table 202d5 for the big hit for special figure 2 The fluctuation time of the symbol variation is determined by comparing with (common to normal and time saving) (FIG. 29 (d) or FIG. 30 (b)). Next, the processes of S406 and S407 are executed, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

When the lottery result is not a small hit (S408: No), the display mode at the time of normal deviation corresponding to the special symbol is set (S411). After that, the fluctuation pattern at the time of normal deviation is determined based on the number of reserved balls (S412). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S405, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 and the variation pattern table 202d2 for the deviation of the special figure 1 or the variation pattern table 202d5 for the jackpot for the special figure 2 ( The fluctuation time of the symbol variation is determined by comparing with the normal / time saving common) (FIG. 29 (c) or FIG. 30 (b)). Next, the processes of S406 and S407 are executed, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, the time saving fluctuation start processing (S303) will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a time saving variation start process (S303) executed in the special symbol variation start process (see S213 and FIG. 39). This time saving fluctuation start processing (S303) differs from the above-mentioned normal fluctuation starting processing (S302) in that the display mode for time saving and the fluctuation pattern are set (determined), and the other points are the same. , The detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the processing of S505, S510, and S512, when the variation pattern for the time reduction of the first special symbol is determined, it is determined based on the variation pattern table 202d4 for the time reduction for the special figure 1 as described above (FIG. 30 (a). )reference). On the other hand, when determining the variation pattern for the time reduction of the second special symbol, it is determined based on the variation pattern table 202d5 for special figure 2 (common to normal and time reduction) in the same manner as the normal variation start processing (S302) (FIG. 30 (b)).

Next, the small hit start setting process (S222) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the small hit start setting process (S222). This small hit start setting process (S222) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and is a small hit type (small hits A to E). This is a process for setting the operation of the V inlet solenoid 209a, the retention solenoid 209b, and the flow path solenoid 209c in the small hit game.

In the small hit start setting process (S222), first, the small hit type selected in the process of S409 of the normal fluctuation start process or the process of S509 of the time saving fluctuation start process described above is read (S601), and then the small hit type A is read. Or, it is determined whether or not it is B (S602). When the small hit type is A or B (S602: Yes), the opening scenario for the special figure 1 is set (S603). The opening scenario for the special figure 1 specifically shows the setting of the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 650f1 and the retention member 650n of the second variable winning device 650. That is, it is shown that the operation of the V inlet solenoid 209a and the retention solenoid 209b is set so that the opening / closing door 650f1 and the retention member 650n are opened for a predetermined period during the small hit game effect (see FIG. 10).

When the processing of S603 is completed, it is determined whether or not the small hit type is B (S604). When the small hit type is B (S604: Yes), the flow path solenoid operation is set so that V winning is impossible (S605). That is, the operation of the flow path solenoid 209c is set so that the sphere cannot flow down the flow path 650h3 (see FIG. 10A). After that, the process proceeds to S608. In the process of S604, when the small hit type is not B (that is, the small hit type is A) (S604: No), the flow path solenoid operation is set so that V winning is possible (S606). That is, the operation of the flow path solenoid 209c is set so that the sphere can flow down the flow path 650h3 (see FIG. 10B).

On the other hand, in the processing of S602, when the small hit types are not A and B (that is, the small hit types are C, D or E) (S602: No), the opening scenario for special figure 2 is set (S606). ). The opening scenario for FIG. 2 specifically shows the setting of the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 650f1 and the retention member 650n of the second variable winning device 650. That is, it is shown that the operation of the V inlet solenoid 209a and the retention solenoid 209b is set so that the opening / closing door 650f1 and the retention member 650n are opened for a predetermined period during the small hit game effect (see FIG. 11A). When the processing of S607 is completed, the flow path solenoid operation is set so that V winning is possible (S606). That is, the operation of the flow path solenoid 209c is set so that the sphere can flow down the flow path 650h3 (see FIG. 11A).

When the processing of S605 and S607 is completed, the V-passing jackpot type corresponding to each small hit type is set in the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203m (S608). More specifically, the jackpot type (big hits C to G) at the time of passing V is determined based on the small hit type acquired in the process of S601 and the special symbol 1 jackpot selection table 202b1 or the special symbol 2 jackpot selection table 202b2. As described above, if the small hit type is A, it is determined that it is a big hit C (7 rounds with a short time and a big hit), and if the small hit type is B, it is a big hit D (2 rounds with a short time and no big hit). Judging, if the small hit type is C, it is determined that it is a big hit F (5 rounds with a short time, big hit), and if the small hit type is D, it is determined to be a big hit G (10 rounds with a short time, a big hit). If the small hit type is E, it is determined that it is a big hit E (15 rounds with a short time, a big hit) (see FIG. 27 (b) or (c)).

Next, the start of the small hit is set based on the small hit type (S609), and the small hit start flag 203j and the small hit medium flag 203k are set on (S610). After that, this process ends.

Next, the start winning information processing (S105) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 640. This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a hold process for the value when there is a start prize.

When the start winning process (FIG. 43, S105) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 (S701). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (S701: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of pending numbers N1 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired (S702). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball slot 64 (S701: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball slot 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 4. If it is not less than (S703: No), the process proceeds to S707. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S701: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball counter 203d is added by 1 (S704). Then, a hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S705).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S705, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above. Each value of the counter C5 is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S706). In the process of S706, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the hold second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the hold third area is set, and if the value is 3, the hold fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, in the processes of S707 to S712, the same process is executed for the winning of the second entrance 640 for the processes of S701 to S706. The only difference is that the holding process for the second special symbol is executed for the winning of the second ball opening 640, and the other processes are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, when it is determined in the process of S707 that the ball has not won the second entrance 640 (S707: No), the look-ahead process is executed after the process of S712 (S713). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, a look-ahead process (S713), which is one process in the start winning process (see S105 in FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (S713).

In this look-ahead process (FIG. 44, S713), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new prize in the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 (S801). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning in the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 (S801: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new prize in the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (S801: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the prize is a prize of the first special symbol (S802). ).

In the process of S802, when it is determined that the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (S802: Yes), the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, the special symbol 1 big hit selection table 202b1 and the special symbol 1 small hit selection table 202e1 Based on the above, the lottery result, the big hit type and the small hit type are acquired (S803), and the process proceeds to S804. In the process of S804, the winning information command including the big hit determination result, the big hit type, the small hit determination result, and the small hit type acquired in S803 (or S805) is set (S804), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S802, when it is determined that the winning is the winning of the second special symbol (S802: No), the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2, the special symbol 2 big hit selection table 202b2, and the special symbol 2 small hit selection Based on the table 202e2, the lottery result, the big hit type, and the small hit type are acquired (S805), the process of S804 is executed, and this process is completed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device and the electric motor associated with the second ball entrance 640 are performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the accessory.

In this normal symbol variation processing (FIGS. 40 and S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S901). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device. Includes being in the middle of being. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S901: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S901: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S902), and the second symbol display device is used. If the display mode is not changing (S902: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S903). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is larger than 0 (S904), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is 0 (S904 :). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S904: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S905).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S906). In the process of S906, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S907).

Next, the lottery result is acquired based on the second random number table 202c (S908). In this control example, there is no distinction between the high probability state and the low probability state in the lottery of the normal symbol, and the probability of winning the normal symbol is always constant. Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S907 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 11", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "12 to 239", the normal symbol is out. (See FIG. 26 (d)).

After that, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S908 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S909), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S909: Yes), it is a hit. (S910), and the process proceeds to S912. In the process of S910, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "○" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

In the process of S909, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S909: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S911). In the process of S911, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S912.

When the processing of S910 or S911 is completed, it is determined in the processing of S912 whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S912). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S912: Yes), the time saving middle hit flag 203q is set to ON (S913). Next, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device is set to 3 seconds (S914), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S912: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device is set to 4 seconds (S915), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the variation display time is very short, "4 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the normal state of the normal symbol. The ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball entry port 640.

On the other hand, in the process of S902, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S902: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed. (S916). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S914 or the process of S915 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device.

In the process of S916, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S916: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S916, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S916: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S917). In the process of S917, the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S910, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display device. ) Is set to be done. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S911, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. Is set. When the stop display is set by the process of S917, the variation display in the second symbol display device ends when the second symbol display update process (see S1708) of the main process (see FIG. 53) is executed next. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted on) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S910 or the process of S911.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (FIGS. 45, S106) is the ordinary symbol. It is determined whether it is a hit (S918). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S918: Yes), the electric accessory control process is set (S919), and this process ends.

Next, the electric accessory control process (S919) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 46. This electric accessory control process (S919) is a process executed in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and FIG. 46 is an electric accessory control process (see FIG. 45). It is a flowchart which showed S919).

In the electric accessory control process, first, it is determined whether or not the time saving middle hit flag 203q is on (S1001). When the time saving middle hit flag 203q is on (S1001: Yes), the time saving middle hit flag 203q is set to off (S1002), and then it is determined whether or not the time saving is in progress (S1003). When the time is shortened (S1003: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is opened (3 seconds) and closed. (5 seconds), set to open (3 seconds) (S1004), and end this process.

On the other hand, in S1001, when the time saving middle hit flag 203q is not on (that is, off) (S1001: Yes), or in S1003, when the time saving is not in (S1003: No), the pachinko machine 10 has a normal symbol. Since it is the normal state of, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set to opening (0.1 seconds), closing (0.1 seconds), and opening (0.1 seconds). (S1005, this process ends.

In this way, in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the opening operation of the second entrance 640 is "opening (0.1 seconds), closing (0.1 seconds), opening (opening (0.1 seconds)", as compared with the normal state of the normal symbol. 0.1 seconds) → open (3 seconds), close (5 seconds), open (3 seconds) ”, which makes it easy for the ball to enter the second entry port 640.

Further, when the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set by the electric accessory control process (S919), the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1706) of the main process (see FIG. 53) is executed next. , The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process (FIG. 47, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S1101). Here, the passage of the sphere at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S1101: Yes), the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S1102). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S1103).

If the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S1101: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203f is less than 4 (S1103: Yes), the normal symbol hold ball The value (M) of the number counter 203f is added by 1 (S1104). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set to the first of the free hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S1105). In the process of S1105, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the hold second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the hold third area is set, and if the value is 3, the hold fourth area is set as the first area. When the process of S1105 is completed, the normal map look-ahead process is executed (S1106).

Here, the general drawing look-ahead process will be described with reference to FIG. 48 (S1106). FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal map look-ahead process (S1106). In the normal figure look-ahead process (FIG. 48, S1106), first, the pre-determination based on the value of the second random number counter C4 newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is executed (S1201). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 newly stored in the process of S1105 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c.

Next, the hit pre-determination result and the fluctuation time determination result are acquired based on the pre-determination result (S1202). After that, the Fuzu winning information command is set (S1203), this processing is terminated, and the process returns to the through-gate passage processing.

Returning to FIG. 47, the description will be continued. When the normal figure look-ahead process (S1106) is completed, it is then determined whether or not the current time is a big hit of a special symbol (S1107). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S1107: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S1107: No), it is determined whether or not the present is a small hit (S1108). As a result of the determination, if the small hit is in progress (S1108: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

If it is not in the small hit (S1108: No), it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is changing (S1109). As a result of the determination, if the second special symbol is changing (S1109: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. If it is not during the change of the second special symbol (S1109: No), it is determined whether or not the time is being shortened (S1109). As a result of the determination, if the time is shortened (S1110: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is. If the time is not shortened (S1110: No), an error command is set (S1111), and this process ends.

On the other hand, whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S1101: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol hold ball count counter. If the value (M) of 203f is not less than 4 (S1103: No), the normal drawing look-ahead process (S1106) is skipped, the processes S1107 to S1111 are executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, the V inlet passing process (S108) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a V inlet passing process (S108) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

In the V entrance passing process (S108), it is first determined whether or not a small hit is being made (S1301). In the process of S1301, when it is determined that a small hit is being made (S1301: Yes), a V entrance passage command is set (S1302), and this process is terminated. If it is not in the small hit (S1302: No), it means that the ball has entered the second variable winning device 650 even though it is not a small hit game, so an error command is set (S1303) and this process is performed. To finish.

The V inlet passage command set in the process of S1302 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V entrance passage command, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the balls that have passed through the V entrance, and transmits a command for causing the display control device 114 to execute an effect based on the V entrance passage. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect during the small hit game based on the ball entering the second variable winning device 650 (see FIG. 12).

Next, the V-pass processing (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the V-passing process (S109). This V-passing process (S109) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

In the V-passing process, first, the V-passing jackpot type value stored in the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203m is acquired (S1401), and the V flag 203n indicating the acquired V-passing jackpot type is set to ON (S1401). S1402). Then, the V passage command is set (S1403).

Next, it is determined whether or not the small hit type corresponds to the small hit B (S1404). If it is determined in the process of S1404 that it corresponds to the small hit B (S1404: Yes), an error command is set (S1405), and this process is terminated. In this embodiment, the ball can pass through the V winning switch 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650 in the small hit A, C, D or E (that is, other than the small hit B), and the small hit type value is used. Only when the small hit A, C, D or E (that is, other than the small hit B) is set. Therefore, when the small hit type value is small hit B and the V passing process (S1401) executed based on the ball passing through the V winning switch 650e3 is executed, the V winning switch 650e3 is illegally executed. It is considered that this is the case when the ball is won. In this case, by setting an error command in the process of S1405, an error output is executed and a fraudulent act can be detected.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S1501) as a setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1601). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S1602). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S1603).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 7) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1604), and if it is turned on (S1604: Yes), the process shifts to S1612. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605), and if it is not stored (S1605: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S1612 in this case as well.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1606), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1607: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S1612 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1716 of FIG. 53, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1612, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S1612). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S1613, S1614) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1613, S1614) is executed. Further, the initialization process (S1613, S1614) of the RAM 203 is similarly executed when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S1613, S1614), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1613), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1614). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1610.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S1605: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S1605: Yes). S1607: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1608). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1610. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S1610, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S1611), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1701 to S1709 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1712 and S1713 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 53), first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), the output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is stored on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1701). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) and the start winning process (see FIG. 43) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the jackpot start command, the round number command, and the jackpot end command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 54) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1702). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1703), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or the first 1 The jackpot control process for opening or closing the first specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1704). In the jackpot control process, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and the maximum opening time of the first specific winning opening 65a has elapsed, or a specified number of balls have won a prize in the first specific winning opening 65a. Is determined. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the first specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the first specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1704) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

Next, in the case of a small hit state of a special symbol, various effects according to the small hit are executed, and a small hit control process for opening or closing the opening / closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 is executed ( S1705). In the small hit control process, the opening / closing door 650f1 is opened based on the opening scenario, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the opening / closing door 650f1 has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the opening / closing door 650f1. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed. In the present embodiment, the small hit control process (S1705) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

When the process of S1705 is completed, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is executed (S1706). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the electric accessory control process (FIGS. 46, S1005) executed in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45), the electric accessory opening / closing process is performed. Start opening / closing control of objects. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening operation set in the process of S1004 or the process of S1005 in the electric accessory control process (FIGS. 46 and S1005) is completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1707). In the first symbol display update process, S405, S410, and S412 of the normal variation start process (FIGS. 40 and S302) or the time saving variation start process (FIGS. 41 and S303) executed in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 39). When the fluctuation pattern is set by the processing of S505, S510, and S512, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B start the fluctuation display according to the fluctuation pattern. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is used. Turn off and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. Turns off and the red LED turns on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, the variation set by the process of S405, S410, S412 or the process of S505, S510, S512 of the normal variation start process (see FIG. 40) or the time saving variation start process (see FIG. 41). When the fluctuation time corresponding to the pattern ends, the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is terminated, and the normal fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 40) or the time saving fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 41) is terminated. The stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in the display mode set by the processing of S404, S409, S411 or the processing of S504, S509, S511.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1708). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S914 or the process of S915 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device. .. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol "○" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S917 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45), the variation executed in the second symbol display device. The display is finished, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighting display) in the display mode set by the processing of S910 or the processing of S911 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 45). To do.

Next, the storage device control process for setting the opening and closing of the storage valve 750a attached to the storage device 750 is executed (S1709).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1710), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1710: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1711). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1711: Yes), the process is shifted to S1701, and each process after S1701 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1711: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1712, S1713).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1712). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1702 (S1713).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1701 to S1709 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the processing of S1710, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1710: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 51 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1714 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1714), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S1715). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1716), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1717), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1710 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1701 to S1709, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1712 and S1713 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1701. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1701 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S1601) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1701 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1704) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1704). This jackpot control process (S1704) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 53), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed, and the first This is a process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1801). Specifically, if the jackpot start flag 203h is set to ON by the process of S219 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38), it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1801, when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1801: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203h is set to off (S1802), and the opening command is set (S1803).

The jackpot start command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the jackpot start command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display jackpot start command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect of starting the jackpot. When the processing of S1803 is completed, the storage release flag 203p is set to ON (S1804), and the main processing is completed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1801, if the jackpot of the special symbol is not started (S1801: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1805). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. Specifically, it is determined by whether or not the jackpot middle flag 203i is on. In the process of S1805, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S1805: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1805, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S1805: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1806). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1806: Yes), the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened (S1807), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1807). S1808). After setting the number of rounds command, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display round number command according to the round number to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the continuous jackpot is executed in the voice lamp control device 113, the display round number command according to the cumulative number of rounds is transmitted. Therefore, the cumulative number of rounds in the continuous jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the player can be made aware that the jackpot has continued for a long time, so that the player's interest can be improved.

On the other hand, in the process of S1806, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1806: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S1809). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65, or when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 30 seconds) have passed in the first variable winning device 65. , 10 in total) When a prize is won, it is judged that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of S1809, if the closing condition of the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S1809: Yes), the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is closed. , End this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is not satisfied (S1809: No), it is determined whether or not it is the timing of the end of the big hit (S1811). Specifically, when the special game state (all 16 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state is completed, it is determined that the jackpot ends.

In the process of S1811, when it is the timing of the end of the jackpot (S1811: Yes), the jackpot end command is set (S1812), and the jackpot middle flag 203i is set to off (S1813).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special game being executed is the jackpot B (S1814). In the process of S1814, if it is determined that the hit is not B (7R time saving no big hit) (S1814: No), the time saving medium counter 203g is set to 1 (S1815), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1814, if it is determined that the hit is B (7R time saving no big hit) (S1814: Yes), the process of S1815 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

The jackpot end command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the jackpot end command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects a display mode of the jackpot end effect based on the prize information stored in the special figure winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display jackpot end command corresponding to the selected jackpot end display mode is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot end command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the jackpot end effect.

Next, the small hit control process (S1705) will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a small hit control process (S1705) executed in the main process (see FIG. 53). This small hit control process (S1705) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the small hit state of a special symbol, various effects according to the small hit can be executed, or the first 2 This is a process for opening or closing the opening / closing door 650f1 of the variable winning device 650.

In the small hit control process, first, it is determined whether or not the small hit of the special symbol is started (S1901). Specifically, if the small hit start flag 203j is set to ON by the process of S610 of the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 42), it is determined that the small hit of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1901, when the small hit of the special symbol is started (S1901: Yes), the small hit start flag 203j is set to off (S1902), and the small hit start command is set (S1903).

The small hit start command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the small hit start command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display small hit start command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display small hit start command, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect of starting the small hit.

When the process of S1903 is completed, the V inlet solenoid 209a and the flow path solenoid 209c are set to ON (S1904) based on the opening scenario, the operation of the retention member 650n is started (S1905), and the present process is completed.

The opening scenario referred to in the processing of S1904 is set in the above-mentioned small hit start setting processing (see FIG. 42), and the opening scenario of the V inlet solenoid 209a is set regardless of the small hit type, and the flow path. The opening scenario of the solenoid 209c is set only when the small hit type is A, C, D or E. Therefore, in all the small hit games, the opening / closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 is opened, and the ball can be entered into the second variable winning device 650. On the other hand, only in the small hits A, C, D or E in which the flow path solenoid 209c is turned on, the ball that has entered the second variable winning device 650 can flow down to the special discharge flow path 650e2. That is, the small hits A, C, D or E are the small hit types to which the big hits are given, and the small hits B are the small hit types to which the big hits are not given.

Further, in the process of S1905, the operation of the retention member 650n is started (the retention solenoid 209b is turned on), so that one ball can be retained in the distribution destination region 650h3.

On the other hand, in the process of S1901 when it is not the timing to start the small hit of the special symbol (S1901: No), it is determined whether the small hit of the special symbol is in progress (S1906). As for the small hits of the special symbols, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the small hits of the special symbols (including during the small hit game of the special symbols). Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the small hit game of the special symbol. Specifically, it is determined by whether or not the small hit medium flag 203k is on. In the process of S1906, if it is not during the small hit of the special symbol (S1906: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S1906, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the small hit (S1906: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the V entrance is satisfied (S1907). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 6.5 seconds) has elapsed after opening the opening / closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650, or when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 6.5 seconds) have passed in the second variable winning device 650. (10 in total) When a prize is won, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

The closing condition may be that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls have entered the second specific winning opening 650a.

In the process of S1907, when the closing condition of the opening / closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 is satisfied (S1907: Yes), the V inlet solenoid 209a is used to close the opening / closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650. It is set to off (S1908), the retention solenoid 209b is set to off in order to end the operation of the retention member 650n (S1909), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the opening / closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 is not satisfied (S1907: No), it is determined whether or not it is the timing of the end of the small hit (S1910). Specifically, it is determined that the timing of the end of the small hit is after a predetermined time has elapsed (3 seconds in this control example) after the above-mentioned V inlet closing condition is satisfied. As a result, the small hit end process (off of the flow path solenoid 209c) can be executed after the operation of the retention member 650n is completed, so that the ball retained in the distribution destination region 650h3 is moved to the V winning switch 650e3. You can surely enter the ball.

In the processing of S1910, when it is the timing of the end of the small hit (S1910: Yes), the small hit medium flag 203k is set to off (S1911), the small hit end processing is executed (S1912), and each solenoid is released. The scenario is cleared (S1913), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1910, if it is not the timing of the end of the small hit (S1910: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Here, the details of the small hit end processing (S1912) will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the small hit end process (S1912). This small hit end process (S1912) is a process executed when it is determined in the small hit control process that the timing is the end of the small hit.

In the small hit end process (S1912), first, the flow path solenoid 209c is set to off (S2001), and it is determined whether or not the V flag 203n is on (S2002). In the process of S2002, when it is determined that the V flag 203n is on (S2002: Yes), it means that the ball has passed through the V winning switch 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650 during the small hit game. A process for starting the execution of the jackpot game based on the passage of the V winning switch 650e3 is performed.

Specifically, the opening scenario of the first specific winning opening 65a is set based on the jackpot type corresponding to the V flag 203n (S2003), and the start of the jackpot is set based on the jackpot type corresponding to the V flag 203n (S2003). S2004). Next, the jackpot start flag 203h and the jackpot middle flag 203i are set on (S2005), and the V flag 203n is set off (S2006). Then, the time saving / medium counter 230 g is set to 0 (S2007), the value of the V-passing jackpot type value stored in the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203m is cleared (S2008), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2002, when it is determined that the V flag 203n is not on (S2002: No), it means that the ball does not pass through the V winning switch 650e3 to the small hit ball, so no big hit is given. A small hit end command is set to end (S2009). After that, the process of S2008 is executed, and this process is terminated.

The small hit end command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the jackpot end command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects a display mode of the jackpot end effect based on the prize information stored in the special figure winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display jackpot end command corresponding to the selected jackpot end display mode is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot end command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the jackpot end effect.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process (S1706) will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an electric accessory opening / closing process (S1706) executed in the main process (see FIG. 53). This electric accessory opening / closing process (S1706) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53), and is a process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640.

In the electric accessory opening / closing process, first, it is determined whether or not the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2101). The opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set by the electric accessory control process (FIGS. 46, S1005) executed in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45). In the process of S2101, if the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is not set (S2101: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2101, when the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2101: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the first opening timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2102). If it is determined in the process of S2102 that it is the first opening timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2102: Yes), the opening of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2103), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2102 that it is not the first opening timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2102: No), then it is determined whether it is the first closing timing of the electric accessory 640a. (S2104). When it is determined that it is the first closing timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2104: Yes), the closure of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2105), and then it is determined whether the time saving operation is in progress (S2106). ). If it is determined in the process of S2106 that the operation time is not shortened (S2106: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined in the process of S2106 that the operation time is shortened (S2106: Yes), a close command is set (S2107), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2104 that it is not the first closing timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2104: No), then it is determined whether it is the second opening timing of the electric accessory 640a. (S2108). When it is determined that it is the second opening timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2108: Yes), the opening of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2109), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2108 that it is not the second opening timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2108: No), then it is determined whether it is the second closing timing of the electric accessory 640a. (S2110). If it is determined that it is not the second closing timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2110: No), then it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the second entry port 640 (S2111). If it is determined that the ball has not entered the second entry port 640 (S211: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2110 that it is the second closing timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2108: Yes), and when it is determined in S2111 that the ball has entered the second entry port 640. (S211: Yes), the closure of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2112). Then, the setting of the electric accessory 640a opening operation is cleared (S2113), and this process is terminated.

Next, the storage device control process (S1709) will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a storage device control process (S1709) executed in the main process (see FIG. 53). This storage device control process (S1709) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53), and is a process for setting the opening and closing of the storage valve 750a attached to the storage device 750.

In the storage device control process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the release counter 203pa is larger than 1 (S2201). When it is determined that the value of the release counter 203pa is not larger than 1 (that is, 0 or 1) (S2201: No), then it is determined whether or not the storage release flag 203p is ON (S2202). If it is determined that the storage valve is ON (S2202: Yes), storage release (that is, opening of the storage valve 750a) is set (S2203). Then, the value of the release counter 203pa is set to 1, and the process proceeds to S2205. On the other hand, in the process of S2201, when it is determined that the value of the release counter 203pa is larger than 1 (S2201: Yes), the processes of S2201 to S2204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S2205.

In the process of S2205, it is determined whether or not the value of the release counter 203pa is 25000 (S2205). If it is determined that the value of the release counter 203pa is not 25000 (S2205: No), the value of the release counter 203pa is added by 1 (S2206), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2205, when it is determined that the value of the release counter 203pa is 25000 (S2205: Yes), storage closure (that is, closure of the storage valve 750a) is set (S2207), and the storage release flag 203p is set. Set to off (S2208). Next, the value of the release counter 203pa is set to 0, and this process ends.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 59 to 70, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S3001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S3119 (see FIG. 60) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S3002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 60, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power off command from the main control device 110 (see S3116 in FIG. 60), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power off process of S3119. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S3119 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S3002: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S3119 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S3006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S3003: Yes), the process proceeds to S3004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data corruption of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S3004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S3119 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S3003: No), and the process proceeds to S3008.

If the power off processing flag is on (S3002: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S3119, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S3004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S3004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S3004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S3006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S3005: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S3007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S3008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S3008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S3119 is executed (see S3118 in FIG. 60). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S3119 is executed, the process of S3008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S3119 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S3008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S3009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S3010), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S3011) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S3008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, so that the process of S3008 is performed via the processes of S3004 to S3006. This is the case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S3008: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S3009, is skipped, the process is shifted to S3010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S3010). Next, interrupt permission is set (S3011), and the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S3009 is that when the processing of S3008 is reached via the processing of S3004 to S3006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S3004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S3101 this time was executed (S3101), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S3101: No), the process proceeds to S3112 without performing the processes of S3102 to S3111. In the process of S3101, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S3102 to S3111 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S3112, the variation display setting process of S3113, the effect state setting process of S3114, and the specific effect setting process of S3115 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S3112 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main controller 110, and by executing the processing of S3113 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing can be used. Based on this, the settings related to the variable effect can be made without delay. Further, since the processing of S3114 is executed in a short cycle, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is changed to the display content corresponding to the current gaming state without delay based on the command received by the command determination processing. Can be made to.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S3101 (S3101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S3103 to S3111 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3102). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S3108 described later (S3103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S3104). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process proceeds to the process of S3105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S3105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S3106). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S3107). This frame button input monitoring / effect processing monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the effect is pressed, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S3108), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S3109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S3109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S3110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S3108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S3109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After the counter update process (S3111), a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control unit 110 is performed (S3112). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 61 to 65.

Next, the process proceeds to S3113. In the process of S3113, the variable display setting process is executed (S3113). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67.

Next, the process proceeds to S3114. In the process of S3114, the effect state setting process is executed (S3114). In this effect state setting process, in order to set the effect state for making each effect mode (display mode of the third symbol, display mode of the reserved symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 correspond to the game state. The process is executed, and a display effect state command is generated and set based on the set effect state. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this effect state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 68.

When the processing of S3114 is completed, the process proceeds to the processing of S3115. In the process of S3115, the specific effect setting process is executed (S3115). In this specific effect setting process, a process for setting an effect different from the variable effect for showing the lottery result of each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, normal figure) is executed. The details of this specific effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 69.

Then, when the specific effect setting process is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S3116). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S3116 (S3116: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S3118), and the power-off process is executed (S3119). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S3120), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also deleted.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S3116 (S3116: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S3117), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S3117: No), the process returns to the process of S3101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3117: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S3112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S3112). This command determination process (S3112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. It is a process for.

In the command determination process (FIG. 61, S3112), first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control unit 110 is read from the command storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed. It is determined whether or not a variation pattern related command has been received (S3201). The variation pattern-related command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (fluctuation time) of the special symbol or a command for notifying the variation pattern (fluctuation time) of the normal symbol, and is a command from the main control device 110. The selected fluctuation pattern (variation time) is output corresponding to each of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, or the normal symbol.

If it is determined that the variation pattern-related command has been received in the process of S3201 (S3201: Yes), the variation pattern-related process (S3202) is executed. This variation pattern-related processing is used to extract the variation pattern based on the variation pattern-related command output (received) from the main control device 110 and cause the display control device 114 to execute the effect display. Here, the fluctuation pattern-related processing (S3202) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 62.

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern related process (S3202). In this variation pattern-related process (S3202), it is determined which symbol the variation pattern command received this time corresponds to, and based on the determination result, the process corresponding to the received symbol is executed. .. In this fluctuation pattern-related processing (S3202), it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern-related command received this time is a fluctuation pattern command for a special symbol (special symbol) (S3301). If it is determined in the process of S3301 that the command is a variation pattern command for special figures (S3301: Yes), the process proceeds to S3302.

When it is determined in the process of S3302 that it is the variation pattern command for special figure 2 (S3302: Yes), as shown in FIG. 62, first, it is determined whether the variation pattern received this time is the variation pattern command for special figure. (S3301). Here, if it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern received this time is the fluctuation pattern command for special figure 2 (S3302), and if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command is for special figure 2 (S3302: Yes), then , Special 2 fluctuation flag 223s is set to ON (S3303), the special figure fluctuation start flag is set to ON, and the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received command (S3305), while the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is set. Will be done.

The variation start flag 223d (variation start flag for special symbols) provided in the variation display of the special symbol is set to on, the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S3305), and this process is terminated. .. On the other hand, in the processing of S3301, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern-related command received this time is not the fluctuation pattern command for special figures, the fluctuation start flag 223u for normal drawings is set to ON (S3306), and the received fluctuation pattern is set. The variation pattern type is extracted from the command (S3307), and this process ends. The variation pattern type extracted here indicates that the variation pattern type of the special symbol is the variation pattern type of the special symbol in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 for each special symbol type (corresponding first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol). It is stored in an identifiable format, and in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 66) described later, the start of the variable display effect of the special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the special symbol are set for the display control device 114. It is used for notification (when setting a variation pattern command for displaying a special symbol).

Returning to FIG. 61, the description will be continued. In the process of S3201, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern related command has not been received (S3201: No), it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3203). If it is determined that a stop type command (either a special figure 1 stop type command, a special figure 2 stop type command, or a normal figure stop type command) has been received (S3203: Yes), it corresponds to the type of the received command. The stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON (S3204). Specifically, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received, the stop type selection flag 223e corresponding to the first special symbol is set to on, and when the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the second special The stop type selection flag 223e corresponding to the symbol is set to on, and when the normal symbol stop type command is received, the stop type selection flag 223e corresponding to the normal symbol is set to on.

When the processing of S3204 is completed, next, the stop type (one of complete deviation (disengagement), reach deviation, small hit, and jackpot (hit)) is extracted from the received stop type command (S3205), and this processing is performed. finish. The stop type extracted in the process of S3205 is stored in the voice lamp control device 113 in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221. Then, it is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 66) described later is executed, and is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

In the process of S3203, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S3203: No), it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3206). When it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received (S3206: Yes), the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 included in the received hold ball number command are included. (That is, the number of reserved balls in the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is extracted, and the corresponding counter value provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is set according to the extracted counter value. The counter value is updated (S3207). More specifically, when the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is stored. When the value is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c.

In the processing of S3207. When a normal symbol hold ball number command indicating the number of hold balls of a normal symbol is received, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter (that is, the number of hold balls of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol), which is not shown, is extracted and extracted. The corresponding counter value provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is also updated according to the counter value.

When the process of S3207 is completed, the process related to the number of reserved balls is executed (S3208). In this reserved ball number-related process (S3208), a process for setting various flags and display commands is executed based on the reserved ball number in the special figure 2. Here, the reserved ball number-related processing (S3208) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the contents of the reserved ball number related processing (S3208).

When the process related to the number of reserved balls (S3208) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls is updated in Special 2 (Special Figure 2) (S3401). Here, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special 2 is not updated (S3401: No), that is, when the number of reserved balls command received this time is not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2, this process is terminated as it is. .. On the other hand, in the process of S3401, when it is determined that the number of special 2 reserved balls has been updated (S3401: Yes), then it is determined whether the number of special 2 reserved balls has been updated to 1 (S3402). Here, it is determined whether the number of special 2 reserved balls has been updated to 1, that is, whether the number of special 2 reserved balls has changed from "0" to "1", that is, from the state where there is no special 2 reserved ball to the state where there is. To do.

In the process of S3402, when it is determined that the number of special 2 hold balls has been updated to 1 (S3402: Yes), the special 2 hold flag 223n is set to on, and then the end effect execution flag 223x is set to on. It is determined whether or not the flag is set (S3404). When it is determined that the end effect execution flag 223x is set to ON, that is, when it is determined that the end effect (see FIG. 19B) is being executed by the third symbol display device 81. (S3404: Yes), a display victory command is set (S3405), and this process ends.

When the display victory command is set, the character "victory" is displayed as the effect result of the end effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 20A), which is advantageous to the player. It is notified that the state will continue. If the ball wins a prize in Special Figure 2 during the period during which the end effect is being executed, the effect may be switched even during the end effect, or the effect may be switched in advance as in the present embodiment. At the end of the end effect executed for the specified period, the special figure 2 may be notified that the ball has won a prize.

In addition, as in the present embodiment, the timing at which the ball wins in the special figure 2 (second ball entry port 640) and the effect that the ball wins in the special figure 2 (second ball entry port 640) are notified. If there is a possibility that a time lag may occur between the timing and the timing of the operation, for example, the reserved symbol displaying the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 may be deleted during the end effect execution period. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being notified of the effect result of the end effect due to the increase in the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 even though the end effect is continued.

Returning to FIG. 63, the description will be continued. In the process of S3402, if it is determined that the number of special 2 reserved balls has not been updated to 1 (S3402: No), then it is determined whether the number of special 2 reserved balls has been updated to the upper limit (4) (S3406). ), When it is determined that the update has been performed (S3406: Yes), the special 2 hold upper limit flag 223p is set to ON (S3407: Yes), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3406 that the number of special 2 reserved balls has not been updated to the upper limit, the process of S3407 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640 (starting winning) or the ball passes through the through gate 67. Therefore, every time there is a start winning prize, the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 are set by the processing of S2210 as the main control device. It is possible to match the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, respectively. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d or special of the main control device 110. Even if the value deviates from the value of the symbol 2 hold ball counter 203e, if the hold ball number command is notified based on the start winning, the special symbol 1 hold ball counter 223b or the special symbol of the voice lamp control device 113 The value of the 2 reserved ball counter 223c can be modified to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e of the main controller 110.

Further, in the process of S3206, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S3206: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information related command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3209). If it is determined that the winning information-related command has been received in the processing of S3209 (S3209: Yes), the winning information-related processing is executed (S3210). In this prize information-related process (S3210), various flags and various counters that are referred to for setting various effects executed by the third symbol display device 81 are set. As a result, based on the lottery result of the pending special symbol, the special symbol executed before the change of the pending special symbol starts (that is, before the change of the target special symbol). During the variable display), it is possible to execute an effect showing the lottery result of the special symbol for which the winning information command is transmitted, and the lottery result of one special symbol is displayed to the player by using the variable display period of a plurality of special symbols. Suggestion notification can be made, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

Here, the winning information-related processing (S3210) will be described with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information-related processing (S3210). When this prize information-related process (S3210) is executed, first, it is determined whether the prize information-related command received this time is a prize information command related to a special figure (special symbol) (S3501). If it is determined that the winning information command is related to the special figure (S3501: Yes), the received winning information command is stored in the special drawing winning information storage area 223a (S3502), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3501, if it is determined that the prize information-related command received this time is not the prize information command related to the special figure (special symbol) (it is the prize information command related to the general figure) (S3501: No), the prize is won. The information is stored in the prize information storage area 223t for general drawing (S3503), and this process is terminated.

In the gaming machine in which the winning information of the special symbol (pre-reading of the special symbol) and the winning information of the normal symbol (pre-reading of the normal symbol) are executed, the output is output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. The output timing of each winning information command is the same, and when determining by the winning information related processing (S3210), a priority is set for each winning information command, and only the winning information command having the higher priority is determined. It may be configured as follows. As a result, it is not necessary to execute different discrimination processes for each prize information command, the processing load can be reduced, and the types and numbers of prize information commands discriminated on the voice lamp control device 113 side are irregular. Since it can be reduced to, it is possible to easily perform an unintended effect of the player.

That is, the winning information included in the winning information command is acquired when the ball enters each entry port (first entry port 64 or second entry opening 640) or through gate 67 by the main control device 110. Since each of the counter values is the result of executing the determination in advance before the lottery based on the entry is executed, or the information indicating the value based on the counter value, the voice lamp control device 113 Even if the winning information command is not acquired by the side, the game will not be hindered. Therefore, when the predetermined conditions are met (the special drawing winning information command and the general drawing winning information command are received at the same time). In some cases), it is configured so as not to intentionally acquire one of the winning information commands, thereby achieving the above-mentioned effect. Further, in a configuration in which there are a plurality of acquisition conditions (entry) for one symbol (first special symbol), such as the left first entrance 64a and the right first entrance 64b of the present embodiment, a prize is won. The information command includes information that allows the voice lamp control device 113 to identify which acquisition condition is based on the winning information command, and the processing based on the winning information command is based on the identification result. May be variable. Specifically, for example, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a winning information command based on the ball entering the left first ball entry port 64a, an effect based on the received winning information command (so-called look-ahead effect). May be configured to be performed more frequently than when a winning information command based on a ball entering the right first ball entry port 64b is received. As a result, the frequency with which the look-ahead effect is executed can be easily changed even for the same first special symbol. According to the configuration shown in the above example, during the game aiming at the left first entrance 64a (left-handed game), the look-ahead effect based on the first special symbol can be executed (frequently executed), and the right first. During the game aiming at the entrance 64b (right-handed game), the look-ahead effect based on the first special symbol may be difficult to execute (can be executed with a low probability). As a result, it is possible to set the effect mode according to the game state.

Returning to FIG. 61, the description will be continued. In the process of S3209, when it is determined that the winning information-related command has not been received (S3209: No), it is determined whether or not the winning-related command has been received next (S3211). When the hit-related command is received (S3211: Yes), the hit-related process (S3212) is executed.

Here, the hit-related processing (S3212) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 65. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a hit-related process (S3212). This hit-related process (S3212) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 61) that a hit-related command has been received.

In the hit-related process, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot start command has been received (S3601). When it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S3601: Yes), the jackpot start command for display is set (S3602), and this process ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting (notifying) the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S3601: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S3603). In the process of S3603, when it is determined that the round number command has been received (S3603: Yes), 1 is added to the round number accumulation counter (S3604). After that, the display round number command is set based on the round number cumulative counter (S3605), and this process ends.

If it is determined in the process of S3603 that the round number command has not been received (S3603: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot end command has been received (S3606). When it is determined that the jackpot end command has been received in the process of S3606 (S3606: Yes), the display jackpot end command is set (S3607), and the present process is terminated.

In the process of S3606, when it is determined that the jackpot end command has not been received (S3606: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit start command has been received (S3608).

If it is determined in the process of S3608 that the small hit start command has been received (S3608: Yes), the small hit start command for display is set based on the small hit type (S3609), and this process ends. In the process of S3608, when it is determined that the small hit start command has not been received (S3608: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit end command has been received (S3610).

In the process of S3610, when it is determined that the small hit end command has been received (S3610: Yes), a small hit end command for display is set in order to execute an effect suggesting the end of the small hit game (S3611). , End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S3610, when it is determined that the small hit end command has not been received (S3610: No), it is determined whether or not the V passing command has been received (S3612).

In the process of S3612, if it is determined that the V pass command has been received (S3612: Yes), the process based on the entry of the second variable winning device 650 into the V winning switch 650e3 is executed, and the display V passing command is executed. Is set (S3613), and this process is terminated. In this embodiment, there is a measuring means for measuring the number of times the V passing command is received during the period when the flag 223i in the consecutive villas is set to ON, and for display corresponding to the number of times measured by the measuring means. The V-pass command can be set. Specifically, the display V passage command is set so that the privilege effect is executed only when the number of measurements by the measuring means exceeds a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). As a result, the player can be made to aim for more V passages, and the game can be enthusiastically performed.

In addition, other conditions may be set as the condition for setting the content of the display V passing command. For example, the number of small hit games that did not pass V and the number of small hit games that passed V may be set respectively. A means for measuring and calculating the ratio may be provided, and the content of the display V passage command may be set based on the ratio calculated by the means. As a result, a player who has executed many small hit games that do not pass V can execute a blessing effect when the V has passed, or a player who has a high percentage of small hit games that have passed V. On the other hand, it is possible to execute a production to congratulate that fact.

If it is determined in the process of S3612 that the V-pass command has not been received (S3612: No), this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 61, the description will be continued. In the process of S3211, when it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S3211: No), then it is determined whether or not the notification command has been received (S3213). When it is determined that the notification command has been received in the processing of S3213 (S3213: Yes), the notification voice is set, the display command for notification is set (S3214), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S3213, when it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S3213: No), it is determined whether or not the status command has been received (S3215). When it is determined that the status command has been received (S3215: Yes), the status information based on the received status command is stored in the status storage area 223k (S3216), and this process is terminated. The state commands received here include a normal state command for indicating that the game state is a normal state, a jackpot state command for indicating that the game state is a jackpot state, and a small hit state for the game state. A small hit state command to indicate that the game state is a time saving state, a time saving state command to indicate that the game state is a time saving state, the electric accessory 640a is operating, and how many times it is operating. This is a state command related to the game state that can be grasped on the main control device 110 side, such as an operation state command for indicating.

The above-mentioned state command is configured to be received from the main control device 110 when the gaming state is changed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the process of determining the content of the received state command from becoming complicated and reduce the processing load. Further, when a power failure or the like occurs and the data in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is erased, the state command currently set in the power failure recovery process is output. The output timing of the state command is not limited to this, and the currently set game state may be output periodically, or the game state does not shift and a specific output condition is satisfied. In this case (for example, during a jackpot game, the timing when a predetermined round is reached, or in the normal state, the timing when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number), the status command may be output. As a result, the current gaming state can be more reliably grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

On the other hand, in the process of S3215, if it is determined that the state command has not been received (S3215: No), then the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S3217). In the process of S3217, for example, it is determined whether or not a stop command has been received from the main control device 110, and when it is determined that the stop command has been received, a display stop command is set based on the received command, or a game is played. When a ball entry command set based on the ball entering each entry port provided on the board 13 is received, the number of entry balls is accumulated for each type of entry opening where the ball enters. , Executes a process such as setting a command for the number of balls to be displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the variation display setting process (S3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S3113). This variation display setting process (S3113) is one process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation display setting process (see FIG. 66) is a process executed in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, in the present embodiment, each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, normal figure) corresponding to the main symbol mainly displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is arranged according to the set effect state. Designed to be variable. In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is set for each of the above-mentioned symbols and notified to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 sets the main symbol (the symbol to be displayed in the first display area Dm) and the secondary symbol (the second) based on the received display variation pattern command and the contents of the received display effect state command. The effect display corresponding to the design (design to be displayed in the display area Dn) is displayed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 in the gaming machine in which different effect displays are executed corresponding to a plurality of effect states.

In the variation display setting process (S3113), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3701). Then, when it is determined that the special figure variation start flag 223d is off (S3701: No), the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so the process proceeds to S3707. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223d for the special symbol is on (S3701: Yes), the detailed mode of the variation display of the special symbol this time is based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110. Each process of S3702 to S3706 for determining is executed.

More specifically, first, the variation start flag 223d for special figures is set to off (S3702), then the extracted variation pattern is acquired (S3703), and it is determined whether or not the time saving medium flag 223g is on (S3702). S3704). In the process of S3704, if it is determined that the time saving medium flag 223g is on (S3704: Yes), then the time saving medium flag is set to off (S3705), and the variation pattern command for displaying the special figure is set (S3704: Yes). The process proceeds to S3706) and S3707. On the other hand, in the process of S3704, if it is determined that the time saving / medium flag 223 g is not on (off) (S3704: No), the process of S3705 is skipped and the process of S3706 is executed.

When executing the process of S3706, 1 is subtracted from the value of the corresponding special symbol reserved ball number counter (special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c) to obtain the subtracted value. Based on this, the data in the special figure winning information storage area 223a included in the command storage area is shifted.

In the process of S3707, it is determined whether the flag indicating the stop type of the special figure is set to on among the stop type selection flags 223e of the RAM 223 (S3707). Then, when it is determined that the flag indicating the stop type of the special figure is off among the stop type selection flags 223e (S3707: No), the process proceeds to S3712. On the other hand, in the processing of S3707, when it is determined that the flag indicating the stop type of the special figure is on among the stop type selection flags 223e (S3707: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e (for special figure) is turned off. (S3708), then the stop type extracted in the process of S3205 of the command determination process (see FIG. 61) is acquired (S3709), and the acquired stop type is set as it is (S3710). Then, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set (S3711). After that, the normal map variation display setting process (S3712) is executed, and this process is terminated.

This normal map variation display setting process (S3712) is a process executed to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81 when a variation pattern command related to the normal map variation is received from the main control device 110. Here, the normal map variation display setting process (S3712) will be described with reference to FIG. 67.

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal map variation display setting process (S3712). When the normal map variation display setting process (S3712) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the normal map variation start flag 223u is set to ON. Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223u for the normal map is off (S3801: No), the fluctuation pattern command related to the normal map has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S3810 is started. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223u for the normal diagram is on (S3801: Yes), the detailed mode of the variation display of the special symbol this time is based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110. Each process of S3802 to S3810 for determining the above is executed.

Of the various processes executed in the normal map variation display setting process (S3712) of FIG. 67, the portion where the same process as the variation display setting process (S3113) described with reference to FIG. 66 is executed is The detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S3801, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223u for normal drawing is on (S3801: Yes), S3702 and S3703 for special figures executed in the above-mentioned fluctuation display setting process (S3113). For the processing, the processing of S3802 and S3803 whose target is changed to the normal diagram is executed, and then it is determined whether or not the timing at which the variation based on the received variation pattern command is executed is the time saving state (S3804). Here, the determination is made based on the state information stored in the state storage area 223k and the time reduction remaining period information stored in the time saving remaining period storage area 223h.

In the process of S3804, when it is determined that the fluctuation start timing is in the time saving state (S3804: Yes), then the timing at which the fluctuation based on the received fluctuation pattern command ends (in the case of a hit, the electric accessory 640a). (S3805), it is determined whether or not the operation content of the above is set in the time saving state (S3805). Here, by calculating the difference between the time saving remaining period information stored in the time saving remaining period storage area 223h and the fluctuation time included in the acquired fluctuation pattern, it is determined whether or not there is a time saving state at the timing when the fluctuation ends. To do.

In the process of S3805, when it is determined that the fluctuation end timing (electric accessory 640a operation start timing) is in the short time (S3805: Yes), the normal figure valid flag 223q is set to ON (S3806), and then the fluctuation It is determined whether the end timing is within 2 seconds of the time saving end (S3807). In the processing of S3807, if it is determined that the fluctuation end timing is within 2 seconds of the time reduction end (S3807: Yes), the replacement flag 223v is set to ON (S3808), and the display fluctuation pattern command (for normal drawing) is set. ) Is set (S3810), and the process proceeds to S3811.

On the other hand, in the process of S3804 or S3805, when it is determined to be No, the normal figure valid flag 223q is set to off (S3809), and the process proceeds to the process of S3810 described above. If it is determined in the processing of S3807 that the fluctuation end timing is not within 2 seconds of the end of working hours (S3807: No), the processing of S3808 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S3810.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the same processes of S3811 to S3815 as described above for S3707 to S3711 are executed, and this process is completed. The processing to be executed in S3811 to S3815 is that the target of the stop type command is the stop type command for special figures in S3707 to S3711, and the stop type command for normal drawings in S3811 to S3815. Since only the differences are different and the other contents are the same, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the effect state setting process (S3114) executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect state setting process (S3114). This effect state setting process (S3114) is a process for setting the effect state according to the state command output from the main control device 110 and the current game situation, and is set to the effect state set in this process. By outputting the based information (display effect state command) to the display control device 114, the display mode of each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, normal figure) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and The display mode of the number of reserved symbols (number of reserved symbols) of each symbol is configured to be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the effect state.

When the effect state setting process (S3114) is executed, first, the state information (game state) stored in the state storage area 223k is read out (S3901). This state information is stored in the state storage area 223k based on the state command received from the main control unit 110 in the above-mentioned command determination process (see S3112 in FIG. 61). Therefore, it is used to determine the current gaming state on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

Next, with reference to the state information stored in the state storage area 223k, it is determined whether or not the present (state information stored in the state storage area 223k) indicates the start of a jackpot (S3902). Here, if it is determined that it indicates the start of a big hit (S3902: Yes), the flag 223i in the consecutive villas is set to ON (S3903), and the process proceeds to S3918. On the other hand, in the process of S3902, when it is determined that it does not indicate the start of the jackpot (S3902: No), it is determined whether it indicates the end of the jackpot next (S3904).

If it is determined in the process of S3904 that it indicates the end of the jackpot (S3904: Yes), then it is determined whether to shift to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot (S3905). The determination of S3905 is determined based on the jackpot type information stored in the state storage area 223k. In the process of S3905, if it is determined that the process shifts to the time saving state (S3905: Yes), the time saving medium flag 223 g is set to ON (S3906), and then the process proceeds to S3918.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3905 that the time saving state is not shifted (S3905: No), the flag 223i in the consecutive villas is set to off (S3907), and the privilege effect execution flag 223w is set to off (S3908). The end effect execution flag 223x is set to off (S3909), and the process proceeds to S3918.

If it is determined in the process of S3904 that it does not indicate the end of the jackpot (S3904: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing to end the time saving state (S3910). When it is determined that it is the timing to end the time saving state (S3910: Yes), then the special 2 hold flag 223n for determining the presence or absence of the hold storage of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is set to ON. It is determined whether or not it is done (S3911). Here, if it is determined that the special 2 hold flag 223n is not on (off) (S3911: No), the consecutive villa flag 223i is set to off (S3912), and the process proceeds to S3918. Further, when it is determined that the special 2 hold flag 223n is set to ON (S3911: Yes), the process proceeds to S3918 in the same manner.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the flag 223i in the consecutive villas is set to on when the big hit is started, and the time saving state is not given after the big hit is finished, or when the time saving state is finished, the special figure 2 shows. When the hold memory is "0", the flag 223i in the consecutive villas is set to off. As a result, during the jackpot game, while the time saving state and the state in which the change (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed when the time saving state is changed to the normal state are repeatedly executed. (During a specific period that is advantageous to the player), the flag 223i during the consecutive villas can be continuously set to ON. Therefore, by measuring various values during the period when the flag 223i in the consecutive villas is turned on (for example, the number of times the jackpot is executed, the number of balls acquired, etc.), various values in the consecutive villa mode can be easily obtained. In the pachinko machine 10 having a continuous villa mode that shifts to a plurality of different gaming states, the processing can be simplified.

Returning to FIG. 68, the description will be continued. In the processing of S3910, when it is determined that it is not the timing when the time saving state ends (it is not the time saving end timing) (S3910: No), it is determined whether it is the small hit start timing (S3913), and the small hit start timing is used. If it is determined to be present (S3913: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current state is the normal state (S3914). In the process of S3914, if it is determined that the current state is the normal state (S3914: Yes), the pseudo effect flag 223r is set to ON (S3915), and the process proceeds to the process of S3918. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S3914 that the current state is not the normal state (the time saving state) (S3914: No), the above-mentioned processing of S3915 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S3918.

In the process of S3913, when it is determined that the current is not the small hit start timing (S3913: No), then it is determined whether the current is the small hit end timing (S3916), and when it is the small hit end timing. (S3916: Yes) sets the pseudo-effect flag 223r to off (S3917), and proceeds to the process of S3918. Here, in the case of the small hit end timing, if it is determined that the pseudo effect flag 223r is not set to ON (that is, the small hit end timing executed during the time saving state), S3917 The process proceeds to the process of S3918 without executing the process.

If it is determined in the process of S3916 that the current timing is not the end timing of the small hit (S3916: No), the process proceeds to the process of S3918. In the process of S3918, the current effect state is selected based on the effect state selection table 222b (S3918). Then, a display effect state command indicating the selected effect state is set (S3919), and this process ends.

Next, the specific effect setting process (S3115) executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the contents of the specific effect fixed process (S3115). This specific effect setting process (S3115) is a process for setting a display command for displaying the specific effect on the third symbol display device 81 when the specific condition is satisfied.

In the first embodiment, a privilege effect is executed when the number of reserved balls (number of reserved balls) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) reaches the upper limit (4) during the time saving state (see FIG. 21). In the case where the second special symbol (special figure 2) is not stored on hold during the time saving state, and the remaining period of the time saving state (variable remaining period of special figure 1) becomes a predetermined period (10 seconds). The end effect (see FIG. 19B) executed in 1 is configured to be executed as a specific effect.

When the display control device 114 receives a display command indicating the content of the specific effect, the display mode corresponding to the received specific effect content regardless of the variable display state (whether or not it is changing) of each symbol. Is configured to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When the specific effect setting process (S3115) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the consecutive villa flag 223i is set to on (S4001), and the consecutive villa flag 223i is not set to on (set to off). If it is determined (S4001: No), this process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the flag 223i in the consecutive villas is set to ON (S4001: Yes), then it is determined whether the privilege effect execution flag 223w is set to ON (S4002), and the flag is set to ON. If it is determined that there is no such case (S4002: No), it is determined whether or not the special 2 hold upper limit flag 223p is set to ON (S4003).

In the processing of S4003, if the special 2 hold upper limit flag 223p is set to on (S4003: Yes), the display privilege effect effect command is set (S4004), and the privilege effect execution flag 223w is set to on (S4005). ), End this process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special 2 hold upper limit flag 223p is not set to on (set to off) (S4003: No), or in the processing of S4002, the privilege effect execution flag 223w is already set to on. If it is determined that this is done (S4002: Yes), the process proceeds to S4006.

In the process of S4006, it is determined whether or not the end effect execution flag 223x is set to ON (S4006). Here, when it is determined that the end effect execution flag 223x is not set to on (set to off) (S4006: No), then it is determined whether the special 2 hold flag 223n is set to on. (S4007), when it is determined that the special 2 hold flag 223n is not set to on (set to off) (S4007; No), it is determined whether the time saving remaining period is 10 seconds (S4008). ).

In the process of S4008, the information indicating the time saving remaining period stored in the time saving remaining period storage area 223h is read out and the determination is executed. In the process of S4008, when it is determined that the time saving remaining period is 10 seconds (S4008: Yes), the display consecutive villa end effect command is set (S4009), and the end effect execution flag 223x is set to ON (S4010). ), End this process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the end effect execution flag 223x is set to ON in the processing of S4006 (S4006: Yes), or when the special 2 hold flag 223n is set to ON in the processing of S4007 (S4007). : Yes) skips the processes of S4008 to S4010 and ends the main process as it is.

As described above, in the specific effect setting process (S3315) of the present embodiment described with reference to FIG. 69, the state in which the flag 223i in the consecutive villas is set to on as the first specific effect. When the special 2 hold upper limit flag 223p is set to on (when the number of hold storages in special figure 2 reaches the upper limit) during (time saving state), the privilege effect (see FIG. 22) is configured to be executed. There is. By executing this privilege effect, it is possible to provide the player with a high-value-added effect, so that the player can enthusiastically perform the game in the time-saving state. In addition, when the privilege effect is executed, the main symbol Dmc of the normal figure is not displayed, so that the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 cannot be increased (the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 has already reached the upper limit). In this state), it is possible to suppress the effect of inciting the ball to enter the second entry port 640, and it is possible to suppress the player from giving a great sense of discomfort.

Further, since the above-mentioned privilege effect is configured to be continuously executed until the flag 223i in the consecutive villa is set to off (until the consecutive villa mode ends), it is added value to the player. Since it is possible to provide a high-value production for a long period of time (at least until all the reserved memory numbers in Special Figure 2 are consumed), the high-value-added production is completed in a short period of time, and the player's willingness to play It is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as reducing the value.

In addition, as the second specific effect, the number of reserved memories of special figure 2 is set to "" without acquiring the reserved memory of special figure 2 while the flag 223i in the consecutive villas is set to on (time saving state). There is an end effect (see FIG. 19B) that suggests that the consecutive villa mode will end when the remaining period of the time saving state reaches a predetermined period (10 seconds remaining). It is configured to be executed. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily grasp the possibility that the consecutive villa mode will end, and the period advantageous for the player (the consecutive villa mode) will end without being noticed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a problem.

Next, the counter update process (S3111) executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the contents of the counter update process (S3111). This counter update process (S3111) is a process for updating the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j and calculating the elapsed time (remaining time) of the executed fluctuation display. The information regarding the remaining time (time saving remaining period) of the variable time referred to here (time saving remaining period command for display) is output to the display control device 114 and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. , Refer to when setting the effect content in the voice lamp control device 113.

When the counter update process (S3111) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the current fluctuation time counter 223j is "0" (S4101). When it is determined to be "0" (S4101: Yes), that is, when the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is not updated (the state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation in the time saving state is not executed), then, It is determined whether or not the current time is during the time reduction (in the time reduction state) (S4102). Here, the determination is made based on the state information stored in the state storage area 223k.

If it is determined in the process of S4102 that the current time is being shortened (S4102: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the timing when the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is started (S4103), and the special figure 1 is shown. When it is determined that it is the timing to start the fluctuation (S4103: Yes), the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is set to "1" (S4104), and the remaining fluctuation time is based on the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j. The period (time saving remaining period) is calculated, and the information indicating the calculated time saving remaining period is stored in the time saving remaining period storage area 223h (S4105).

After that, the display time reduction remaining period command is set (S4106), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S4102, when it is determined that the current time is not in the time saving (in the time saving state) (S4102: No), or in the processing of S4103, when it is determined that the present is not the start timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation. (S4103: No) skips the processes of S4104 to S4106 and ends this process.

In the process of S4101, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is not "0" (S4101: No), that is, the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j has already been updated (Special Figure 1 in the time saving state). In the state where the fluctuation is executed), it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is "150,000" (whether 150 seconds have passed) (S4107). Here, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is not "150,000" ("less than 150,000") (S4107: Yes), the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is added by "1" (S4108). , The process proceeds to the process of S4105 described above. On the other hand, in the processing of S4107, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is "150,000" (S4107: Yes), the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is set to "0" (S4109), and S4105 Move to processing.

In this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special figure 1 executed during the time saving state is all defined as "150 seconds" regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 1, and therefore, it is shown in FIG. 70. As shown, the upper limit of the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is set to "150,000" corresponding to "150 seconds", but the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the special figure 1 executed during the time saving state is a plurality of fluctuation patterns (variation time). If the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be selected from the fluctuation time), the upper limit value of the fluctuation time counter 223j can be reset based on the content of the fluctuation pattern to be executed (the fluctuation time to be set). It may be configured to determine whether the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j being updated has reached the set upper limit value.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 84. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 71, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR type ROM has a high speed because a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S5001), and the display control device 114 enables various controls for the third symbol display device 81 to be executed. To start.

Here, the boot process (S5001) will be described with reference to FIG. 72. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S5001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S5101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S5102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S5101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S5102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S5102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S5103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S5104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S5001 in FIG. 71) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S5002 in FIG. 71) (S5105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the main boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S5001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 72, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S5101 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S5101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S5102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S5103 to S5105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S5101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S5101. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S5102 and S5102, the processes of S5103 to S5105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes of S5103 to S5105 may be executed without performing the processes of S5101 and S5102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 71. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S5002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S5003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S5003, then the variable image at power-on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S5004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S5004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S5005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 82 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S6502 in FIG. 82 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 73 (b)), the power-on main image and the power-on variation image (not shown), which are images at power-on, are simply drawn. The command determination process (see S5308 in FIG. 73 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S5309 in FIG. 73 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the NAND flash memory 234a can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that the character ROM 234 is used, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, the ball entered the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize), and the start instruction of the variation effect was controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110. When the display variation pattern command is received via the device 113, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image (not shown) at power-on is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect is performed. be able to. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed for a long time when the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, the power failure is restored. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S5005, the interrupt permission is set (S5006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S5006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 73 (a). FIG. 73A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S5201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 73 (b). FIG. 73B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 36) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 73B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S5301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S5301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed, so it is not an image at power-on (not shown) but a normal effect. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the command determination process (S5302) is executed, and then the display setting process (S5303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S5302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 74 to 78.

In the display setting process (S5303), one frame of images to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S5302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S5304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S5303) or the simple display setting process (S5309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S5305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S5306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S5305), which are determined in the task process (S5304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 59 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 84.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S5307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S5307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (for example, jackpot A, jackpot B, front-rear reach, reach other than front-rear reach, complete loss) , The chance eye) is compared with the stop type counter and the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S5301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S5308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S5309) is executed to display S5304. Move to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 74 to 78, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S5302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 74, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S5401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S5401: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S5401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S5303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S5402), and then the command The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S5403).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S5404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S5404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S5405), the process returns to the process of S5401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S5405) will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (a). FIG. 75A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, the effect state stored in the effect state storage area 233k is read out (S5501). Then, among the variation display data tables corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command, the variation display data table corresponding to the effect state read by the processing of S5501 is determined, and the determined variation display data table is used. It is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5502).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S5501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter fluctuation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 is used for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S5502 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5503). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S5502 is turned on, and other fluctuations are performed. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S5504). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of S5503, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5502, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S5505), and the pointer Initialize 233f to 0 (S5506). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5507), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S5506, from the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5502. , The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S5503e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S5505, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the display pattern command processing in the present embodiment, the display content (effect content) of the third symbol display device 81 is based on the display variation pattern command output (received) from the voice lamp control device 113. ), The display content (display mode of each symbol, display mode of the number of pending symbols of each symbol) corresponding to the output (received) display effect status command from the voice lamp control device 113 is determined. It is configured. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 15 to 22, it is possible to execute the display suitable for each effect state. Further, in order to discriminate between the display effect state command and the display variation pattern command on the display control device 114 side and execute the process of determining the display content, the voice lamp control device 113 corresponds to each effect state. It is not necessary to set the display variation pattern command, and the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, in the variation pattern command processing, the display content corresponding to the effect state is determined, and the determined display content is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but other than that. As a configuration, based on the display variation pattern command, the above-mentioned display processing is executed for the display contents corresponding to all the effect states, and among them, only the display contents corresponding to the currently set effect states are the players. It may be configured to be visibly displayed on the screen. Specifically, a display layer is provided corresponding to each effect state, and a process of transmitting a layer other than the layer corresponding to the set effect state is executed, or a set effect state is executed. The layer corresponding to is placed in the foreground. As a result, even if the effect state is changed while the display based on the variation pattern command is being executed and the display content is changed, it is possible to immediately respond. Further, regarding the area where the common display contents are always displayed regardless of the set effect state (for example, the second display area Dn), the display is displayed on another layer, and the display effect state command is referred to. Instead, the display content may be determined only by the fluctuation pattern command.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 74. In the processing of S5404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S5404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S5406). If there is a display variable type command (S5406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S5407), and the process returns to the process of S5401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S5407) will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (b). FIG. 75B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variable type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, complete off, or chance eye) indicated by the display stop type command. (S5601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 73 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S5602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S5602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned off. (S5603), this stop type command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S5602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S5304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S5602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S5603, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, but the character ROM 234 is used as a normal video before drawing is performed by the third symbol display device 81. The image data required for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the drawing responsiveness of the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S5601, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is completely out of order. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of S5602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, which causes the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete disengagement. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 74. In the processing of S5406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S5406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S5408), and the rear surface is determined. If there is an image change command (S5408: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S5409), and the process returns to the process of S5401.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S5409) will be described with reference to FIG. 76 (a). FIG. 76A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S6503) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S5701). .. Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images are turned on. The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S5702), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S5701 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S5702. .. When the specified back image type is back B or back C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display any of the back images A to C according to the back image type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set by S5702 is used. The type of back image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident) in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S5702, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 74. In the processing of S5408, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S5408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S5410), and there is an error command. If (S5410: Yes), the error command processing is executed (S5411), and the process returns to the processing of S5401.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S5411) will be described with reference to FIG. 76 (b). FIG. 76B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S5801). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S5802), and the error command The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S5801, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S5802 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process in S5802, the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 74. In the processing of S5410, if it is determined that there is no error command (S5410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display effect state command among the unprocessed commands (S5412), and the display effect is displayed. If there is a state command (S5412: Yes), the effect state information based on the received command is stored in the effect state storage area 233k (S5413), and the process returns to the process of S5401.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 74. In the process of S5412, if it is determined that there is no display effect state command (S5412: No), it is determined whether or not there is a hit-related command (S5440). If it is determined that there is a hit-related command in the process of S5440 (S5440: Yes), the hit-related command process is executed (S5441), and the process returns to the process of S5401. On the other hand, in the processing of S5440, if it is determined that there is no hit-related command (S5440: No), other command processing is executed (S5414), and the process returns to the processing of S5401.

In the processing of S5401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S5401: Yes). ), The processes of S5402 to S5413 and S5419 are executed again. Then, the processes of S5401 to S5413 and S5419 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S5401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this process is performed. End the command judgment process.

The simple command determination process (S5308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 73B) is also processed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment process, the commands required to display the power-on image (not shown) from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display Only the stop type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 75 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 75 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and others. For the command of, the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 75A) executed in this case, in the processing of S5501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S5502, the process of writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, the details of the hit-related command processing (S5441) will be described with reference to FIG. 77. This hit-related command process (S5441) is a process executed when it is determined that there is a hit-related command in the command determination process (see FIG. 146).

In the hit-related command processing (S5441), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot start command (S5901). If it is determined in the process of S5901 that there is a hit start command for display (S5901: Yes), the jackpot start command process is executed (S5902), and the process proceeds to the process of S5903.

Here, the details of the jackpot start command processing (S5902) will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (a). FIG. 78 (a) is a flowchart showing the jackpot start command process (S5902). This jackpot start command process (S5902) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit-related command process (FIG. 77) that there is a jackpot start command for display, and a third effect suggesting the start of a jackpot is produced. This is a process for displaying on the symbol display device 81.

In the jackpot start command processing (S5902), first, the jackpot start display data table corresponding to the command (for example, corresponding to the jackpot type) is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6001). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6002). After that, based on the jackpot start display data table, the time data is set in the time counter 233h (S6003), the pointer 233f is initialized (S6004), and the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S6005). This process ends.

Returning to FIG. 77, the description will continue. If it is determined that there is no display jackpot start command in the process of S5901 (S5901: No), the process proceeds to the process of S5903. When the processing of S5901 or S5902 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command (S5903). If it is determined in the process of S5903 that there is a display round number command, the round number command process is executed (S5904), and the process proceeds to the process of S5905.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S5904) will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (b). FIG. 78 (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command process (S5904). This round number command process (S5904) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit-related command process (FIG. 77) that a display round number command has been received, and the number of rounds during the jackpot game is updated. This is a process for displaying the effect of the command on the third symbol display device 81.

In the round number command process (S5904), first, the round number display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6101). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S6102), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the round number display data table (S6103). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S6104), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S6105), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 77, the description will continue. If it is determined in the process of S5903 that there is no display round number command (S5903: No), the process proceeds to the process of S5905. When the processing of S5903 or S5904 is completed, it is determined whether or not the display jackpot end command has been received (S5905).

If it is determined in the process of S5905 that there is a jackpot end command for display (S5905: Yes), the jackpot end command process is executed (S5906), and the process proceeds to the process of S5907.

Here, the details of the jackpot end command processing will be described. This jackpot end command process (S5906) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit-related command determination process (FIG. 77) that a jackpot end command has been received, and a third effect suggesting the end of the jackpot game is produced. This is a process for displaying on the symbol display device 81.

In the jackpot end command processing (S5906), first, the jackpot end display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d. Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared, and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the jackpot end display data table. After that, the pointer 233f is initialized, the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off, and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 77, the description will continue. If it is determined that there is no display jackpot end command in the process of S5905, the process of S5906 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S5907.

When the processing of S5905 or S5906 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a small hit start command for display (S5907). If it is determined in the process of S5907 that there is a small hit start command for display (S5907: Yes), the small hit start command process is executed (S5908), and the process proceeds to the process of S5909.

Here, the details of the small hit start command processing (S5908) will be described. This small hit start command process (S5908) is a process executed when it is determined that the small hit start command has been received in the hit related command determination process (see FIG. 77), and suggests the start of the small hit game. This is a process for displaying the effect on the third symbol display device 81.

In the small hit start command processing (S5908), first, the small hit start display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d. Next, the transfer data table buffer corresponding to the small hit start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. After that, the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the small hit start display data table, the pointer 233f is initialized, the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off, and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 77, the description will continue. If it is determined in the process of S5907 that there is no small hit start command for display (S5907: No), the process of S5908 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S5909.

When the processing of S5907 or S5908 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a small hit end command for display (S5909). If it is determined that there is a small hit end command in the process of S5909 (S5909: Yes), the small hit end command process is executed (S5910), and this process is terminated.

Here, the details of the small hit end command processing (S5210) will be described. This small hit end command process (S5210) is a process executed when it is determined that the small hit end command has been received in the hit related command determination process (see FIG. 77), and suggests the end of the small hit game. This is a process for displaying the effect to be performed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the small hit end command processing (S5210), first, the small hit end display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d. Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared, and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the small hit end display data table. After that, the pointer 233f is initialized, the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S5303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 79, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S6201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S6201: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the processes of S6202 to S6204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S6205. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S6201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S6202), S6203 to S6204 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S6203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S6203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S6203: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S6204).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 80. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to and all the error determinations set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S6301).

In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and it is necessary to draw the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. for each sprite. Determine various parameters.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S6301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S6302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 79. After the warning image setting process (S6204) or in the process of S6203, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S6203: No), the process proceeds to the process of S6205.

In S6205, the pointer update process is executed (S6205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S6401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S6401, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S6402). As a result, if it is End information (S6402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S6403), and if it is a demo display data table (S6403: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S6404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S6405), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S6403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S6403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S6403: No). S6406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S6402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S6402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 79 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6206). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S6206 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as magnification, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S6207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S6208). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S6208: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S6208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag is on. (S6209).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S6209: Yes), the confirmation display has not been produced yet, and it is time to produce the confirmation display. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S6210), and then the contents are cleared by writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6211). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S6212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S6214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S6215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing contents can be set as described above. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by invoking another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S6215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S5304), from the start of the fluctuation until the predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S6215, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S6209, if the confirmation display flag is off instead of on (S6209: No), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S6216). If the demo display flag is off (S6216: Yes), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (S6217) and then writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6218). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S6219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6220), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S6221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S6216, if the demo display flag is on (S6216: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S5309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 73B) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, the variation image at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time (Fig. A process of setting the display data table, which is specified to stop and display), in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S5305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 82A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6501: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting The process is executed (S6502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 82 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off as a result of the processing of S6501 (S6501: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S6503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S6502), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S5305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 82 (b). FIG. 82B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S6502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S6601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S6601: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S6602). In the process of S6602, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S6602 that the transfer process has not been completed (S6602: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S6602: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S6603. Further, as a result of the processing of S6601, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S6601: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S6603.

In the process of S6603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S6603), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S6603: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S6604), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data) is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S6603 (S6603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S6605), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 73 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S5308 in FIG. 73 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S5309 in FIG. 73 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 74 to 78) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 79 to 81) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 83) (see S6501: No in FIG. 82 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 83, a normal image transfer setting process (S6503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S5305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S6503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S6205) of the display setting process (S5303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S6701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S6702), and if it is the transfer data information (S6702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S6703) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S6704), and the process proceeds to S6705.

Further, in the process of S6702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S6702: No), the processes of S6703 and S6704 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S6705. In the process of S6705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S6705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S6705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S6706).

In the process of S6706, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S6706 that the transfer process has not been completed (S6706: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S6706: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S6707. Further, as a result of the processing of S6705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S6705: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S6707.

In the process of S6707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S6707), and if the transfer start flag is on (S6707: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S6708), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S6703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S6717. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S6707: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S6713). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S6713: No), there is no image data to be transferred, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag is on (S6713: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag is set to off (S6714), the rear image provided for each rear image type is provided. Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S6715). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally). The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S6716), and the process proceeds to S6717.

When the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S6715, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S6717, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6717). The discrimination in the processing of S6717 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S6717, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6717: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S6717 (S6717: Yes), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S6718). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the address given. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S6718, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S6719), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, if the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the command determination process executed earlier by executing this normal image transfer process, the back image is changed. Of the image data used in the above, the image data not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S5306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S5304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S5305) to generate the drawing list shown in FIG. 59 (S6801). That is, in the processing of S6801, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S5304). , The specified storage RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and then the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the sprite image data is stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S5305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S6802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231 and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the start address of the storage source to the final address of the storage source is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the process of S6802 (S6803). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 73B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

Whether or not to change the state of the starting port provided on the gaming board of a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the game ball is easy to enter. Some perform the first lottery. In such a conventional game machine, a lottery executed by entering a game ball into the starting port in a state easily changed to the second state is executed a predetermined number of times, and until the lottery result of the predetermined number of times is displayed. In a game machine that is continuously set, the probability that a judgment that the lottery is advantageous to the player is executed in a state where the lottery is executed a predetermined number of times is constant, and the game becomes monotonous and the player gets bored early. There was a problem that it would end up.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, the holding memory of the special figure 2 which is advantageous to the player is acquired during the period when the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is executed during the time saving state. It is possible to improve the interest of the game because the period can be set.

In a game machine in which a lottery of a plurality of symbols is executed, there is a game machine that notifies the player by displaying a symbol display for showing the lottery result by a display means (third symbol display device 81). There is a problem that it is difficult for the player to understand the content of the game because a plurality of symbols are displayed in a variable manner at various timings.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, among the third symbols corresponding to the plurality of symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the symbol most of interest to the player in the current gaming state, that is, that is, Since the symbol that has the greatest influence on the game result is displayed with more emphasis than the other symbols, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Further, in the above-described first embodiment, a game (left-handed game or right-handed game) that is advantageous to the player is performed according to various game states (normal state, time saving state, jackpot state, etc.) to be set. It is configured differently. This makes it possible for the player to change the content of the game while grasping the current game state, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming more monotonous.

In the first embodiment, since it is possible to provide different playability depending on the type of special symbol variation executed when the time is shortened, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. Can be done.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 92. The first embodiment described above is configured so that when the special symbol fluctuates once during the time saving state, the time saving state ends, and in the time saving state where the first special symbol fluctuates, the second special symbol It was configured to acquire the reserved memory of.

Then, when the change of the first special symbol in the time saving state is completed, if the hold memory of the second special symbol is acquired, the change of the second special symbol (lottery) is executed next, and the change is performed. The jackpot game is executed based on the (lottery), and after the jackpot game is completed, the time is reduced again. On the other hand, when the change of the first special symbol during the time saving state is completed, the second special symbol is displayed. If the hold memory could not be acquired, it was configured to shift to the normal state as it is.

In the first embodiment configured in this way, since the end timing of the time-saving state is the end timing of one variation of the first special symbol, the player can easily predict the end timing of the time-saving state. There is a problem. Further, in order to make the player's prediction difficult, it is necessary to be able to set a plurality of different fluctuation times for the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the storage capacity of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is increased. There was a problem of letting them do it.

Further, in the above-described first embodiment, if the hold memory of the second special symbol can be acquired at the end of the fluctuation of the first special symbol executed during the time saving state, the state advantageous to the player can be continuously acquired. If it is not, the gameplay is easy for the player to understand, and the player's advantageous state ends, but on the other hand, there is a problem that the gameplay becomes monotonous and the player gets bored early.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, a plurality of conditions for ending the time saving state are provided, and it is difficult for the player to grasp the ending timing of the time saving state. Specifically, the case where either the first special symbol change (lottery) is executed twice or the second special symbol change (lottery) is executed once is set as the end condition of the time saving state. ..

With this configuration, if the hold memory of the second special symbol is not secured at the time when the fluctuation of the first special symbol of the first rotation (first rotation of the time reduction) in the time saving state is completed, the time saving is performed. The change (lottery) of the first special symbol in the second rotation in the state is executed. On the other hand, if the hold storage of the second special symbol is secured at the time when the change of the first special symbol of the first rotation (first rotation of the time reduction) in the time saving state is completed, the hold storage of the second special symbol is reserved. The symbol change (lottery) is executed.

Therefore, in the time saving state, when the change of the first special symbol in the first rotation of the time saving is completed, the game property of acquiring the holding memory of the second special symbol is continued, and the holding memory of the second special symbol is stored. It is possible to provide a case where the used variation (lottery) is executed and a case where the second special symbol is held and stored.

Further, in the second embodiment, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol executed during the time saving state can be selected from a plurality (two). Therefore, the time saving state period (the changing period of the first special symbol executed during the time saving state) can be diversified by combining a plurality of fluctuation patterns, and the interest of the game can be improved. Since the time saving state period is set by the combination of a plurality of fluctuation patterns, when a plurality of fluctuation patterns of the first special symbol are prepared in the gaming machine having one time saving number as in the first embodiment described above. In comparison, the storage capacity of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the time saving state is configured to end when the change (lottery) of the second special symbol is executed once. As a result, for example, when the second special symbol is changed in the first rotation of the time saving, the winning small hit is executed when the small hit that is not most advantageous to the player (when the ball is passed through a specific area). When the number of rounds of the big hit game is smaller than that of other small hits), the game is intentionally performed so that the ball does not pass through the specific area, and the second special symbol of the second rotation of the time saving to be executed next is performed. It is possible to prevent a special game such as a game aiming at the fluctuation of the game from being executed.

If the result of the change (lottery) of the first special symbol in the first rotation of the time reduction is a small hit, the small hit game is executed after the change of the first special symbol in the first rotation of the time reduction is completed. Since the time saving state is maintained during this small hit game (because the time saving end condition is not satisfied), the game property of acquiring the hold memory of the second special symbol and the second variable winning device during the small hit game period. It is possible to set a period during which a plurality of game features such as a game feature in which a ball is inserted into the 650 and the ball is passed through a specific area (V winning switch 630) can be executed at the same time. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a novel playability, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

As shown in the first embodiment described above, when the end condition of the special symbol variation that started the fluctuation during the time reduction state is set as the end condition of the time reduction state, the special symbol variation of the first rotation of the time reduction occurs. Since the small hit game executed after the end is not in the time saving state, it is not possible to provide the game for acquiring the hold memory of the second special symbol during the small hit game.

Further, in the second embodiment, as the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol during the time saving state, the first fluctuation pattern (time saving state) in which the player can execute the game of acquiring the hold memory of the second special symbol is executed. A fluctuation pattern longer than the normal map fluctuation time in the middle) and a second fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern shorter than the normal map fluctuation time in the time saving state) in which it is difficult to execute the game for acquiring the hold memory of the second special symbol. It is configured to be selectable. With this configuration, for example, when the second variation pattern is selected twice in a row, the time saving state is not substantially given (a game in which the reserved memory of the second special symbol is acquired during the time saving state). When the first fluctuation pattern is selected twice in a row, it is possible to acquire the hold memory of the second special symbol during the time saving state with a high probability. The state is given. Further, when the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern are selected respectively, a time saving state in which the hold memory of the second special symbol can be acquired is given.

That is, it is possible to make the acquisition expectation of the second special symbol in the time saving state different based on the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol executed in the time saving state, so that the player can be provided with a surprising game. can do. Further, even if the jackpot type that shifts to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game and the jackpot type that does not shift to the time saving state are not prepared, and the time saving state is given after all the jackpot games are completed, the first Since it is possible to set a substantial time-saving state entry rate based on the selection result of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity by preparing a plurality of jackpot types.

In addition, by preparing a plurality of variation pattern selection tables for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the time saving state and configuring so as to refer to different variation pattern selection tables based on the gaming state and the gaming situation. It is possible to make the effective time saving state entry rate more diverse.

The configuration used in the second embodiment (a configuration in which a plurality of time saving end conditions are used) may be used for a gaming machine having game characteristics other than the second embodiment, for example, a small hit winning of a second special symbol. When some of the small hit types are set among the plurality of small hit types that are sometimes set, a small hit game in which the ball cannot pass through the specific area (V winning switch 630e3) is executed. It may be used for such a game machine.

Further, in the second embodiment, the number of fluctuations (lottery) is set to 2 as the end condition of the time saving state based on the fluctuation (lottery) of the first special symbol, but a larger number may be set. .. Further, the total number of fluctuations (lottery) of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations (lottery) of the second special symbol may be set as the end condition of the time saving state, and other than the number of fluctuations of the special symbol. , The number of fluctuations of the normal symbol, the result of the fluctuation (lottery) of the special symbol, and various accessories provided in the pachinko machine 10 (electric accessory 640a, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650, etc.) The end condition of the time saving state may be set based on the operation status (presence or absence of operation, number of operations).

The pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in terms of configuration, that is, a partial configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, a partial configuration of the RAM 203, and the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Other various processes are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the display screen executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. FIG. 85A is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen in a time saving state. Here, the display screen shown in FIG. 85 (a) will be described with respect to points different from the above-described first embodiment (points different from the display contents of FIG. 15 (a)). The same elements as those in the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 85A is an example showing a display screen in a state in which the hold storage of the second special symbol is not acquired at the time when the first rotation of the time saving is completed. As shown in FIG. 85 (a), at the end of the first rotation of the time saving, the hold memory of the second special symbol has not been acquired (special figure 2 display indicating the number of reserved symbols in the main reserved symbol display area Dm5). If this is not the case, then the first special symbol variation (lottery) is started as the variation of the second rotation of the time saving. Here, a fluctuation pattern of 150 seconds is set as the fluctuation pattern of the second rotation of the time reduction, and the display of "remaining time 0 seconds" displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds is compared with the display. "+150 seconds" is displayed as a display mode for adding the remaining time. The display of "150 seconds" is a display for indicating the fluctuation time of the second rotation of the time saving.

Then, in the first main display area Dm, the character "still" is displayed as a continuous notification display mode indicating that the game for acquiring the hold memory of the special figure 2 is continued. By displaying such a display screen, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the time saving state (the game state in which the game for acquiring the hold memory of special figure 2 is executed) will continue. You can play the game with expectations until the end.

The "remaining time" displayed in the sub-display area Ds1 is set before the remaining time of the special figure 1 fluctuation of the first rotation of the time reduction becomes "0", that is, during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 of the first rotation of the time reduction. A value indicating a part or all of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation which may be the second rotation may be added and displayed. In this case, if the remaining period of the special figure 1 fluctuation in the first rotation of the time saving is a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) and the hold storage of the special figure 2 is not acquired, the addition display is executed. Good. As a result, even if the remaining time is running low, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

On the other hand, at the time when the first rotation of the time reduction is completed, the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is not acquired, and the game of acquiring the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is executed as the variation of the special figure 1 of the second rotation of the time reduction. When a difficult second fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern shorter than the normal map fluctuation time in the time saving state) is selected, the display in which the remaining time is added as shown in FIG. 85 (a) is not performed, and the above-mentioned display is performed. The display screen (time saving state end display) shown in FIG. 20B of the first embodiment is displayed. In this case, during the period during which the time reduction state end display is being executed, the special figure 1 variation of the second rotation of the time reduction is executed.

That is, when the above-mentioned second fluctuation pattern is set, the time saving state is substantially completed, so that the time saving 2 is performed on the third symbol display device 81 even though the time saving state is set. When the special figure 1 fluctuation of the rotation is executed, the time saving state end display is displayed. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the end timing not in the end timing of the internal game state (time saving state) but in the game state in which the hold memory of the special figure 2 can be acquired, and the player can be notified of the end timing. It is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

It should be noted that the special figure 1 fluctuation of the second rotation of the time reduction executed during the period when the time reduction state end display is displayed, and the number of reserved symbols of the special figure 1 which decreases when the second rotation of the time reduction is executed (hold). Since the number of stored items is displayed in the second display area Dn of the third symbol display device 81, it can be made difficult for the player to notice.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the display timing indicating the end of the time saving state is different based on the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol selected during the time saving state. , Even during the time saving state internally, if the gaming state advantageous to the player cannot be given, the display indicating the end of the time saving state is executed. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. In addition, in the second embodiment, the case where the second fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation pattern shorter than the normal figure fluctuation time in the time saving state) which is difficult to execute the game for acquiring the hold memory of the special figure 2 is set is internally. Even if the time is shortened, it is assumed that the player cannot be given a favorable gaming state, but in addition to that, when the normal map fluctuation time is longer than the remaining period of the normal map fluctuation state (at the end of the normal map fluctuation). (When the time saving state ends), even if the time saving state is internally determined, it is determined that the gaming state advantageous to the player cannot be given, and the display indicating the end of the time saving state is executed. May be good.

Next, the display screen in the case where the special figure 1 fluctuation of the first rotation of the time saving wins a small hit will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 (b) to 86 (b). FIG. 85B is an example showing a display screen in a state in which special figure 1 wins a small hit and one special figure 2 has one reserved memory at the time when the first rotation of the time saving is completed. As shown in FIG. 85B, the first display area Dm is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode “341” indicating that the special figure 1 main symbol Dma has won a small hit, and the main reserved symbol is displayed. In the area Dm5, a display mode indicating that there is one reserved memory of the special figure 2 is displayed.

Then, the "remaining time 0 seconds" indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation of the first rotation of the time reduction is completed is displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1, and further, it is displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. "+60 seconds" is displayed as a display mode for adding the remaining time to the display of "remaining time 0 seconds". The display of "60 seconds" is a display for indicating the game time of the small hit game executed based on the small hit winning of the special figure 1.

That is, although the details will be described later, in the second embodiment, when the variation (lottery) of the special figure 1 is executed twice or the variation (lottery) of the special figure 2 is executed once, the time is shortened. The state is set to end, and when the variation (lottery) of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 85 (b) is executed once, the end condition of the time saving state is not satisfied. Therefore, the time saving state is continued during the small hit game executed by the small hit winning of the special figure 1. As a result, even in the state where the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is acquired, the reserved memory of the special figure 2 can be further acquired during the period when the small hit game is executed.

In this way, the player can simultaneously execute the game of inserting the ball into the second variable winning device 650, which is opened by the small hit game, and the game of acquiring the hold memory of the special figure 2. As a special game period notification mode for notifying the user, "charge combo activation" is displayed in the first display area Dm.

Then, when the small hit game is executed, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), the normal symbol main symbol Dmc is variablely displayed in the first display area Dm, and the game for acquiring the hold memory of the special figure 2 is performed. Will be executed. Further, when the small hit game executed in the small hit winning of Special Figure 1 is a small hit in which the ball can pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3), the ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game. Then, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), "V" is displayed in the first display area Dm, and the jackpot game is started.

<About the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed. Since the other points are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 87 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. The ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the contents of the variation pattern table 202d4 for special figure 1 defined in the variation pattern table 202d are partially changed. However, since the other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Although the details will be described later, the end conditions for the time saving state are also different.

The special figure 1 time saving fluctuation pattern table 202d4a (see FIG. 88) of the second embodiment is the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired with respect to the special figure 1 time saving fluctuation pattern table 202d4 of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that different fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times) are set based on.

Specifically, regardless of whether the lottery result of Special Figure 1 is "missing", "small hit", or "big hit", when the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 99", , A fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 120 seconds is set, and in the case of "100 to 198", a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is set. With this configuration, the game content in the time-saving state can be greatly different depending on the selected fluctuation pattern.

FIG. 87B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. In the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment, the special 2 fluctuation flag 203r is added to the first embodiment. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special 2 fluctuation flag 203r is a flag for indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed during the time saving state, and if it is set to on, the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed during the time saving state. It shows. The special 2 variation flag 203r determines that the current variation is special figure 2 in the time saving variation start process 2 (S303 in FIG. 91) executed in the special symbol variation start process (see S213 in FIG. 39). In the case (S551: Yes in FIG. 91), it is set to ON (see S522 in FIG. 91), referred to in the time saving end determination process (see S251 in FIG. 90) (see S2301 in FIG. 90), and the time saving medium counter 203g. After setting the value to "0", it is set to off (see S2303 in FIG. 90).

In this way, at the start of the special figure fluctuation, the result of determining which of the special figure 1 or special figure 2 fluctuation is executed is stored (the corresponding flag is set to on), and the time is shortened. At the timing when it is decided whether or not to end the state, it is determined whether or not to end the time saving state (whether or not the time saving state ending condition is satisfied) based on the stored determination result. It is possible to properly manage the current game state and the type of special figure change executed during the time saving state.

In the second embodiment, the type of the special symbol (special figure) determined at the timing when the variation (lottery) of the special figure is started is determined, and the determination result is stored in the special figure. It is configured so that it can be determined whether or not to end the time saving state at the fluctuation end timing, but other configurations may be used. For example, when the fluctuation (lottery) of the special figure is started, this time. By determining whether or not the time reduction state ends at the timing when the fluctuation ends and storing the determination result, even if control is performed to end the time reduction state based on the determination result at the special figure fluctuation end timing. It is good, at the timing of the end of the fluctuation of the special map, the type of the special map variation executed this time (the type of the special map variation used for the variation) is discriminated, and the control for ending the time saving state is performed based on the discrimination result. You may want to do it.

<Regarding the control process in the second embodiment>
In the control process in the second embodiment, the contents of the control process in the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 are changed from those in the first embodiment. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 89 to 92, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, the special symbol variation process is changed to the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 89) with respect to the first embodiment, and the time is shortened to be executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 89). The end determination process (see FIG. 90) was added, the time saving fluctuation start process was changed to the time saving fluctuation start process 2 (see FIG. 91), and the jackpot control process was changed to the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 92). Is different.

First, the special symbol variation processing 2 (S104) will be described with reference to FIG. 89. In this special symbol variation processing 2 (S104 in FIG. 89), the lottery result of the special symbol variation is different from the special symbol variation processing of the first embodiment described above, and the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g is 1 or more. In the case of (S224: Yes), the time saving end determination process (see S251 in FIG. 89) is executed, and the other configurations are the same. Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the special symbol variation processing 2 (see S104 in FIG. 89) described with reference to FIG. 90 will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving end determination process (see S251) in the second embodiment. This time saving end determination process (see S251) executes control for determining the end state of the time saving state in the second embodiment having a plurality of ending conditions of the time saving state.

When the execution of the time saving end determination process (S251 in FIG. 90) is started, it is first determined whether or not the special 2 fluctuation flag 203r is set to ON (S2301 in FIG. 90). In S2301, when the special 2 fluctuation flag 203r is set to on, that is, when the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed (S2301: Yes), the time saving end condition of the special symbol is satisfied at that time. Therefore, next, the value of the counter of the time saving medium counter 203g is set to "0" (S2303), the special 2 fluctuation flag 203r is set to off (S2302), and the special 2 fluctuation flag 203r is set to off. This process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2301, if the special 2 fluctuation flag 203r is not set to ON (S2301: No), then the time saving / medium counter 203 g is subtracted by 1 (see S2304), and this process ends.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving fluctuation start processing 2 (see S303 in FIG. 91) used in the second embodiment. In this time saving fluctuation start processing 2 (see S303 in FIG. 91), whether the type of the special figure variation executed this time is the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 with respect to the time saving fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment described above. The process for determining is added, and the other contents are the same. The description of the same contents will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 91, when the time saving fluctuation start processing 2 (see S303 in FIG. 91) is executed, the same processing of S501 and S502 as the time saving fluctuation start processing is executed. After finishing the processing of S502, it is next determined whether or not the current fluctuation is in the special figure 2 (S551). When it is determined that the current fluctuation is the special figure 2 (S551: Yes), the special 2 fluctuation flag 203r is set to ON (S552), and the process proceeds to S503. On the other hand, in the process of S551, when it is determined that the current fluctuation is not the special figure 2 (special figure 1) (S551: No), the process of S552 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S503. Then, the same processes of S503 to S512 as the time reduction start process are executed, and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is subtracted by 1 each time the fluctuation of the special drawing other than the special drawing 2 (that is, the fluctuation of the special drawing 1) is executed, and the time saving is performed. The time saving state is terminated when the value of the medium counter 203g becomes 0, and the time saving state is set to 0 by forcibly setting the value of the medium counter 203g to 0 by executing the fluctuation of the special figure 2. It has two types of time-saving end conditions for ending.

This makes it possible to execute the variation (lottery) of the special figure 1 multiple times in the time saving state, and the number of times the variation (lottery) of the special figure 2 is executed in the time saving state is singular (1 time). Can be.

Next, the jackpot control process 2 (S1704 in FIG. 92) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 92. The big hit control process 2 (S1704 in FIG. 92) differs from the above-mentioned big hit control process only in that the number of time reductions given to some big hits after the end of the big hit is changed from 1 time to 2 times. However, the other contents are the same.

The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 2 (S704 in FIG. 92). As shown in FIG. 92, when this process is executed, the same processes of S1801 to S1814 as the above-described jackpot control start process are executed. Then, when it is determined in the process of S1814 that the jackpot type is not "B or D" (S1814: No), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203 g is set to "2", and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the second embodiment, a plurality of time saving state end conditions for ending the time saving state are prepared, and further, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation during the time saving state is set to a plurality of fluctuation patterns (variation). It is configured to select from time). As a result, it is possible to further diversify the game during the time saving state, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. Specifically, when the ratio of selecting the jackpot type to which the time saving state is given after the end of the big hit is fixed, short fluctuation patterns are continuously selected as the fluctuation pattern (variation time) selected during the time saving state. In that case, even though the time saving state is given, it becomes a time saving state in which it is practically difficult to acquire the hold memory of the special figure 2. In this way, it is possible to change the substantially time-saving state entry rate depending on the selection result of the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the selected special figure 1 fluctuation.

In the second embodiment, as the time saving state, the time saving number is set to 2 times, and the time saving state is executed until the variation of the special figure 1 is executed twice or the variation of the special figure 2 is executed once. However, the set number of time reductions and the time reduction state end condition may be any one that can execute the same technical idea regardless of the configuration in the second embodiment described above. , The number of time reductions may be set to 3 or more.

Further, as the time saving end condition, even if the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 (for example, 5 times) or the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 is set to be larger than the number of reserved storages of the special figure 1 (upper limit 4) Good. As a result, even if the reserved memory of the special figure 2 cannot be acquired during the change of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 can be surely changed during the time saving state, so that the player is hit by a big hit when the time saving state is entered. A game can be provided.

Further, as the time saving end condition, the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 is set to 2 times, or the number of changes of the special figure 2 is 4 times (or the total number of changes of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is 4 times). In addition, in the small hit type of Special Figure 2, it is possible to set a big hit type to which a time reduction is given and a big hit type to which a time reduction is not given as a big hit type to be executed when passing through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3). You may use another example. With this configuration, when one reserved memory of special figure 2 is acquired during the special figure 1 change executed in the first rotation of the time saving, it is executed based on the special figure 2 change of the second rotation of the time saving. A specific area (V winning switch 650e3) is passed through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3) during the small hit game to execute the big hit game, or a specific area (V) is executed during the small hit game executed based on the special figure 2 fluctuation of the second rotation of the time saving. It is possible to let the player select whether to execute the third rotation of the time saving (the second rotation of the special figure 1) without passing the winning switch 650e3).

That is, in the special figure 1 fluctuation (first preparation period) executed in the first rotation of the time saving, when the game of acquiring the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is executed and one of the reserved memories of the special figure 2 is acquired, The fluctuation of special figure 2 which is the priority fluctuation is started at the second rotation of the time saving. If a small hit is won due to the fluctuation of the special figure 2, the small hit game is executed after the fluctuation of the second rotation of the time saving is completed. By passing the game ball through the specific area during this small hit game, the big hit game (V winning big hit) based on the small hit game is started. In this alternative example, as the type of the V prize jackpot in Special Figure 2, the type in which the time saving state is given after the jackpot game and the type in which the time saving state is not given can be set, so that the special feature of the second rotation of the time saving Fig. 2 If the jackpot based on the fluctuation is a jackpot that does not give a time saving state, the consecutive villa mode ends with this jackpot game. Here, the player does not execute the jackpot game in the second rotation of the time reduction, or does not execute the jackpot game in the second rotation of the time reduction, in a state where only one hold memory of the special figure 2 is acquired (small). During the winning game, the special figure 1 variation (second preparation period) executed for the third time reduction is executed in a specific area (without passing the game ball through the V winning switch 650e3), and the new special figure 2 You can choose whether to play a game that acquires hold memory.

As a result, based on the number of reserved memories of special figure 2 acquired during the first preparation period, one of the reserved memories of special figure 2 is discarded, and more reserved memories of special figure 2 are aimed at or acquired. Since it is possible to select whether or not to reliably execute the jackpot game based on the reserved memory of the special figure 2, the player can arbitrarily select the game content suitable for the player.

Further, in this alternative example, as the types of jackpots executed based on the reserved memory of special figure 2, there are a type in which a time saving state is given after the jackpot game is completed and a type in which a time saving state is not given. When a big hit game (V winning big hit) based on a small hit game is executed with one hold memory of, there is a possibility that the time saving state ends after the big hit game ends. Therefore, the subsequent game results can be greatly different depending on which of the above-mentioned game contents is selected by the player, and the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced.

In addition, the notification suggesting the type of the big hit game based on the small hit game executed in the second rotation of the time saving described above may be executed by the notification means (for example, the effect display by the third symbol display device 81). As a result, the player can select the game content with reference to the notification content by the notification means. In this case, as the notification content by the notification means, it is preferable to notify the game content that is advantageous to the player in a notification mode that the player can grasp. For example, if the jackpot executed based on the small hit game executed in the second rotation of the time reduction is a jackpot to which the time reduction state is given after the jackpot game is completed, it is advisable to set a notification mode to indicate that fact. .. As a result, the player can safely pass the ball through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) in the small hit game in the second rotation of the time saving.

In addition, in this alternative example, the time saving end condition is set as the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 is 2 times, or the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 is 4 times (or the total number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is 4). Since the number of times is set to (times), the game for selecting the above-mentioned game content can be executed only when the hold of the special figure 2 is acquired during the change of the special figure 1 executed in the first rotation of the time reduction number, so that the time reduction can be performed. It is possible to enthusiastically play a game in order to acquire the reserved memory of the special figure 2 as soon as the state is given.

Further, since the time saving end condition is set so that the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 is smaller than the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2, for example, the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 executed during the time saving state is set. Therefore, the number of fluctuations in the special figure 1 can be reduced. As a result, even if a plurality (for example, two) of the reserved memories of the special figure 2 are stored during one change of the special figure 1, the second change of the special figure 1 can be executed during the time saving state. This makes it possible to increase the chances of selecting the game content described above. In this other example, as the time saving end condition, the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 is 2 times, or the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 is 4 times (or the total number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is 4 times). However, the time saving end condition based on the number of fluctuations in the special figure 2 may be set to have a larger number of fluctuations than the time saving ending condition based on the number of fluctuations in the special figure 1.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 100. In the first embodiment described above, 3 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation (normal symbol fluctuation) executed during the time saving state, and the number of lottery of the normal symbol executed during the time saving state is set. Was configured to stabilize. Further, in the above-described second embodiment, in order to change the period during the time-saving state, a plurality of conditions for ending the time-saving state are provided with respect to the above-mentioned first embodiment, and the process is further executed during the time-saving state. It was configured so that a plurality of fluctuation times of the special figure 1 could be set.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol executed during the time saving state can be set from a plurality of normal symbols, and can be executed during the time saving state according to the content of the game. It was configured so that the number of lottery of symbols was different.

As a result, the player can be made to perform many lottery of ordinary symbols during the time saving state and enthusiastically play the game in order to obtain the special figure 2 hold. In addition, since the number of lottery of ordinary symbols executed during the time saving state can be changed, it is possible to set a time saving state that is advantageous to the player and a time saving state that is disadvantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. it can.

The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in terms of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, the partial configuration of the RAM 203, and the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Other various processes are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the game in the third embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is configured so that the time saving state given based on the lottery of Special Figure 1 and the time saving state given based on the lottery of Special Figure 2 are different. Further, it is configured so that a different time saving state is given based on the gaming state when the time saving state is given. By assigning different time-saving states in this way, it is possible to prepare a plurality of game features in the time-saving state, and it is possible to make the player perform a variety of games.

Specifically, by setting different time-saving states, the variation time of the normal symbol executed during the time-saving state is different, so that the playability during the time-saving state is different. That is, as described in the first embodiment described above, the pachinko machine 10 wins a normal symbol during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 in the time saving state, opens the electric accessory 640a, and enters the second ball. Since the game of acquiring the special figure 2 hold is executed by putting the ball into the mouth 640, the number of lottery of the ordinary symbols executed during the time saving is performed by making the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbols different. The number of fluctuations) can be made different.

Further, in the third embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is configured to be different based on the number of lottery (number of fluctuations) of the normal symbol executed during the time saving state. Specifically, when the number of lottery (number of fluctuations) of ordinary symbols executed during the time saving state exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 40 times), a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is set. ing. With this configuration, by executing a large number of normal symbol fluctuations during the time saving state, the number of lottery (variation times) of the normal symbols can be further increased, and the player is enthusiastically shortened. It is possible to execute a medium game. In addition, by shifting to a state in which a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is set, as a result, the number of balls entering the second entry port 640 per unit time can be increased, so that the player It is possible to provide a game that is advantageous to the player.

In this way, by providing a plurality of time saving states in which the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is different, it is possible to set a time saving state that is advantageous to the player and a time saving state that is disadvantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. ..

First, with reference to FIG. 93, a display screen executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 93A is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen in a time saving state. Here, the display screen shown in FIG. 93 (a) will be described with respect to points different from the above-described first embodiment (points different from the display contents of FIG. 15 (a)). The same elements as those in the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 93 (a), "39/40" is displayed at the lower right of the first display area Dm. This is a display mode described in the normal map fluctuation display area for displaying the number of normal map fluctuations during the time saving state (during special figure 1 fluctuation in the time saving state), and the value of "39" is executed. It is a normal map fluctuation number display mode for indicating the number of times, and a value of "40" is a normal map target fluctuation number display mode indicating a threshold value at which the fluctuation time of a normal symbol is shortened. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, a guidance display for guiding the period until the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened is displayed.

When the game progresses from the state shown in FIG. 93 (a) and the number of fluctuations in the normal map during the time saving state reaches 40, the game state in which the fluctuation time in the normal map becomes shorter as shown in FIG. 93 (b). The characters "supercharge time rush" are displayed to indicate that the transition has occurred, and a guidance display for informing the player that the normal map fluctuation time has been shortened is displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

<About the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
The third embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed. Since the other points are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 94 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 202 in MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment. In the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment, the time saving state selection table 202f is added to the first embodiment. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The time saving state selection table 202f is a table referred to when selecting a time saving state based on the jackpot symbols (special figures 1 and 2) and the game state stored in the game state storage area 203s. It is referred to in the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 99) described later (see S1871 in FIG. 99).

Here, in the third embodiment, as the game state to be set, the time saving A and the time saving B which is more advantageous to the player than the time saving A can be selected. Specifically, the jackpot symbol is special figure 1 (first special symbol), and the game state stored in the game state storage area 203s is normal (that is, the jackpot is won or a specific area (V prize). In the case of the timing) when the ball passes through the switch 650e3), the time saving A is selected as the time saving state, and in other cases, the time saving B is selected as the time saving state as shown in FIG. 95.

That is, when the game state is the normal state, a big hit is obtained based on the lottery of the special figure 1, and the time saving state is given as the time saving state only when the time saving state is given after the big hit game is completed, and in other cases, the time saving state is given. As a time saving B is given.

When the time reduction A is set as the time reduction state, 3 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (see S2409 in FIG. 98), and when the time reduction B is set, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set as the time reduction. A shorter variation time (2.5 seconds or 1.5 seconds) is set than when A is set (see S2405 and S2406 in FIG. 98). As a result, when entering the consecutive villa mode for the first time, the game is performed during the time saving state in which the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is normal (4 seconds), and when entering the time saving state again during the consecutive villa mode, the normal symbol changes. The fluctuation time can be shorter than usual. Therefore, once the consecutive villa mode that is advantageous to the player continues, it is possible to make it difficult to shift from the consecutive villa mode to the normal gaming state.

FIG. 94B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment. In the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment, a game state storage area 203s, a time saving state storage area 203t, and a normal figure number counter 203u are added to the first embodiment. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The game state storage area 203s is an area for storing the game state when the start of the big hit is set, and is referred to when selecting the type of the time saving state given after the end of the big hit. In the game state storage area 203s, the game state is stored (see S271 in FIG. 96) after the start of the jackpot is set in the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 96), and the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 99) is stored. ), It is determined as the timing of the end of the jackpot (S1811: Yes in FIG. 99), and when the jackpot type is not B or D (S1814; No in FIG. 99), it is referred to when setting the time saving state (S1871). ).

The time-saving state storage area 203t is an area for storing the selected time-saving state type (time-saving A, time-saving B), and is referred to when setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol during the time-saving state. When the time saving state is selected in the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 99), the time saving state storage area 203t stores the selected time saving state (see S1871 in FIG. 99) and sets the fluctuation time (see FIG. 98). ), The information stored when setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is referred to (see S2401 in FIG. 98).

The normal symbol count counter 203u is a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations of the normal symbol during the time saving state, and is used every time the normal symbol is changed during the time saving state in the fluctuation time setting process (see FIG. 98). 1 is added (see S2403 in FIG. 98). In the present embodiment, when the value measured by the normal symbol number counter 203u reaches a predetermined value (40), the setting process of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is configured to be different.

<Regarding the control process in the third embodiment>
The control process in the third embodiment is the same as that in the first embodiment with respect to the first embodiment in which the contents of the control process in the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. Therefore, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 96 to 99, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, the special symbol variation process is changed to the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 96), and the normal symbol variation process is changed to the normal symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 97) with respect to the first embodiment. The difference is that the jackpot control process is changed to the jackpot control process 3 (FIG. 99). Since the other elements are the same, the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the special symbol variation process 3 (see S104 in FIG. 96), the processes S201 to S219 are executed as in the first embodiment described above, and when the process of S219 is completed, the current game state is set to the game state storage area 203s. Store (S271). Then, the processes of S220 to S225 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, and the present process is terminated.

That is, in the third embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, the game state at the time when the start of the jackpot is set can be temporarily stored. Thereby, the game state set after the end of the big hit game can be set based on the game state at the start of the big hit (at the time of winning the big hit).

In the present embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, and the game state at the timing for setting the start of the jackpot is stored in the game state storage area 203s. For example, the variation of the special symbol is started. It may be configured to store the game state of the timing (for example, the timing at which the special symbol variation start process (see S213 in FIG. 96) in the special symbol variation process 3 is executed).

Next, in the normal symbol variation process 3 (see S106 in FIG. 97), the processes S901 to S912 are executed as in the first embodiment described above, and then the variation time setting process is executed (S951). Here, the fluctuation time setting process (S951) will be described with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation time setting process (S951).

When the variable time setting process (S951) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current time saving state is the time saving A (time saving state A) (S2401), and it is determined that the time saving A (time saving state A). (S2401: Yes) sets the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation time) to 3 seconds (S2409), and ends this process. On the other hand, in the processing of S2401, when it is determined that the current time saving state is not the time saving A (time saving state A) (S2401: No), then whether the value of the normal figure number counter 203u is larger than "1". (S2402).

In the process of S2402, when it is determined that the value of the normal figure number counter 203u is not larger than "1" (S2402: No), "1" is set to the value of the normal figure number counter 203u (S2403), and S2404. Move to the processing of. On the other hand, in the processing of S2402, when it is determined that the value of the normal figure number counter 203u is larger than "1", the process proceeds to (S2402: Yes) and the processing of S2404.

In the process of S2404, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal figure counter 203u is “40” or more (S2404). In the process of S2404, when it is determined that the value of the normal figure counter 203u is not more than "40" (less than 40), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal figure fluctuation time) is set to 2.5 seconds. (S2405). In this case, a fluctuation time shorter than the normal map fluctuation time set in the process of S2409 is set.

On the other hand, in the process of S2404, when it is determined that the value of the normal figure number counter 203u is "40" or more, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal figure fluctuation time) is set to 1.5 seconds (S2406). In this case, a fluctuation time shorter than the normal map fluctuation time set in the process of S2405 is set. Then, when the processing of S2405 or S2406 is completed, "1" is added to the value of the normal figure number counter 203u (S2407), the normal figure number command is set (S2408), and this processing is completed.

The normal figure number command set in the process of S2408 is a command output to the voice lamp control device 113, and the output process is performed in the same manner as the various commands set in the main control device 110 described above. ..

As described above, in the third embodiment, different normal map fluctuation times are set based on the type of the time saving state to be set and the number of normal map fluctuations executed during the time saving state. With this configuration, the number of fluctuations in the normal map executed during the time saving state can be made different based on the type of the time saving state and the number of fluctuations in the normal map executed during the time saving state. It is possible to improve the interest in the game of winning the game by winning the game and acquiring the reserved memory of the special figure 2.

In addition, when "time saving B" is set, which is more advantageous than "time saving A" as the time saving state (short fluctuation time is set as the normal map fluctuation time), the number of times of normal map fluctuation is more than a predetermined number (40 times or more). ), Since the configuration is such that a shorter normal fluctuation time is set, the player can be made to continuously execute the game during the time saving state.

In the third embodiment, a specific normal map fluctuation time is set based on each time saving state and the number of normal drawing time savings, but other configurations may be used, for example, each time saving state and the normal drawing time saving. A normal figure fluctuation time selection table to be referred to for setting the normal figure fluctuation time is provided according to the number of times the figure changes, and the normal figure fluctuation time selection table is based on a predetermined acquisition value (for example, a counter acquisition value). Therefore, the fluctuation time of the normal map may be selected. In this case, a table in which a long normal map fluctuation time is easily selected and a table in which a short normal map fluctuation time is easily selected are provided in the normal map fluctuation time selection table corresponding to each time saving state and the number of normal map fluctuations. Then, as in the third embodiment, it is possible to make the normal map fluctuation time, which is easy to be selected, different based on each time saving state (time saving A, time saving B) and the number of times the normal map changes, and the reserved memory of the special figure 2 It is possible to improve the interest in the game to acquire.

Further, in the third embodiment, two types of the time saving state, "time saving A" and "time saving B", are provided, but more types may be provided. Further, although one opportunity (the number of times of fluctuation of the normal map is 40 times) is provided to change the time of fluctuation of the normal map selected based on the number of times of change of the normal map, two or more may be provided.

Further, in the third embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a shorter normal map fluctuation time than usual is selected (easily made), but a specific upper limit condition (for example, a normal map) is selected. When the number of fluctuations exceeds 50 or when the number of reserved storages in Special Figure 2 reaches the upper limit), the selected normal map fluctuation time is longer than usual (for example, 10 seconds). ) May be selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively given a privilege due to the excessive execution of the fluctuation of the normal map.

Next, the jackpot control process 3 (S1704) of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 99. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 3 (S1704). The jackpot control process 3 (S1704) differs from the jackpot control process of the first embodiment described above in that a process is added when it is determined that the timing is the end of the jackpot, and the other processes are the same. Is executed. The description of the same processing will be omitted.

When the jackpot control process 3 (S1704) is executed, the processes of S1801 to S1814 are executed in the same manner as the jackpot control process of the first embodiment, and in the process of S1814, the jackpot type is "big hit B" or "big hit D". (That is, it is a jackpot to which a time saving state is given after the jackpot ends) (S1814: No), the time saving state is set based on the time saving state selection table 202f, and the set time saving state is set. It is stored in the time saving state storage area 203t (S1871). Then, the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g is set to “1” (S1815), and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. The third embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the command determination process is changed to the command determination process 3 (see FIG. 100). Since the other elements are the same, the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 3 (S3112). When this command determination process 3 (S3112) is executed, the processes S3201 to S3214 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process of the first embodiment. Then, when it is determined in the process of S3213 that the notification command has not been received (S3213: No), it is determined whether or not the command for the number of times of normal drawing has been received (S3251). When the normal figure count command is received (S3251: Yes), the display normal figure count command is set (S3252). The display number number command set here is output to the display control device 114 in the same manner as the other display commands, and is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the time saving state. The number of times is displayed (see FIG. 93).

<Modification 1 of the game board 13 in the first embodiment>
Next, a modification 1 of the game board 13 in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIG. 101. In the first embodiment described above, as described with reference to FIG. 2, a storage device is used to regulate the entry of balls into the right first entry port 64b arranged in the right region of the game board 13. A 750 and a non-electric accessory 710 were provided. As a result, unless the non-electric accessory 710 is opened, the ball is surely prevented from entering the right first ball entry port 64b. On the other hand, in the present modification 1, a configuration is used in which the entry of the ball into the right first entry port 64b is restricted without using the storage device 750 and the non-electric accessory 710. Specifically, by providing a constantly movable valve 1500 above the right first ball entry port 64b, the entry of a ball into the right first ball entry port 64b is restricted.

Further, in the configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above, the through gate 67 and the second entry port 640 are arranged in the first flow path 701, and the ball has passed through the through gate 67. The second entrance below the through gate 67 so that the ball passes in a shorter period (0.2 seconds) than the fluctuation time (3 or 4 seconds) of the normal symbol (normal symbol) executed based on. By disposing the 640, it was suppressed that the ball passing through the through gate 67 directly entered the second entry port 640. On the other hand, in this modification, the through gate 67 is arranged in the first flow path 701, and the second entry port 640 is arranged in the second flow path 702. As a result, it is possible to physically prevent the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 from entering the second entry port 640.

The difference between the configuration of the game board 13 in the first modification and the configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above is that the storage device 750, the non-electric accessory 710, and the specific general entrance 630 are eliminated. The point is that the arrangement position of the right first entry port 64b is changed, and the arrangement position of the second entry port 640 is changed from the first flow path 701 to the second flow path 702. The other configurations are the same. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 101 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 13 of the present modification 1. As shown in FIG. 101, in the game board 13 of the present modification 1, a constantly movable member 1500 is provided along the ball rolling surface of the most upstream portion of the first flow path 701, and the constantly movable member 1500 is provided. Is configured to allow the ball to enter the right first entry port 64b when is movable in the open position (in the open state).

Here, the operation of the constantly movable member 1500 will be described in detail. The constantly movable valve 1500 is configured to be variable to an open position (open state) and a closed position (closed state) at a predetermined timing based on the power being turned on to the pachinko machine 10. There is. Specifically, in the movable member drive process (not shown) executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 53) of the main control device 110, operation control is performed based on the movable scenario stored in the ROM 203. Has been done. In this movable scenario, the operation of constantly opening the movable member 1500 for 0.1 seconds and then closing it for 1.2 seconds is repeatedly executed.

That is, in the game board 13 of the present modification 1, the ball launched in the right-handed game flows into the first flow path 701 at 1.2 second intervals, and the rolling member 1500 is always arranged. It flows down in the downstream direction while rolling on the surface. When the timing when the ball flows into the first flow path 701 and rolls on the constantly movable member 1500 (or falls on the constantly movable member) and the timing when the constantly movable valve 1500 is opened coincide with each other. The ball passes through the constantly movable member 1500 in the open state and enters the right first ball entry port 64b.

The timing of rolling (or falling onto the constantly movable member) on the constantly movable member 1500 is at 1.2 second intervals, and the timing of opening the constantly movable valve 1500 is 0 in 1.3 seconds. Since it is .1 second, the timing at which the two match is about once every 15.6 seconds. That is, when the right-handed game is continuously executed, about four balls per minute enter the right first ball entrance 64b.

That is, in a game state in which the right-handed game is continuously executed, such as during a jackpot game or a time-saving game, the ball enters the right first entrance 64b on a regular basis, so that the jackpot game is played. It is possible to prevent the state in which there is no hold of the special figure 1 from occurring when the state is completed and the time is shortened. In addition, since the period (0.1 seconds) in which it is difficult for the player to aim is set as the period during which the constantly movable valve 1500 is opened at one time, the left first ball is entered in the normal state of the game. A right-handed game can be more disadvantageous to the player than a left-handed game aimed at the mouth 64a.

Specifically, when the game state is the normal state, when the left-handed game is performed, about 15 balls out of the 250 shot balls fired will enter the left first entry port 64a. It is designed, and if a ball enters, five prize balls will be paid out. In addition, it is designed so that about 5 balls enter the general entry port 63, and when a ball enters, 5 prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the left-handed game, when 250 balls are fired, it is possible to put about 20 balls into the left first entry port 64a, considering that the prize balls to be paid out are fired again. It becomes.

On the other hand, when the game state is the normal state and the right-handed game is performed, it is designed so that about 9 balls out of the 250 fired balls enter the right first entry port 64b. If you enter the ball, two prize balls will be paid out. Further, the general entry port 63 is not provided in the right side region. Therefore, in the right-handed game, when 250 balls are fired, about 10 balls are allowed to enter the right first ball entrance 64b even if the prize ball to be paid out is fired again. I can only do it. Therefore, when the game state is the normal state, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the right-handed game.

In the present embodiment, the general entry port 63 is not provided in the game area (right area) through which the ball launched by the right-handed game passes, but in the normal state of the game, the right-handed ball is hit more than the left-handed game. The general ball entrance 63 may be arranged based on a design concept to the extent that the game is not more advantageous to the player. As a result, the number of balls paid out as prize balls can be increased in the right-handed game in the time saving state or the jackpot state.

Next, among the configurations arranged in the right side region of the game board 13 in the present modification 1, the through gate 67 and the second entry port 640 are different from the configurations of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above. The explanation will focus on the points.

In the first modification, the through gate 67 is arranged in the downstream portion of the first flow path 701 having the bending path 701a, and the second entry is made in the downstream portion of the second flow path 702 (the lower end portion of the fifth flow path 704b). A ball mouth 640 is arranged. With this configuration, the ball flowing into the second flow path 702 can flow down toward the second entry port 640 at intervals of 1.2 seconds without reducing the flow speed of the ball. Therefore, since the flow interval of the balls flowing down the second flow path 702 can be made constant, the balls are connected in the second flow path 702, and a plurality of balls are simultaneously entered into the second entry port 640. It can be suppressed that it ends up. Further, when the third symbol display device 81 notifies that the electric accessory 640a is open without noticing that the electric accessory 640a has been opened (see FIG. 23 (b)), it is promptly performed. The ball can be entered into the second entry port 640.

Further, different flow paths (first flow path 701, 1st flow path 701,) in which the through gate 67, which triggers the execution of the lottery of the normal symbol, and the electric accessory 640a whose operation is controlled by winning the normal symbol, are distributed by the distribution member 700. Since it is arranged in the second flow path 702), when the distribution member 700 is destroyed so as to allow the ball to flow down to only one of the flow paths (when the distribution function is disabled), the second ball entry port is used. It is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the 640. That is, when the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a are arranged in one of the flow paths distributed by the distribution member 700, the distribution member 700 is destroyed and a state is created in which the ball flows down only in one of the flow paths. This makes it possible to create a state in which it is easy to insert a ball into the second entrance 640, but by using the configuration of this modification, the ball is illegally inserted into the second entrance 640. It is possible to suppress the creation of a state that is easy to make.

<Modification 2 of the game board 13 in the first embodiment>
Next, a modification 2 of the game board 13 in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIG. 102. In the first embodiment described above, as described with reference to FIG. 2, a storage device is used to regulate the entry of balls into the right first entry port 64b arranged in the right region of the game board 13. A 750 and a non-electric accessory 710 were provided. As a result, unless the non-electric accessory 710 is opened, the ball is surely prevented from entering the right first ball entry port 64b. On the other hand, in the present modification 2, a constantly movable plate 1700 is provided between the storage device 750 and the specific general entry port 630, and when the storage device 750 is released, a ball that has passed through the storage device 750. The case where the ball enters the specific general entry port 630 and the case where the ball does not enter the specific general entry port 630 are provided.

Specifically, the constantly movable plate 1700 can be changed to a guide position (protruding position) in which the ball can be guided to the specific general entry port 630 every second, and an open position (evacuation position) in which the ball cannot be guided (difficult). A variable control means is provided, and the flow of the sphere that has passed through the storage device 750 can be controlled by the variable control by the variable control means.

The operation of the constantly movable plate 1700 is controlled by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Specifically, the movable plate solenoid (not shown) that variably operates the constantly movable plate 1700 is set to an on state (a state in which the constantly movable plate 1700 is projected) and an off state (a state in which the constantly movable plate 1700 is retracted). It has a variable control means for making it variable, and a predetermined variable scenario based on a predetermined counter value updated every time the main process of the main control device 110 is executed by the variable control means. Variable control is executed according to.

The movable plate solenoid used in this modification is configured such that the movable plate 1700 is always located at the shelter position while the power is on. As described in each of the above-described embodiments, this is the first condition during the time saving state as an end condition of the game period (time saving state period in which it is easy to acquire the hold memory of FIG. 2) which is advantageous to the player. This is because the condition that the change (lottery) of the special symbol (special figure 1) is executed once is set. In other words, unless this end condition is satisfied, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol) will be shorter than the normal state (normal symbol fluctuation time 3 seconds), and it will be executed when the normal symbol (normal symbol) is won. This is because the opening operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a to be performed is also such that the opening operation pattern (long opening) which is advantageous to the player is continuously executed. As described above, in the state where there is no reserved memory of special figure 1, the fluctuation of each special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started until the reserved memory of special figure 2 is acquired. There is no (waiting for a short time), and only the fluctuation of the normal symbol (normal symbol) is executed. In this case, the time saving state will be continued until the ball is won in the normal drawing and the ball enters the second entrance 640. In order to prevent such a situation from being intentionally created, the movable plate 1700 is always positioned at the protruding position when the power of the movable valve solenoid is turned off. As a result, even if the act of intentionally stopping the supply of power to the movable valve solenoid is executed, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of great damage.

In the configuration of the present modification described above, depending on the timing at which the storage device 750 is released (that is, the timing at which the jackpot game is started) and the variable state of the constantly movable plate 1700, the right first entry port 64b is reached. It is possible to regulate the entry of the ball. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect at what timing the jackpot game will start.

A configuration may be added to the above-described modified example so that a different timing can be set as the timing for releasing the storage device 750. Specifically, according to the jackpot type selected at the time of winning the jackpot of the special symbol (special symbol), the jackpot type for releasing the storage valve 750a of the storage device 750 and the jackpot type for not releasing are set in advance. Further, as the jackpot type for releasing the storage valve 750a, the first timing (for example, the timing for starting the first round) and the second timing (for example, the timing for starting the third round) are set in advance. Configure.

With this configuration, the storage device 750 is released and the timing at which the sphere passes through the storage device 750 can be diversified. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether the timing at which the jackpot game is started and the variable state of the constantly movable plate 1700 are favorable timings for the player, and the player can be made even after the jackpot game is started. Can be played with a sense of expectation. In addition, it is possible to suppress the act of starting the jackpot game at a timing advantageous to the player.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned presence / absence of release of the storage device 750 and the configuration in which a plurality of release timings are set according to the jackpot type may be used in each of the above-described embodiments. As a result, more complicated game playability can be provided, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Modification 3 of the game board 13 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, a modification 3 of the game board 13 in the above-described first embodiment will be described. The third modification is different in that the arrangement positions of the storage device 750 and the specific general entry port 630 are different from those of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) of the first embodiment described above, and other than that. The composition of is the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 103, in the present modification 3, the storage device 750 and the specific general entry port 630 are arranged on the right side of the lower center of the game board 13. With this configuration, the right-handed game makes it easier to store the ball in the storage device 750 than the left-handed game. Specifically, among the balls launched by the right-handed game, the balls that have flowed down on the first variable winning device 65 are configured to be most easily stored in the storage device 750.

Then, in a state where the spheres are stored in the storage device 750, the next and subsequent spheres are configured to flow down above the stored spheres. Specifically, the upper surface position of the sphere stored in the storage device 750 is lower than the flow direction extension line of the sphere flowing down on the first variable winning device 65 (the first variable winning device 65 A storage device 750 is arranged so as to have a downward step with respect to the upper surface of the unit to be provided. Therefore, the storage of the spheres in the storage device 750 does not affect the subsequent sphere flow. In the present modification 3 configured in this way, when the right-handed game that is advantageous to the player is started, the holding of the special figure 1 can be secured more reliably.

Each modification of the game board 13 described above may be applied to each of the above-described embodiments. As a result, a more complicated game can be provided to the player, and the interest can be improved.

<Modification example of electric accessory 640a>
Next, a modified example of the electric accessory 640a used in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107. In each of the above-described embodiments, the game board in which the second ball entry port 640 is arranged so that two or more balls do not enter the second ball entry port 640 while the electric accessory 640a is open. It was configured to regulate the ball flow in the right region of 13. That is, a measure was taken to regulate the ball flow of the electric accessory 640a so that a plurality of balls do not flow in continuously at the same time. On the other hand, the electric accessory A200 described in this modification has a configuration in which two or more balls cannot enter the second entry port 640.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104, the shutter portion A222 has a cross section orthogonal to the rotation shaft portions 223 and 223 curved in a substantially "<" shape, and the rotation door A220 serves as a side start winning opening A40A. It is composed of a door main wall A222A that is located on the front side and stands up substantially vertically when the door is closed, and a winning auxiliary wall A222B that extends rearward from the upper end of the door main wall A222 in this state. The door main wall A222A has a V-shaped cross section in order to prevent the game ball from being caught. Further, the door main wall A222A is located away from the rotating shaft portions 223 and 223, and rotates forward from a substantially horizontal state as the rotating door A220 rotates from an open state to a closed state. It becomes a state of standing up almost vertically. The winning auxiliary wall A222B is inclined so as to descend toward the back side of the side starting winning opening A40A with the rotating door A220 open.

Further, the width of the shutter portion A222 is slightly narrower than the width of the side starting winning opening A40A, while the width of the pair of side walls is wider than the width of the side starting winning opening A40A. When the rotating door A220 is completely closed, the front surface of the side wall comes into contact with the side edge of the side starting winning opening A40A, and the rotating door A220 further closes the side starting winning opening A40A. It prevents it from rotating.

Of the pair of side walls, door rotating protrusions A224 and A224 are provided on the opposite sides of the rotating shaft portion from the shutter portion, respectively. Further, on the side wall, positioning contact portions A225 and A225 which are located behind the door rotating protrusion A224 and project downward when the rotating door A220 is in the completely open open end position are formed. ing.

A detection sensor is housed in the above-mentioned switch housing part 215B of the resin housing. The detection sensor has a flat rectangular parallelepiped shape, and a game ball passage hole is formed through the rear end portion in the vertical direction. Through holes are formed on both the upper and lower sides of the switch accommodating portion 215B corresponding to the game ball passage hole, and the game ball that has entered the tongue piece accommodating portion 215A passes through the game ball passage hole 281 and accommodates the switch. It is designed to move below the portion 215B. Below the switch accommodating portion 215B, a duct (not shown) that takes in the game ball and guides it to the ball circulation system of the game field is provided.

The tongue piece accommodating portion 215A of the resin housing is accommodated in the movable tongue piece A230. The movable tongue piece A230 has a flat structure in which the width direction is short with respect to the front-rear direction and is thinned in the vertical direction, and is supported so as to slide back and forth while sliding on the inner surface of the tongue piece accommodating portion 215A.

The movable tongue piece A230 has a symmetrical shape when viewed from above, and its front end portion is provided with a protruding projecting piece portion that is stepped narrower than the whole. The infested projectile portion is slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball, and has a width that allows it to be inserted into the lower wide portion of the side start winning opening A40A.

A pair of outward descending inclined surfaces 240S and 240S inclined so as to descend toward both sides are formed on both side portions in the lateral width direction of the upper surface of the infested projecting piece portion. In addition, between the pair of outward descending inclined surfaces 240S and 240S of the infested projecting pieces, the pull-in inclined surface is extremely gently inclined so as to descend toward the center and is gently inclined so as to descend toward the rear. 240H is formed. Further, on the upper surface of the infested projecting piece portion, an induction inclined surface 240Y that descends relatively steeply from the rear end of the retracting inclined surface 240H toward the rear is formed.

The movable tongue piece A230 has a shape in which the trapezoidal protrusion 231D protrudes rearward from the center in the width direction at the rear end of the substantially quadrangular base portion in the portion rearward from the infestation protrusion when viewed from above. There is. At the center of the base portion in the width direction, a ball-passing elongated hole is formed vertically from the front end position to the rear end position. The ball passage slot has a width that allows exactly one game ball to pass through and is slightly smaller than the width of the infested projectile portion. In addition, the front end of the ball-passing elongated hole becomes semi-circular and part of it reaches the base end of the infested projecting piece, and the rear end of the ball-passing elongated hole becomes parallel to the bottom of the trapezoidal projecting portion 231D. It has reached the position near the rear end of the base part.

A pair of doors extending in the vertical direction along both side edges of the long ball passage hole in the range of the movable tongue piece A230 extending from the base end of the infestation projecting piece to the intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the base part. The drive protrusion is formed so as to protrude. The entire base portion on the rear side of the door drive protrusion wall is a power receiving portion A230P that is thickened in the vertical direction so as to have an upper surface flush with the rear end portion upper surface of the door drive protrusion wall.

A pair of connecting recesses are formed in the power receiving portion A230P on the opposite inner side surfaces facing each other with the ball passage elongated hole interposed therebetween. Each connecting recess is composed of a substantially triangular interference avoiding recess whose lower end side is narrowed, and an engaging groove portion which is formed by being depressed in the inner surface of the interference avoiding recess on the side away from the ball passage elongated hole and extends in the vertical direction. Become. The front sliding contact surface 236A arranged on the front side of the engaging groove portion extends straight in the vertical direction. The rear sliding contact surface 236B arranged on the rear side of the engaging groove portion has a portion below the intermediate position in the vertical direction projecting forward to serve as a seesaw stopper portion according to the present invention. The stopper contact surface 237S at the upper end of the seesaw stopper portion is slightly inclined so as to descend toward the front sliding contact surface 236A.

Each door drive protrusion is provided with an intermediate recessed portion at an intermediate position in the front-rear direction, the front side of the intermediate recessed portion is the front pressing protrusion A241 according to the present invention, and the rear side of the intermediate recessed portion is the rear pressing according to the present invention. It is a protrusion A242. The rear pressing protrusion A242 has the same height as the power receiving portion A230P, and the front pressing protrusion A241 is lower than the power receiving portion A230P. Further, the bottom surface of the intermediate depression portion is a horizontal and flat intermediate depression flat surface 233N. The rear surface of the front pressing protrusion A241 is the closing pressing portion A241K according to the present invention, and rises vertically from the intermediate depressed flat surface 233N. Further, the upper surface of the front pressing protrusion A241 is the door stopper A241J according to the present invention, and is horizontally flat. On the other hand, the front surface of the rear pressing protrusion A242 is the opening pressing portion A242Z according to the present invention, which also rises vertically from the intermediate depressed flat surface 233N. The front surface of the front pressing protrusion A241 is parallel to the closing pressing portion A241K, which is the rear surface, and gently inclines forward from the middle to extend to the rear ends of the above-mentioned outward downward inclined surfaces 240S and 240S. ..

The lower end of the seesaw member A250 is engaged with the connecting recess of the movable tongue piece A230, and the door rotating protrusions A224 and A224 of the rotating door A220 are engaged with the door driving protrusion of the movable tongue piece A230, respectively. are doing. As a result, the movable tongue piece A230 is driven by receiving power from the solenoid via the seesaw member A250, and the rotary door A220 is driven by receiving power from the movable tongue piece A230.

First, the transmission of power from the seesaw member A250 to the movable tongue piece A230 will be described. Each connecting arm of the seesaw member A250 is received in each interference avoiding recess of each connecting recess of the movable tongue piece A230, and the lower end connecting protrusions A255 and A255 of each connecting arm are formed in each engaging groove of each connecting recess. Engage.

Here, when the solenoid is not excited, the plunger protrudes forward as shown in FIG. 104, and at this time, the lower end connecting convex portions A255 and A255 are located at the lower end portion of the engaging groove portion. At this time, the movable tongue piece A230 is arranged at the rear end position of the linear movement movable range, and the infestation projecting piece portion is retracted to the back side of the side start winning opening A40A. In this case, that is, in a state where the infestation projectile portion is retracted to the back side of the side start winning opening A40A, the tip portion of the infestation projectile portion is retracted to a position where the inside of the side start winning opening A40A is completely covered. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from colliding with the side start winning opening A40A in the shunting state.

When the solenoid is excited from this state and the plunger is sucked backward, the seesaw member A250 rotates around the rotation shaft portions A253 and A253, and the connecting arm rotates forward. The lower end connecting convex portions A255 and A255 press the front sliding contact surfaces 236A and 236A forward while sliding contact with the front sliding contact surfaces 236A and 236A. As a result, the movable tongue piece A230 is pushed forward of the game machine, and as shown in FIG. 104, the protruding protrusion piece portion protrudes from the side start winning opening A40A toward the front side of the game board. Then, for example, the end surface of the base portion of the movable tongue piece A230 comes into contact with the opening edge of the side start winning opening A40A from the rear surface side, and the movable tongue piece A230 is positioned at the "front end operating position" according to the present invention and stops. Then, the infestation protrusion piece 240 is in a state of being maximally protruded from the side start winning opening A40A (see FIG. 106).

When the excitation of the solenoid is stopped with the movable tongue piece A230 arranged at the front end operating position (the state shown in FIG. 106), the plunger is projected forward by the compression coil spring A276. Then, the lower end portion of the seesaw member A250 rotates rearward of the game machine around the rotation shaft portions A253 and A253, and the lower end portion of the seesaw member A250 moves from the front position to the rear position from the rotation shaft portions A253 and A253. Moving. At this time, the lower end connecting convex portions A255 and A255 are in sliding contact with the rear sliding contact surfaces 236B and 236B of the engaging groove portion and are pushed backward. As a result, the movable tongue piece is pulled in to the rear of the game machine, and the infestation projecting piece portion retracts to the back side of the side start winning opening A40A (see FIG. 107).

Specifically, when the excitation of the solenoid is stopped and the lower end portion of the connecting arm in the seesaw member A250 rotates rearward, first, the upper edge portion E1 (first) of the stopper concave portion provided on the lower end connecting convex portion A255. The trailing edge of the plane M1) comes into contact with the stopper contact surface 237S of the seesaw stopper portion. Then, as the seesaw member A250 rotates, the lower end connecting convex portion A255 slides into contact with the rear sliding contact surface 236B, and the lower end connecting convex portion A255 is located behind the rotating shaft portions A253 and A253 of the seesaw member A250. Occasionally, the lower edge portion E2 (lower end edge of the second plane M2) of the stopper recess comes into contact with the lower portion of the rear sliding contact surface 236B below the seesaw stopper portion, and the rear sliding of the engaging groove portion. Push the contact surfaces 236B and 236B backward. As a result, the movable tongue piece can be returned to the initial position (rear end retracted position) by the elastic force of the compression coil spring A276.

By the way, when the movable tongue piece A230 retracted to the back of the side start winning opening A40A is pulled out to the front of the game board by, for example, a wire inserted through a gap of the game machine, the following become that way. That is, the power is not transmitted from the solenoid to the seesaw member A250, the power of the seesaw member A250 is transmitted from the movable tongue piece A230, and the connecting arm of the seesaw member A250 is pushed forward by the rear sliding contact surface 236B in the engaging groove portion 236. Then, the first plane M1 in each of the stopper recesses of the lower end connecting convex portions A255 and A255 and the stopper contact surface 237S of the seesaw stopper portion come into surface contact with each other. When the movable tongue piece A230 is further pulled forward from this state, the pulling force becomes an upward force F1 orthogonal to the stopper contact surface 237S of the stepped portion, and becomes the center of the first plane M1 and the rotating shaft portion. The direction is substantially parallel to the direction connecting the center of A253, that is, the direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation direction of the stopper recess. As a result, the rotation of the seesaw member A250 is restricted, and it becomes impossible to pull the movable tongue piece A230 toward the front so that the protruding protrusion piece portion protrudes in front of the side start winning opening A40A. Further, even if the seesaw member A250 is slightly lifted diagonally upward by the upward force F1, the triangular ridge formed on the connecting wall 252 of the seesaw member A250 engages with the flange portion 274F of the plunger. As a result, the rotation of the seesaw member A250 is more reliably prohibited.

Next, the transmission of power from the movable tongue piece A230 to the rotating door A220 will be described. The door rotating protrusions A224 and A224 of the rotating door A220 are engaged with the door driving protrusion of the movable tongue piece, respectively, whereby the rotating door A220 receives power from the movable tongue piece A230 and rotates. To do. Specifically, in a state where the movable tongue piece A230 is arranged at the rear end retracting position and the entire infestation projecting piece portion is retracted to the back side of the side start winning opening A40A, the door rotating projecting portion A224 presses the front side. It is arranged above the door stopper A241J in the protrusion 241 (state in FIG. 104). At this time, the rotating shaft portion of the rotating door A220 is located diagonally forward of the door rotating protrusion A224. At this time, the first space AS1 according to the present invention is formed between the lower end portion of the door rotating protrusion A224 and the open pressing portion A242Z of the rear pressing protrusion A242.

Then, when the movable tongue piece A230 advances from the rear end retracted position, the front pressing protrusion A241 moves forward and becomes the lower end of the door rotating protrusion A224, as shown in the changes from FIGS. 104 to 107. The door stopper A241J of the front pressing protrusion A241 no longer faces in the vertical direction, and the lower end of the door rotating protrusion A224 faces the intermediate depressed flat surface 233N in the vertical direction with the intermediate depressed flat surface 233N. A rotating space for the door rotating protrusion A224 is secured between them.

Then, when the movable tongue piece A230 moves further forward, the lower end of the door rotating protrusion A224 moves in the first space AS1 described above, and during this time, the movable tongue piece A230 moves forward but the rotating door. Is kept in a stopped state. Then, as shown in FIG. 105, when the protruding protrusion of the movable tongue piece A230 protrudes by a predetermined amount from the side start winning opening A40A, the lower end of the door rotating protrusion A224 is the rear pressing protrusion A242. It abuts on the front surface A242Z. Then, as the movable tongue piece further advances, the door main wall A222A of the rotating door A220 is lifted, the side start winning opening A40A is opened (see FIGS. 105 and 106), and the movable tongue piece A230 is at the front end. When the operating position is reached, the rotating door A220 is fully opened, and the game ball can be won in the side start winning opening A40A. More specifically, when the rotating door A220 is pushed by the rear pressing protrusion A242 and rotated by a certain angle, the rotating door A220 rotates toward the open end position due to its own weight. That is, the rotating door A220 starts the rotation operation when the protruding protrusion piece portion protrudes about half from the side start winning opening A40A, and the protruding protrusion piece portion protrudes about half and then completely protrudes. In a relatively short period of time, the side start winning opening A40A changes from the fully closed state to the fully open state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the movable tongue piece A230 starts advancing, the rotary door A220 is stopped halfway, and the rotary door A220 starts to open from the middle. The mouth A40A is opened. Then, when the game ball falls on the upper surface of the infestation projecting piece portion 240 protruding from the side starting winning opening A40A, the game ball is guided by the infestation projecting piece portion 240 to win a prize in the side starting winning opening A40A. The game ball is detected by the detection switch.

Further, when the rotating door A220 is completely opened, as shown in FIG. 106, the positioning contact portion A225 of the side wall abuts on the upper surface of the rear pressing protrusion A242, and the rotating door A220 is at the open end. Positioned in position. As a result, the rattling of the rotating door A220 is regulated. Further, in this state, a second space AS2 according to the present invention is formed between the lower end portion of the door rotating protrusion A224 and the open pressing portion A242Z of the rear pressing protrusion A242.

Further, when the movable tongue piece A230 retracts from the front end operating position, the front pressing protrusion A241 moves rearward as shown in the changes from FIGS. 106 to 107. At this time, the lower end portion of the door rotating protrusion A224 moves relatively in the second space AS2 toward the front pressing protrusion A241. As a result, a part of the infestation projecting piece portion 240 in the movable tongue piece A230 moves into the front opening winning opening A40A (from the state where the door rotating projecting portion A224 is in contact with the opening pressing portion A242Z, it hits the closing pressing portion A241K. The rotating door A220 is maintained in an open state while (moving in the second space AS2 until it comes into contact). Then, the movable tongue piece A230 wins a front opening prize by a predetermined amount (the distance that the door rotating protrusion A224 moves in the second space AS2 from the state where the door rotating protrusion A224 abuts on the opening pressing portion A242Z until it abuts on the closing pressing portion A241K). When moving into the mouth A40A, the closing pressing portion A241K of the front pressing protrusion A241 comes into contact with the lower end of the door rotating protrusion A224. At this time, about half of the infestation projecting piece portion 240 of the movable tongue piece A230 is housed in the side start winning opening A40A. Then, when the movable tongue piece A230 is further retracted, the rotating door A220 operates so as to close with the retracting of the movable tongue piece A230, and when the infested projectile portion is completely retracted, the rotating door A220 is moved. The side start winning opening A40A is completely closed and stopped, and the movable tongue piece A230 further retracts behind the side starting winning opening A40A, and the lower end of the door rotating protrusion A224 moves up and down with the door stopper A241J. It returns to the initial state facing in the direction. As described above, in the present embodiment, the movable tongue piece A230 starts retreating, the rotating door 220 is stopped halfway, and the rotating door A220 starts closing from the middle. The mouth A40A is closed.

By the way, in a state where the side start winning opening A40A is closed (state in FIG. 104), for example, when the rotating door A220 is to be pried open with a wire or the like, the door rotating protrusion A224 rotates to the opening side. , The front side pressing protrusion A241 comes into contact with the door stopper A241J in the vertical direction. As a result, unauthorized opening of the rotating door A220 is prohibited. Here, the direction of the force by which the door rotating protrusion A224 pushes the door stopper A241J of the front pressing protrusion A241 is in the vertical direction and is orthogonal to the movable direction (front-back direction) of the movable tongue piece A230. Therefore, when an illegal external force is applied to the rotating door A220, the door stopper portion A241J of the movable tongue piece A230 is not moved in the movable direction, and the rotating door A220 is surely prevented from being opened illegally. Can be done.

<Other production example 1 using the configuration of each embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 108, other production examples executed using the configurations of the above-described embodiments will be described. In the second embodiment described above, as a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 15 (a), each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, It was configured to display the number of pending figures for each symbol) and each symbol. On the other hand, in the effect example described with reference to FIG. 108, the effect of displaying the symbol display and the number of reservations of the special figure 1 in the sub-display area Ds is executed. In this sub-display area Ds, it is displayed in a variable display mode in which a specific display mode (for example, a number) is changed in correspondence with the fluctuation of the symbol of the special figure 1 (the change in the special figure 1 is executed). , The reserved number of the special figure 1 is configured to be displayed in the suggestion display mode suggesting the display mode to be displayed next in the variable display mode. Here, the contents of this production example will be described with reference to FIG. 108 (a).

The display screen of FIG. 108 (a) is a display screen showing an example of the case where the special figure 1 is not held during the change of the special figure 1 during the time saving state (the first time reduction). As shown in FIG. 108 (a), the special figure 1 variable display area Ds3 of the sub-display area Ds is referred to as "remaining time seconds" as an auxiliary display mode for giving meaning to the variable situation of the variable display mode. The display and the display of "10" are displayed in the variable display area Ds4 as a variable display mode indicating that the special figure 1 is changing. By varying the display mode (“10” in FIG. 108 (a)) displayed in the variable display area Ds4, it is configured to notify that the special figure 1 is changing during the variable display. There is.

It should be noted that the display mode (for example, "10") displayed in the variable display area Ds4 while the special figure 1 is changing means that the player mistakenly recognizes that the change of the special figure 1 has stopped in the display mode. In order to prevent this, the display mode is temporarily stopped and displayed for a period (for example, 0.5 seconds) in which the player can recognize the display mode in a slightly shaken state, and then the display mode is changed to the next display mode. Then, when the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is stopped, the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4 (for example, “∞” (see FIG. 108 (b))) is set by the player in the display mode of the special figure 1. In order to recognize that the fluctuation has stopped, it is configured to stop for a longer period (for example, 1 second) than the above-mentioned temporary stop display (for example, 0.5 seconds).

With this configuration, the player can easily grasp the content of the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4. As long as the player can easily grasp the contents of the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4, other configurations may be used, for example, the period during which the special figure 1 is variably displayed. , The color of the background image of the special figure 1 variable display area Ds3 is changed, the display content of the auxiliary display mode is changed, and the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4 is changed during the period when the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed. You may change the color of the character and the thickness of the characters. As a result, the player can easily understand the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4.

Further, according to the configuration used in this production example, it is possible to notify that the special figure 1 is fluctuating and the remaining fluctuation period of the special figure 1 depending on the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4. ing. As a result, a plurality of information related to the fluctuation of the special figure 1 can be displayed in one display area (variable display area Ds4).

In this production example, in order to notify the player that the special figure 1 is fluctuating, the effect display that counts down the time in the special figure 1 fluctuation display area Ds3 is executed, but other than that. It may be configured, and for example, a story development type production display such as a production in which a question is asked and an answer is given or a production in which a mission is achieved may be used. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the special figure 1 is changing by changing the content displayed in the special figure 1 variable display area Ds3.

Then, among the sub-display areas Ds, in the special figure 1 hold display area Ds5, the hold number suggestion mode for showing the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed based on the hold number of the special figure 1 (FIG. 108 (Fig. 108). a) See). This hold number suggestion mode is displayed in a display mode suggesting a display mode to be displayed in the variable display area Ds4 from the next time onward. That is, the display mode displayed corresponding to each hold number suggestion mode is changed each time the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4 is changed.

According to the display screen shown in FIG. 108 (a), four hold number suggestion modes are displayed in the special figure 1 hold display area Ds5, and any of "V", "9", and "∞", respectively. Display mode is displayed. The display mode displayed as the hold number suggestion mode suggests the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4 as described above, and the "V" display mode is a hit by the lottery result of the special figure 1. The "9" display mode suggests the residual fluctuation period of the special figure 1, and the "∞" display mode suggests that there is no reserved memory of the special figure 1.

According to the game state shown in FIG. 108 (a), since there is no hold memory of the special figure 1, the display is set so that the number of "∞" displayed is increased as the hold number suggestion mode. As described above, the display mode of each hold number suggestion mode displayed in the special figure 1 hold display area Ds5 is the lottery result of the changing special figure 1, the remaining fluctuation time of the changing special figure 1, and the special figure. Since the display content is set based on the number of reserved balls of 1, the player can play the game while predicting the progress content of the future game based on the display mode displayed in the special figure 1 reserved display area Ds5. It can be carried out.

According to the display screen shown in FIG. 108 (a), four hold number suggestion modes are displayed, but the display number always displays four hold number suggestion modes regardless of the hold number in FIG. It is configured to be done. That is, in the special figure 1 hold display area Ds5, the hold number of the special figure 1 is notified (suggested) to the player not by the display number of the hold number suggestion mode but by the display content of each hold number suggestion mode. There is. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the current number of holds.

In this production example, the number of display of the hold number suggestion mode displayed in the special figure 1 hold display area Ds5 is configured to be always displayed (regardless of the hold number of special figure 1). Other configurations may be used, and are displayed in the special figure 1 hold display area Ds5 based on, for example, the number of holds of special figure 1, the remaining fluctuation time of special figure 1, and the lottery result of special figure 1. The display number of the pending number suggestion mode may be different. In this case, for example, when the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 becomes short (for example, when the remaining time becomes 10 seconds), the number of display of the hold number suggestion mode displayed in the special figure 1 hold display area Ds5 is reduced. It is good to configure. As a result, the options predicted by the player can be reduced, and the prediction accuracy of the player can be improved.

Further, as in the second embodiment described above, in the gaming machine configured to execute the game advantageous to the player when there is no hold number of the special figure 1 at the end of the time saving state. By suggesting (displaying) the presence or absence of the reserved number of the special figure 1 as in this production example, it is possible to make the player execute the game in the time saving state while expecting the player to the end.

Then, when the effect display of FIG. 108 (a) elapses and the fluctuation of the special figure 1 stops, the display screen shown in FIG. 108 (b) is displayed. The display screen of FIG. 108 (b) is a display screen showing an example in the case where neither the special figure 1 nor the special figure 2 is held in the state where the fluctuation of the special figure 1 executed during the time saving state is stopped. is there. As shown in FIG. 108 (b), when the first time reduction is completed in the state where the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are not held, the change of the special symbol is not started (the special figure change of the second rotation of the time reduction is performed). (Without being started), it will be on standby for a short time. During this short waiting time, by continuously executing the right-handed game, the normal symbol is continuously changed (lottery), and the game in which the ball is inserted into the second entrance 640 is executed.

In the configuration of the game board 13 described above with reference to FIG. 2, even if the right-handed game is executed during the time saving state, the ball does not enter the right first entrance 64b, and therefore the ball does not enter the right first entrance 64b. The state shown in (1) is a gaming state in which the time saving state is continuously maintained until the ball enters the second entry port 640. On the display screen, the normal symbol main symbol Dmc corresponding to the normal symbol is variablely displayed in the first display area Dm, and the special figure 1 reserved display area Ds5 is currently displayed instead of the display indicating the number of reserved characters in the special figure 1. Is displayed in the variable display area Ds4 as a display indicating that the special figure 1 is not fluctuating in the special figure 1 variable display area Ds3. The characters "remaining time ∞ seconds" with the "∞" display mode stopped are displayed.

According to the effect example described above, the player displays a display mode in which the fluctuation status (lottery result, remaining fluctuation time) of the special figure 1 during the time saving state and the reserved number of the special figure 1 are displayed on the display screen. Since the effect is displayed so as to predict the progress of the subsequent game, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the above-mentioned production example, both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 shift to the time saving standby state which can occur in the state without holding (the "∞" display mode is stopped and displayed in the variable display area Ds4). Although the effect display for suggesting is also executed, it is determined whether or not to execute this effect display based on the number of reserved memories (presence / absence of hold) in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2. Also, for example, when the number of reserved storages in the special figure 2 is 1 or more, it is preferable not to execute the above-mentioned effect display.

In the first embodiment described above, when both the gaming state at the timing when the fluctuation (lottery) of the normal symbol is executed and the gaming state at the timing when the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set are both in the time saving state. As the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a, an operation pattern (long open) that is advantageous to the player is set, but other configurations may be used. For example, a fluctuation (lottery) of a normal symbol is executed. The timing at which the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (the timing at which the determination condition is satisfied) may be used instead of the timing (the timing at which the determination by the determination means is executed).

Further, the timing at which the operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed (the timing at which the operation means executes the operation) is not the timing at which the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set (the timing at which the operation mode is set by the operation mode setting means). ) May be used.

Further, when the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is to operate the electric accessory 640a a plurality of times, each operation content may be determined at each timing when each operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed. .. Specifically, as the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a, there is an operation pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is opened three times, and when an operation pattern (long release) advantageous to the player is set, each release is performed. When the period is set to 2 seconds and an operation pattern (short opening) that is disadvantageous to the player is set, when each opening period is set to 0.2 seconds, the long opening is used as the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a. Is set, and when the time saving state ends between the second opening and the third opening, the opening period may be set to 0.2 seconds only for the third opening. With this configuration, the electric accessory 640a is operated so as to be advantageous to the player until the end during the time saving state which is advantageous to the player, but after the gaming state shifts to the normal state, the player It can be facilitated to suppress the provision of an excessively favorable condition.

In this case, only the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a may be set in advance, and the opening period may be set at the timing when the electric accessory 640a is opened according to the operation pattern. Without setting the operation pattern of the object 640a, the timing at which the operation of the electric accessory 640a is started and the operation content may be individually controlled for each operation.

Further, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent a plurality of balls from entering the second entry port 640 while the electric accessory 640a is open, a ball is inserted into the second entry port 640. It is possible to enter the second entrance 640 in order to prevent a plurality of balls from entering the second entrance 640 at the same time, with the condition that one ball is inserted as the condition for ending the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. A distribution means for alternately distributing balls to a flow path (first flow path) and a flow path that cannot enter the second ball entry port 640 (second flow path) is provided, and the first flow path is provided. Although it was configured so that the distance between the balls flowing down was wide. Other configurations may be added to more reliably prevent a plurality of balls from entering the second entry port 640 at the same time.

For example, of the flow paths (first flow paths) capable of entering the second ball entry port 640, a gear-type sprocket mechanism is provided on the upstream side of the second ball entry port 640, even if the first flow path is provided. Even if a plurality of balls flow down continuously on the road, the sprocket mechanism may guide the balls one by one to the downstream side to widen the flow interval of the balls. As a result, it is possible to physically prevent a plurality of balls from entering the second entry port 640 at the same time. In this way, when a ball feeding member for feeding the ball in the downstream direction is provided on the upstream side of the second entry port 640 so that the flow interval of the ball is constant, the above-mentioned distribution member may not be used. .. Further, the ball feeding member may have a configuration other than the sprocket mechanism described above. For example, a magnetic body that can move with a constant operation is provided, and the ball is fed (flowed down) in the flow direction at a predetermined timing depending on the moving position of the magnetic body. ) Configuration may be used.

Further, in the present embodiment, the distribution member (distribution device 700) uses a configuration in which the ball launched in the right-handed game is distributed to two flow paths, but a configuration in which the ball is distributed to three or more flow paths. May be used. In this case, one distribution member may be used to distribute the sphere to three or more flow paths, or a combination of a plurality of distribution members may be used to distribute the sphere to three or more flow paths. It may be configured to sort. As a result, the interval at which the ball flows down the flow path that can enter the second ball entry port 640 can be further widened.

Further, in the present embodiment, a distribution member (distribution device 700) that distributes spheres evenly to a plurality of flow paths is used, but it is necessary to equalize the distribution rate of spheres to each flow path. Instead, for example, a distribution member may be provided such that the number of balls flowing down the first flow path 701 and the number of balls flowing down the second flow path 702 are 1: 2, or the distribution destination of the balls may be A configuration may be provided so as to be randomly selected. This makes it possible for the player to be interested in the flow mode of the ball.

In the second embodiment described above, a plurality of conditions for ending the time saving state are provided, and when any of the conditions is satisfied, the time saving state is terminated. However, other configurations may be used in advance. When all the set end conditions for the time saving state are satisfied, the time saving state may end. In this case, it is preferable to use a configuration in which a plurality of time-saving state end conditions that already satisfy the conditions are output to the outside so that the player can grasp them.

Further, in the second embodiment described above, one condition of the end condition of the time saving state is that the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol is executed a plurality of times (twice) as the number of times the time saving state is continued. However, such a configuration may be used to execute the playability shown below.

In the third embodiment described above, when the time saving state B is set for the purpose of providing a variety of playability by making the fluctuation time of the normal symbol different when a predetermined condition is satisfied, further, the time saving state When the number of fluctuations of the normal symbol in the inside exceeds 40 times, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened to provide an advantageous state to the player, but the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is different. By doing so, it may be configured to provide a disadvantageous state to the player, for example, a plurality of normal figure fluctuation times based on the type of the winning symbol and the gaming state at the time of winning. In a configuration in which one selection table is selected from the selection table and the normal figure fluctuation time executed from the selected normal figure fluctuation time selection table is selected, from the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the time saving state. A configuration may be used in which a long fluctuation time of the normal map (variation time of the normal map length) can be selected.

In this case, if the normal symbol length fluctuation time is selected, it is not possible to execute any more ordinary symbol lottery during the time saving state, so that the gaming state advantageous to the player is substantially terminated. With this configuration, the player grasps how long the substantially time-saving state (the game state is the time-saving state and the normal symbol length fluctuation time is not selected as the normal symbol variation) will continue. It is possible to provide playability that is difficult to achieve.

Further, when selecting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal figure), a configuration in which the fluctuation time set in advance based on the number of fluctuations of the normal figure may be selected in advance, or the normal pattern may be selected. When setting the fluctuation time of the symbol (normal figure), a configuration may be used in which the fluctuation time corresponding to the counter value acquired from a plurality of fluctuation times is selected based on a predetermined counter value. Further, when the fluctuation of the normal symbol (normal symbol) is started, a predetermined lottery is executed, and when the lottery result is the predetermined lottery result, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol) is set to the time saving state. A normal map fluctuation time (normal map length fluctuation time) longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in (for example, 150 seconds) may be selected.

In this way, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, by lengthening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, it is possible to end a substantially time saving state that is advantageous to the player, thereby allowing the player to You can concentrate on playing the game while always keeping a sense of tension.

Further, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the third symbol display device 81 is executed in a configuration in which a normal symbol fluctuation time (normal symbol length fluctuation time) longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the time saving state is selected. When the normal figure length fluctuation time is selected as the effect to be performed, it is preferable to turn off the notification of the right-handed game and guide the left-handed game even if the time is shortened. In this case, since the special figure 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state is actually being executed, the time-saving state is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the special figure 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state is completed. It is advisable to execute an effect that notifies that the (ream villa mode) has ended. As a result, the player can be made to think that the special figure 1 fluctuation during the time saving state has ended and the time saving state has ended.

Further, as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, in addition to the above-mentioned normal map length fluctuation time (150 seconds), the fluctuation time in the normal map (for example,) which is shorter than that but longer than the normal normal map fluctuation time (3 seconds). 30 seconds or 50 seconds) may be set to be configurable. In this case, when the fluctuation time in the normal map is set, the effect display that makes the third symbol display device 81 think that the time saving state has ended is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as in the case where the fluctuation time in the normal figure is set as described above. It is displayed to make the player think that the time saving state has ended, and at the timing when the fluctuation time in the normal map ends, or just before the fluctuation time in the normal map ends (for example, corresponding to the normal fluctuation time in the normal map). 3 seconds ago), it is advisable to display the effect display in the time saving state again. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that the time saving state has been shifted to the time saving state a plurality of times by using one time saving state, and it is possible to provide the player with a surprising game.

Furthermore, by combining the above-mentioned two normal map fluctuation configurations, the time saving state end effect executed when the set normal map fluctuation time exceeds the remaining period of the time saving state, and the set normal map fluctuation time The configuration may be such that both the time saving state end suggestion effect and the time saving state end suggestion effect executed when is shorter than the remaining period of the time saving state can be displayed. As a result, even after the time saving state end effect is executed, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game with the expectation that the time saving state will be immediately changed to the time saving state.

In the first embodiment described above, the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set so that the ball cannot enter the second entry port 640 in the normal state (non-time saving state), but in the normal state by any chance. When a ball enters the second ball entry port 640, it is advisable to provide a game stopping means for stopping the game. In this case, as the game stopping means, a means for executing a firing prohibition process in which the ball is not fired even if the operation handle 51 is operated, or a ball fired by operating the operation handle 51 is the game area (game board 13). Ball collection processing that allows the ball to be collected before reaching the front), and firing regulation processing that regulates the firing strength of the operation handle to the firing strength that is disadvantageous to the player (the firing strength that cannot reach the game area). , Even if a ball enters each entrance provided in the game area, it is conceivable to invalidate all the benefits (the privilege of paying out the prize ball and the privilege of executing the lottery).

Further, as a process for executing the game stopping means, first, when it is determined that the ball has entered the second entry port 640, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state. If it is determined that the time is not shortened, then it is determined whether or not the current jackpot game is in progress. Then, when it is determined that the ball is not in the big hit game, it is preferable to determine that the current entry is an illegal entry and to execute the game stop process by the above-mentioned game stop means.

Further, in the game stop means execution process described above, when it is determined that the ball has entered the second entry port 640 during the big hit game, the game stop means is not executed, but a special privilege effect is executed. It is good to do it. That is, although the time is not shortened during the jackpot game, the ball may rarely enter the second entrance 640 because it is in the game state in which the right-handed game is performed. In this case, the game stop means is not executed, and instead, a special effect for blessing the player is executed, which makes it possible to realize that the player has a very rare experience. It can be made to enhance the effect of production.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to execute the above-mentioned dedicated effect, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in a manner in which the player can recognize the normal figure variation display during the jackpot game, and the electric accessory 640a is displayed. The timing of opening (short opening timing) may be predicted. As a result, the player can digest the jackpot game while gazing at the normal map variation display displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

<Other production example 2 using the configuration of the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 109 to 111, another effect example 2 using the configuration of the third embodiment will be described. In this production example, the configuration for setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is different from that of the third embodiment described above, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is provided according to the game state. It is configured to be set based on the selection table 203aa. Here, with reference to FIG. 109, the effect content executed in the present effect example 2 will be described.

FIG. 109 shows an example of the display screen of the effect executed in the present effect example 2, and FIG. 109 (a) is a schematic view showing an example of the display screen when the time saving state is started. Reference numeral 109 (b) is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen when a long variation is set as the variation time of the normal symbol in the time saving state. The same elements as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 109 (a), on the display screen of the present production example 2, a picture imitating a bomb is displayed as an end suggestion display mode Dm10 that triggers a reduction in the remaining period in a short period of time, and a picture imitating a bomb is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In the second sub-display area Ds2, the characters "pinch when the bomb explodes" indicating the contents of the end suggestion display mode Dm10 are displayed.

Then, when a fluctuation time longer than the remaining period of the short period of time is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, as shown in FIG. 109 (b), the end suggestion display mode Dm10 is displayed in the exploding display mode. In the second sub-display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds, the characters "sorry end" are displayed, and the remaining time is displayed in "? Seconds".

In this way, when it is determined that the actual time reduction period (the fluctuation time of special figure 1 in which the fluctuation is started during the time reduction) does not change, but the fluctuation of the normal symbol (normal figure) does not end during the time reduction period. Since the electric accessory 640a does not perform the opening operation (long opening) which is advantageous to the player during the short time period, the state which is substantially advantageous to the player is completed.

In this production example 2, the display screen shown in FIG. 109 (b) is displayed when a fluctuation time longer than the remaining period of the short period of time is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. However, if a fluctuation time (for example, 10 seconds) longer than the normal fluctuation time (3 seconds) can be set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the same display screen is displayed even when the fluctuation time is selected. Good. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the advantageous period has ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the general drawing variation pattern selection table 202aa used in the present production example 2 will be described. FIG. 110 (a) is a schematic diagram in which the contents of the normal map variation pattern selection table 202aa are defined. As shown in FIG. 110A, the normal-figure variation pattern selection table 202aa includes the normal-figure variation pattern selection table 202aa1 which is referred to when the gaming state is the normal state, and when the gaming state is the time saving A. The reference figure variation pattern selection table 202aa2 for the time saving A and the attached figure variation pattern selection table 202aa3 for the time saving B referred to when the game state is the time saving B are defined, and are different depending on each gaming state. The variation pattern selection table is referenced.

As shown in FIG. 110 (b), the normal map fluctuation pattern selection table 202aa1 is defined so that a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of 4 seconds is always selected, and the normal map fluctuation pattern selection table for time saving A is specified. As shown in FIGS. 110 (c) and 110 (d), 202aa2 and the attached figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202aa3 for the time saving B show the value of the fluctuation type counter and the normal symbol (normal figure) fluctuation in the time saving state, respectively. The fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is selected based on the number of times.

Since the means for measuring the number of fluctuations of the normal symbol (normal diagram) in the time-saving state is the same as that of the third embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the normal symbol variation process 4 executed in the present effect example 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol variation processing 4. The ordinary symbol variation process 4 is different from the above-mentioned ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 45) in that the process for setting the variation time (S914, S915) is changed, and is the same except for the above. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted. When the normal symbol variation process 4 is executed and it is determined that the time is not shortened in the process of S912 (S912: No), or when the process of S913 is completed, the variation time is set based on the normal symbol variation pattern selection table 202aa. Then, this process is terminated.

According to the present production example 2 described above, the period that is advantageous to the player during the time saving period (the period during which the electric accessory 640a is long open) may be different depending on the set fluctuation time of the normal symbol. Therefore, the player can always pay attention to how long the advantageous period lasts.

It should be noted that, based on the general symbol winning information command output from the main control device 110, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol stored on hold is determined in advance, and the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the determination result. May be set. In this case, for example, the end suggestion display mode Dm10 may not be displayed when there is no fluctuation in the normal map of the fluctuation time exceeding the time saving remaining period in the pre-determination information of the normal map. As a result, it is possible to provide a period for the player to play the game with peace of mind.

Further, the effect display mode may be changed depending on the presence or absence of the hold storage of the special figure 2. In this case, it is preferable to display the end suggestion display mode Dm10 only in the state where there is no hold memory of the special figure 2. As a result, it is possible to make the player execute a game that gives a sense of crisis, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

<Other examples using the configurations of the above-described embodiments>
In each of the above-described embodiments, when a big hit is won in the lottery of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) (per symbol), and when the ball passes through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3) ( An example of using a pachinko machine 10 (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which a big hit game is executed has been described for (per V prize), but the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments is adopted only for the above-mentioned symbol hit. It may be used for a gaming machine (so-called type 1 type). Next, a game machine when the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments is used for one type will be described.

In the game machines used in other examples, when a jackpot is won in a lottery of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), a jackpot game is executed, and a predetermined condition is satisfied depending on the type of the winning jackpot. A game machine that can give a probability change state (so-called 1) in which the probability of winning a big hit by a special symbol lottery is set to a higher probability than the normal state until the special symbol changes 5 times. It is a type probability variation type), and the jackpot winning based on the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot winning based on the first special symbol (the jackpot game with many rounds and the jackpot that is likely to be given a probability variation state). It is configured so that the game) can be easily given.

Further, when the gaming state shifts to the probabilistic state, a variation pattern having a long variation time (for example, 150 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol as in each of the above-described embodiments. Make it easier. Then, in a state where both the reserved memory of the first special symbol and the reserved memory of the second special symbol are held, the fluctuation (lottery) based on the reserved memory of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. (So-called special figure 2 priority change).

With this configuration, it is possible to play a game in which the hold memory of the second special symbol is acquired in a state where the long-term fluctuation of the first special symbol is executed. Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game during the predetermined period (during the first special symbol change in the probabilistic state). When such a configuration is used, the first ball entry means that serves as an opportunity to acquire the hold memory of the first special symbol by performing a game (for example, a right-handed game) aiming at a predetermined position in the game area. Each entry is possible so that both the (first entry port 64) and the second entry means (second entry port 640), which triggers the acquisition of the hold memory of the second special symbol, can be entered. The means may be arranged. Further, it is preferable that the second ball entry means makes it more difficult for the ball to enter the ball than the first ball entry means.

As a result, in the probabilistic state, a fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, and during a predetermined period in which the probabilistic state continues (the period until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol ends 5 times). A game (disadvantageous game) in which the change of the first special symbol is executed without executing the lottery of the second special symbol (without the ball entering the second ball entry means), or the first special A fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the symbol, and a lottery for the second special symbol is executed during a predetermined period in which the probability variation state continues (the period until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol ends 5 times). (A ball enters the second ball entry means), and one of the games (advantageous game) in which the variation of the second special symbol is executed is executed.

In this way, the variation pattern of the first special symbol set during the probability variation state executes the probability variation state advantageous to the player and the probability variation state unfavorable to the player, so that the variation of the special symbol executed during the probability variation state is executed. Can make the player watch. Further, as in each of the above-described embodiments, even when a small hit is won in the first special symbol, the game of acquiring the hold memory of the second special symbol can be continued.

In the other examples described above, as a type 1 probabilistic type gaming machine, a configuration in which the probabilistic state ends when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number is used, but other configurations may be used. For example, a configuration in which the probabilistic state is continued until the next big hit is won, or a lottery is performed each time a special symbol change (lottery) is executed to decide whether or not to end the probabilistic state, and based on the lottery result. A configuration that terminates the probabilistic state may be used.

Further, in the other example described above, the variation (lottery) based on the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is executed preferentially over the variation (lottery) based on the reserved memory of the special figure 2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and regardless of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, a configuration may be used in which the special symbol is changed (lottery) in the order in which the reserved memory is acquired (winning order). Further, the number of consecutive times (upper limit number of times) to which the probability change state is given may be set in advance, and when the upper limit number of times is reached, the probability change state may not be given after the end of the jackpot.

Next, in the above-described first embodiment, the reserved memory of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is acquired during the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) executed in the time saving state. Although a configuration is used in which the time saving state is given again after the jackpot game based on the hold memory is completed, an upper limit (for example, 5 times) may be set for the number of times the time saving state is continuously given. ..

In this case, the number of jackpots executed until the number of consecutive grants in the time-saving state reaches the upper limit differs depending on the number of jackpot rights acquired during one time-saving state (the number of reserved memories in Special Figure 2). be able to. Therefore, the player can be enthusiastically played in order to acquire a larger number of reserved memories of the special figure 2.

In the first embodiment described above, the time saving state is always given after the end of the jackpot game based on the reserved memory of the special figure 2, but the jackpot game based on the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is configured. A jackpot type that is not given a time saving state after the end may also be selected. As a result, by continuously digesting the reserved memory of the special figure 2, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of times the time saving state is given when the jackpot is continuously executed.

That is, for example, when there are four reserved memories of special figure 2 and the jackpot game based on the reserved memories has a time reduction four times in a row, the time is shortened when the four reserved memories of special figure 2 are exhausted. While the next special symbol change is executed when the number of consecutive grants of the state is 4, it is based on the hold memory that is digested last among the jackpot games based on the hold memory of the special figure 2. When the jackpot has a time reduction and the other cases have no time reduction, the number of consecutive grants in the time reduction state becomes one when the four reserved memories shown in FIG. 2 are exhausted.

Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether or not the number of consecutive grants in the time saving state has reached the upper limit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the maximum number of jackpots when the number of consecutive grants in the time-saving state reaches the upper limit can be changed depending on the jackpot type of the reserved memory of the acquired special figure 2, so that the player can be provided with a surprising game. be able to.

As a method for measuring the number of times of continuous granting in the time-saving state, a method of measuring the number of times the time-saving is set for a continuous jackpot may be used, or the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 fluctuation executed during the time-saving state is measured. It may be a method of doing. When the latter measurement method is used in the first embodiment described above, in one consecutive villa mode, when the number of consecutive grants in the time saving state reaches the upper limit (5 times), a maximum of 25 jackpots (special). The maximum number of reserved memories in FIG. 2 is the upper limit (4) each time, and the fluctuation result in Special Figure 1 is a big hit each time), but the minimum is 5 big hits (the number of reserved memories in Special Figure 2 is 1 each time). (When the variation result in FIG. 1 is off every time) is provided. In this way, when the upper limit is set for the number of consecutive grants in the time saving state, the number of jackpots executed in one consecutive villa mode can be changed, so that the player can be in the consecutive villa mode. You can play games enthusiastically.

In addition, in a right-handed state (for example, a time saving state or a probabilistic state) that is advantageous to the player, the advantageous special symbol (second special symbol) that is advantageous to the player among the special symbols and the advantageous special symbol are more disadvantageous than the advantageous special symbol. The special symbol (first special symbol) is configured to be variable (lottery), and the second special symbol is configured so that the variable execution condition is more easily established than the first special symbol during the right-handed state. In the game machine, when it is determined that the second special symbol is fluctuating by the discriminating means for discriminating the type of the special symbol that fluctuates during the right-handed game, the display means (third symbol display device 81) is used for the second. 2 The effect display for varyingly displaying the identification information for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is executed, and when it is determined by the discrimination means that the first special symbol is fluctuating, the lottery result of the first special symbol is shown. The third symbol emphasizes the guidance display (for example, "Save the hold of special figure 2") that encourages the acquisition of the hold memory of the second special symbol during the change period, rather than the variable display of the identification information for the purpose. It may be configured to be displayed on the display device 81.

In this way, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 (particularly, the variable display mode of the special symbol) is changed based on the type of the special symbol to be executed in the specific game state, so that the present setting is performed. It is possible to notify the player of an appropriate game method based on the current game state and the current game content. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

Further, a discriminating means for discriminating the fluctuation time of the first special symbol executed during the right-handed game is provided, and the fluctuating time of the first special symbol executed by the discriminating means is a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). When it is determined that the above is the case, the above-mentioned guidance display may be displayed. As a result, the player can be made to grasp the content of the guidance display, and the game content of the game being executed can be corrected. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by shortening the period in which the guidance display is displayed.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a in the time saving state, the opening pattern (long opening) is 11 seconds in total, that is, the first opening period is 3 seconds, the closing period is 5 seconds, and the second opening period is 3 seconds. ) Is set and the opening scenario corresponding to the set opening pattern is completed, or when one ball enters the second entry port 640 during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a, the electric combination Although the condition (end condition) for terminating the opening operation of the object 640a is satisfied, a different opening pattern and an ending condition are set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a, and the above-described embodiments are met. May configure gaming machines with different playability.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the electric accessory 640a is opened during the time saving state (when the winning is won by the normal symbol lottery during the time saving state), the number of balls entering the second entrance 640 is increased. By limiting the number to one, it was possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive privilege. However, by using such a configuration, a privilege given to the player when the player wins the normal symbol lottery during the time saving state (a privilege that makes it easier for the ball to enter the second entrance 640). Is always constant, and there is a problem that the player's willingness to play is reduced.

Therefore, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, as an opening pattern (long opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a executed during the time saving state, the interval at which the sphere reaches the electric accessory 640a (the sphere is caused by the distribution member 700). An opening pattern was set in which an opening scenario was used in which the opening of 0.2 seconds was repeated 5 times at 1.2 second intervals, which is the distribution interval), and the opening scenario was completed as the end condition of the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. In this case, or, it is preferable to use a configuration in which the end condition is set when four balls enter the second entry port 640 during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a.

With this configuration, when the timing at which the electric accessory 640a is released in the long opening pattern coincides with the timing at which the ball reaches the electric accessory 640a, the electric accessory 640a is opened once. In, a maximum of four balls can be inserted into the second entry port 640. Therefore, the game status (ball launch timing, the privilege that is given to the player when the ball is won in the normal symbol lottery during the time saving state (the privilege that makes it easier for the ball to enter the second entrance 640) Depending on the timing at which the ball reaches the electric accessory 640a), it can be made different, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

Further, when the right-handed game is continuously executed (when the game of firing 100 balls per minute is executed), the opening interval of the electric accessory 640a is set to the electric accessory 640a. Since it is set to 1.2 seconds, which is the same as the timing when the ball arrives, it is easy for a player who is actively performing a right-handed game to put a large number of balls into the second entrance 640. can do.

Further, as described using the first embodiment described above, in the right region of the game board 13, a distribution member 700 that alternately distributes game balls and a flow of balls distributed by the distribution member 700 Since the ball is configured to reach the electric accessory 640 via a rectifying means (a bending path 701a or a direct passage that does not reduce the flow speed of the ball) for keeping the interval constant, a right-handed game is played. It is possible to further improve the accuracy of the interval at which the fired ball reaches the electric accessory 640a when the ball is continuously executed.

When such a configuration is used, the suggestion notification for suggesting the opening timing of the electric accessory 640a to the player may be executed. By executing this suggestion notification, the player can be made to play the game aiming at the timing at which it is easy to put the ball into the second ball entry port 640.

In each of the above-described embodiments, as the operating means that can be operated by the player, the frame button 22 that determines that the operating means has been operated by the player's pressing operation is used, but other configurations are used. May be used, and it is possible to determine that the player has been operated by tilting it to the left or right or back and forth to determine that it has been operated by a lever-shaped operating means, or that the player has been operated by touching or approaching. A touch sensor type operating means, a wireless operating means capable of determining that the operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the third symbol display for showing the player the lottery result of each symbol is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, in the third symbol, different display means may be provided for the display means for displaying the main symbol to be emphasized and displayed to the player and the display means for displaying the subordinate symbol. Further, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used, and a display applying the organic electroluminescence (EL) phenomenon that emits light when a voltage is applied to a layered structure using a certain organic compound. The surface of the device (organic EL display) and various three-dimensional objects (roles, etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 10 is used as a screen, and after identifying the position (protrusion, burial relationship) of the three-dimensional surface, an image is displayed using a projector. A display device (project mapping) for irradiating may be used.

When the above-mentioned project mapping is used as the display means, the image data is irradiated based on the data of the three-dimensional surface of the movable accessory provided in the pachinko machine 10 and the position data of the movable accessory when irradiating. By configuring so as to determine the position and the content, it is possible to execute a free display and enhance the effect of the effect. In addition, in consideration of the case where an abnormality occurs in the movable accessory that can be a screen, it is determined whether the movable accessory is in a normal state, and when it is determined that the determination result is not normal, the movable accessory is immovable. It is advisable to execute the abnormal time control so that the image data is irradiated by using the part as a screen. As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player cannot grasp the display content displayed on the display means due to the abnormality of the movable accessory.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed in the game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player, and the left side area of the game board 13 is executed in the normal game state. It is configured so that the left-handed game aiming at is executed, but the target area of the game board 13 may be different depending on the game state, and the left-handed game is executed during the time saving state, and during the normal state. May perform a right-handed game. Further, the game may be configured so that the game can be executed in different game states while aiming at the same area.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

It should be noted that, for example, in a slot machine, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (Probability change in special 1 fluctuation period in the composition of 1 type and 2 types)
A first acquisition means for acquiring the first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, a first determination means for executing the first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means, and a first determination means thereof. The first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information for indicating the first determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information for indicating that the first determination result is specific. By the first privilege granting means for granting the first privilege to the player when the stop display is displayed, the second acquisition means for acquiring the second information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the second acquisition means thereof. A second determination in which the acquired second information is stored and a second determination in which a determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination is more likely to be performed are executed based on the second information stored in the storage means. It is possible to switch between the two determination means, the first state that restricts the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the second state that makes it easier for the second acquisition condition to be satisfied than the first state. A game machine having the above-mentioned state setting means, and having a priority means for causing the second determination corresponding to the second information stored in the storage means to be executed with priority over the first determination. A gaming machine characterized in that, when the first state is switched to the second state, the first determination is executed before the second determination is executed. A1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, whether to change the state of the start port provided on the game board from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the game ball is easy to enter. There is one that executes the first lottery of whether or not. In such a conventional game machine, a lottery executed by entering a game ball into the starting port in a state easily changed to the second state is executed a predetermined number of times, and until the lottery result of the predetermined number of times is displayed. A game machine to be continuously set has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the probability that the lottery is executed in a predetermined number of times and the judgment that the lottery is advantageous to the player is executed is constant, and the game becomes monotonous and the player is early. There was a problem that I got bored.

According to the game machine A1, even when the second acquisition condition is easily satisfied, the dynamic display of the first identification information is executed, and the second determination is made during the dynamic display period. Since execution is restricted, at the start of the special state, there is a period during which the first determination, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the second determination, is executed, and then the second determination, which is advantageous to the player, is made. Since the second information stored in the storage means is configured to be prioritized by the priority means over the first determination and the second determination is executed, the second determination that is advantageous to the player is continuously performed. By switching to a period that is easy to execute, it is possible to improve the interest of the player and suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

In the game machine A1, the first ball entry means that triggers the establishment of the first acquisition condition when the game ball enters, and the second acquisition condition that triggers the establishment of the second acquisition condition when the game ball enters. A second ball entry means, a variable member that can be changed between an open state in which the game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter, and the game ball passes through a predetermined passing area. A detection means capable of detecting whether or not a game has been played, a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the detection of a game ball in the detection means, and lottery information for showing the lottery result by the lottery means are dynamically displayed. When the lottery information dynamic display means and the lottery information for showing the specific lottery result are stopped and displayed, the variable member is moved to the closed state or the open state in a variable pattern set by a predetermined rule. The lottery means has a variable control means to be changed, and the lottery means is configured to be able to execute the lottery even during a period in which the first identification information or the second identification information is dynamically displayed. A game machine A2 characterized by this.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A1, a lottery is drawn by passing the game ball to the passing area even during the period when the special state is set and the first identification information is dynamically displayed. Since it is possible to satisfy the second acquisition condition by executing the game ball into the second ball entry means, the passing area is as much as possible even during the period when the first identification information is dynamically displayed. There is an effect that the player can play the game so as to pass the game ball.

In the game machine A1 or A2, a variable winning means in which the game ball can be entered, a variable winning means in which the game ball is difficult to enter, and a specific area through which the game ball entered in the variable winning means can pass. , When the game ball passes through the specific area, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game that is advantageous to the player and the second determination means have determined that the result is the specific second determination. Based on this, the gaming machine A3 is characterized by having a variable game executing means for changing the variable ball entering means from a state in which it is difficult to enter the ball to a state in which the ball can be entered.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A1 or A2, by executing the second determination, it is possible to shift to a game in which the game ball is passed to a specific area, and the player can be informed of the game. It has the effect of being able to provide a game with change.

In either of the game machines A2 or A3, the variable pattern variable by the variable control means is variably set according to a period in which the special state is set. Game machine A4.

According to the game machine A4, since the variable pattern is changed according to the setting period of the special state, there is an effect that the variable pattern can be executed according to the period in which the special state is set.

In any of the game machines A2 to A4, the first storage means for storing the first information acquired by the first acquisition means and the first identification dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. It has a first dynamic display period setting means for determining a dynamic display period of information, and the first dynamic display period setting means is in the case where the second state is set by the state setting means. As the dynamic display period of the first identification information, at least the first dynamic display period shorter than the dynamic display period in which the lottery information is dynamically displayed by the lottery information dynamic display means and the lottery information are A game machine A5 characterized in that a second dynamic display period longer than the dynamically displayed dynamic display period can be set.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A2 to A4, the length of the dynamic display period set by the first dynamic display period setting means causes the second input as the second state. It is possible to set an advantageous state in which the game ball is easily entered into the ball means and a disadvantageous state in which it is difficult to allow the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game so that the second state becomes an advantageous state.

The game machine A5 has a display means capable of displaying predetermined information, and a display control means for displaying the state information for indicating the state of the game set by the state setting means on the display means. The control means is characterized in that when the second dynamic display period is set by the first dynamic display period setting means, the state information for indicating the second state is not displayed. Game machine A6 to play.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of the game machine A5, the game ball is inserted into the second ball entry means as the dynamic display period of the first identification information even though the second state is set. When the second dynamic display period, which is difficult to make, is set, the state information for indicating the second state is not displayed, so that the information displayed on the display means impairs the player's expectations. It has the effect of being able to be suppressed.

In any of the game machines A1 to A6, there is a game regulation means capable of regulating the game of the player based on the fact that the second acquisition condition is satisfied in the state where the first state is set. A game machine A7 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A6, the player's second acquisition condition is satisfied in the first state in which the establishment of the second acquisition condition is restricted. Since it is possible to regulate the game, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the illegal establishment of the second acquisition condition.

In the game machine A7, the game machine A8 is characterized in that the game regulation means regulates the launch of a game ball.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect of the game machine A7, since the launch of the game ball is regulated by the game regulation means, there is an effect that fraud can be effectively suppressed.

In any of the game machines A2 to A8, the first ball entry means can enter the first flow path in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means and the game ball into the second ball entry means. The first ball entry means arranged in the second flow path and the second flow path is played by the game ball entering the ball entry port arranged in the second flow path. It is characterized in that the ball is put into a state where it can enter, and the game ball is put into a state where it is difficult to enter by entering the game ball into the first ball entering means arranged in the second flow path. The game machine A9.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A2 to A8, the second state is set by inserting the game ball into the ball entry port, and the game ball is inserted into the second ball entry means. Even when the game ball is allowed to flow down the second flow path in order to make the ball ball, the game ball enters the ball entry port, so that the game ball can easily enter the first ball entry means. There is an effect that the judgment can be easily executed and configured.

In the game machine A9, a holding means capable of holding the game ball at a position where the game ball can enter the ball entrance, and a holding release means for releasing the holding by the holding means based on the establishment of the release condition. The gaming machine A10, characterized in that it has and.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A9, there is an effect that the timing of entering the game ball into the first ball entry means can be controlled by the release condition.

The game machine A11 is characterized in that the cancellation condition is canceled based on the first privilege being granted by the first privilege granting means.

According to the game machine A11, in addition to the effect of the game machine A10, the cancellation condition is satisfied at the timing when the first privilege is given, so that the first acquisition condition is easily satisfied after the first privilege is given. It has the effect of being able to.

<Characteristic B group> (Special 1 prize regulation at normal times)
A first flow path through which the game ball can flow down, a second flow path through which the game ball flowing down the first flow path is difficult to flow down, and a position where the game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter. The game ball enters the first ball entry means, the second ball entry means arranged in the second flow path, and the game ball can enter, and the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means. The acquisition means that can acquire information based on the ball, the determination means that executes the determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means are dynamic. In a gaming machine having a dynamic display means to be displayed and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed. , By letting the game ball flow down the second flow path and executing the game, a special state is set that is more advantageous to the player than letting the game ball flow down the first flow path and executing the game. When the game is played by flowing the game ball down the second flow path in a state where the special state is not set by the state setting means capable of performing the game and the state setting means, the first input is performed. The game machine B1 is characterized by having a regulating means for making it difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means rather than the ball means.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, whether to change the state of the start port provided on the game board from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the game ball is easy to enter. There is one that executes the first lottery of whether or not. In such a conventional game machine, a lottery executed by entering a game ball into the starting port in a state easily changed to the second state is executed a predetermined number of times, and until the lottery result of the predetermined number of times is displayed. A game machine to be continuously set has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the probability that the lottery is executed in a predetermined number of times and the judgment that the lottery is advantageous to the player is executed is constant, and the game becomes monotonous and the player is early. There was a problem that I got bored. In addition, if the game is configured to change the flow route of the game ball in order to change the game, the player is illegally benefited by causing the game ball to flow down to a route different from the assumed flow route. There was a problem that was given.

According to the game machine B1, when a special state is set, the game can be changed by allowing the second flow path to flow down to play the game, while the special state is set. If not, the game ball is regulated so that it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means than the first ball entry means. Therefore, when the special state ends, the game is played by flowing down the first flow path. There is an effect that defects such as fraud can be suppressed by inevitably directing the player to do so.

In the game machine B1, at least a third flow path through which the game ball can flow down and a fourth flow path through which the game ball flowing down the third flow path is difficult to flow down are formed in the second flow path. It has a distribution means capable of distributing the game ball flowing down the second flow path to the third flow path and the fourth flow path, respectively, and the second ball enters the fourth flow path. A game machine B2 characterized in that the means is arranged.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, the game balls distributed to the third flow path among the game balls flowing down to the second flow path can enter the second ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the amount of game balls that can enter the second ball entry means can be reduced as compared with the first ball entry means.

In the game machine B2, a third ball entry means capable of entering a game ball is arranged in the third flow path, and based on the fact that the game ball enters the third ball entry means, the said An advantage determination means for executing an advantage determination that is more advantageous to the player than the determination based on the information acquired by the information being acquired by the acquisition means and the game ball entering the third ball entry means. By setting the special state, the third ball entering means is provided with a variable control means for changing the state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the state in which the game ball is easy to enter. Game machine B3 to play.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2, in a special state, it becomes easy to enter the ball into the third ball entry means, so that the player is allowed to flow the game ball down to the second flow path. It has the effect of encouraging players to play games.

In the game machine B2 or B3, the game machine B4 is characterized in that the distribution means alternately distributes game balls to the third flow path and the fourth flow path.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B2 or B3, by alternately distributing the game balls, half of the game balls that have flowed down into the second flow path can flow down, effectively as the second ball entry means. It has the effect of reducing the number of game balls that enter the ball.

In the game machines B1 to B4, the mode is switched between a holding means capable of holding the game ball flowing down the first flow path or the second flow path and a state in which the game ball held by the holding means is allowed to flow down downstream. The second ball enters by the switching means, an opening through which the game ball that has flowed down due to being switched to the state of flowing down by the switching means, and the game ball entering the opening. A game machine B5 characterized by having a variable means for making a means into a state in which a game ball can enter.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B4, the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is regulated by the holding means and the switching means, so that the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is regulated at an unintended timing. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the game ball enters the second ball entry means.

The game machine B6 is characterized in that, in the game machine B5, the switching means switches to a state in which the game ball can be held after a predetermined period of time elapses after switching to the state of flowing down.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5, the period during which the game ball can enter the second ball entry means can be defined, so that the game ball enters the second ball entry means. Has the effect of being able to regulate more.

In the game machine B5 or B6, the second ball entry means is characterized in that the second ball entry means is changed by the variable means to a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter based on the entry of the game ball. Game machine B7 to play.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5 or B6, the game ball entered the second ball entry means even during the period when the switching means was switched to the sulfurizing state. In this case, since the second ball entry means is changed to a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter, it is possible to prevent a plurality of game balls from continuously entering the second ball entry means. .. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving an excessive privilege to the player.

In any of the game machines B5 to B7, a first position where the game ball held by the holding means is provided in a flowable region and the flowed game ball can be guided to the first flow path, and the first position. Variable guidance means that can be changed to a second position that is difficult to guide to the flow path, and guidance member variable control that variably controls the variable guidance means to the first position and the second position at predetermined predetermined intervals. A gaming machine B8 having means and means, wherein the opening is arranged in a region where a gaming ball flowing down the first flow path can enter.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B5 to B7, the timing at which the game ball held by the holding means by the switching means can flow downstream, and the variable guiding means are in the first position. Since it is possible to insert the game ball into the opening only when the timing to be changed to is satisfied with the predetermined condition, the player is conscious of the timing of the game and enthusiastically plays the game. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In any of the game machines B1 to the game machine B8, when the special state is set by the state setting means, the identification information is dynamically displayed so that the remaining period of the special state is shortened. A game machine B9 characterized by having variable means for the game.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B8, the identification information is dynamically displayed, so that the remaining period of the special state is shortened. Therefore, the identification information is dynamically displayed to the player. It has the effect of making people interested in the period and improving the interest of the game. It should be noted that the longer the dynamic display period is executed, the longer the special state that is advantageous to the player becomes longer, so that the player can expect a longer dynamic display period.

<Characteristic C group> (Control to connect one game)
At a position where the first flow path through which the game ball can flow down, the second flow path where the game ball flowing down the first flow path is difficult to flow down, and the game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter. A game ball is placed in the arranged first entry means, the second entry means arranged in the second flow path and capable of entering a game ball, and the first entry means or the second entry means. The acquisition means that can acquire information based on the entry of the ball, the determination means that executes the determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means are dynamic. In a gaming machine having a dynamic display means to be displayed and a privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player when the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed, the first 2. A variable means that can be changed into a first state in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than the first state, and the variable means from the second state to the above. A variable execution means that changes to the first state based on the establishment of the variable condition, and based on the establishment of the specific condition, the game ball is caused to flow down from the first flow path to the second flow path to execute the game. The special state setting means for setting a special state that facilitates the execution of the privilege game that is advantageous to the player, and the identification information are dynamically displayed after the privilege game is executed, and the dynamic display period thereof. It is characterized in that it has a canceling means for canceling the special state based on the end of the game, and a variable condition determining means for determining the establishment of the variable condition when the privilege game is executed. Game machine C1 to play.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a start port provided on the game board, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a high probability state is set in which the lottery probability after the winning game is increased according to the type of the winning game so that the winning game can be easily executed continuously. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, it is difficult for the player to confirm whether the lottery is actually performed in a high probability state and the game is played, and there is a problem that the interest is easily lowered.

According to the game machine C1, when the privilege game is executed, it is determined whether or not the variable condition for determining whether to change the variable means to the first state is satisfied. Therefore, when the privilege game is executed, it is determined. By changing the variable means to the first state, the identification information can be easily displayed dynamically, the special state can be easily released, and if the variable means is not changed, the identification information can be difficult to be displayed dynamically. There is an effect that the special state can be easily set continuously, and the interest can be improved depending on whether or not the variable condition is satisfied when the privilege game is executed.

The game machine C1 has a type determination means for determining the type of the privilege game when the privilege game is executed, and the variable condition determination means is set to the type of the privilege game determined by the type determination means. The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the establishment of the variable condition is determined based on the above.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C1, the establishment of the variable condition is determined based on the type of the privileged game to be executed. The ratio can also be set, and there is an effect that stable game content can be set.

In the game machine C1 or C2, the privilege granting means executes the privilege game as one of the benefits, and the type determining means determines the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege granting means. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the special state is set based on the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege granting means.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1 or C2, the ratio of setting the special state can be changed by setting the type of the privilege game, and the shooting property can be easily adjusted and designed. It has the effect of being able to.

In any of the game machines C1 to C3, a third ball entry means capable of entering the game ball is arranged in the second flow path, and the acquisition means is used to enter the game ball into the third ball entry means. Acquires the information based on the fact that the ball has entered the ball, and the determination means has a game more than the determination based on the information acquired by the game ball entering the third ball entry means. It executes an advantageous determination that is advantageous to the person, and has a regulation means that can be changed between a state that regulates the entry of a game ball into the third entry means and a state that allows entry. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that, by setting the special state, the regulating means is easily changed to a state that allows the ball to enter.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C3, the game ball is likely to be inserted into the third ball entry means in which the advantage determination that is advantageous to the player is executed in a special state. Therefore, there is an effect that the game ball can be made to flow down to the second flow path to encourage the player to play the game.

In the game machine C4, a variable ball entry means that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter, and a specific area through which a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass. It has a privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game when the game ball passes through the specific area, and when the advantage determination determines a specific result, the variable ball entry means is released from the closed state. A game machine C5 characterized in that it can be changed to an open state.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C4, the privilege game is executed by passing the game ball through a specific area, so that the player can be interested in the ball flow. It has the effect of improving the interest of the.

In any of the game machines C2 to C5, the information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry means is stored in the first storage means capable of storing the information and the first storage means thereof. It has a determination condition determining means for determining the information for which the determination is executed by the determining means based on the information, and the type determining means at least stores the information in the storage means during the privilege game. It is determined that the first type corresponding to the first privilege game that is easy to be memorized and the second type corresponding to the second privilege game that is harder to store the information in the storage means than the first type. Characteristic gaming machine C6.

According to the game machine C6, depending on the type determined by the type determining means, it is possible to execute a privilege game in which information is easily stored in the first storage means and a privilege game in which information is difficult to be stored during the privilege game. As a result, when a special state is given after the end of the privilege game, it is possible to set a state in which the identification information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means is dynamically displayed and a state in which the identification information is not displayed. It will be possible. Therefore, it is possible to dynamically display the identification information based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means in the special state, and it is possible to diversify the game executed in the special state.

In the game machine C6, the special state setting means includes a first special state in which identification information based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means is dynamically displayed during the special state, and the first special state. 2 A second special state in which identification information based on the entry of a game ball is dynamically displayed is set in the ball entry means, and the second special state is more game-playing than the first special state. A game machine C7 characterized in that a privileged game that is advantageous to a person is easily executed.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C6, the degree of advantage provided to the player can be different depending on the type of identification information dynamically displayed during the special state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game.

<Characteristic D group> (Continuous Chan mode end production)
The first determination is made based on the first ball entry means capable of entering the game ball, the second entry means different from the first entry means, and the game ball entering the first entry means. To execute a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means, and the determination result by the determination means. A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating, and a variable state from a first state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means to a second state in which a game ball can enter the ball. The variable means for making the ball enter, the state setting means capable of setting a special state capable of changing the second ball entry means to the second state when a specific condition is satisfied, and the special state setting means. When the state is set, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and based on the end of the dynamic display period, the release means for canceling the special state and the special state are set. In this case, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the effect execution means for executing the effect based on the information for determining the establishment of the specific condition based on the remaining dynamic display period is provided. The featured game machine D1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a start port provided on the game board, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a high probability state is set in which the lottery probability after the winning game is increased according to the type of the winning game so that the winning game can be easily executed continuously. In such a game machine, after the symbol for notifying the player of the lottery result is variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like, the lottery result is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the lottery result, and the lottery result is notified. If is a hit, a hit game is known to be performed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that the game is monotonous and the player gets bored early because the variable display of the symbol based on the lottery result is repeated.

According to the game machine D1, the remaining period of the special state changes as the dynamic display period of the identification information executed when the special state is set elapses, so that the remaining period of the special state is specified by the effect executed by the effect executing means. It is possible to recognize the establishment of the condition and the remaining period of the special state, and there is an effect that the problem that the player gets bored early can be suppressed.

The game machine D1 has a detecting means for detecting that the game ball has passed through the passing region, and a discriminating means for determining the establishment of the specific condition when the passing of the game ball is detected by the detecting means. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the effect executing means executes an effect for showing the determination result based on the determination being executed by the determination means.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, even when the identification information is displayed in the special state, the determination of the establishment of the specific condition is executed by passing the game ball through the passing area. , It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine D1 or D2, the effect executing means executes a specific effect based on the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information being equal to or less than a predetermined period. ..

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine D1 or D2, there is an effect that it can be determined that the remaining period of the special state is equal to or less than a predetermined period by executing the specific effect. ..

In any of the game machines D1 to D3, the second determination is executed by the determination means among the information acquired by the acquisition means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means. The effect executing means has a storage means for storing up to a predetermined number of the above information, and the effect executing means stores the information in the storage means when the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information is equal to or less than the predetermined period. The gaming machine D4, characterized in that the specific effect is not executed on condition that the specific effect is stored.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D3, even if the special state ends due to the information being stored in the storage means, it is based on the information stored in the storage means. Since it is in a state where an advantageous judgment is easily made, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving an extra anxiety to the player by executing a specific effect.

In any of the game machines D2 to D4, a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the result information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means for a predetermined period and then stopping the display, and the second dynamic display means thereof. The effect executing means has a period determining means for determining the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information at the time when the result information is stopped and displayed, and the effect executing means determines the determination result by the period determining means as a predetermined period condition. The gaming machine D5 is characterized in that the stop display mode of the result information is switched to the stop display mode based on the determination result of the identification information when the above conditions are satisfied.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D2 to D4, the stop display mode can be switched when the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information satisfies the period condition. It is possible to provide a person with an unexpected effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine D5, the period condition is satisfied when the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information at the time when the result information is stopped and displayed by the second dynamic display means is within a predetermined period. A game machine D6 characterized by this.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D5, it is possible to suppress a problem that the result information and the identification information are stopped and displayed at short intervals, which makes it difficult for the player to grasp the displayed contents. It has the effect of being able to provide a game that is easy for the person to understand.

<Characteristic E group> (Change of normal map fluctuation period in a short time state)
The first determination is made based on the first ball entry means capable of entering the game ball, the second entry means different from the first entry means, and the game ball entering the first entry means. To execute a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means, and the determination result by the determination means. The dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating, and the first state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, make it easier for the game ball to enter the ball than in the first state. A variable means for changing to the second state, a state setting means capable of setting a special state which can be changed to the second state by the variable means when a specific condition is satisfied, and a state setting thereof. When the special state is set by the means, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and based on the end of the dynamic display period, the release means for releasing the special state and the variable means are provided. Lottery information dynamic display in which lottery means for executing a lottery for determining whether to change from the first state to the second state and lottery information for showing the lottery result by the lottery means are dynamically displayed. A dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period in which the lottery information is dynamically displayed, and a dynamic display period in which a plurality of the dynamic display periods determined by the dynamic display period determining means are set. The storage means in which a plurality of display period groups are stored, a selection means for selecting the type of the special state set by the state setting means, and the type of the special state set by the state setting means are used. The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the dynamic display period determining means includes a dynamic display period group setting means for setting the dynamic display period group for determining the dynamic display period.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a start port provided on the game board, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a high probability state is set in which the lottery probability after the winning game is increased according to the type of the winning game so that the winning game can be easily executed continuously. In such a game machine, after the symbol for notifying the player of the lottery result is variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like, the lottery result is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the lottery result, and the lottery result is notified. If is a hit, a hit game is known to be performed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that the game is monotonous and the player gets bored early because the variable display of the symbol based on the lottery result is repeated.

According to the game machine E1, if a lottery information with a short dynamic display period is determined, the lottery can be executed in a special state period, and the fun of the game can be improved by the determined dynamic display period group. , There is an effect that the trouble that the player gets bored at an early stage can be suppressed.

In the game machine E1, the acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means, and the information acquired by the acquisition means are stored. The gaming machine E2, which has a storage means, and the determination means executes the first determination or the second determination based on the information stored in the storage means.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1, the information acquired by the acquisition means can be stored in the storage means, so that the player can continue to use the information regardless of the determination status of the determination means. The game can be played, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

In the game machine E1 or E2, the determination means makes the first determination or the second determination even when the information is stored in the storage means during the period when the identification information is dynamically displayed. A game machine E3 characterized in that it waits for execution.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1 or E2, while the identification information is dynamically displayed, the execution of the determination based on the information stored in the storage means is awaited, so that the memory is stored. Multiple determinations based on the information stored in the means are not executed at the same time. Therefore, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

In any of the game machines E1 to E3, the lottery means has a detecting means capable of detecting that the game ball has passed through a passing area through which the game ball can pass, and the lottery means detects the passage of the game ball by the detecting means. The gaming machine E4, characterized in that the lottery is executed based on the fact that the lottery has been performed.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E1 to E3, when the detection means detects that the game ball has passed through the passing area, the lottery by the lottery means is executed. There is an effect that a person can be enthusiastically played a game using a game ball.

In any of the game machines E1 to E4, the dynamic display period group set by the dynamic display period group setting means is a short dynamic set so that a short dynamic display period can be easily determined as the dynamic display period. A gaming machine characterized in that at least a display period group and a long dynamic display period group in which a shorter dynamic display period is less likely to be determined than the short dynamic display period group are set. E5.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E1 to E4, the length of the dynamic display period set by the dynamic display period group set by the dynamic display period group setting means is set. It can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to make the number of lottery executed by the lottery means different during the special state which is advantageous to the player, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the game machines E2 to E5, the dynamic display period determining means is based on the number of the information acquired based on entering the second ball entering means stored in the storage means. The gaming machine E6 is characterized in that the dynamic display period of 1 is determined from the determined dynamic display period group.

According to the game machine E6, the dynamic display period is determined based on the effect of any of the game machines E2 to E5 and the number of information acquired based on the entry into the second ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to associate the game of inserting the game ball into the second ball entry means with the number of lottery executed by the lottery means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The game machines E1 to E6 have a notification means for notifying that the special state is set, and the notification means dynamically displays the lottery information determined by the dynamic display period determining means. The gaming machine E7 is characterized in that the notification is performed only when the period is shorter than the remaining period of the special state set by the state setting means.

According to the game machine E7, the notification means notifies that the current state is the special state only when the dynamic display of the lottery information ends in the state where the special state is set. Therefore, even during the special state, the player is distrusted by notifying the player that the variable means is in the special state during the remaining period of the special state in which the variable means is not changed from the first state to the second state. It has the effect of suppressing giving a feeling.

<Characteristic F group> (Direction per special 1 during short working hours)
The first determination is made based on the first ball entry means capable of entering the game ball, the second entry means different from the first entry means, and the game ball entering the first entry means. To execute a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means, and the determination result by the determination means. When the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are stopped and displayed, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. In a game machine having the privileged game executing means, the variable means for changing from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter into the second ball entering means to the second state in which the game ball can be entered. A lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions, a lottery information dynamic display means for dynamically displaying lottery information for showing the lottery result by the lottery means, and the specific lottery result. A state setting means capable of setting a special state capable of changing to the second state by the variable means when the lottery information for indicating that is stopped and displayed, and the special state by the state setting means. When the state is set, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and the release means for canceling the special state based on the end of the dynamic display period and the special state are not set. In this case, an effect executing means corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the lottery information is executed based on the setting of the special state. When the special state is set, the effect executing means is specified from a state in which an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the lottery information is executed to an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information. A gaming machine F1 characterized in that it is switched and executed based on the condition that the conditions are satisfied.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a start port provided on the game board, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a high probability state is set in which the lottery probability after the winning game is increased according to the type of the winning game so that the winning game can be easily executed continuously. In such a game machine, after the symbol for notifying the player of the lottery result is variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like, the lottery result is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the lottery result, and the lottery result is notified. If is a hit, a hit game is known to be performed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965). However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that the game is monotonous and the player gets bored early because the variable display of the symbol based on the lottery result is repeated.

According to the game machine F1, in the case of a special state, it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, so that a specific lottery result that makes it easy to enter the second ball entry means. Since it is possible to switch to a production corresponding to whether or not it becomes, it is possible to provide the player with a production corresponding to different information in the special state and other than the special state, so that the game can be changed and the player can be early. It has the effect of suppressing problems that make you tired of it.

In the game machine F1, the information acquisition means for acquiring the information determined by the determination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means or the second entry means, and the information acquisition means. The gaming machine F2, characterized in that it has a storage means for storing the acquired information.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1, the information acquired in the storage means even when a large number of game balls enter the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means. Is memorized, which has the effect of giving the player many opportunities to be judged.

In the game machine F2, the determination means is based on the information acquired based on the fact that the determination condition is satisfied and the ball is entered into the second ball entry means stored in the storage means. The gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the determination is executed with priority over the information acquired based on the entry into the first ball entry means.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effect of the game machine F2, when there is a plurality of information acquired based on the fact that the ball has entered the second ball entry means, the plurality of information is continuously determined. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the determination that is advantageous to the player can be continuously executed, and the player's motivation to play can be improved.

In any of the game machines F1 to F3, when the special state is set in the specific condition, the remaining period of the dynamic display period of the identification information from which the dynamic display is started is equal to or less than the predetermined period. The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that it is set as at least one of the establishment conditions.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F1 to F3, an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information executed when the special state is released before the special state is released. It has the effect of being able to switch to, and when it is released smoothly, it is possible to switch the effect.

In any of the game machines F1 to F4, under the specific condition, the identification information for which the dynamic display is started when the special state is set is stopped and displayed with the identification information for indicating the specific determination result. The gaming machine F5, characterized in that it is set as at least one of the conditions that it is set to be played.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects of the game machines F1 to F4, when the dynamically displayed identification information is stopped and displayed with the identification information for indicating that it is a specific determination result, the identification information is stopped and displayed. At first, the effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the lottery information is performed, and the player is notified whether the game ball is likely to enter the second ball entry means, and then a specific judgment result is obtained. Is also possible to be notified by the effect, so that there is an effect that the player can be provided with an effect that effectively utilizes the dynamic display period of the identification information.

<Characteristic G group> (Game support)
An entry means having an opening through which the game ball can enter, an open state in which the game ball can enter into the opening of the entry means, and a closed state in which entry of the game ball is restricted. When the variable member, the determination means for executing the determination based on the passage of the game ball, and the determination result by the determination means are specific determination results, the variable member is moved from the closed state to the open state. The variable control means is variable according to a specific variable pattern, and the variable pattern is brought into the open state after a closing pattern that is closed for a predetermined period after the first open pattern that is in the open state. A gaming machine G1 characterized in that it is composed of at least a second open pattern.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a passing area through which the game ball can pass, and when the game ball passes through the passing area, a predetermined first lottery is executed and the lottery result is won. If there is, it has been proposed to change the variable member so that the ball can easily enter a specific ball entry port. In such a game machine, when a ball enters a specific entrance, a second lottery different from a predetermined lottery is executed, and a liquid crystal display device displays a symbol for notifying the player of the lottery result. It is known that the lottery result is notified by stopping and displaying the lottery result with a symbol indicating the lottery result, and if the lottery result is a hit, a winning game is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the conventional game machine described above, since the variable display of the symbol based on the second lottery result is displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like, there is a problem that the player overlooks the result of the first lottery. It was.

According to the game machine G1, since the first open pattern and the second open pattern are configured, the player who notices that the variable member is variably controlled by executing the first open pattern. On the other hand, the game ball can be entered into the ball entry means during the second opening pattern. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be supported for a player who does not understand the game content.

In the game machine G1, among the variable patterns, when it is determined that the closing pattern has been executed by the closing determining means for determining that the closing pattern has been executed and the closing determining means, a predetermined first first. The gaming machine G2 comprising a notification executing means for executing notification.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1, the first notification is executed by the notification execution means based on the fact that the execution of the first opening pattern is completed and the closing pattern is executed. It is possible to easily make the player know that the variable control of the variable member is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be supported for a player who does not understand the game content.

The game machine G2 has a game area in which the variable member is provided and an operating means for launching a game ball in the game area, and the period set as the closed pattern in the variable pattern is The gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the ball launched by the operating means is set longer than the period until the ball reaches the variable member.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect of the game machine G2, the period set as the closing pattern is set longer than the period until the ball launched by the operating means reaches the variable member. Even if the player who recognizes that the variable control of the variable member is being executed by the first notification by the notification executing means starts the operation of the operating means, the ball entry means while the second opening pattern is being executed. It is possible to put a ball in the ball. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be supported for a player who does not understand the game content.

In any of the game machines G1 to G3, the end condition determining means for determining that the end condition for terminating the operation of varying the variable member by the variable control means is satisfied, and the end condition determining means is previously provided. The gaming machine G4 is characterized in that it is determined that the end condition is satisfied when the predetermined variable pattern is executed or when a predetermined number of balls enter the ball entry means.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G3, the end condition is satisfied when a predetermined number of balls enter the ball entry means, so that the predetermined number of balls are satisfied in the first opening pattern. By entering the ball into the ball entry means, it is possible to end the variable control of the variable member by the variable control means without executing the closing pattern. As a result, one variable control period can be shortened, so that the player can enthusiastically play the game. Further, even if the closing pattern is set for a long period of time, the end condition of the variable control can be satisfied during the period when the first variable pattern is being executed, so that the player who is executing the normal game can be satisfied. It has the effect of suppressing dissatisfaction caused by the execution of a long-term closure pattern.

In the game machine G4, the period set as the first opening pattern among the variable patterns is set longer than the period until the predetermined number of balls fired by the operating means reach the variable member. A game machine G5 characterized by being a game machine.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effect of the game machine G4, a predetermined number of balls can be thrown into the ball-entry means during the period when the first opening pattern is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the dissatisfaction caused by the execution of the closing pattern for a long period of time for the player who is playing a normal game.

In the game machines G1 to G5, the notification executing means determines a predetermined second notification when a ball enters the ball entering means while the second opening pattern is being executed among the variable patterns. The gaming machine G6, which is characterized by executing the above.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G5, the second notification is executed when the ball enters the ball entry means while the second opening pattern is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to have the player correct the operation method of the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be supported for a player who does not understand the game content.

In the game machines G1 to G6, among the variable patterns, the period set as the first open pattern is shorter than the period set as the second open pattern.

According to the game machine G7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G6, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the ball entry means during the period in which the variable pattern is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be supported for a player who does not understand the game content.

<Characteristic H group> (Direction just before the end of the time-saving game)
The first determination is made based on the first ball entry means capable of entering the game ball, the second entry means different from the first entry means, and the game ball entering the first entry means. To execute a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means, and the determination result by the determination means. When the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating and the identification information for indicating that the determination result is a specific result are stopped and displayed, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Lottery information dynamic in which lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions and lottery information for showing the lottery result by the lottery means are dynamically displayed on a game machine having a privilege game execution means. The display means, the variable member that is variable from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter into the second ball entry means to the second state in which the game ball can enter the ball, and the specific lottery result. A state setting means capable of setting a special state capable of changing the variable member to the second state when the lottery information for indicating that is stopped and displayed, and the special state by the state setting means. When the state is set, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed a predetermined number of times, and the release means for canceling the special state based on the end of the dynamic display period of the predetermined number of times, and the special When the dynamic display of the lottery information is started during the state, the effect execution is executed based on the information corresponding to the period in which the special state is set at the timing when the lottery information is stopped and displayed. A game machine H1 characterized by having means and means.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a start port provided on the game board, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a high probability state is set in which the lottery probability after the winning game is increased according to the type of the winning game so that the winning game can be easily executed continuously. In such a game machine, after the symbol for notifying the player of the lottery result is variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like, the lottery result is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the lottery result, and the lottery result is notified. If is a hit, a hit game is known to be performed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that the game is monotonous and the player gets bored early because the variable display of the symbol based on the lottery result is repeated.

According to the game machine H1, the effect is executed based on the state set at the stop display timing of the lottery information whose dynamic display is started during the special state, so that when the lottery information is stopped and displayed from the effect. It becomes possible to recognize the timing of the game, and it is possible to make the player interested in the state when the lottery information is stopped and displayed, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem of getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the game machine H1, the effect executing means executes an effect corresponding to the dynamic display period of the identification information in a state where the special state is not set, and based on the setting of the special state, the effect is described. The gaming machine H2 is characterized in that it is executed by switching to an effect corresponding to a dynamic display period of lottery information.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine H1, the effect is executed by switching the corresponding dynamic display period between the special state and the non-special state, so that the player is provided with a different effect and the game is played. It has the effect of improving the interest of the.

In the game machine H1 or H2, the acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means, and the information acquired by the acquisition means. The determination means has a storage means to be stored, and the determination means has a game ball in the second ball entry means among the information stored in the storage means based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition. The gaming machine H3 is characterized in that the determination is preferentially executed with respect to the information acquired based on the fact that the player has entered the ball.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1 or H2, when there is a plurality of information acquired based on the fact that the ball has entered the second ball entry means, the plurality of information is continuously determined. can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the determination that is advantageous to the player can be continuously executed, and the player's motivation to play can be improved.

In the game machine H3, in the determination condition, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped and displayed by the identification information for showing the specific determination result, and the undetermined information is stored in the storage means. The gaming machine H4, which is characterized in that, at least, is set as a condition.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1 or H2, it is difficult to satisfy the determination condition during the period when the identification information is dynamically displayed, so that the identification information is stored in the period when the identification information is dynamically displayed. It is possible to give the player an opportunity to store information in the means, and there is an effect that the game can be performed efficiently.

In the game machine H4, when the special state is set, the regulatory means for restricting that the information acquired based on the entry into the second ball entry means is stored in the storage means is provided. A game machine H5 characterized by having.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effect of the game machine H4, when a special state is set, it is regulated that the information acquired based on entering the second ball entry means is stored. Therefore, at the timing when the special state is set, the identification information for showing the determination result based on the information acquired by entering the first ball entry means can be easily displayed dynamically, which is advantageous for the player. There is an effect that it is possible to delay the execution of such a judgment and increase the interest of the player.

In any of the game machines H1 to H5, if the special state is set in the period of the lottery by the lottery means, the lottery information indicating that the variable member is the specific lottery result is stopped and displayed. The gaming machine H6 is characterized in that it is variable to the second state when the game is played.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H1 to H5, it is possible to change to the second state based on the setting status of the special state during the lottery period, which is advantageous to the player. There is an effect that it is possible to easily provide a state of affairs and the interest of the player can be increased.

<Feature I group> (Yamato specifications)
A game ball has entered a first ball-entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball-entry means different from the first ball-entry means, and the first ball-entry means or the second ball-entry means. Based on the information acquisition means for acquiring information based on the above, and the information acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means by the information acquisition means, the first determination is executed. A determination means for executing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the information acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means, and the determination means thereof. A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the above, and a privilege grant for granting the privilege when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. In a gaming machine having means, a normal state in which a game ball is more likely to enter the first ball entry means than the second ball entry means, and a second ball entry means rather than the first ball entry means. It has a state setting means that can at least switch and set a special state that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the means, and when the special state is set by the state setting means, the special state is provided. As a release condition for releasing the state, it is possible to individually set the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed corresponding to the first determination and the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed corresponding to the second determination. A game machine I1 characterized in that it is configured in.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a start port provided on the game board, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a high probability state is set in which the lottery probability after the winning game is increased according to the type of the winning game so that the winning game can be easily executed continuously. In such a game machine, after the symbol for notifying the player of the lottery result is variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like, the lottery result is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the lottery result, and the lottery result is notified. If is a hit, a hit game is known to be performed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that the game is monotonous and the player gets bored early because the variable display of the symbol based on the lottery result is repeated.

According to the game machine I1, as a condition for releasing the special state, the number of times the identification information corresponding to the first determination is dynamically displayed and the number of times the identification information corresponding to the second determination is dynamically displayed can be set. , The expectation that the second determination is executed can be variably set. That is, if the number of times of dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the first determination is set to be large, the player can be given many opportunities to execute the second determination, and conversely, the identification information corresponding to the first determination can be given. If the number of times of dynamic display of is set to be large, the chance that the second determination is executed can be set to be small, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be changed.

The game machine I1 has a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the determination means enters the second ball entry means among the information stored in the storage means. The gaming machine I2 is characterized in that the information acquired by the information acquisition means is preferentially determined based on the above.

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effect of the game machine I1, the judgment is executed with priority given to the information in which the judgment that is advantageous to the player is executed, so that the judgment that is advantageous to the player is continuously executed. It has the effect of making it easier to play and improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine I1 or I2, when the special state is set, the storage means is provided with a regulatory means that makes it difficult to store the information acquired based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means. A game machine I3 characterized by having.

According to the game machine I3, in addition to the effect of the game machine I1 or I2, in the case of a special state, the identification information based on the first determination can be easily displayed dynamically, and the second entry is made during the dynamic display period. There is an effect that a game ball is inserted into the ball means to store more information, and after the dynamic display of the first determination is completed, an advantageous determination can be continuously executed.

In any of the game machines I1 to I3, the release condition configures the dynamic display number of the identification information corresponding to the first determination to be larger than the dynamic display number of the identification information corresponding to the second determination. A game machine I4 characterized by being the one that has been used.

According to the game machine I4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines I1 to I3, it is possible to prevent the special state from being released by executing only the first determination, which is disadvantageous to the player. There is an effect that it is possible to easily execute the second determination which is advantageous to the player during the state.

In the game machine I4, the release condition is set as one dynamic display number of the identification information corresponding to the second determination.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effect of the game machine I4, the number of times that the second determination which is advantageous to the player is executed during the special state can be limited to one, so that the player can receive an excessive privilege. There is an effect that it can be suppressed from being given to.

A game machine I6 in any of the game machines I2 to I5, wherein the storage means is configured to be able to store up to a maximum number of the information.

According to the game machine I6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines I2 to I5, the information in which the second determination advantageous to the player is executed can be stored up to the maximum number, so that the special state ends. After that, it is possible to execute the second determination. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can have expectations even after the special state is completed.

In the game machine I6, the upper limit number is the first upper limit number for the information acquired based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means and the game ball entering the second ball entry means. The game machine I7 is characterized in that a second upper limit number with respect to the information acquired based on the above is set.

According to the game machine I7, in addition to the effect of the game machine I6, the information acquired based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means and the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Since it is possible to set the upper limit number that can be stored with the information acquired based on the above, regardless of the number of stored information acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means. , Information acquired based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entry means can be stored up to the maximum number. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game in order to allow the game ball to enter the second ball entry means during the special state.

In any of the game machines I1 to I7, the variable ball entry means that can be changed between the state in which the game ball can enter and the state in which it is difficult to enter, and the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass through. The game machine I8 is characterized in that the special area is provided, and the privilege giving means is configured to be able to give a privilege when the game ball passes through the specific area.

According to the game machine I8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines I1 to I7, a privilege is given by passing the game ball through a specific area, so that the player is interested in the ball flow. It has the effect of being able to improve the interest of the game.

The game machine I8 is characterized in that the special state is set by the state setting means after the privilege is given by the privilege giving means.

According to the game machine I9, in addition to the effect played by the game machine I8, a special state is set after the privilege is given, so that the game playability by passing the game ball through a specific area can be enhanced. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine I9, the state setting means has a setting determining means for determining whether or not to set the special state, and the setting determining means makes the first determination or the second determination by the determining means. The gaming machine I10, which determines whether or not to set the special state based on the execution.

According to the game machine I10, at the timing when the determination by the determination means is executed, it is determined whether or not to set the special state after the privilege is given. Therefore, depending on the timing when the game ball is passed through the specific area. Whether or not a special state is set will be variable. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of selecting the timing at which the game ball is passed through the specific area.

The game machine I10 is characterized in that the game machine I10 has a suggestion means for suggesting the decision information determined by the setting determination means during the period when the identification information is dynamically displayed.

According to the game machine I11, since it is possible to recognize whether or not the special state is set after the privilege is given by the suggestion means, the game is played so as to pass the game ball to the specific area, or the game is performed to the specific area. There is an effect that the player can decide whether to play the game so that the game ball does not pass by referring to the content of the suggestion.

In any of the game machines I7 to I11, the release condition is a game machine I12 in which the number of times of dynamic display for the first identification information is set to be larger than the first upper limit number.

According to the game machine I12, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines I7 to I11, the information already acquired for entering the ball into the first ball entry means when the special state is entered is the first. Even if the maximum number is stored, the special state is not released even if all the information is first judged and the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, so there is an opportunity for the second judgment to be executed in the special state. It can be given by the player, and has the effect of increasing the value of the special state to the player.

<Characteristic J group> (Big hit production during Ren Chan)
The first determination is made based on the first ball entry means capable of entering the game ball, the second entry means different from the first entry means, and the game ball entering the first entry means. To execute a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means, and the determination result by the determination means. A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating, and a variable state from a first state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means to a second state in which the game ball can enter the ball. The variable means for making the ball, a state setting means capable of setting a special state capable of changing the second ball entry means to the second state when a specific condition is satisfied, and the special state setting means for the second state. When the state is set, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and based on the end of the dynamic display period, the release means for canceling the special state and the release means for releasing the special state. After the release, based on the determination means for determining whether the special state is set by the state setting means and the determination result of the determination means before the dynamic display of the identification information is started. The gaming machine J1 is characterized by having an effect executing means capable of executing the effect in a variable manner.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a start port provided on the game board, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a high probability state is set in which the lottery probability after the winning game is increased according to the type of the winning game so that the winning game can be easily executed continuously. In such a game machine, after the symbol for notifying the player of the lottery result is variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like, the lottery result is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the lottery result, and the lottery result is notified. If is a hit, a hit game is executed, and a production is executed during the hit game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, further improvement in the interest of the game has been required.

According to the game machine J1, even when the special state is released, the effect is changed based on the information of whether the special state is set again before the identification information is dynamically displayed, so that the player can change the effect. It is possible to identify whether a special state is continuously set from the production, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine J1, the effect executing means executes the effect in response to the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the determination result based on the second determination.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effect of the game machine J1, the effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the judgment result based on the second judgment which is advantageous to the player is executed, so that the player This has the effect of increasing expectations for the judgment result of the second judgment.

The game machine J1 or J2 is characterized in that the effect executing means is configured to be capable of executing an effect capable of identifying information based on the number of times that the discriminating means continuously determines that the special state has been set. The game machine J3.

According to the game machine J3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J1 or J2, the number of times the special state is continuously set can be identified by the effect, so that not only the game but also the special state is set for the player. It has the effect of making people interested in the number of times they have been played and improving the interest of the game.

When the game machines J1 to J3 acquire information for executing the first determination when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, and the game ball enters the second ball entry means. A gaming machine comprising: an information acquisition means for acquiring information for executing the second determination, and an information storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means. J4.

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effects of the game machines J1 to J3, information is acquired at the timing when the game ball enters the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means, and the information is used as the information storage means. Since it is stored, it is possible to save the opportunity to be judged by the judgment means, and there is an effect that a lot of benefits can be given to the player.

In the game machine J4, the effect executing means is configured so that the effect can be changed based on the number of the information for executing the second determination stored in the storage means. A game machine J5 characterized by this.

According to the game machine J5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J4, the effect is changed depending on the number of information for which the second determination that is advantageous to the player is executed, so that the information is easily reserved to the player. It has the effect of being able to notify the number of items and increasing interest in the production.

<Characteristic K group>
The first determination is made based on the first ball entry means capable of entering the game ball, the second entry means different from the first entry means, and the game ball entering the first entry means. Is executed, and the determination means for executing the second determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means and the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means are dynamically displayed. A gaming machine having a target display means and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating that the determination result is specific is stopped and displayed. The gaming machine K1 is characterized in that it has a state setting means for setting a gaming state advantageous to the player during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed based on the establishment of a specific condition.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a start port provided on the game board, and a symbol for showing the lottery result is moved to a liquid crystal display device or the like. The target is displayed, and the symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner in which the lottery result is notified at the timing when the dynamic display period ends. If the notification mode indicated by the symbol is a hit, a hit game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and a high probability state is set in which the lottery probability after the hit game is increased depending on the type of the hit game, and the hit games are continuously played. Some have been proposed that are configured to be easy to implement. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the conventional game machine described above, if the dynamic display period for showing the lottery result is long, the number of lottery is reduced and it is disadvantageous for the player, and the longer the dynamic display period, the more boring the player. There was a problem that I got bored with the game. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of suppressing a problem that a player gets tired of playing a game.

According to the game machine K1, the player is in an advantageous state during the period when the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, so that the player is expected to execute the dynamic display with a long dynamic display period. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the game machine K1, the determination means executes a determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination for the second determination, and the game ball has entered the first entry means. Based on the information acquisition means for acquiring the information for executing the first determination, and acquiring the information for executing the second determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means. , The storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means, and the determination means is stored in the storage means based on the completion of the dynamic display of the identification information. The gaming machine K2, characterized in that the determination is executed with respect to the said information.

According to the game machine K2, in addition to the effect of the game machine K1, even if the information is acquired during the period when the identification information is dynamically displayed, it is stored in the storage means, so that the judgment opportunity by the judgment means is increased. It has the effect of being able to.

In the game machine K1 or K2, a variable means for changing from a first state in which a game ball is difficult to enter into the second ball entry means to a second state in which a game ball can be entered, and a lottery condition are satisfied. It has a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the lottery, and a lottery information dynamic display means for dynamically displaying lottery information for showing the lottery result by the lottery means. As an advantageous gaming state, when the lottery information for indicating a specific lottery result is stopped and displayed, it is possible to change to the second state by the variable means. A game machine K3 characterized by being there.

According to the game machine K3, in addition to the effect of the game machine K1 or K2, in a special state, the game ball can be easily entered into the second ball entry means, and the game playability can be changed. Has the effect of being able to increase.

In the game machine K3, when the game state favorable to the player is set by the state setting means, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and based on the end of the dynamic display period, the said The gaming machine K4, characterized in that it has a releasing means for releasing a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effect of the game machine K3, it is advantageous to the player based on the end of the dynamic display of the identification information executed when the game state advantageous to the player is set. Since the game state is released, the player can be interested in the end timing of the dynamic display of the identification information, and even if a long dynamic display period is set, the problem that the player gets bored can be suppressed. There is an effect.

In any of the game machines K1 to K4, the first flow path through which the game ball can flow down and a second flow path through which the game ball flowing down the first flow path is difficult to flow down are provided. The means are arranged at the second flow path and at least at a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter, and the second entry means is arranged in the second flow path. A game machine K5 characterized by being a game machine.

According to the game machine K5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines K1 to K4, the game ball is moved to the first ball entry means even if the game is played to allow the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. There is an effect that it is possible to regulate a state in which only a determination that is advantageous to the player is likely to be executed because the ball is inserted.

In any of the game machines K1 to K5, when a game state advantageous to the player is set, there is an effect executing means for executing the effect corresponding to the dynamic display period of the identification information. A game machine K6 characterized by this.

According to the game machine K6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines K1 to K5, if a game state advantageous to the player is set, an effect corresponding to the dynamic display period is executed. It has the effect of improving the interest.

In the game machine K6, the effect executed by the effect executing means includes an effect that encourages the game ball to enter the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means. The game machine K7.

According to the game machine K7, in addition to the effect of the game machine K6, the game ball is made to enter the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means during the game state which is advantageous to the player, and the first determination or the second Since it is possible to easily give an opportunity for the judgment to be executed, there is an effect that the game can be performed efficiently.

In any of the above-mentioned game machines, the game machine Z1 is characterized in that the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the above-mentioned game machines, the game machine Z2 is characterized in that the game machine is a pachinko game machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the above-mentioned game machines, the game machine Z3 is characterized in that the game machine is a fusion of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, whether to change the state of the start port provided on the game board from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the game ball is easy to enter. There is one that executes the first lottery of whether or not. In such a conventional game machine, a lottery executed by entering a game ball into the starting port in a state easily changed to the second state is executed a predetermined number of times, and until the lottery result of the predetermined number of times is displayed. A game machine to be continuously set has been proposed (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).
However, further improvement of interest is required.
The technical idea has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present technical idea is to provide a game machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 includes a first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second entry means different from the first entry means, and the first entry means. The first determination is executed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball means, and the first determination is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means. 2 The determination means for executing the determination, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are stopped. When displayed, it has a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player, and the game ball enters the second ball from the first state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. Lottery information that dynamically displays lottery information for showing the lottery result by the variable means that can be changed to the second state, the lottery means that executes the lottery based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and the lottery result It is possible to set a dynamic display means and a special state that can be changed to the second state by the variable means when the lottery information for indicating a specific lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the special state is set by the state setting means and the state setting means, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and the special state is released based on the end of the dynamic display period. When the special state is not set, the effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and the lottery information is dynamically based on the setting of the special state. The effect executing means includes an effect executing means for executing an effect corresponding to the display, and the effect executing means starts from a state in which the effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the lottery information is executed when the special state is set. It is switched and executed based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied to the effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information.
The game machine of the technical idea 2 is determined by the determination means in the game machine described in the technical idea 1 based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means. It has an information acquisition means for acquiring information and a storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, and the determination means enters the second ball entry means stored in the storage means based on the establishment of the determination condition. The determination is executed with priority over the information acquired based on the ball entering the first ball entry means based on the information acquired based on the ball.
The game machine of the technical idea 4 is the game machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, and the dynamic display is started when the special state is set in the specific condition. At least one of the conditions for establishment is that the remaining period of the dynamic display period of the identification information is equal to or less than a predetermined period.
The game machine of the technical idea 5 is the game machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 4, and the identification information whose dynamic display is started when the special state is set under the specific condition. Is set as at least one of the conditions that is set to be stopped and displayed with the identification information for indicating the specific determination result.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, a game is performed on a first ball-entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball-entry means different from the first ball-entry means, and the first ball-entry means. The first determination is executed based on the fact that the ball has entered the ball, and the second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination is executed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means. When the determination means to be performed, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are stopped and displayed. In addition, it has a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player, and the game ball can be entered from the first state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second entry means. A variable means for changing to the second state, a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions, and a lottery information dynamic display means for dynamically displaying lottery information for showing the lottery result by the lottery means. And, when the lottery information for indicating that it is the specific lottery result is stopped and displayed, the state setting means capable of setting a special state that can be changed to the second state by the variable means. And, when the special state is set by the state setting means, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and the release means for canceling the special state based on the end of the dynamic display period. , When the special state is not set, an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and based on the setting of the special state, the dynamic display of the lottery information is supported. The effect executing means includes an effect executing means for executing the effect, and the effect executing means moves the identification information from a state in which the effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the lottery information is executed when the special state is set. It is switched and executed based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied to the effect corresponding to the target display.
Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1. That is, the information acquisition means for acquiring the information determined by the determination means based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means or the second entry means, and the information acquisition means. It has a storage means for storing the information.
Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2. That is, the determination means is based on the information obtained based on the fact that the determination condition is satisfied and the ball is entered into the second entry means stored in the storage means. The determination is executed with priority over the above-mentioned information acquired based on the fact that the ball has entered the ball entry means.
Therefore, there is an effect that the player's motivation to play can be increased.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in any one of Technical Thoughts 1 to 3. That is, at least in the specific condition, when the special state is set, the remaining period of the dynamic display period of the identification information from which the dynamic display is started is equal to or less than a predetermined period. It is set to one.
Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in any one of Technical Thoughts 1 to 4. That is, the specific condition is set so that the identification information for which the dynamic display is started when the special state is set is stopped and displayed with the identification information for indicating the specific determination result. It is set as at least one of the conditions that it is a thing.
Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
202 ROM (storage means)
202f time saving state selection table (selection means)
64a Left first ball entry port (first ball entry means)
64b Right first ball entry port (first ball entry means )
640 Second ball entry port (second ball entry means)
640a Electric accessory (variable means)
S225 release hand stage S1815 state setting means

Claims (5)

A first ball-entry means on which a game ball can enter, a second ball-entry means different from the first ball-entry means, and
The first determination is executed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means, and the player is more likely than the first determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means. A determination means for executing an advantageous second determination,
A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a judgment result by the judgment means, and a dynamic display means.
In a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed.
A variable means for varying the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter into the second ball entry means to the second state in which the game ball can enter the second ball.
A lottery means to execute a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions, and
Lottery information dynamic display means for dynamically displaying lottery information for showing the lottery result by the lottery means, and
A state setting means capable of setting a special state capable of being changed to the second state by the variable means when the lottery information for indicating a specific lottery result is stopped and displayed.
When the special state is set by the state setting means, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and the release means for canceling the special state based on the end of the dynamic display period.
When the special state is not set, an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and based on the setting of the special state, an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the lottery information is performed. Has a production execution means to execute
When the special state is set, the effect executing means satisfies a specific condition from a state in which an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the lottery information is executed to an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information. A game machine characterized in that it is switched and executed based on the above. An information acquisition means for acquiring information determined by the determination means based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means. The determination means has the first ball entry based on the information acquired based on the fact that the ball has entered the second ball entry means stored in the storage means based on the establishment of the determination condition. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the determination is executed with priority over the information acquired based on the entry into the means. At least one of the conditions for establishing the specific condition is that, when the special state is set, the remaining period of the dynamic display period of the identification information from which the dynamic display is started is equal to or less than a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the gaming machine is set to. The specific condition is set so that the identification information whose dynamic display is started when the special state is set is stopped and displayed with the identification information for indicating the specific determination result. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the presence is set as at least one of the conditions.

Images